MEchanical Spec 17-02-10

ABU DHABI INTERNATIONAL SHOOTING CLUB
PLOT NO. C1 VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATION FOR MEP MECHANICAL SERVICES TO BUIDNINGS
February 17, 2010 Rev.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
S/No Section No Title Pages
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SYSTEM
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.
14200 15010 15040 15050 15100 15190 15200 15250 15300 15360 15365 15410 15420 15430 15450 15455 15480 15495 15496 15510 15540 15545 15625 15710 15755 15800 15835 15850 15860
Vertical Transportation (For Informaton) Mechanical General Provision Commissioning Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ACMV Valves Mechanical Identification Noise, Vibration and Seismic Control Insulation Fire Hydrant and Sprinkler System Liquefiedn Petroleum Gas Installation Gas Suppression Alarm System Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances Domestic Water Valves Plumbing Specialties Domestic Water Equipment Sanitary Fixtures and Fittings Fire Stopping Fuel Oil Specialties Fuel Oil Storage Tank ACMV Piping Systems ACMV Pumps Chemical (Water) Treatment Centrifugal Water Chiller (Not Applicable) Cooling Towers (Not Applicable) Heat Exchangers Air Distribution Fan Coil Units Air Handling Units Energy Recovery Wheel
1-17 18 38 39 44 45 - 55 56 62 63 - 67 68 77 78 81 82 97 98 103 104 116 117 126 127 131 132 136 137 145 146 149 150 151 152 154 155 159 160 166 167 173 174 181 182 187 188 192 193 194 195 200 201 202 203 214 215 - 218
Table of Contents Page 1 of 2
MEP - Specification Specification Mechanical
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
S/No 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41 Section No 15865 15870 15880 15885 15910 15920 15940 15950 15990 15995 Appendix A Appendix B Fans Precision Air Conditioning Unit Split/Multi Split Type Air Conditioning Unit Air Filters Ductwork Accessories Refuse Chute Air Terminals Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of System Building Automation System BTU Meter Acceptable Manufacturers BAS Control Schematic Title Pages 219 230 231 236 237 240 241 243 244 251 252 - 258 259 260 261 283 284 315 316 - 317 1 14
MEP - Specification Specification Mechanical
Table of Contents Page 2 of 2
SECTION 14200 VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION (FOR INFORAMTION) Section 1. Community Centre Block: 1. Passenger Elevators: Quantity Equipment type Carrying capacity Speed Control system 2 nos. Passenger elevators (PL1&PL2) Overhead traction 1350 kgs [18 persons] 60 meters / minute [1 meter / second] Geared traction machine AC-Variable voltage variable frequency [VVVF] drive. 2-car group control 3 stops-3 openingsAll in same line (G,1 & 2) 11.35 mtrs (approx.) 5200 MM (W) X 2750 MM (D) [Common shaft for two elevators] 2000 mm (W) x 1550 mm (D) X 2400mm(H) 1600 mm max. (clear from the finished first serving floor level to the bottom of the pit) 4950 mm (clear between the last landing finished floor level and underside of machine slab) 2250mm (clear underside hoisting beam / hook) Directly above the hoistway.
Operation Number of stops and openings Travel HOISTWAY SIZE AVAILABLE
Car internal size Pit depth required
Overhead height
Machine room height Location of machine
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation
Page 1 of 317
Elevator car design Ceiling, lighting & ventilation
(Black alumite trim with arched milky white resin board, lighting through indirect full lighting; ventilation by means of electric blower) Finished / cladded with Mirror polished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs. Finished / cladded with Mirror polished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs.
Car doors
Car rear & side walls
Car front return panel and Transom panel Cabin flooring
Mirror polished stainless steel 35mm recess will be provided in the cabin platform for granite flooring [by main contractor and weight shall not exceed 50 Kgs] On all floors Lintel and splayed door frame to cover full wall thickness in Mirror polished stainless steel. On ground floor Finished / cladded with Mirror polished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs. On other floors Finished / cladded with hairline finished stainless steel.
Entrance frames
Landing door panels
Type of hoistway doors
Two panel center opening power operated automatic sliding doors. 1100mm (W) x 2100mm (H) Extruded hard aluminium On ground floor Horizontal unit comprising of digital led dot display hall position indicator fixed above the entrance and hall call buttons of micro stroke click button which self illuminate on registration of a call (face plate in stainless steel hairline with dark gray plastic case).
Door opening size Car & entrance landing sills Hall position indicators
Page 2 of 317
On other floors Vertical combined unit comprising of digital hall position indicator, directional arrows and micro stroke click buttons which self illuminate on registration of a call, (face plate in hairline finished stainless steel with dark gray plastic case). Car operating panel Vertical type car operating panel will be mounted on the front return panel of the cabin for better operational convenience with call buttons of micro stroke click type which will illuminate on registration of a call. Face plate will be in mirror polished stainless steel.
2. Service Elevators Quantity Equipment type Carrying capacity Speed Control system 1 no Service elevator (SL1) Overhead traction 1350 kgs [18 persons] 60 meters / minute [1 meter / second] Geared traction machine AC-Variable voltage variable frequency [VVVF] drive. Selective collective
3 stops-3 openingsAll in same line (G, 1 & 2)
Operation Number Of Stops And Openings Travel HOISTWAY SIZE AVAILABLE Car internal size Pit depth required
11.35 mtrs (approx.) 2400 MM (W) X 2480 MM (D) 2000 mm (W) x 1550 mm (D) x 2400 mm(H) 1600 mm max. (clear from the finished first serving floor level to the bottom of the pit) 4950 mm (clear between the last landing finished floor level and underside of machine slab) 2250mm (clear underside hoisting beam / hook) Directly above the hoistway.
Overhead height
Page 3 of 317
Elevator car design Ceiling, lighting & ventilation
(Black alumite trim with arched milky white resin board, lighting through indirect full lighting; ventilation by means of electric blower) Finished / cladded with Hairline finished stainless steel Finished / cladded with Hairline finished stainless steel
Car doors Car rear & side walls Car front return panel and Transom panel Cabin flooring
Hairline finished stainless steel 35mm recess shalll be provided in the cabin platform for granite flooring [by main contractor and weight to be considered 60 Kgs] On all floors Lintel and splayed door frame to cover full wall thickness in hairline finished stainless steel. On all floors Finished / cladded with hairline finished stainless steel. Two panel side opening power operated automatic sliding doors. 1100mm (W) x 2100mm (H) Extruded hard aluminium On ground floor Horizontal unit comprising of digital led dot display hall position indicator fixed above the entrance and hall call buttons of micro stroke click button which self illuminate on registration of a call (face plate in stainless steel hairline with dark gray plastic case). On other floors Vertical combined unit comprising of digital hall position indicator, directional arrows and micro stroke click buttons which self illuminate on registration of a call, (face plate in hairline finished stainless steel with dark gray plastic case).
Entrance frames
Landing door panels
Page 4 of 317
Car operating panel
Vertical type car operating panel will be mounted on the front return panel of the cabin for better operational convenience with call buttons of micro stroke click type which will illuminate on registration of a call. Face plate will be in hairline finished stainless steel.
3. ESCALATORS Quantity Capacity Speed Operating system Angle of Inclination Rise 4 nos. escalators (E1 ~ E4) 9000 persons / hour 30 meters / minute. Up / Down travel arrangement. 35 degrees. 5.85 mtrs (approx.) (E1 ~ E2) - G to 1 5.50 mtrs (approx.) (E3 ~ E4) - 1 to 2 1550 mm. 1240 mm. 1004 mm.
Escalator width Width between moving handrail Step width Balustrade Interior panel Deck board Skirt guard Moving handrail
Vertical flat, rectangular tempered-glass panels. Hairline finished stainless steel. Hairline finished stainless steel. Colour to consultants choice from Manufactures standard range of colours.
Step: Tread board Cleated Riser Demarcation comb and cleat Floor plate comb
Die-cast aluminium alloy with black painted grooves Die-cast aluminium alloy painted black Yellow molded resin. Black molded resin
Page 5 of 317
Comb plate, landing plate & manhole cover Operating panel
Stainless steel plate with anti-slip pattern. Emergency stop button, buzzer stop switch, up & down start switch. Hairline finished stainless steel. Anti-slip floor plate. Step chain safety device. Kicked plate emergency stop switch. Non-reversing device Skirt guard safety switch. Handrail inlet safety device. Drive chain safety device.
Outer sheathing Operational & safety features
All other operational & safety features will be as per manufacturers standards. Power supply Lighting supply 415 Volts 3Phase 50Hz. 240 Volts 1Phase 50Hz.
Block A,B,C,D: Passenger Elevators Quantity Equipment type Carrying capacity Speed Control system 08 nos. Passenger elevators (PL1&PL2) Overhead traction 1150 kgs [15 persons] 1.5 - 1.75 meter / second Geared traction machine AC-Variable voltage variable frequency [VVVF] drive 2-car group control 9STOPS-9OPENINGS ALL IN SAME LINE (G, 1, M, 2~7) 30.5 mtrs (approx.)
Operation NUMBER OF STOPS AND OPENINGS
Travel
Page 6 of 317
HOISTWAY SIZE AVAILABLE
4650 MM (W) X 2700 MM (D) [Common shaft for two elevators] 1800 mm (W) x 1500 mm (D) x 2400 mm(H) 1600 mm max. (clear from the finished first serving floor level to the bottom of the pit) 4300 mm (clear between the last landing finished floor level and underside of machine slab) 2250mm (clear underside hoisting beam / hook) Directly above the hoistway.
Overhead height
Machine room height Location of machine Elevator car design Ceiling, lighting & ventilation
(Black alumite trim with arched milky white resin board, lighting through indirect full lighting; ventilation by means of electric blower) Finished / cladded with Hairline finished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs. Finished / cladded with Hairline finished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs.
Car doors
Hairline finished stainless steel 35mm recess shall be provided in the cabin platform for granite flooring [by main contractor and consider a weight of 60 Kgs] On all floors Lintel and splayed door frame to cover full wall thickness in hairline finished stainless steel. On ground floor Finished / cladded with hairline finished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs. On other floors Finished / cladded with hairline finished stainless steel.
Entrance frames
Landing door panels
Page 7 of 317
Two panel center opening power operated automatic sliding doors. 1000mm (W) x 2100mm (H) Extruded hard aluminium On ground floor Horizontal unit comprising of digital led dot display hall position indicator fixed above the entrance and hall call buttons of micro stroke click button which self illuminate on registration of a call (face plate in stainless steel hairline with dark gray plastic case). On other floors Vertical combined unit comprising of digital hall position indicator, directional arrows and micro stroke click buttons which self illuminate on registration of a call, (face plate in hairline finished stainless steel with dark gray plastic case).
Car operating panel
Vertical type car operating panel will be mounted on the front return panel of the cabin for better operational convenience with call buttons of micro stroke click type which will illuminate on registration of a call. Face plate will be in hairline finished stainless steel.
Block E, F, G, H: Passenger Elevators Quantity Equipment type Carrying capacity Speed Control system 16 nos. Passenger elevators (PL1, PL2, PL3 & PL4) Overhead traction 1150 kgs [15 persons] 1.5 - 1.75 meter / second Geared traction machine AC-Variable voltage variable frequency [VVVF] drive 2-car group control 9STOPS-9OPENINGS ALL IN SAME LINE (G, 1, M, 2~7) 30.5 mtrs (approx.)
Operation NUMBER OF STOPS AND OPENINGS
Travel
Page 8 of 317
HOISTWAY SIZE AVAILABLE
4650 MM (W) X 2700 MM (D) [Common shaft for two elevators] 1800 mm (W) x 1500 mm (D) x 2400 mm(H) 1600 mm max. (clear from the finished first serving floor level to the bottom of the pit) 4300 mm (clear between the last landing finished floor level and underside of machine slab) 2250mm (clear underside hoisting beam / hook) Directly above the hoistway.
Overhead height
Elevator car design Ceiling, lighting & ventilation (Black alumite trim with arched milky white resin board, lighting through indirect full lighting; ventilation by means of electric blower) Finished / cladded with Hairline finished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs. Finished / cladded with Hairline finished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs.
Car doors
Hairline finished stainless steel 35mm recess shall be provided in the cabin platform for granite flooring [by main contractor and consider weight of 60 Kgs] On all floors Lintel and splayed door frame to cover full wall thickness in hairline finished stainless steel. On ground floor Finished / cladded with hairline finished stainless steel with etching in pattern selected to consultants choice from Manufacturers standard range of designs. On other floors Finished / cladded with hairline finished stainless steel.
Entrance frames
Landing door panels
Page 9 of 317
Two panel center opening power operated automatic sliding doors. 1000mm (W) x 2100mm (H) Extruded hard aluminium On ground floor Horizontal unit comprising of digital led dot display hall position indicator fixed above the entrance and hall call buttons of micro stroke click button which self illuminate on registration of a call (face plate in stainless steel hairline with dark gray plastic case). On other floors Vertical combined unit comprising of digital hall position indicator, directional arrows and micro stroke click buttons which self illuminate on registration of a call, (face plate in hairline finished stainless steel with dark gray plastic case).
Car operating panel
Vertical type car operating panel will be mounted on the front return panel of the cabin for better operational convenience with call buttons of micro stroke click type which will illuminate on registration of a call. Face plate will be in hairline finished stainless steel. OPERATIONAL AND SAFETY FEATURES FIREMAN EMERGENCY OPERATION: When the firemans switch activated during a fire, all calls are cancelled and the designated car returns immediately to a specified floor. To facilitate rescue afterwards, the car responds only to car calls. CAR ARRIVAL CHIME An electronic chime sounds to inform waiting passengers of the car arrival. Interphone: Interphone for three way communication between the elevator cabin, machine room and security personnel at ground floor lobby near the lift entrance. Overload holding stop: When a car load exceeds pre-determined capacity, the elevator will stop its operation with the doors open at the floor and a buzzer will sound. The buzzer will stop when enough passengers have exited the car to reduce the load to below the excess capacity.
Page 10 of 317
Door load detector: When an object is caught in opening / closing doors, the doors will reverse its direction when a excess load is detected. For example, when a pebble becomes lodged in the door track, rather than force itself open/closed, the reverse cycle is to be repeated until the problem is eliminated. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPEN TIME ADJUSTMENT: The system judges the situation whether each car stops responding to a car call or a hall call and controls the time of the doors stay open accordingly. The time spent waiting for the elevator is thereby shortened and operating efficiency is increased. Car light and fan off automatic: To save energy, car lighting and ventilation fan are turned off automatically if there is no call registered within a predetermined period of time. False call cancellation: All car calls will be automatically cancelled to avoid unnecessary stops by registration of nuisance car calls if the number of calls registered does not correlate with the car load. Safety door edge: One leading edge of the car door panels is equipped with a safety door edge. When a passenger or an object touches one of the edges, the closing doors will be opened immediately.
Safety ray
An infra-red light beam covers the full width of the door as it opens or closes to detect passengers or objects. Emergency car lighting: Turns on immediately when power fails, and provides a minimum level of illumination within the car. Door nudging feature: In the event of any door safety device malfunction, a temporary override function is to be automatically engaged to close the doors, thereby preventing a fault in elevator operation. Once the doors close completely, the override has to be cleared and normal operation resumes.
Page 11 of 317
Next landing facility with main power supply uninterrupted: If an elevator door becomes jammed for some reason [ex. A pebble] and passengers are unable to get off at the desired floor, the elevator automatically proceed to the next floor with functioning doors closed in order that the passengers do not get stranded at the affected floor. Safe landing with main power supply uninterrupted: This feature is so designed to prevent passengers from being stranded in the car when an elevator malfunctions and stops between the floors. The source of this malfunction has to be automatically searched out and when elevator operation is determined to be safe, the car shall proceed to the nearest safe landing at reduced speed and the doors then open. Automatic bypass (ABP) A full loaded car will bypass hall calls in order to maintain maximum operating efficiency. Emergency landing device: Emergency landing device which will bring the elevators to the nearest landing in the event of power failure and keep the doors open for evacuation of passengers. Thereafter, the elevators will discontinue its operation until restoration of normal power supply. Auto-door speed control: The system monitors the actual door load conditions at each floor and automatically adjusts door speed and torque accordingly. Door sensor self diagnosis: If a non-contract door sensor fails, the system automatically determines the door closing timing to maintain the elevator service. Car call canceling: When a car responds to the final car call in one direction, the system automatically checks and clears the remaining calls in another direction from memory. Power on releveling: If a car stops at a door zone due to a failure with normal power, the car will relevel to secure the floor level with the doors open after normal power is resumed.
Page 12 of 317
Continuity of service: The assignment of hall calls when the car cannot respond to the calls registered another car in the group will operate as a backup for the excluded car to ensure continuity of service to all hall calls. Independent service: A car can be isolated from group service and used without interruption using the override switch in the car operating panel. Repeated door close Should an obstacle prevent the doors closing, the doors will repeatedly open and close until the object is removed. Reopen with hall button: While the doors are closing, they can be reopened by pressing the hall button. Expediting of door close Door open and door close buttons Hand operation for emergency evacuation purposes Half back wall mirror Hairline finished stainless steel handrail on rear side of the cabin DC alarm bell Buffers Safety Guide rails Oil type Gradual type Machined steel Tee sections for cabin and formed steel sections for counterweight Cast iron blocks enclosed in a steel frame 415 Volts 3Phase 50Hz. 240 Volts 1Phase 50Hz.
Counterweights Power supply Lighting supply
Page 13 of 317
SECTION 2
2.1
LIFT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.9 2.1.10 2.1.11 2.1.12 2.1.13 2.1.14 2.1.15 2.1.16 2.1.17 2.1.18 2.1.19 2.1.20 2.1.21 2.1.22 2.1.23 2.1.24 2.1.25 2.1.26 2.1.27 2.1.28
Regulations Lift Well and Machine Room Machine Room........... Landing Doors and Entrances Lift Car Car Top Control Station Car Lighting Guides Clearances Sound Attenuation Electrical Installations Controls Interference Suppression Car Landing Controls and Indicators Registration of Landing Calls Levelling Alarm Labels, Notices and Instructions Testing ........... Damage to Lift Installation Commissioning, Acceptance Procedure & Service Manuals BMS Interface Fire Alarm Interface Workmanship and Materials Builders Work Samples Foundation Bolts and Alignment Equipment Selection
Page 14 of 317
2.1.29 2.1.30 2.1.31 2.1.32 2.1.33 2.1.34 2.1.35 2.1.36 2.1.37 2.1.38 2.1.39 2.1.40 2.1.41 2.1.42 2.1.43 2.1.44 2.2
Electrical Apparatus and Supply Examination of Drawings and Information Provided Type of Cable Conductor Design Responsibility of Plant and Equipment Materials to be Used Electrolytic Action Dezincification Welding of Steel and Brazing of Copper Pipe Lines Sleeve Pipes and Cover Plates Fire Smoke Stop Barriers Interchangeability Supply of Computer Hardware and Software Electrical Continuity Segregation of Services Test Certificates Record Documentation
TRACTION LIFT REQUIREMENTS
2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4
Car Safety Gear Buffers Lift Machine Emergency Operation
2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
NOT USED ESCALATOR & TRAVELATOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL SUPPLY ESCALATOR/TRAVELATOR DETAILS 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 Truss Track System Main Drive Shaft Tension Carriage
Page 15 of 317
2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 2.6.8 2.6.9
Step Chains Commercial Chains Steps/Treads Handrail and Handrail Drive Comb Plates
2.6.10 Floor Plates 2.6.11 Guards 2.6.12 Drive Machine 2.6.13 Motor 2.6.14 Controller 2.6.15 Machine Break 2.6.16 Auxiliary Break 2.6.17 Safety Devices 2.6.18 Stop Switches 2.6.19 Start Switches 2.6.20 Operational Panel 2.6.21 Inspection Control 2.6.22 Notices and Signs 2.6.23 Wiring 2.6.24 Balustrade 2.6.25 Inner & Outer Decking 2.6.26 Lubrication System 2.6.27 Corrosion Protection 2.6.28 Access 2.6.29 BMS Interface
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation Page 16 of 317
2.7 2.8
MAINTENANCE COMMISSIONING & SERVICE MANUAL 2.8.1 2.8.2 Commissioning & Acceptance Procedure Handover Procedure
END OF SECTION
Page 17 of 317
SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The scope of works for all mechanical and electrical works and systems comprises engineering, supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning, handover, training, maintenance and warranty all as described or reasonably implied in the Contract. The Contractor is obliged to provide fully functioning works and systems in conformance with the requirements of the Contract. In the event certain items are not fully described or indicated in the Contract, but deemed essential by the Supervision Consultant (in all reasonableness) for the performance of the works and systems then the provision of such items shall form part of the Contractors scope of works at no additional cost to the Employer. B. The Contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate the equipment and services and shall produce properly coordinated shop drawings to demonstrate the installation comply with the performance requirement with shop drawing, calculations and details. C. Shop drawings shall take into account actual measurement and setting out dimensions/levels obtained and determined by the Contractor on site, actual equipment/material used, actual routing of services, co-ordination with all installation, and site conditions/constraints. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the authority or authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility companies/authorities serving the project and the Owners insurance underwriter. B. Drawings, specifications, codes, standards and condition of contract are minimum requirements. Where requirements differ, the more stringent apply. C. The Supervision Consultant reserves the right to inspect and reject any part of the Works not complying. The Contractor shall replace such rejected works without cost variation and delay to the Contract. D. Approval or acceptance by the Supervision Consultant shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the Works. E. No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the agreement of the Supervision Consultant. The Contractor shall provide/allow the Supervision Consultant full opportunity for the examination and measurement of any work which is about to be covered or put out of view. Upon request by the Supervision Consultant, the Contractor shall expose their Works and allow/provide access to the Supervision Consultant to inspect any part of the Works during the course of the manufacturing or site installation/erection. F. When requested by the Supervision Consultant, the Contractor shall submit evidence including written certificates and full testing reports from approved/recognised testing organisation certifying that his proposed equipment or material has been tested and conform with the specified standard.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 2. Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions Page 18 of 317
1.03
ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A. Abbreviations: 1. ADA 2. ACMV 3. AMCA 4. ANSI 5. ARI 6. ASHRAE 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. ASME ASTA ASTM BMS BS/BSS CAD ELV ETL LPC HVCA ICAO IEC IEE IEEE IES IP IPCEA ISO M&E NC NEC NR NEMA NFPA SMACNA SPL SPW FM UL
American with Disabilities Acts Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation Air Moving and Conditioning Association (USA) American National Standards Institute American Refrigeration Institute American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers (USA) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (USA) Association of Short-circuit Testing Authorities American Society for Testing and Materials (USA) Building Management System British Standard or British Standard Specification Computer Aided Drafting Extra Low Voltage Electrical Testing Laboratories Loss Prevention Council (UK) Heating and Ventilation Contractors Association (UK) International Civil Aviation Organisation International Electrotechnical Committee Institute of Electrical Engineers (UK) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society Index of Protection International Power Cable Engineers Association International Standardisation Organisation Mechanical and Electrical Noise Criteria National Electrical Code Noise Rating National Electrical Manufacturers Association (USA) National Fire Protection Association (USA) Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. (USA) Sound Pressure Level Sound Power Level Factory Mutual Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
B. All other notations and symbols used shall have their internally/normally accepted/used meaning. 1.04 CLIMATE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall warrant that all materials and equipment are suitable for continuous use and operation in the climatic conditions encountered on site. B. All equipment and materials shall be fully tropicalised and suitable for use in the peculiar local climate and operating conditions. All equipment/system shall be suitable for continuous operation with outdoor dry bulb temperature of at least up to 50C and relative humidity of up to 100%.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 2. Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions
Page 19 of 317
C. Indoor Design Criteria Contractor shall be responsible to provide the following indoor conditions: Dry bulb temperature: 24C 1.5C. Relative humidity: 50% 10%. Noise level: Dining, living and Bedrooms: 35 NC. Kitchen, Bathroom, lobby, elevator lobby: 40 NC. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion. B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB, or any other material which is considered hazardous by the authority having jurisdiction. C. Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed as directed by the Supervision Consultant. D. Provide name/data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturers name. Model number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a conspicuous place. E. Install materials and equipment with qualified trade people. F. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar application and sizes. G. Fully lubricate equipment where required. H. Follow manufacturers instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation. I. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc, are scheduled or specified for job site operating conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be de-rated with the method of de-rating identified on the submittals. Energy consuming equipment shall meet local energy ordinances and by-laws.
J.
K. Factory inspection for mechanical and electrical equipments included in the contractor cost for engineering and client representatives to attend the test. Factory inspection shall be arranged by the contractor for MEP equipments such as heat exchanger, chillers, FCUs, DX unit, cooling towers, pumps, transformers, MV panels, LV panels cables, UPS, Lift, escalator, central battery systems etc.., L. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipments and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactory completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufactures catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 5
year field service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations. 2.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLED AT OUTDOOR LOCATION A. For equipment and services intended to be installed at outdoor locations or exposed to external weather conditions, the Contractor shall ensure that these equipment and services are properly protected by weatherproof external casing or cladding to handle expected hot, humid, salt and carbon laden atmosphere. All associated motors, terminal, and electrical components shall be weatherproof type and suitable for outdoor installation, IP 55 or greater. Weather protection shield shall also be provided for all moving parts of the equipment and associated accessories external to the weatherproof equipment casing. B. All external equipment including control panels etc. shall be specially graded against corrosive environment. C. All the external plastic pipes shall be protected from UV rays, and painted with UV resistant paint / insulated and clad with Al. Jacketing. D. This outdoor weatherproof requirement shall also apply to services installed in close proximity of external openings and louvres. E. Air conditioning split pack units serving sub stations and other ancillary buildings will be suitable for 24 hour operation and be installed with 100 % spare capacity i.e. one unit running and one stand-by with automatic change-over on failure and run time settings. The units will be suitable to provide duty for an external temperature of 52 deg C and maintain a temperature of 22 deg C +/1 deg C. 2.03 PANEL AT EXPOSED LOCATIONS
A. For all Mechanical and Electrical panels outside plant rooms and at exposed locations such as car-park, services area, public space, etc. shall be provided with a lockable front door with viewing glass panel where applicable. 2.04 EQUIPMENT SELECTION
A. The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the Contract are minimum capacities and the Contractor shall take into account of the offered equipment capacities to meet the performance requirement in the Contract and actual installation requirements. B. Physical sizes of all plant and equipment shall suit the space allocated, taking into account the requirement for access and proper maintenance. C. Any proposal to deviate from the Specification and Drawings is subject to the Supervision Consultants approval at his sole discretion. Upon approval, any necessary changes to the engineering and installation as a result of these deviations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. D. Proposed equipment shall be submitted for approval by the Supervision Consultant before ordering is placed. All necessary information requested by the Supervision Consultant for the review of the proposal shall be submitted.
Page 21 of 317
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Contract documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation instruction. B. Coordinate work with related trades and furnish, in writing, any information necessary to permit the work of related trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible conflict or delay. C. The drawings show the general arrangement of equipment and appurtenances. Follow these drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other divisions will permit. Provide off-sets, fittings, and accessories which may be required but not shown on the drawings. Investigate the site, and review drawings of other divisions to determine conditions affecting the work, and provide such work and accessories as may be required to accommodate such conditions. D. The locations of panels and other equipment indicated on the drawings are approximately correct. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels, thermostats, switches, etc., and have the precise and definite locations accepted by the Supervision Consultant before proceeding with the installation. E. The drawings show only the general run of services and approximate location of equipment, outlets, panels, etc. Any significant changes in location of equipment, outlets, panels, etc., necessary in order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the determine attention of the Supervision Consultant for review before such alterations are made. Modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Contract. F. Carefully check space requirements with other division works to ensure that equipment can be installed in the space allotted. G. Wherever work interconnects with work amongst different installation, coordinate with other trades to insure that they have the information necessary so that the Contractor may properly install the necessary connections and equipment. Identify items requiring access in order that the Ceiling Trade will know where to install access doors and panels. Abortive due to failure of providing coordination requirements with respect to access will be to the account of the Contractor. H. Consult amongst installation so that, wherever possible, motor controls and distribution equipment are of the same manufacturer. I. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of risers through structural masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as required for the proper protection of each riser passing through building surfaces. Failure to furnished sleeves in block-work and structure during the construction and requiring abortive works of breaking out will be back-charged to the Contractor. Provide fire stopping around all pipes, conduits, ducts, sleeves, etc, which pass through fire compartments. At locations of multi services passage through structural/concrete blockwork opening where masonry filling is impossible, include for complete firestopping between services and the adjacent structural/blockwork opening.
J.
K. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment suitably so as not to exceed allowable loading of structures. L. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on the
drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Supervision Consultant for review. At completion include a set of these drawings with each set of record drawings. M. Coordinate with the local utility companies/authorities for their requirements for service connections and provide all necessary provisions, grounding, materials, equipment, labor, testing, and appurtenances. N. Before commencing works, examine adjoining works on which this work is in any way affected and report conditions which prevent performance of the works. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered. O. The Contractor is responsible to any modifications required due to service not properly coordinated. 3.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. Prior to the submitting of bids, visit the project site and become familiar with all conditions affecting the proposed installation and make provisions as to the cost thereof. B. The Contract Documents do not make representations regarding the character or extent of the sub-soils, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations, above or below ground, or other sub-surface conditions which may be encountered during the work, based on examination of the site or other information. Failure to examine the drawings or other information does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for satisfactorily completion of the work. 3.05 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Provide excavation for the work of the specified installation, if required or necessary. Excavate all material encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings or as required. Remove from the site excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill. Provide grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Remove any water which accumulates. Provide sheeting and shoring as may be necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel. B. Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of four inches below the trench depths indicated on the drawings or required. Backfill overdepths in the rock excavation and unauthorized overdepths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level of at least 95% to standard proctor density or 75% relative density or as specified by the Supervision Consultant. Wherever unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the work is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material. C. Excavate trenches for utilities that will provide the following minimum depths of cover from existing grade or from indicated finished grade as required by local authorities. D. Trenches should not be placed within 3 meters of foundation or soil surfaces which must be resist horizontal forces. E. Do not backfill until all required tests have been performed and installation observed by the Supervision Consultant. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications.
Backfill shall consist of non-expansive soil with limited porosity. Deposit in 15 cm layers and thoroughly and carefully tamp until the work has a cover of not less than 30 cm. Backfill and tamp remainder of trench at 30 cm intervals until complete. Uniformly grade the finished surface. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of slabs or other surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of conduit or other equipment, layout the work carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping, equipment etc., using skilled trade people of the trades required at no additional cost to the Contract where applicable. B. Provide slots, openings and recesses through slabs as required. Where these openings are not provided, provide cutting and patching to accommodate penetrations at no additional cost to the Contract. 3.07 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS
A. Air Tight Seals 1. All penetrations through the building fabric subject to suction or pressurization shall be sealed airtight. B. Holes in Roof (Not Applicable) 1. Roof penetrations for passage of conduits or circular PVC and PVC Cables shall be sealed watertight using a flexible polypropylene conical sleeve manufacturer to seal the cable to the roof structure, regardless of the roof profile. 2. All sharp metal edges, which may come in contact with the cable, shall be suitably bushed. C. Fire Rated Penetrations 1. Where services penetrate any fire rated barrier, the Contractor shall seal the penetration with the use of an appropriate material to ensure the integrity of the fire barrier where applicable. 2. The Contractor shall seal the cable enclosures through fire rated barriers to ensure the integrity and rating of the fire barrier where applicable. D. Acoustic Penetrations 1. Where services penetrate acoustic barriers, sealant shall be supplied and installed to maintain the acoustic separation at least equal to the barrier penetration where applicable. E. Penetration through water-proof Areas 1. Appropriate waterproof sealing material shall be used. F. At locations where Contractor requests opening in structural floors larger than service installed, the balance portion to be filled by checker plate by the Contractor. 3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Verify exact locations and mounting heights with the Supervision Consultant before installation. 3.09 WATERPROOFING
A. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs, machine room floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary, make penetration prior to the waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch-pockets required. Advise the Supervision Consultant and obtain written permission before penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such penetration is shown on the Drawings.
B. Restore waterproof integrity of walls or surfaces after they have been penetrated without additional cost to the Contract. 3.11 SUPPORTS
A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice. Provide supports, hangers, auxiliary structural members and supplemental hardware required for support of the work. B. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work indicated as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets and equipment room. C. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment which is installed in a free standing position. D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of all equipment mounted on them. E. Adequate support of equipment (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall not depend on ducts, pipe, electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support. F. Equipment shall not rest on or depend for support on suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling). Provide independent support of equipment. Do not attach to supports provided for ductwork, piping or work of other trades. G. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment so that loading will not exceed allowable loading of structure. Equipment and supports shall not come in contact with work of other trades. 3.12 FASTENINGS
A. Fasten equipment to building in accordance with the best industry practice. B. Where weight applied to the attachment points is 45 kg or less, conform to the following as a minimum: 1. Wood : Wood screws 2. Concrete and solid masonry : Bolts and expansion shields 3. Solid metal : Machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs C. Where weight applied to the building attachment points exceeds 45 kg, but is 135 kg or less, conform to the following as a minimum: 1. At concrete slabs provide 60 cm x 60 cm x 13 cm steel fishplates on top with through bolts. Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top slabs screed line, where no fill is to be applied. 2. At steel decking or sub-floor for all fastenings, provide through bolts and threaded rods. The tops of bolts and rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screed line and grouted in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the decking or sub-floor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with his decking or sub-floor such hangers shall be provided. D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 135 kg, coordinate with and obtain the approval of Supervision Consultant and conform to the following as a minimum:
1. Provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall suitably welded or clamped to building steel. Provide threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members. E. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging tying to the building structural elements. F. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups or arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars. 3.13 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify equipment with permanently attached black phenolic nameplates with 13 mm high white engraved lettering. Identification shall include equipment name or load served as appropriate. Nameplates shall be attached with cadmium plated screws; peel and stick tape or glue on type nameplates are unacceptable. B. Services runs shall be properly identified as per the requirements in the Contract. C. See individual section for additional identification requirements. 3.14 PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS
A. In all public areas, tenant areas, and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or installation of any equipment or assembly which bears on any surface any name, trademark, or other insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from which such object has been obtained, is prohibited. B. Required test lab certification labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed. 3.15 EQUIPMENT PADS AND ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Provide concrete pads under all floor mounted electrical equipment. Equipment pads shall conform to the shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a minimum 25 mm margin around the equipment 28 day, 175 kgs/square cm concrete reinforced with 15 cm x 15 cm welded wire mesh. Trowel tops and sides of pad to smooth finishes, equal to those of the floors, with all external corners bullnose to a 20 mm radius. Shop drawings stamped UNALTERED shall be used for dimensional guidance in sizing pads. B. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads, inertia blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size and number recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment and locate by means of suitable templates. Equipment installed on vibration isolators shall be secured to the isolator. Secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or support as recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer. C. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws shall pass through the gypsum board and securely attach to the partition studs. As an attached to 15 cm square, galvanized metal backplates which are attached to the gypsum board with an approved non-flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions are not acceptable.
Page 26 of 317
3.16
DELIVERY, DRYAGE AND HAULING
A. Provide drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building of equipment specified and be responsible for the timely delivery and installation of equipment as required by the construction schedule. If any item of equipment is received prior to the time it is required, the Contractor shall be responsible for its proper storage and protection until the time it is required. Pay for all costs of demurrage or storage. B. If equipment is not delivered or installed at the project site in a timely manner as required by the project construction schedule, the Contractor shall be responsible for resulting disassembly, reassembly, manufacturers supervision, shoring, general construction modification, delays, overtime cost, etc., at no additional cost to the Contract. 3.17 TESTING OF SYSTEMS
A. Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance and acceptance testing, and complete work sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion date to permit the execution of the testing prior to occupancy and Contract closeout. Complete any adjustments and/or alterations which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment prior to the completion date. B. Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed and outlining when field testing will be performed. Submit completion schedule for review within six months after the notice to proceed by Supervision Consultant or Owners Representative has been given. Update this schedule periodically as the project progresses. C. Provide all miscellaneous materials including balancing loops, drain and air vent valves, connections, water, temporary power, chemicals, gas etc as required for various systems described elsewhere to complete testing and commissioning of services. 3.18 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM AND INTERFACES
A. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the mechanical system and equipment to interface with the Building Automation System in accordance with the point schedules specified on the drawings and specified in Section 13940. All necessary interfacing works shall be included in the Contract. 3.19 SAMPLES
A. Samples showing fabrication techniques, quality and workmanship of component parts, compatibility of accessories shall be submitted for approval, upon request by the Supervision Consultant. Samples submitted shall be the property of the Client. B. The Contractor shall also extend such warranties to cover the entire Defect Liability Period. 3.20 WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor shall warrant that the capacity, rating or duty of all equipment used in the installation shall not be less than the performance specified on the Drawing or in the Specification when operating under the specified conditions and in accordance with the equipment manufacturers instructions. Any equipment/system not meeting this requirement shall be rejected. 3.21 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS, PERSONNEL AND PROPERTY
A. All material and goods shall be delivered to the site in new condition, properly packed and protected against damage due to handling, adverse weather or other circumstances, and be kept in packing case or under protective covering until required for use.
B. Any items suffering damage in transit or on site shall be rejected and replaced without extra cost and time to the Contract. C. In the case of equipment and materials which originate from other countries and/or different climatic conditions, all such equipment and material shall be adequately and securely packed for safe transportation with due regard to the climatic conditions encountered in transit and arrival. D. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all apparatus, equipment and materials furnished by him in connection with his works, and special care shall be taken to protect all parts thereof in such a manner as may be necessary or as directed. E. Protection shall include covers, crating, sheds, stores or other means to protect the apparatus, equipment and materials from the weather, water damage, corrosion and to prevent dirt, grit, plaster or other foreign substances from entering the working parts of machinery or equipment. Special care shall be taken to keep all opening of pipes, ducts, etc. closed while in storage or during the course of delivery and erection/installation. F. The Contractor shall take precautions to avoid unnecessary damage among the M&E installation. G. All precautions shall be taken for the safety of personnel on site. The Contractor shall also conform with the general regulations governing personnel on the site and must keep to the working space allocated for their use. 3.22 INTERFACING WITH ALL SERVICES AND SYSTEMS
A. General 1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary provisions for interfacing amongst installation, trades, services, and equipment. All necessary sensors, current/voltage transformers, voltage-free contacts, relays, auxiliary contacts, terminals, transducers, etc. for interfacing works shall be provided by the Contractor. 2. All control/monitoring wiring from sensors, equipment, and components for the interfacing shall be terminated at a separate interfacing compartment located at the respective equipment/systems switchboard or control panel. The interfacing compartment shall be completed with all necessary connectors, terminals, and with proper identifications to allow interfacing works to be easily carried out. The compartment shall clearly indicate Extra Low Voltage Cable Only. No Power Cable Connection. Where there is no equipment/system switchboard or control panel involved, the Contractor shall provide separate interfacing panels with provisions same as the interfacing compartment as described above. The locations of the switchboard/control panels and the interfacing panels shall be properly coordinated. 3. For every control panel and each module of the switchboard, at least five (5) spare terminals shall be provided for future interfacing works. 4. Wiring and cables for interfacing with the fire alarm system and other fire protection and life safety systems shall be fire rated to comply with Civil Defences requirements. 5. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, interfacing wiring from Fire Alarm and Building Automation systems shall be provided and terminated at the terminals of the interfacing compartments or panels by the Fire Alarm System and Building Automation System installation respectively. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the current and voltage requirements for the interfacing works/provisions. The type of provisions for interfacing signals shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified: Digital inputs and outputs : voltage-free dry contact
Analog inputs and outputs : 4 20 mA or 0 10 mV 6. All the interface provisions shall be DC operated and rated not more than 50 mA. 7. In addition to the interfacing requirements shown on the Drawings, interfacing provisions as described below shall also be provided and included in the Contract. B. Electrical Installation 1. The Electrical Installation shall provide the following: a. Isolators and power points (fused spur units) for all mechanical equipment and systems. Where shown on the Drawings, the Electrical installation shall include direct power cable connections to the mechanical systems main motor control centres. b. Earthing terminal in the Fire Command Centre and all other plant rooms for supplementary equipotential bonding of mechanical equipment and systems where applicable. c. Fuel day tank High/Low level alarm signals to the Building Automation System where applicable. C. Plumbing and Sanitary Installation Not Applicable 1. The Plumbing and Sanitary Installation shall provide the following: a. Water supply connections to water tanks under other mechanical electrical installation including isolation valve. b. High / Low level alarm signals to the Building Automation System for all water tanks. D. ACMV Installation Not Applicable 1. The ACMV Installation shall provide the following: a. Smoke signal from the air-handling unit return air smoke detector to the Fire Alarm System. b. An emergency ventilation system panel with ON/OFF control and ON/OFF/TRIP status indications at the Main Control Centre and the two (2) sub-control centers including switches and indication lights for the following equipment and systems: 1) Entire smoke extraction system including individual fans (and associated motorized dampers), individual smoke shutters/curtains, smoke damper, etc 2) All Staircase pressurization fans 3) All Smoke Lobby ventilation fans 4) All automatic entrance doors 5) Other emergency fans for fire and life safety operations c. Shut down control of air-handling units by the Fire Alarm System on floor-by-floor basis. d. High/Low level signals to the Building Automation System for all water tanks including feed and expansion tanks. E. Fire Alarm Installation 1. The Fire Alarm Installation shall provide the following: a. All control and monitoring modules for interfacing with all other mechanical and electrical systems. b. High level interface with the Building Automation system. c. Signal to all electronic security systems. F. Building Automation System (BAS) Installation 1. The BAS contractor shall provide the following:
a. All control and monitoring modules for interfacing with other mechanical and electrical systems (with the exception of those for interfacing with the Fire Alarm System). b. High level interface with the Fire Alarm System. 3.23 STRUCTURAL EXPANSION JOINTS AND SETTLEMENT JOINTS
A. The Contractor shall make adequate provisions of flexible joints/connectors and/or expansion loops where services pass through structural expansion joints. The locations of these expansion joints are shown on the Architectural/structural drawings. The provisions of flexible joints / connections shall take into account the movement allowance. Detailed calculations shall be submitted by the Contractor to justify the selection of these flexible joints/connectors. B. For settlement joints shown on the structural drawings or required by the construction of structural works, the Contractor shall co-ordinate that any installation which passes through settlement joints shall be executed after the complete casting of both side of the joint. C. The Contractor shall co-ordinate to ensure that all services installed under metal roof and skylight shall have adequate provisions to take into account the movement and deflection of the roof structure and the cladding. 3.24 PAINTING
A. All equipment, enclosures, housings, air ducts, piping, trunking, cable trays, conduits, etc. which are exposed to view (including those in plantrooms) shall be provided with colour paint finishes. B. Generally, all metal surfaces requiring painting shall be provided with two (2) coats of asphalt aluminium paint, primer coated, and two (2) coats of finished paint. C. No painting shall be done on damp surfaces. D. The Contractor shall submit colour scheme for the entire Works to the Supervision Consultant for approval. E. Painting requirements as stated in codes and regulations or generally required by local authorities shall also be provided. Where applicable. 3.25 SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND NOTICES
A. The Contractor shall supply and install the following safety equipment and notices for each switchboard/control panel in the respective switchrooms and plantrooms:1. Solid rubber insulated mats complying with BS 921 in front of and extending the full length of the control panel/switchboards. 2. Copies of all statutory safety notices, regulations and instructions for resuscitation and treatment after electrical shock. 3. Danger signs on the switchboards/control panels, the doors of sub-station, switchrooms and electrical riser duct rooms and elsewhere to the requirements of the Power Supply Authority. 4. A copy of the main single line diagram, varnished and mounted on suitable hard backing and framed (in glass panel), showing clearly the full details of the electrical and mechanical systems as supplied and installed. 5. Any other Notices as required by all local Authorities.
Page 30 of 317
3.26
QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC)
A. The Contractor, prior to the commencement of the Works, shall submit for the Supervision Consultants approval comprehensive QA/QC programme for the installation which shall include, but not be limited to the following:1. QA/QC programme of the manufacturing process of equipment; 2. Method statement of all site erection/installation works; 3. Method of protection for material/equipment during delivery, and stored on and off the site; and 4. Testing and commissioning programmes, procedures, etc. B. The QA/QC programme and procedures shall generally be in conformance with the guidelines of ISO 9000. C. All equipment, material and items incorporated in the Works under this Contract are to be new and of top class quality. D. Equipment/material of non-reputable make may not be accepted solely at the discretion of the Supervision Consultant. E. The use of electrically dissimilar metals in contact with each other shall be avoided. If this is not possible, the contact surfaces of the two (2) metals shall be insulated from each other by an approved method. F. All work under this Contract shall be performed in a skilful and workmanlike manner and in accordance with best workshop practice. G. All components shall be easily accessible for maintenance/replacement. H. All instrumentation and equipment required for inspection, testing and commissioning shall be calibrated and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit all valid calibration records from manufacturer and/or recognised laboratories and testing authorities before the use of such instrumentation and equipment. 3.27 PROGRESSIVE RECORD/AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. During the course of the Contract, the Contractor shall keep progressive record drawings of all installation works. B. As-built drawings shall be developed and produced during the course of the installation and, when requested by the Supervision Consultant, for substantiating of monthly progress claims. C. As-built drawings shall be submitted prior to the issue of Taking Over Certificate by the Supervision Consultant. D. As-fitted schematic system diagrams, properly framed, shall also be provided and mounted on the wall inside each plant room. E. Submission of approved as-built or as manufactured drawings shall be in manners as follows: 1. One (1) set of special quality plastic film transparency for all drawings; 2. Two (2) sets of computer soft copy in CD ROM; 3. Five (5) bound sets of paper prints for all drawings F. Additional set of as-built drawings in addition to the above as specified in the Contract Preliminaries and reasonably requested by the Supervision Consultant shall also be provided.
3.28
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS SUBMISSIONS
A. As-built drawings shall be provided as required by the Supervision Consultant. B. The Contractor shall ensure that the submissions are made properly and in a timely fashion and will not delay the inspections and testings by the authorities. All as-built drawings shall be produced based on the latest architectural plans. 3.29 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. System testing and commissioning, shall be carried out by an independent party, engaged by the Contractor. The Contractor shall reserve the necessary provisional sum in his contract price and coordinate with the Client on the nomination of this independent party for management of the testing and commissioning. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary licences as required by all relevant authorities before operation of any equipment/system. C. All testing and commissioning to enable proper operation of the Works shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Supervision Consultant in accordance with the construction programme or before the issuance of Taking Over Certificate, whichever is earlier. D. All final adjustments and final balancing of the equipment/system operation shall be completed before the Date of Taking Over Certificate. E. The complete testing and commissioning are deemed to be concluded successfully only when the installation operated properly within the specified limits of its rating continuously without failure of any kind. F. The Contractor shall establish the dates by which permanent utilities shall be available for testing and commissioning of equipment and take this into account in his programme, or make suitable arrangements to test and commission with temporary power based on programme. G. The Contractor shall arrange for all submissions to Authorities and pay the cost of statutory inspections and certificates. H. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide third party for testing and commissioning ACMV systems. 3.30 ATENDANCE TO OCCUPATION PERMIT APPLICATION
A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary attendance to inspections by the Supervision Consultant and authorities for the purpose of Occupation Permit application. 3.31 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL
A. The Operation and Maintenance Instruction manual shall be in A4 size paper and be bound in rigid covers covered and engraved with lettering giving the Employers name, project name, Supervision Consultants name. B. Final draft manuals must be submitted for the Supervision Consultants review before Taking Over Certificate is issued. After acceptance by the Supervision Consultant, the Contractor shall submit five (5) sets and a soft copy of this manual for record before Taking Over certificate is issued.
C. In general, each manual shall consist, but not be limited to the following section:1. General a. This section shall include the purpose of the manual and brief description of the manual directory. 2. System Description a. This section shall include the following as a minimum:3. Description of the overall system. a. General operation of plant, starting up and shutting down procedures, location of each equipment, normal and emergency operation of systems/equipment, control settings and tolerances. b. Size and capacity of all the major equipment and components of the system. c. The proposed initial setting of protective devices and other adjustable components of the system. Space shall be reserved for the insertion of final commissioned and accepted settings. d. Normal sequence of equipment and plant operation and alternative sequence to maintain operation of part of the total facilities during abnormal circumstances. 4. Technical Specification This section shall include the technical descriptions and functions of all equipment and components and shall generally include: a. Schedules of equipment showing quantities, locations, types, operating duties. b. Technical description of all systems and equipment, including circuit diagrams of each printed circuit board and component layout diagram for each printed circuit board installed for this project. c. Wiring diagrams. d. Manufacturers drawings. e. Equipment list, stating the make, model, serial number, accepted settings (after commissioning). f. Catalogues, certificates and performance data sheets for all equipment. 5. Maintenance This section shall include the required operating and maintenance procedures of all the equipment. This shall include the following as a minimum:a. Inspection manual for all system/equipment; b. Operation manual for all system/equipment; c. Procedure of changing components of equipment requiring regular replacement; d. Maintenance instructions, calibration procedures and fault finding instructions for all systems; e. Precautions when carrying out operation and maintenance procedures; f. Storage and inventory systems; and 6. Safety This section shall include the following as a minimum:a. Proper procedure of equipment operation; b. General description of plant hazards, where appropriate, including the following:1) Protection against electrical hazards; 2) Protection against mechanical and physical hazards; 3) Protection against fire and explosion hazards; 4) Protection against chemical hazards; 5) Protection during fuel and chemical handling; and 6) First aid and accident reporting.
Page 33 of 317
7. Directory of Suppliers a. This section shall list the name of suppliers and agents of each type of equipment, materials and accessories. Correspondence address, telephone number, fax number, pager number, and E-mail address shall be included. 8. List of Spares a. This section shall list all the spares, consumable materials, and maintenance tools that will be maintained and kept to ensure continued satisfactory operation of the equipment and systems. 9. Organisation of Maintenance Team a. This section shall include detailed organisation of the Maintenance team deployed for the Defect Notification Period with names and CVs, of all key staff. Contact telephone or pager numbers for emergency and/or twenty-four (24) hour call shall also be included. 10. List of As-Built Drawings a. This section shall contain a full list of all as-built and as-manufactured drawings. 3.32 TAKING OVER PROCEDURE
A. The Contractor shall adhere to the sequence of handover described below: 1. The Contractor shall submit the arrangement of the commissioning to the satisfaction of the Supervision Consultant. The Supervision Consultant reserves the right to reject any person. 2. The installation shall be practically complete following satisfactory commissioning and the submission of final commissioning data prior to the issuance of Taking Over Certificate by the Supervision Consultant. It is solely the Contractors responsibility to ensure that all plant/equipment shall have their respective warranty by the respective equipment/plant supplier directly. 3. A joint inspection shall be held among the Employer, Supervision Consultant and Contractor to establish an outstanding works and defects list. All outstanding works/defects, shall be completed within one month from the date when the Taking Over Certificate was issued. 4. If, at the end of the one months period from the date of issuing the Taking Over Certificate, any defects/outstanding works mentioned in the list still exist, the Supervision Consultant is empowered to appoint a body to rectify all defects/outstanding works and deduct the cost involved from the Contract sum. B. The Contractor shall also refer to other requirements in the relevant clauses of the Contract. 1. Before the Taking Over Certificate is issued, the following must be completed: a. Operation and Maintenance Instructions Manual, test data and as-built drawings must be submitted. Computer soft copies of these manuals and drawings shall also be submitted. b. The Employer or his representative must be fully instructed in the operation of the system. A written acknowledgment from the Employer shall be required. c. All tools and spares shall be handed over. A written acknowledgment from the Employer shall be required. d. Written confirmation from the Contractor to indicate the installation is completed according to Performance Requirement. e. Submit and obtain approval by the Supervision Consultant. Maintenance schedule for the installation during the Maintenance and Defect Notification Period.
Page 34 of 317
3.33
AS-NEW CONDITIONS
A. At the time of handover of the Works after the Taking Over Certificate, the whole installation shall be in as-new conditions. The Contractor shall, during the course of the Contract, protect all plant and equipment and shall restore/repaint as necessary before handover of the installation. 3.34 DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD
A. The Defect Liability Period for Mechanical & Electrical systems shall be as defined in the Main Contract document. During the Defect Notification Period, the Contractor shall provide a 24-hour call-out service to repair any equipment that has broken down. B. Immediately answering the breakdown calls, the Contractor shall attend to such calls within a maximum time limit of 2 hours during night and 1 hour during daytime of receiving such calls. C. During the Defect Liability Period, the Contractor shall at his own cost remedy and make good with all faults or defects in the Works, which in the opinion of Supervision Consultant, is due to faulty materials, workmanship. The Contractor shall indemnify the employer against any damage or injury to the Building contents and/or occupants arising from such faults or defects. D. If the Contractor fails to remedy such faults or defects within a reasonable time, the Employer may proceed to do so at the expense of the Contractor and without prejudice to such other rights as the Employer may have under the Contract. E. The Contractor shall also refer to other requirements in the relevant clauses of the Contract. F. The site infrastructural Contract shall warrant that the complete MEP installation shall perform satisfactorily due to the Defect Liability Period. 3.35 TUITION/TRAINING
A. The Tenderer shall submit a schedule in the Tender submission list all works and systems for which the Contractor has to provide training. The Schedule should have information include list of recommended training courses within each works/systems, location of the training courses (UAE/Overseas). Trainers details (from the manufacturers premises where applicable), Courses duration, unit rate of the training in per head basis. B. The Contractor shall provide sufficient and proper instructions to the trainees nominated by Employer in the commissioning, operation, maintenance, servicing and trouble-shooting of the various plant and systems. C. The Contractor shall provide training facilities and training courses and ensure that the trainees nominated by Employer will acquire full knowledge and appreciation of all aspects of the day to day operation, breakdown and routine maintenance, and fault diagnosis of all plant, equipment, and system installed under this Contract. Detailed syllabus and the timing of the training courses shall be submitted. D. Trainees nominated by Employer will attend the training courses, and the Contractor shall allow them reasonable access to technical information and documentation required for proper operation and maintenance. The Contractor shall also explain this information and documentation to allow the trainees to become fully conversant with all aspects of the systems. E. When training is required to be held in overseas facilities, all necessary costs for airfare, hotel accommodation, local transportation, food, etc. shall be included.
Page 35 of 317
3.36
VERMIN PROOFING AND CLEANING
A. On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall check and ensure that all cable entries, openings, coreholes, etc. are properly sealed with fire rated material and rendered vermin proof and water tight. The floors, trenches and surroundings shall be cleaned, mopped, and left in a clean, dust free state on completion. Building works and paint work of equipment damaged during the installation works shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Supervision Consultant. B. All costs involved in the above shall be deemed to be included in each installation. 3.37 POWER SYSTEM HARMONICS A. For the purpose of this provision, PCC means the point of common coupling being the terminals of the mechanical equipment power interfacing units at the point where they connect to the electrical distribution system. The Contractor shall demonstrate the installation will be carry out to complying with current international and European Community electrical immunity and emission standards. In order to continue an interference free service to others installation, the Contractor must comply with each of the following: 1. The Contractor shall provide adequate measures including active harmonic filters to limit the total harmonic distortion at the PCC to 5% for voltage and less than 12% for current for all phases, in accordance with the requirements of the Institution of Electrical and Electronic Supervision Consultants Standard IEEE 519. The Contractor shall take particular care in the selection of equipment that may produce harmonics including without limitation electronic ballasts, UPS, softstarters and variable speed drives, to ensure that these limits are met at all times. 2. The Contractor shall ensure that the power factor at the PCC is equal to or better than 0.85 lagging 3. The Contractor shall complete the installation to meet all current international and European Community emission standards for electrical interference for light commercial buildings, including without limitation EN50082, IEC1547, CISPR11, CISPR15, CISPR16, EN55015, EN55011, EN50081, EN60555, EN61000, IEC801, IEC1000 and EN61800. 3.38 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)
A. The Contractor shall demonstrate the installation will be carry out in the way to ensuring that all equipment supplied conforms with the requirements of relevant international standards in terms of their electromagnetic compatibility with the environment and with all equipment to be installed in the Project. All equipment used shall comply with the prevailing generic EMC requirements and EMC requirements applicable to general, scientific and industrial equipment specified but not limited to the following standards, or their equivalents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IEC CISPR EN BSI VDE International Electrotechnical Commission standards International Special Committee on Radio Interference Document European Standard British Standard Institution Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker
B. All signal and control cabling installed shall be correctly screened and earth to prevent noise and electric shock. Operation of all equipment shall not be adversely affected by radiated energy from hand held communication equipment.
Page 36 of 317
C. All equipment that is likely to be touched by personnel and contains sensitive electronic equipment shall be protected against electrostatic discharge. D. The Contractor shall ensure that any static or alternating magnetic fields, generated in the environment, do no adversely affect the operation of the equipment. E. Bonding shall be provided for all exposed metallic parts of the equipment and connecting them to the earthing network for meeting safety requirements and minimize noise voltage due to potential differences. F. Equipment provided bt the Contractor shall have minimum radio interference in the frequency range 0.15 MHz to 30 MHz by means of suppression at source. G. All equipment supplies, prefabricated and installed shall be, manufactured and installed to fully comply with the European Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/996/EEC, the CE marking directive 93/68/EEC and the United Kingdoms Electromagnetic Compatibility regulations 1992 and 1994 and all subsequent amendments. H. All equipment supplied to the site shall be either electromagnetically benign or carry the EC mark and be provided with copies of the relevant test certificates. 3.39 CONTRACTORS OBLIGATIONS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractors obligations for the production of Shop Drawings shall, in addition to other requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, include the following : 1. Adjustments and enhancement of services as a result of space co-ordination to provide sufficient installation and maintenance access to facilitate easy future operation and maintenance 2. Re-routing and re-organization of services to achieve the clear headroom/ceiling height required by the architectural works 3. Adjustments and enhancements to suit the construction works on site 4. Adjustments and enhancements to suit equipment/systems offered 5. Adjustments and enhancements to suit public utility connections 6. Adjustments and enhancements to suit existing public utilities locations for avoiding diversions of these existing utilities 7. Adjustments and enhancements due to coordination and interfacing with other trades (e.g. power supply, water supply, electro-magnetic compatibility, etc.) 8. Changes required as a result of certain construction sequence and methods 9. Adjustments and modifications of the installation arrangement to suit the specified phased completion and early hand-over areas B. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for the preparation of all Shop Drawings necessary or required under the Specifications and/or for the construction of the Works. The Shop Drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be based on the Contract Document. These Shop Drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Supervision Consultant. C. During the course of the Contract, the Contractor shall produce and commence submission of detailed shop drawings sufficiently early for the Supervision Consultants review. These shop drawings shall be submitted progressively in accordance with the construction programme. Clearance or approval of any such drawings by the Supervision Consultant shall not relieve the Contractor from any specified performance or material requirements, nor nullify the Supervision Consultants right to reject unsatisfactory works on the site. A minimum period of twenty-one (21) days shall generally be allowed for the review of each shop drawing submission by the Supervision Consultant. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for this 21 day review period for each submittal in his Construction Schedule. D. Installation works carried out by the Contractor before the relevant shop drawings submitted and approved by the Supervision Consultant are at the Contractors own risk.
E. Shop drawings shall show at least the following general categories of information : 1. Penetrations through floors, walls, and other structural members; 2. Plinth details; 3. Equipment positions and operating weights; 4. Entry positions, access routes, weight of equipment or components during delivery to site; 5. Services access openings; 6. Location, details of concealed/buried conduits, inserts, and pipes; 7. Temporary openings in floors/walls; 8. Detailed workshop and manufacturing drawings; 9. Equipment schedules; 10. Electrical wiring and control diagram; 11. General layout plans and sections (1:50 scale for plans and 1:20 scale for sections); 12. Schematic diagram; 13. Support and mounting details; 14. Material/Component specifications; 15. Setting out dimensions and level; and 16. Interfacing details and co-ordination with Architectural, structural and all installation Works. F. In preparing the Shop Drawings, the Contractor shall provide all construction-related engineering input and undertake construction co-ordination, inter-facing, cross-checkings, sequencing and construction detailing subject to the absolute approval of the Supervision Consultant. G. Shop drawings shall be constantly updated to reflect modifications and changes agreed/accepted by the Supervision Consultant and to reflect changes issued by Supervision Consultants instructions. H. Shop drawings produced shall be properly co-ordinated with the works of all installation. Where required for proper co-ordination and to achieve required headroom, the Contractor shall make modification of services layout/routing, duct aspect ratios, pipework gradient, etc. (from those shown on the Contract Drawings) and reflect all these on the shop drawings for the Supervision Consultants approval. I. The Contractor shall co-ordinate and provide on time the details of builders works required to be incorporated into the construction works. For builders work information has already been given on the Drawings or the Contract drawings, such information is to be checked by the Contractor to ensure suitability and sufficiency for his works. Supervision Consultants comments and corrections made on shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his Contractual responsibilities to comply with requirements of the Specification and Drawings.
J.
K. Shop drawings shall be updated progressively to reflect as-built conditions. L. In preparing the Shop Drawings, the Contractor shall co-ordinate the information in the Contract, engineering the installation and demonstrate the installation adequacy, practicality, suitability, compliance of any statutory requirements and integrity of other information in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase whatsoever to the Contract Sum for the Works or any extension of time to complete the Works.
END OF SECTION.
Page 38 of 317
SECTION 15040 COMMISSIONING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. B. WORK INCLUDED Comply with requirements in Division 1 and Section 15010. Provide all services, materials and labour required to fully commission the mechanical systems in accordance with this Section of the Specification. Manufactures factory personnel / authorised representatives shall be involved in the commissioning process of the following equipment and system on site. All associated cost shall be included in the Sub-contract. 1. Boilers 5.Chillers 2. Building Automation System 6.Cooling Tower 3. Automatic Fire Alarm System 7.All the chilled water and domestic water pumps 4. Fire protection pump set The test and commissioning shall consist of primary check of the installation correctness and final check and verification of the system function and operation performance. COORDINATION Meet the requirements of the General Instructions. Coordinate the work of this Section with all other Divisions to ensure complete and operational mechanical systems at completion of this work. Appoint a single person as Commissioning Coordinator who shall be responsible for progressing the commissioning activities of each Division 15 trade. Review the design intent of the project and the intended operation of systems with the Supervision Consultant before proceeding with commissioning. QUALITY ASSURANCE Meet ASHRAE Standard 1-1989 Guideline for Commissioning of HVAC Systems and NFPA codes for fire protection and alarm systems. If in the Supervision Consultant/Owners opinion that the qualifications of the Sub-contractors commissioning team is not acceptable, the Sub-contractor shall engage an independent Testing and Commissioning Specialist to perform all testing and commissioning works on his behalf. Supply the following details regarding the proposed firm for approval: 1. Principle representative and qualifications 2. Proposed personnel and relevant project experience 3. Previous similar assignments and references 4. Scope of work to be undertaken 5. Company resources and equipment
C.
D.
1.02 A. B.
C.
D.
1.03 A.
B.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 3. Section 15040 Commissioning
Page 39 of 317
C.
Use of an independent testing and commissioning specialist shall not relieve the Sub-contractors obligation to name one of his own employees as the person responsible for progressing commissioning, i.e. the Commissioning Coordinator. Supply the name, qualifications and experience of the proposed Commissioning Coordinator for approval. Selection shall be subject to review and the approval of the Supervision Consultant. Supply alternative person(s) when requested by Supervision Consultant. The Supervision Consultant may, at his discretion, attend and advise in the commissioning process. Meet Supervision Consultants requirements. Hold and attend regular meetings during the commissioning process. Prepare detailed progress reports to coincide with regular commissioning meetings. Coordinate, prepare, and issue of minutes for each meeting to be circulated to each involved trade, the Supervision Consultant and the Supervision Consultant representative(s). Minutes shall highlight action items.
D.
E.
F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. SCHEDULES AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS Submit, within 90 days from the commencement of the Sub-contract a detailed and comprehensive installation completion/start-up / testing schedule, identifying all trades and suppliers to be involved. Update the schedule and resubmit for review, on a monthly basis, during the course of commissioning. If found to be unacceptable, revise the schedule and the construction forces to suit the reviewed schedule. This schedule shall include, but is not limited to the following items: 1. Electrical service connections. 2. Installation and testing of refrigerant piping systems. Very strict compliance to manufacturers recommendations is required with regards to quality of workmanship and testing procedures for refrigerant piping works such as pipe covering, flushing air-tightness of soldered, flared and flanged joints, vacuum drying and nitrogen replacement. This is to ensure that no moisture and dirt is left inside the pipe and guarantee no refrigerant leaks. 3. Installation, leak testing and cleaning of duct systems. 4. Installation and hydraulic testing of all pipe systems. 5. Control system wiring. 6. Air and water balancing. 7. Equipment suppliers pre-start checkout of the equipment installations, including controls. 8. Start up of various pieces of equipment and systems. 9. Operational testing of system components. 10. Performance testing of equipment and systems. 11. Acceptance testing of equipment installations and system, by authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's insurance company. 12. Troubleshooting. 13. Calibration of controls and point checkout. 14. Control software set-up and checkout including seasonal and response checkout of operating sequences, PID optimization. 15. Interfacing testing of the entire BAS with other Division works. 16. Emergency system checkout 17. Fire alarm and control system interfacing. 18. Flushing and hydrostatic testing of all pipework systems. 19. Balancing of all water circulation and pipework systems. 20. Submittal of completed equipment and system checkout sheets 21. Demonstration of systems and equipment 22. Maintenance manual preparation and submittal
Page 40 of 317
23. Operator training program 24. Record documentation submittal 2.02 A. RECORD DOCUMENTATION Prepare record documentation for each equipment installation covering: 1. 2. 3. 4. Equipment identification and supplier Shop Drawing submittal, review, production release, and delivery dates Dates for completion of all work required to prepare for equipment installation Dates for equipment installation, supplier pre-start checkout and system availability for startup 5. Dates for equipment start-up, performance testing, proposal for temporary use, acceptance testing, demonstration, turnover and warranty start/finish B. Submit proposed record sheets and procedures to Supervision Consultant for review, when requested. List all specialist personnel and equipment required for the test and ensure that these are available by the test date. Provide documentation of the commissioning process for inclusion into the maintenance manuals. These are to include checkout sheets, equipment data sheets, start-up certificates from suppliers involved in start-up, documentation concerning demonstration to the Owner. Include all record and result sheets form commissioning tests. Maintain a log of key operating parameters, problems encountered, solutions employed and verification of effectiveness of solutions. Include log in maintenance manuals. STARTUP Coordinate and supervise the start-up of the various pieces of equipment and systems. Utilize the start-up services of the manufacturer's representative. Ensure that the equipment is operating in a satisfactory manner. Check the following items: 1. Direction of rotation 2. Grease and lubricants 3. Noise, if deemed to be a problem 4. Seals 5. Alignment of fan drives by a millwright 6. Piping connections and safeties 7. Electrical amp draw, starting inrush current and trip/heater settings 8. Performance of all plant and equipment in accordance with the manufacturers ratings. TROUBLESHOOTING Resolve inter-Division coordination problems. Where problems become apparent during the commissioning process, identify and resolve these problems. The basic functions in troubleshooting are: 1. What - identification and definition of the problem 2. Why - determination and evaluation of the causes 3. When - determine the time available or constraints to resolve the problem 4. Involve the Supervision Consultant in the review of the problem and proposed resolution 5. Coordinate remedial actions with the appropriate parties
Page 41 of 317
C.
D.
E.
2.03 A.
2.04 A. B.
6. 7. 2.05 A. B.
Evaluate the effectiveness of the remedial actions Record the problem, cause, remedial actions and results
OPERATION AND TESTING Meet Section 15010 requirements for Inspection, Testing and Certificates. Test the operation of the individual components and systems. Go through each step of the sequence of operation and verify that each component operates correctly. Direct and ensure that all other division work trades involved make the required changes and adjustments to effect the proper operation of all components and systems. Meet commissioning test requirements. Document operation and testing. Carry out operational tests for the current season and simulate operation of summer and intermediate seasons. DEMONSTRATION Demonstrate to the Supervision Consultant and Owners representatives the proper operation of all equipment and systems supplied under this Division. Demonstrations shall occur only after the operation and testing has been successfully completed. Ensure that equipment suppliers participate in the demonstration as required. Meet Section 15010 requirements for Maintenance Instruction to Owners.
C. D.
2.06 A.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COMMISSIONING TESTS ACMV System: A. Verify readings, calibration and set-up of sensors and equipment, including: 1. Temperature sensors 2. Air flow switches 3. Status switches 4. Pressure sensor, gauges and gauge connection utilization 5. Control damper (if any) positioning, including tightness when closed and full open/balance position 6. Alarm contacts 7. Water flow switches 8. Water flow balancing valves B. Verify correct sensors are reporting accurately to the distributed field panels and operator workstation. C. Operate each major equipment such as pumps, air handling units, air-cooled split unit, fan coil unit, fans, heat recovery wheel, cooling tower, etc. Verify and correct the following if required: 1. Start/stop from the control console and Building Automation System. 2. Correct open/close and modulation procedures with valves and dampers 3. Stable operation of controls under normal conditions and with changes in air/refrigerant/on/off conditions 4. Trend logs operation indication 5. Piping, sensor and unit installation
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 3. Section 15040 Commissioning Page 42 of 317
6. Filters for return air. 7. Drain pan operation and trap priming. 8. Variable speed drive frequency and pump speed. D. Verify duct cleaning, air balancing and air pattern adjustments. Supply air grille, diffuser air flow measurement. E. Verify access to each fire damper. F. Commission test of all ACMV equipment including pumps, AHU, FCU, terminal units, etc as per manufacturers recommendations. G. Measure and verify resultant noise level of every guest room, function/meeting rooms, office, corridor outside plantroom, apartment unit, carpark and lobby. H. Carry out smoke test to activate the engineered smoke control system and verify the system performance. I. Verify staircase pressurization system performance and air balancing to maintain the required pressure differential between stair well and vestibule. System operation tests including normal power supply scenario and simulating power failure scenario to demonstrate stability of control equipment with start-up power surge and controls system recovery. Fire Protection System: A. Verify readings, calibration and set-up of sensors and equipment, including: 1. Every fire alarm signals transmission, including manual call point, detector and flow switch. 2. Water flow meter. 3. Status switches 4. Pressure gauges and gauge connection utilization 5. Water tank level sensor. 6. Alarm contacts. 7. Water flow switches. B. Verify correct sensors are reporting accurately to the distributed field panels and operator workstation. C. Test run each major equipment such as fire pumps, jockey pumps, main fire alarm panel, fire alarm junction box, etc. Verify and correct the following if required: 1. Manual start/stop from the pump control panel and automatic start pump operation. 2. Correct open/close and modulation procedures with valves. 3. Stable operation of controls including pump cut-in and cut-out pressure setting, water proofing test for control valve set of the automatic sprinkler system. 4. Trend logs operation indication. 5. Piping, sensor and unit installation. D. Measure and verify water discharge pressure and flowrate of sprinkler pump, hosereel and hydrant. E. System operation tests including normal power supply scenario, simulating power failure scenario and total power failure scenario. To demonstrate stability of control equipment with start-up power surge and controls system recovery.
J.
F. Simulate activation of gas suppression system to verify signal transmission, activation system component, including valves, visual and audio alarm, overwrite comment and etc.
of
G. Commission test of all fire protection system equipment shall follow manufacturers recommendations. Plumbing, Gas and Fuel Supply, Sanitary and Drainage System: A. Verify readings, calibration and set-up of sensors and equipment, including: 1. Water flow meter 2. Status switches 3. Pressure gauges and gauge connection utilization 4. Liquid level sensor 5. Gas detector 6. Temperature sensor 7. Gas flow meter B. Verify correct sensors are reporting accurately to the distributed field panels and operator workstation. C. Test run each major equipment such as hot water boiler, calorifier, electrical storage water heater, transfer pumps, booster pumps, fuel pump, ejector and sump pumps, motor control panel, etc. Verify and correct the following if required: 1. Manual start/stop from the pump control panel and automatic start pump operation. 2. Correct open/close and modulation procedures with valves. 3. Stable operation of controls including pump cut-in and cut-out pressure setting. 4. Trend logs operation indication. 5. Piping, sensor and unit installation. D. Water storage tank and pipe network sterilization. E. System operation tests including normal power supply scenario and simulating power failure scenario to demonstrate stability of control equipment with start-up power surge and controls system recovery. F. Testing and commission of all system equipment shall follow manufacturers recommendations. 3.02 POST COMPLETION PERFORMANCE VISITS
A. Visit the site and the Owner's representative each month after project completion for a minimum period of two days until the end of the project warranty period. B. Review the operation of the system. C. Correct any operating problems, if problem is related to warranty issues. D. Prepare a report for inclusion in the Operating Manuals of the problems and issues that have arisen and the corrective action(s) recommended and implemented.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 A. B. WORK INCLUDED Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install the basic mechanical materials indicated on the Drawings, specified in Division 15 of this Specifications, and where required for the proper operation of the mechanical systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. 2.02 A. INSERTS Submit proposed materials and methods for cast-in-place inserts. Where inserts must be placed after concrete is poured, use Hilti or equivalent system. PIPE HANGERS Provide pipe hangers and supports for all piping. Provide hangers in accordance with the following requirements. Provide galvanized steel hangers and supports for all pipework systems. Provide proprietary manufactured hangers, accessories and supports similar to the Grinnell or Myatt system or equivalent. Select products to ensure adequate safety factors under anticipated loads. Provide supports for other piping types such as plastic, mechanically fused or packed joint pipe according to the pipe manufacturers published recommendations. Support piping continuously where required to prevent sagging. Provide sway brazing to meet local seismic requirements, if any. Provide protection saddles where insulated piping is supported from below. Provide roll type supports where shown on the drawings and where longitudinal movement may occur. Provide single pipe rolls where supported from below and where suspended. Provide spring cushions where slight vertical movement is likely and cushioning required. Provide engineered constant support hangers on piping subject to vertical movement exceeding 40 mm due to vertical pipe expansion. EQUIPMENT RIGGING SUPPORTS Provide eyebolts suitable for block and tackle connection, adequately supported by the structure above for: 1. Large Fans 2. Motors
Page 45 of 317
B.
C. D.
E. F.
G.
2.03 A.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 4. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
3. Pumps 4. Other equipment which will require block and tackle handling 2.04 A. SLEEVES, WALL AND FLOOR PLATES Use machine cut and reamed standard weight steel piping. Pipe sleeves 200 mm and larger shall have minimum 6 mm wall thickness. Concealed perimeter risers and runouts may have sleeves of 1.31 mm galvanized steel set around section of insulation to provide freedom of movement of piping. Extend 50 mm above finished floor level. For piping through exterior walls, cooperate with the waterproofing trade at all times, and do not break any waterproofing seal without consent of the waterproofing trade. Provide waterproof link seals. Provide leak plates where pipe sleeves pass through exterior building walls. Each leak plate shall be a 3.42 mm steel plate, welded to the sleeve, 100 mm diameter greater than sleeve outside diameter. Provide 1.31 mm galvanized steel duct sleeves. Provide adequate bracing for support of sleeves during concrete and masonry work. For fire rated floors and walls, build fire damper assemblies into structure to attain fire rated construction, in a manner acceptable to the governing authorities. Cover pipe sleeves in walls and ceilings of finished areas, other than Equipment Rooms, with satin finish stainless steel, or satin finish chrome or nickel plated brass escutcheons, with nonferrous set screws. Do not use stamped steel split plates. Split cast plates with screw locks, however, may be used. Cover exposed duct sleeves in finished areas with 1.31 mm galvanized steel plates in the form of duct collars. Fix in position with non-ferrous metal screws. PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE Where space limitations do not permit the use of expansion loops or offsets, provide proprietary made expansion Joints properly selected for system operating pressures according to the following: 1. For piping up to and including 65 mm, select ends to suit specified pipe fittings. For piping 75 mm and above, use flanged ends. 2. Steel Piping - expansion joint with stainless stell pressure carrier, flanged ends. 3. Copper Piping - expansion compensator with two ply bellow, all bronze construction. Submit for Supervision Consultants review prior to installation, drawings showing the location of expansion joints, anchors and guides. Submit calculations to verify selection. Show details of proposed connection to structure and loads to be imposed. Recognize that the concrete structure will shrink. Provide risers with sufficient flexibility. Consult with structural Supervision Consultant to determine the degree of flexibility.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.05 A.
B.
C.
Page 46 of 317
2.06 A.
STRAINERS Provide pipeline strainers with stainless steel screens according to the following: Pipe Schedule Copper Steel, cast iron, and other metal Pipe Size All sizes All sizes Type Y Y Material Bronze Cast Iron or cast steel to suit system working pressure
B. C. D.
Supply one extra set of strainer screens and install after systems have been thoroughly cleaned. Equip each strainer 40 mm and smaller in size, with plugged blow off tappings. Equip each strainer 50 mm and larger in size, with blow off tapping. Provide blow off piping complete with capped shut off valve. Terminate in downward vertical position. Size blow off piping and valve the same size as the blow off tapping. Ensure that each strainer can be isolated from piping systems with isolating valves on each side of strainer, and which are not more than 3 metres away from strainer. Provide strainers in the following locations: 1. at the suction/return side of each pump and chiller 2. immediately upstream of each pressure reducing valve 3. immediately upstream of each AHU/PAU control valve. 4. immediately upstream of each entering side of a plate and frame heat exchanger 5. immediately downstream of cooling tower 6. where shown on Drawings DRAINS Provide minimum 20 mm ball valve with hose end adapter, metal cap and chain at all low points of all systems. Locate to allow easy connection of hose. Provide 40 mm minimum size drains from ductwork connected to intake hoods and wall louvres. Equip drains with deep seal traps. Provide 20 mm valves with metal caps and chains at the base of all pipe risers. Install hose end ball valve in conjunction with 450 mm minimum length full line size dirt leg. PRESSURE GAUGE AND TEMPERATURE GAUGE CONNECTIONS Provide pressure gauge and temperature gauge connections in the following locations: 1. On both pipe connections of pumps, chillers, AHUs, Primary AHUs. 2. Where shown on drawings. Provide 6 mm brass needle valves at each gauge connection.
E.
F.
2.07 A.
B.
C.
2.08 A.
B.
Page 47 of 317
2.09 A.
PRESSURE GAUGES Gauges shall be 113 mm size with black finish cast aluminium case, phosphor bronze Bourdon tube, brass rotary type movement, bronze bushed, silver brazed tip and socket joints, adjustable type pointer and calibrated in kPa and psi. Install each gauge with brass impulse dampener. Select gauges to suit an overpressure of 25% without damage to movement. Normal operating pressure shall indicate approximately at mid point of dial. Provide compound type gauge and scale for suction connection to pumps connected to open systems or equipment. Provide gauges with an accuracy of 1% of full scale. Provide gauges in the following locations: 1. on both pipe connections of pumps, AHUs, Primary AHUs. 2. where shown on drawings. Supply two additional gauges for each type/range as spare part and handover to Owners use. ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Provide access to concealed mechanical equipment and components which require inspection, adjustment, repair and preventive maintenance. Install systems and components to result in a minimum number of access doors and panels. Install equipment and components in locations readily accessible through doors and panels. Coordinate requirements for all access doors and panels to suit Supervision Consultant finishes and large enough to provide adequate access to equipment and components. Check and coordinate Supervision Consultants provision of access doors and panels with a fire rating required by the code governing the fire rating of the structure. FLASHING Flashing will be carried out under each trade for roof curbs shown on their drawings. Provide flashing for pipe openings or pre-manufactured roof curbs. Carry out all counterflashing for roof mounted mechanical equipment and for pipes and ducts passing through roof. Fit counterflashing over flashing or curb. Pitch pockets are not acceptable. CURBS Coordinate with Division 3 or Division 5 to provide other curbs and reinforcing steel required for Division 15. Curbs are required for roof mounted equipment, around ducts passing through roof and surrounding holes where groups of pipes and/or ducts pass through Equipment Room floors, Kitchens and similar areas where water dams are required. Provide roof curbs at least 300 mm above finished roof, unless exceeded by Supervision Consultant considerations.
B. C.
D. E.
F. 2.10 A.
B.
C.
2.11 A. B. C.
2.12 A.
B.
C.
Page 48 of 317
D.
Provide concrete curbs around holes in Equipment Room floors, extending at least 150 mm above finished floor. Make watertight connection between curb and floor. Fill spaces between curbs and pipes and ducts with firestopping material. Caulk watertight with fire resistant waterproof compound.
E.
2.13 A.
CONCRETE Coordinate with Division 3 for provision of concrete housekeeping pads under all floor mounted mechanical equipment and supports. Extend pads over the full equipment base and isolator area. Concrete work, including housekeeping pads, required for Division 15 work and shown on the Structural or Supervision Consultant Drawings will be provided by Division 3. COVERS Supply frames for installation by Division 3. Provide covers for pits and sumps. Provide gas tight gaskets for sewage pits. Trench gratings will be provided by Division 5 - Metals. STEEL Provide steel required for Division 15 work including supports, framing of openings and lintels over openings that is not shown on Structural or Supervision Consultant Drawings. Provide steel of adequate strength to support equipment and materials during all operating and test conditions. Support suspended equipment from the bottom or from manufacturer's designated suspension points. Support tanks and similar equipment with adequate beam strength by saddles with curvature to match the equipment. Continuously support other equipment. Provide base supports for all pipe risers to distribute operating and static loads to meet Supervision Consultant requirements. Fabricate steel supports from materials having approved corrosion resistance or galvanised after fabrication. SUCTION DIFFUSER Suction diffuser shall be of cast iron construction with cast integral straightening vanes, and 15mm (1/2) NPT ball valve drain. A startup screen of 20mesh, grade 304 stainless steel shall be included over a primary strainer of grade 304 stainless steel, 4mm (5/32) diameter perforations. The cover shall be EPDM O-ring sealed and the diffuser body shall be equipped with a cast boss for a pipe support.
Page 49 of 317
B.
2.14 A. B. C. D. 2.15 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.16 A.
B.
C.
D.
Diffuser shall have fusion bonded epoxy protective coating, and pressure rating not less than 16 bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Conform to the requirements of Division 2 and section 15010. Read subsurface information data. Excavation and backfill required for Division 15 work shall be carried out by the Division 15 including the following: 1. Excavation: Initial excavation to 150 mm above pipe inverts 2. Final excavation to pipe inverts 3. Backfill Initial backfill with sand to 300 mm above top of pipes 4. Final backfill Ensure that excavation work is executed to attain required inverts and grades. Remove material excavated by Division 15 and not to be reused, from the site. Carefully prepare the bottom of pipe trench. Use one of the following bedding methods: 1. In firm undisturbed soil, lay pipe directly on the soil and shape soil to fit the lower 1/3 segment of pipe and fittings. 2. In rock, shale and where noted, excavate to 150 mm below and minimum 200 mm on each side of pipe. Form a 150 mm thick bedding using 10 mm crushed stone. Provide continuous support over at least the lower 1/3 segment of pipe. 3. In unstable soil, in fill and where soil has been disturbed during previous excavation work, excavate to at least 150 mm below bottom of pipe and form a reinforced concrete cradle supporting full length between firm support, or install piers down to undisturbed solid soil. Piers shall be at a maximum spacing of 2400 mm. Provide at least one pier for each pipe length. Support over at least the lower 1/3 segment of pipe. Where excavation is necessary close to and below the level of any footing, backfill with 14,000 kPa concrete to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Do not proceed with the work prior to receiving written approval from Supervision Consultant. Obtain approval from governing authorities and Supervision Consultant before backfilling. Provide backfilling materials as specified in Division 2. Division 2. PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Locate distribution systems, equipment and materials for maximum usable space, optimum service clearances and to accommodate current requirements and identified future expansion. Coordinate Division 15 services installation above typical floor modular ceilings to allow installation and future relocation of lights and air troffers without interfering with or requiring
Page 50 of 317
D. E. F.
G.
H. I.
Lay and compact as specified in
3.02 A.
B.
relocation of mechanical, electrical or other services, or removal of ceiling grid. C. D. Include all pipe and duct offsets required to eliminate interference with the work of other Divisions. Install equipment and materials to present a neat appearance. Run piping, ducts and conduit parallel to or perpendicular to building planes. Conceal piping, ducts and conduit in finished areas. Install so as to require a minimum amount of furring. Install pipe, duct and conduit straight, parallel and close to walls and slab or deck underside, with specified pitch. Use standard fittings for all direction changes. Do not use drilled tees and other field fabricated fittings. Install eccentric reducers in horizontal piping to permit drainage and eliminate air pockets. Where pipe sizes differ from connection sizes of equipment, provide reducing fittings between inline components such as valves, strainers and fittings, and equipment. Reducing bushings are not permitted. Cap open ends of piping during installation. Lay copper tubing so that it is not in contact with dissimilar metal and will not kink or collapse. Use non-corrosive lubricant or teflon tape equal to Dow Corning and apply on male thread. Provide brass adapters or dielectric couplings wherever dissimilar metals are joined. No pipe to be laid in water or when, in opinion of Supervision Consultant conditions are unsuitable. Ensure that pipe installation does not transmit vibration to the walls and floors through which they pass. Make provisions for neat insulation finish around equipment and materials. equipment within insulation depth. Do not mount
E.
F.
G. H.
I. J. K. L. M.
N.
O.
P.
Provide, in electrical rooms and elevator machine rooms, drip trays under the entire length of pipe within the confines of the room. Pipe drip tray to nearest floor drain. Perform welding to meet ANSI B31.9. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT Provide unions or flanges at all connections to equipment. Ensure that piping adjacent to equipment is readily removable for servicing and/or removal of equipment without shutting down entire system. Install unions in piping up to and including 50 mm pipe size. Install flanges in piping 65 mm pipe size and larger. Prevent galvanic corrosion by isolating copper and steel. Use red brass adapters, or completely isolate flanges using full face gaskets with bolts installed through phenolic sleeves with insulating fibre washers. Where the Code prohibits the use of red brass adapters, use insulating couplings.
Page 51 of 317
Q. 3.03 A.
B.
C.
Where system valves are required, solid brass isolating valves may be used in lieu of adapters or couplings. D. Provide metallic code rated continuity link between flanges or unions, where pipe mains carry flammable fluids or gases. INSERTS Size and space for the loads to be supported. Provide all required inserts for Division 15 system and equipment. Properly locate and firmly secure inserts to forms before concrete is poured. Place inserts only within main structure and not in any finishing materials. When inserts are required in precast concrete, supply inserts and location drawings to the precast concrete supplier for casting into material. Otherwise, include the cost of having the precast concrete supplier install inserts at the site. Do not use powder actuated tools. HANGERS Suspend piping, ductwork and equipment with all necessary hangers and supports required for a safe and neat installation. Ensure that pipes are free to expand and Sub-contract and are graded properly. Adjust each hanger to take its full share of the weight. Suspend hanger rods directly from the structure. Do not suspend pipes, ducts or equipment from other pipes, ducts, equipment, metal work or ceilings. Provide auxiliary structural steel angles, channels and beams where ductwork, piping and equipment must be suspended between joists or beams. Use galvanized rods, steel support angles, channels and beams. Space hangers to ensure that structural steel members are not over stressed. In no case shall pipe hangers be further apart than indicated in the tables. When requested, submit detailed drawings showing locations and magnitude of ductwork, piping and equipment loads on the structure. Provide calculations when requested by Supervision Consultant. Do not use trapeze type hangers for support of piping, without prior review by Supervision Consultant. Where permitted, fabricate from angle or channel frames, and space hangers to suit the smallest pipe size. Do not use hooks, chains or straps to support equipment and materials. For precast concrete work, if inserts cannot be cast into members, pass hanger rods between the members and weld to steel plates resting on the upper surface of the precast material. To prevent raising of the hanger rod, apply a lock nut and 50 mm minimum dia. flat washer tight against the under surface of the precast material. Ensure that copper materials are completely isolated from ferrous materials. Use plastic or epoxy coated hangers and clamps, or use lead inserts between copper piping and ferrous materials, and between copper piping and copper coated ferrous materials.
Page 52 of 317
3.04 A.
B. C. D.
E. 3.05 A.
B.
C.
D. E.
F.
G. H.
I.
J. K.
Provide round steel threaded rods meeting ASTM A-36. The following table establishes minimum standards of rod sizes and hanger spacing for steel and copper piping.
Maximum Horizontal Spacing of Supports Pipe Size mm 12 20 25 32 40 50 65 75 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 750 L. Rod Size Mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 16 16 20 22 22 22 25 25 29 32 32 40 Steel M 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.4 2.7 2.7 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 Copper m 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.0 3.3 3.7 3.7 3.7
In addition to these basic requirements, provide hangers in the following location: 1. to eliminate vibration 2. at points of vertical and horizontal change of direction of pipe 3. at inline centrifugal pumps 4. at valves and strainers 5. on mains at branch takeoffs 6. to avoid stress on equipment connections 7. as required for seismic restraint Install spring hangers or other special supports specified in Section 15240. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe at each hub. Where groups of fittings occur, not more than three joints shall be between hangers. Refer to applicable articles of the Specification regarding thermal insulation requirements. Generally, support ducts with 2.7 mm by 25 mm wide galvanized hangers or with 12 mm dia. rods and 40 mm rolled angle saddles to meet SMACNA or ASHRAE Standards. Support vertical duct risers at each floor with galvanized rolled angle collars bearing on building
Page 53 of 317
M. N. O. P. Q.
structure. 3.06 A. SLEEVES, WALL PLATES, FLOOR PLATES Set sleeves for piping and ductwork in conjunction with erection of floors and walls. Locate sleeves accurately in accordance with submittal drawings, and as follows: 1. Through interior walls, set sleeves flush with finished surfaces on both sides. 2. Through exterior walls above grade, set sleeves flush with finished surfaces on inside and to suit flashing on outside. 3. For floors in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Janitors Closets, Kitchens and similar areas where a water dam is required, set sleeves flush to underside of structure and extending 50 mm above finished floor. 4. For other floors, set sleeves flush to both finished surfaces. Refer to Supervision Consultants Room Finish Schedule. Size sleeves to provide 25 mm clearance around insulated piping and ductwork. Ensure that fire ratings of floors and walls are maintained. Provide continuous insulation runs through fire separations. Ensure that piping and ductwork do not touch sleeves. Pack clearance spaces with fire stopping materials. Install leak tight seals to meet the manufacturer's requirements. Select the inside diameter of each wall sleeve opening to fit the pipe and leak tight seal, all to ensure watertight joint. Additional sleeving requirements: 1. Provide sleeves for systems not part of Sub-contract, but identified to be required on Drawings. 2. Provide sleeves to accommodate compressed air piping and wiring conduits required for Division 15 work. 3. Provide additional sleeves as required by Drawings to accommodate service requirements. Include for the cost of drilling and setting sleeves. 4. Fill unused sleeves with lime plaster. PROVISION FOR FIRE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE
B. C. D.
E. F.
G.
3.07
A. Make provision for pipe expansion, contraction and building shrinkage with suitable anchors and offsets or expansion loops. B. Install piping to allow freedom of movement in all planes without imposing undue stress on any section of main piping, branch piping, equipment and structure. C. Use offsets at takeoffs to fans, fan coil units, pipe risers and other branch lines. D. Select expansion joints for the calculated movement according to the following temperature ranges. 1. For cold pipes, from minimum operating temperature to 45 deg C, plus 25% safety factor. 2. For warm and hot pipes, from minimum ambient, but not lower than -5 deg C, to maximum operating temperature plus 25% safety factor. E. When ambient temperature during installation is higher than operating temperature, use precompressed expansion joints. F. Select expansion joints to withstand system test pressure, as well as operating pressures and
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 4. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Page 54 of 317
temperatures. G. Install expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions. H. During the construction and warranty periods, regularly review provisions for building shrinkage and make necessary adjustments to piping to ensure freedom from binding and stress. 3.08 PIPE GUIDES AND ANCHORS
A. Install pipe guides for expansion joints according to expansion joint manufacturer's published recommendations. Use at least two guides on each side of expansion joint. B. Install manufactured or field fabricated alignment guides to allow movement in axial direction only. C. Install vertical risers properly anchored and guided to maintain accurate vertical position of piping. At time of startup, clean and lubricate guides, and adjust to allow free sliding at operating conditions. D. For piping up to and including 75 mm, guide pipes at every floor or every 3900 mm. Guide larger pipes at every second floor or every 7500 mm. E. Fabricate anchors from structural steel channels, plates or angles. F. Secure anchors to the structure. Avoid introduction of excessive reactive forces and operating weights into the structure and onto equipment and piping. G. Where guides are provided on cold piping, provide thermal break to prevent sweating. 3.09 PAINTING
A. Supply ferrous metal work except piping and galvanized and stainless steel ductwork, with at least one factory prime coat, or paint one prime coat on job. B. Clean and steel brush surfaces with welds. Then prime coat all steel supports and brackets. C. On uninsulated piping, steel brush and prime coat welds. D. Touch up or repaint all surfaces damaged during shipment or installation and leave ready for finish painting. E. Provide final coat of finish painting.
End of Section
Page 55 of 317
SECTION 15100 ACMV VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKS INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide and install all valves as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: B. Refer to Division 1 for procedure. C. Furnish shop drawings, product data and samples (when requested) for all valves. D. Submit all valve flow rate versus pressure drop (CV) data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL
A. Valves for similar service shall be supplied from one Manufacturer. B. All valves shall be products regularly produced for the specified service and rating in accordance with the manufacturers catalog and engineering data. C. For flanged valves, provide companion flanges of same pressure rating-class of valve being used. D. Provide valves rated at the specified working pressure unless indicated otherwise. E. Provide valve materials suitable for service and temperature of respective systems, especially with respect to discs, plugs, balls, linings, gaskets (non-asbestos containing), and lubricants of globes valves, plug cocks, ball valves, etc. F. Provide composition discs for bronze globes, angles or checks. Provide bronze discs for iron body brass mounted globes, angles, or checks except where otherwise specified or approved at recommendation of the manufacturer. G. Valves, except check valves, shall be capable of being packed under pressure when wide open by means of beveled back seat and bonnet. H. All gate and globe valves shall have four sided stem to hand-wheel connection with self-locking unit. I. J. Valves 150 mm and larger to be mounted seven 2 m above the floor or higher, in areas without ceiling, shall be provided with chain wheel operators. Wheel handles to be non-heating style cast from malleable iron ASTM A197.
Page 56 of 317
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 5. Section 15100 ACMV Valves
K. Mark each valve at the factory with the following minimum information, engraved, stamped or cast on each valve or metal tag permanently attached to the valve. 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Catalog or Figure number. 3. Size and pressure class. 4. Arrows shall indicate direction of flow on check, globe, angle, non-return and eccentric plug valves. 5. UL approved valves shall bear the UL label. L. All valves shall have known flow rate versus pressure drop characteristics gained for laboratory testing.
S/NO 1
VALVE TYPE Gate Valve
SIZE Up to 50mm
MATERIAL Bronze Material
Gate Valve
More than 50mm
Cast Iron
3 4 5 6
Globe Valve Globe Valve Ball Valve Butterfly Valves
Less than 50mm More than 50mm Up to 50mm 150mm
Bronze body Cast Iron Body Bronze Material Carbon Steel Body, Stainless disc and stem Bronze Body Cast Iron Body Bronze body
STANDARD Threading BS 21 BSEN 1288 Kilemark PN 20 / 1.5 times operating pressure PN 16 / 1.5 times operating pressure BSEN1171 PN 32, BS 515 4 Tape threaded PN 16 / BS4504 PN 32 BS5154 BSEN10266 BSEN593
7 8 9
Check Valve Check Valve Fixed orifice Double Regulating Valve FODRV
Up to 50mm More than 50mm Up to 50mm
BS 5154, Threaded type PN16 BSEN12334 and BS5153 Threaded to BS21 PN16 / PN25 BS1452 Body BS4504, PN16 PN25
10
More than 65mm
Cast Iron Body
All Valves: Certificate of Origin shall be provided for all valves. 15% accuracy inflow with required operating pressure To be kilemarked as quality assurance
2.02
GATE VALVES
A. All gate valves within the building shall be solid wedge type or split wedge type for 100 mm and larger. Gate valves shall be provided with painted iron wheel handles, with gland followers in stuffing boxes and shall be constructed so that they may be repacked while open and under pressure.
Page 57 of 317
B. All gate valves 50 mm and smaller shall be bronze body and wedge, with soldered brazed, or threaded ends as specified below and as required by the piping system in which they are installed. Valves shall be of the rising stem type and provided with a union bonnet. C. All gate valves larger than 50 mm shall be cast iron body with bronze or iron mounting and shall be provided with flanges ends as required by the piping system in which they are to be installed. Valves serving steam systems and all valves in mechanical rooms shall be of the outside screw and yoke type. Valves for other services and other locations can be of the no-rising stem type. All cast iron gate valves shall be provided with a bolted bonnet. D. Provide the following gate valve accessories: 1. Position indicators for non-rising stem valves on valve sizes larger than 50 mm. 2. Provide clean outs on valves used in condenser water systems. 3. For valves without full access provide extension stems to allow operation. 4. Provide floor stands/operators for all valves where indicated on the drawings. 5. Provide operating nuts and wrenches for all valves shown on the drawings as being lockshield valves. Provide similar operating nuts for all valves. 6. Provide gearing with protective cover on valve sizes 150 mm and greater. 2.03 A. BUTTERFLY VALVES Provide lug style butterfly valves shown in tables. Provide balancing stop on at least one valve per equipment connection and as necessary for balancing services. When manufacturer requires, valves must be installed in proper direction for shut-off and dead end service. Butterfly valves shall be High Performance valves manufactured of carbon steel body, threadedlug with reinforced Teflon seats, 316 stainless disc and stainless stem. If valves are used for fuel oil, provide reinforced Teflon seats and 316 stainless disks. Butterfly valves for bubble tight dead end shut-off shall be capable of remaining in service with downstream piping removed. Provide the following butterfly valve accessories. 1. Valves 150 mm or larger shall have gear operator with crank handle or handwheel. 2. Valves smaller than 150 mm shall have seven position lever. 3. Where valves are located 2 m above floor level in equipment rooms provide chain wheel operators and chains. 4. Provide a position indicator on all butterfly valves. 5. For valves without full access provide enclosed extension stems to allow operation. 6. Provide memory stops for valves used on balancing. 7. Provide a padlock flange. BALL VALVES Provide full port ball valves with reinforced (glass filled) Teflon seats, seals, bearings and packing. Provide balancing stop on at least one valve per equipment connection and as necessary for balancing service. Valves on insulated piping shall have 50 mm extended stems. All ball valves shall have locking handles to allow servicing and removal of equipment. Ball Valves for Clean Steam: For clean steam and clean steam condensate, provide 316 stainless steel ball valves for shut-off.
B.
C. D.
E.
2.04 A.
B.
Page 58 of 317
C.
Provide lever handle with plastic sleeve on all ball valves unless otherwise noted. Provide extension stem for all ball valves to be installed on insulated piping. Provide soldered or threaded ends on all valves in equipment rooms and risers. Provide memory stops on valves used for balancing. GLOBE VALVES All globe valves 50 mm and smaller shall be bronze body with soldered, brazed or threaded ends and as required by the piping system in which they are installed. Threaded ends shall be used on all valves in equipment rooms and risers. Provide with union bonnet. All globe valves 65 mm and larger shall be cast iron body with bronze mounting except where otherwise required by local Authorities having jurisdiction and shall be provided with flanged ends as required by the piping system in which they are to be installed. Provide bolted bonnet. Provide operating nuts and wrenches for all valves shown on the drawings as being lockshield valves. Do not provide pressure tappings in globe valves for throttling applications. ANGLE VALVES All angle valves 50 mm and smaller shall be bronze body, Teflon disc; integral seat; screwed ends. All angle valves 65 mm and larger shall be cast iron body, bronze disc and seat ring; flanged end. CHECK VALVES All check valves 50mm and smaller shall be bronze body and disc, regrinding, threaded ends or as indicated in the valve schedules and as required by the piping system in which they are installed. Provide threaded cap. All check valves 65mm and larger shall be cast iron body with bronze, brass and stainless steel trim and shall be flanged end as required by the piping system in which they are installed. Provide bolted cap and weighted lever for adjustment. All check valves shall be spring loaded, silent or non-slam type. SAFETY AND RELIEF VALVES All safety and relief valves to be constructed and rated in accordance with ASME, and so stamped. Use pressure relief valves for unheated liquids. Use safety relief valves for heated liquids, including water boilers, etc. Valves suitable and rated for proper temperatures; for "safety relief valves" minimum temperature rating is saturated steam temperature corresponding to pressure 10 percent higher than valve set pressure.
D. E. 2.05 A.
B.
C.
D. 2.06 A.
B. 2.07 A.
B.
C. 2.08 A.
B. C. D.
Page 59 of 317
E.
Valves shall have set pressure indicated on Drawings but not more than working pressure of protected equipment. Valves shall open, under test, at set pressure, with tolerance of plus or minus 3% of set pressure. Valves shall have capacity to relieve maximum possible generated energy while maintaining pressure in protected equipment at no more than 10 percent above vessel working pressure. Provide multiple valves if required for capacity even though only one valve may be shown on Drawings. STRAINERS Strainers shall be full size of entering pipe size. Pump start up strainer screens shall be used for cleaning and removed afterwards. 0.8mm perforation for size 15mm to 50mm. 1.4mm perforation stainless steel screen for above 65mm. Provide blow-off valve on each strainer. For clean steam and clean steam condensate, provide stainless steel. AUTOMATIC AIR VENT Automatic air vent cocks of adequate size shall be provided at all high points on water pipework risers or along pipeline where air lock is deemed possible. Where such points are inaccessible, air bottles shall be provided with the vent pipe turned over and carried down to a point 1,200mm above floor level, terminating in with a vent cock. Automatic air vents shall have gunmetal or brass body, non-ferrous or stainless steel floats and guides and non-corrodible valve seats. Each valve shall incorporate a lockshield and the discharge pipe shall be run to the nearest agreed drain point. BALANCING VALVE Balancing valves shall be of double regulating type (FODRV) and shall be installed as shown on the Drawings or as required for proper balancing of the water distribution system. For size up to 50mm, disc bonnet and body shall be of gunmetal construction. Seats rings shall be carbon filled TFE. Valve stem shall be stainless steel. Valves shall be screwed end connection to BS 21. For size above 50mm, bonnet and body shall be of cast iron construction of high quality to BS 1452 Grade 220 or cast steel construction of high quality to BS 1504-161 Grade 480 to suit the actual working pressure of the system. Cast iron disc with bronze trim and stainless steel stem. Valve shall have flanged end to BS 4504 PN16 or PN25 in accordance with the specified and expected working pressure. Valves shall have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and re-opened to original set position.
F. G.
H.
2.09 A. B.
C. D. 2.10 A.
B.
C.
D.
2.11 A.
B.
C.
D.
Page 60 of 317
E.
Precise double regulation with indicator. Pressure and water flow relationship at different pre-set graduation shall be read off from certified flow charts. Once set, the position of the regulation shall be tamper proof. Valves shall be complete with facilities for flow measurement, regulation and isolation. Flow measurement accuracy shall be within 5% across complete range of flow rates from 10% to 100%. 2 sets of flow measurement instruments shall be provided and handed-over to the Employer after completion of the testing and commissioning of the water distribution system. Valves shall be leak tight at full rated working pressure.
F. G.
H.
I.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Provide all equipment with shutoff valves. Provide all valve strainers, check valves, except control valves and unless specifically sized, of same size as the pipes in which they are installed unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixture stops. Install all globe and angle valves to close against the pressure. Position gate valves so that stems are in any suitable angle from horizontal to upright position. Install valves only in accessible locations. Do not install valves with stems pointing downwards unless specifically indicated. Wherever possible, install valves accessible from floor level. Provide guided chain operators and chain on valves over 2 m above floor in equipment areas. Provide operating handles for all valves and cocks without integral operators. Provide adequate clearance for easy operation. Support line valves at the valve in addition to regularly spaced pipe supports shown and specified. Wye-type Strainers: Ahead of all automatic valves, pumps, coils, pressure regulating valves and similar devices and as shown in systems that are not fully protected by automatic strainer systems. Basket-type strainers: where shown or required. Install strainers in horizontal position. Provide gate blow-down valves and hose adapters at strainers, air separators, tanks, pipe traps, equipment drains, etc. of same size as strainer blow-off connection. Install swing checks and gravity closing lift checks in horizontal position. Provide discharge pipe to atmosphere from all relief and safety valves, sized with area equal to sum of outlet areas of all valves connected thereto, unless indicated larger. Extend to over approved drain receptacle with air gap. Provide ball valves to isolate shock absorbers. Provide open-ended line valves with plugs or blind flanges.
Page 61 of 317
B. C.
D.
E.
F.
G. H.
I. J.
K. L.
M.
Provide valves at points shown and as required for complete isolation of equipment, risers, branches off mains, automatic valves and tanks arranged so as to give complete and regulation control of piping systems throughout the building. Install valves, with neat appearance and grouping, so that all parts are easily accessible for maintenance. Provide isolation valves reasonably required for proper maintenance and isolation even not shown on Drawings. TESTING Test valve bonnets for tightness. Test operate valves from closed-to-open-to-closed position while valve is under test pressure. Test automatic valves including solenoid valves, expansion valves, water regulating valves, pressure reducing valves, pressure relief valves, safety valves and temperature and pressure relief valves for proper operation at settings indicated. Insure that valves are field checked for packing and lubricant and that disc is for service intended. Replace leaking packing. Service valves which do not operate smoothly and properly with suitable lubricant before placing in operation. Test relief valves, safety relief valves, safety valves and temperature and pressure relief valves three times.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
D.
END OF SECTION
Page 62 of 317
SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORKS INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. All piping and ductwork concealed or exposed shall have identification markers. All equipment and system components shall have identification markers. Relocate mechanical identification material and devices that have become visually blocked by works of this Division or other Divisions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings as product data under provisions of General Conditions, Division 1 and Section 15010 as applicable. B. Submit samples of all nameplates, valve tags, pile markers, Color ID Bands with directional arrows, duct stencils and application sample, valve schedules, equipment schedules, etc. for review by the Supervision Consultant. C. Submit nomenclature system for all valves, equipment, etc. for review. D. Submit copy of all valve schedules, piping lists, and equipment list with Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 COMPLIANCE
A. Proper identification for system and equipment where required by codes, regulations, authoritys requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
A. Manufacturer's nameplate, catalog numbers, rating identification, name or trademark shall be permanently affixed with screws or rivets (adhesives or cements are not acceptable) to all equipment and material furnished under this specification. B. Identify model number, size, capacity, electrical characteristics, serial number, etc. C. Leave nameplates clean, legible and with unobstructed view. 2.02 APPARATUS IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment nameplates shall be 50 mm high, 1.5 mm thick, three layer black laminated plastic plates with 20 mm inch high white lettering engraved through the black layer. Edges shall be beveled.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 6. Section 15190 Mechanical Identification
Page 63 of 317
B. Equipment identification nameplate shall be securely attached to each piece of equipment. C. Secure nameplate to each starter, switch, relay, transformer, etc. that controls the equipment. D. Nameplates to bear notations corresponding to notations on operating instructions and as built Drawings. 2.03 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify with symbol identification and color-code all piping. Provide directional arrows on circulating systems separate from and adjacent to each identification. Identification in conformance with BS 1710 Basic Identification Colours and Colour Code Indication. B. Plastic Markers: Snap-on laminated plastic protected by clear acrylic coating, Setmark by Seton Name Plate Corp. or approved equal. Each marker must show accepted color-coded background, proper color of legend in relation to background color, accepted legend letter size, accepted marker length. C. 50 mm letter size for pipe or insulation 75 mm or larger. 25 mm letter size for pipe or insulation 65 mm or smaller. D. Name of contents and directional arrows shall be placed at points of entrance and exit from mechanical room, adjacent to each valve, on each riser, at each tee fitting, at points of entrance and exit from building, at least once in each room, and intervals no longer than 6 m on long pipe runs. E. Color Coding: The following color coding shall be used: Service Chilled Water Return Chilled Water Supply Condenser Water Return Condenser Water Supply Domestic Cold Water Make-up Water LPG Sanitary Sewer Sanitary Sewer Vent Rainwater Leaders Sprinkler Standpipe / Hosereel Cabinet Irrigation Steam Hot Water Supply Hot Water Return Diesel Fuel 2.04 A. DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION Duct markers shall be stenciled onto insulation of all ducts with legend and flow arrow. Letters shall be 50 mm high. Black lettering on white background.
Page 64 of 317
A. S. A. Color background Green Green Green Green Green Green Yellow Green Green Green Green Green Green Silver Grey Green Green Brown
Color Of Letter White White Crimson Crimson White White Primrose Black Black Black Red Red Salmon Pink Black White White White
Designation CHWR CHWS CWR CWS DCWS MWS LPG SP/WP VP RWP Sprinkler Standpipe / HR IWS Steam HWS HWR Diesel
2.05 A.
VALVE IDENTIFICATION Provide valve tags for all valves. Attach to handwheel or stem of each control and line shutoff valve installed under this Division, with heavy brass "S" hook, color-coded plastic laminate or brass identification tag. Engrave laminate tags shall be at least 25 mm in diameter with numerals at least 3 mm thick. Identify all fire service valves with above specified tags with "FIRE MAIN - DO NOT CLOSE" with white letters on red background. Tag all valves except fixture stops.
B.
C.
2.06
VALVE AND EQUIPMENT CHARTS
A. Provide typewritten schedules giving numbers, service and locations, and notations of normal position and future position of all tagged valves. List piping systems with symbol and color coding on pipe identification chart. List valve model numbers and symbol for service corresponding to piping symbol on valve identification chart. Provide small "key plan" identifying valves as related to column lines. Enclose each schedule, list and key plan in separate transparent plastic binder. B. Frame one copy of schedule under glass, mount where directed in each equipment room. C. Provide typewritten list of equipment, indicating location, service, area served, with equipment reference number corresponding to as-built drawings suitably framed, with glass front, mounted in each equipment room. 2.07 CONTROLS
A. Provide engraved plastic laminate identification plate showing function of switches and manually operable controls, including switches furnished under another Division. Provide point numbers on all control system components corresponding to programmed and second drawing point numbers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials of any materials that will prevent paint to marker adhesion.
3.02
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment Identification: 1. Properly identify each piece of equipment and controls pertaining thereto by nameplates mounted on equipment and controls using round head brass machine screws or pop rivets. Cardholders in any form not acceptable. B. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
Page 65 of 317
C. Place warning signs on machines driven by electric motors which are controlled by fully automatic starters. D. Identify air handling units, fans and pumps with area served. E. Small devices, such as inline pumps, may be identified with tags. F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify equipment out of view behind access doors, in unfinished rooms on the face of the access door. 3.03 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identification of all toilet exhaust, general exhaust and supply air, return air, outside air and exhaust air ducts by means of stenciled lettering identifying contents and direction of flow. B. Locations: Ductwork shall be stenciled in ducts coming out of shaft at each floor, at each junction or branch take-off, at least once in each room where ducts are concealed, at each access panel, in equipment rooms and at intervals not longer than 6 m. Stencil shall clearly identify duct service (SA for supply, RA for return, TEA for Toilet exhaust, KEA for kitchen exhaust, GEA for general exhaust air), area served by branch, and arrow indicating direction of flow. C. Application: Apply to clean surfaces free of dust, grease, oil or any other material which will prevent paint adhesion. 3.04 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Apply markings after all cleaning and painting of piping and insulation is completed. B. Location for Pipe Identification: 1. Within 300 mm of each valve, fitting, thermometer or gauge (except on plumbing fixture). 2. At each branch and riser takeoff. 3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction. 4. On all horizontal runs spaced 6 m maximum but not less than once in each room at entrance and exit of each concealed space. 5. Where capped piping is provided for future connections, provide legible and durable metal tags indicating symbol identification. 6. At wall and ceiling access panels. 7. In addition to foregoing identification for piping, identify fire protection piping with 25 mm wide red painted band, completely encircling pipe adjacent to symbol identifications. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 mm to 200 mm inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. F. In finished areas, label exposed pipes or ducts only adjacent to walls.
Page 66 of 317
3.05
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Valve Identification tags shall have the following abbreviations plus valve number. Service Chilled Water Return Chilled Water Supply Condenser Water Return Condenser Water Supply Condensate drain Abbreviation CHWR CHWS CWR CWS ADCD Service Fuel Oil Supply Fuel Oil Return Fuel Oil Vent Boiler Feed Standpipe Abbreviation FOS FOR FOV BF Standpipe
Identification shall be black lettering on white background or in a manner approved by the Supervision Consultant. 3.06 CONCEALED IDENTIFICATION
A. Where acceptable by the Supervision Consultant, provide color-coded ceiling tacks to locate coils, fire dampers, valves, control devices, etc. or other approved label on each T-bar suspended ceiling push-out tile. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
Page 67 of 317
SECTION 15200 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. WORK INCLUDED Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install the sound and vibration control devices indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specification and in the Particular Specification. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide vibration isolation and duct attenuators from a single sound and vibration control manufacturer, whose responsibilities shall include, but not be limited to: 1. supply of all vibration and sound isolation equipment necessary to meet the performance requirements 2. coordination throughout the project with all provided equipment to ensure adherence to performance criteria 3. determination of equipment, pipe and duct mounting arrangements 4. field supervision and inspection to assure proper installation and performance 5. allowance for expansion and contraction when selecting and applying isolation materials 6. coordination of any silencer provisions with sound power levels of fans specified elsewhere in this Specification Ensure the provision of adequate vibration and sound control equipment for all Chillers, cooling towers, AHUs, fans, pumps, ducts, pipes, Fan Coil Units, VAV Units, Emergency Generators and other mechanical equipment. Ensure that no ducts and pipe installation transmits vibration to the walls and floors through which they pass. Provide equipment, pipe and duct mountings non-resonant with equipment operating and building structure natural frequencies. All vibration isolation equipment shall be meet the seismic requirements in Abu Dhabi. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS Submit Shop Drawings of sound and vibration control components including all calculations. Submit Shop Drawings showing adequate concrete reinforcing steel details and templates for all concrete foundations and supports, all bases including necessary concrete and steel work and vibration isolation devices, and all required hanger bolts and other appurtenances necessary for proper installation of the equipment.
1.02 A.
B.
C.
D.
E. 1.03 A. B.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 7. Section 15200- Noise, Vibration and Seismic Control
Page 68 of 317
PART 2 PRODUCTS (VIBRATION CONTROL) 2.01 A. B. GENERAL Furnish and install all vibration and noise control devices, materials and related items. Co-ordinate with other trades to avoid through their related activities any rigid contact with the building that will degrade the noise and vibration with 'following-work', such as plastering or electrical, to avoid any contact which would adversely affect the vibration isolation. Provide vibration isolators of the appropriate size and capacity to meet the specified deflection and noise control requirements and shall follow the instructions from the manufacturer or vendor of these products.
C.
D.
Vibration isolators shall be produced by a reputable, established manufacturer. approved manufacturer shall supply all vibration isolators.
A single,
E.
The resonant frequency of the isolation system shall be lower than any operating speed and in no circumstances shall coincide with the natural frequency of any component of the equipment. Vibration systems shall be selected to suit the environment in which the equipment is to be located. For example, weatherproof, non-rusting, etc. All vibration isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or calibration markings so that, after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection load can be verified. All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer, and must be linear over a deflection range of not less than 50% above the rated deflection. Overloading of any isolators during installation or servicing shall require isolators to be fitted with overloading restraints. Overloading of equipment due to service connections shall not occur. SPRING ISOLATORS Spring type vibration isolators shall preferably be constructed from suitably treated and finished steel or steel alloys. They shall be equipped with 2 layers of neoprene 'acoustic pads' to prevent transmission of high frequencies. Spring type vibration isolators shall be free-standing and laterally stable, without any housing. All mounts shall have leveling bolts. The spring diameter shall not be less than eight-tenths of the compressed height of the spring at rated load and springs shall be capable of 'additional travel to solid' for another 50 percent, as a minimum before becoming fully compressed. Springs shall be selected so that the ratio of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness ranges between 0.9 and 1.1. Restrained spring isolators shall have vertical travel limit stops to control extension of the spring when the weight is removed or to provide wind resistance in outdoor locations and to prevent excessive movement as the machine speed passes through the resonant frequency of the mounting system.
Page 69 of 317
F.
G.
H.
I.
J. 2.02 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Where restrained spring isolators are to be used, minimum clearance of 13mm shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stop shall be out of contact during normal operations. Mountings used out of doors shall be painted, hot dipped galvanised or neoprene coated. Spring isolators shall be selected to support the required loads with the specified minimum deflection but not being compressed solid or exceeding the maximum rated capacity of the spring. Weight distribution of equipment, pipes, dynamic load due to fluid flow shall be considered in the spring selection. NEOPRENE IN-SHEAR ISOLATORS The active element of the isolator shall be bonded to mild steel or steel alloy plates, sleeves, pressings or forging. Both element and bonding agent shall be resistant to lubricating oil and water suited to the operating temperature. The location of the fixing bolts shall not be in such a way that creates unnecessary stress in the elements. The dynamic deflection and damping coefficients of the active material, at the operating speed of the supported equipment, shall be used in calculation of isolation efficiencies. Alternatively, certified isolation efficiency charts may be used. Mountings whose stiffness varies with direction of deflection shall be mounted with orientation marks for use during maintenance and installation. VIBRATION ISOLATION PADS Waffle-pattern or ribbed neoprene pads shall be made of 40 to 50 durometer neoprene. Where required these shall be adhesively cemented to 1.6mm steel plates of similar area so as to form a sandwich. Pads may be bolted through (where necessary) with bolts isolated from the machine by neoprene grommets. Alternatively 'waffled' neoprene pads can be used without holding down bolts where the vibration is minimal and the weight of machine is such that the resultant friction is adequate and the machine unlikely ever to move. The area of pad to be used and number of layers shall be determined for each application in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where multiple-layer pads are selected to increase the static deflection the layers are to be separated by steel shims as recommended by manufacturers. DOUBLE DEFLECTION PADS Double deflection pads shall be of 40 to 50 durometer neoprene and sized so that deflections do not exceed 15 percent of the pad's thickness. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom. Bolting down holes shall be provided for applications where bolting down is required.
F.
G.
2.03 A.
B.
C.
D.
2.04 A.
B.
C.
2.05 A.
B.
C.
Page 70 of 317
2.06 A.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Piping connected to vibration-isolated equipment shall be installed so that it does not strain or force vibration isolators supporting the basic equipment out of alignment. Pipes shall not restrict such equipment from floating freely on its vibration-isolation system. Springs in series with neoprene pad hangers shall contain a steel spring that is set in a neoprene cup manufactured with a projecting brushing that passes through the hole in the hanger box or is otherwise isolated from the hanger housing to prevent short-circuiting of the hanger rod against the hanger box. The neoprene cup should have a steel washer manufactured to distribute the load properly on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring diameters and the lower holes of the hanger boxes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 C arc before touching the edge of the hole. Springs should have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection and diameters equal to no less than eight-tenths of the compressed height of the spring. Minimum deflection shall be 25mm. All pipe supports shall incorporate a neoprene or felt gasket. PIPEWORK GENERAL All supports or hangers horizontally or vertically installed shall incorporate felt or neoprene gaskets of minimum thickness 6mm. When a pipe passes through the plant room wall, a minimum 25mm clearance shall be provided between the pipe and the penetration in the wall. The pipe shall be supported on either side of the hole, so that the pipe does not rest on the wall. The clearance space shall be stuffed with fibrous fill or material and sealed both sides with non-setting or non-hardening fire stop material. All piping within plant rooms or other specified areas shall be resiliently supported from the building structure with spring in series with neoprene hanger. Pipework connections to pumps shall include minimum 300mm straight flanged sections for insertion of flexible connections at a future date if necessary. DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORT All ducts between the AHUs, fans and other equipment and the duct flexible connectors shall have resilient mounts having same static deflection as the AHU or fan. Hangers used for vibration control shall consist of spring in series with neoprene. Isolators shall be protected from overloading by external containment or metal to metal restraints. No permanent deformation to the spring shall result under 150 percent of the rated maximum loading. The hanger cage shall be capable of carrying five times the maximum rated normal service load without permanent distortion. The drop rod arrangements shall allow 30 movement without metal to metal contact.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. 2.07 A.
B.
C.
D.
2.08 A.
B. C.
D.
Page 71 of 317
2.09 A.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS / EXPANSION JOINTS Flexible neoprene connection with control rod shall be used on chilled water pump, condenser water pumps, water transfer pumps, fire protection pump, all equipment where excessive vibration is expected and as indicated on the Drawings or the equipment schedule. They shall be manufactured of multiple ply of nylon type cord fabric and neoprene both bonded and cured in hydraulic rubber presses. Where flexible pipe connections are required, they shall have a length that is approximately 6 to 10 times the diameter. Twin sphere connectors shall be used. The axis of the connectors shall be perpendicular to the direction of vibration. Alternatively, where the Supervision Consultant allows, the connectors may be formed into 90 bends. Where expansion joints are required to achieve vibration isolation, the tie rod system fixings shall be constructed in such a way to prevent metal to metal contact throughout the normal range of movement of the joint. Where service pipes are joined to equipment incorporating flexible connections the first 3 service supports after the flexible connection shall have vibration isolation mounting with minimum 25mm static deflection or one-half the static deflection of the mounting system used for the equipment whichever is greater. INERTIA BASES Concrete inertia blocks shall be formed of stone-aggregate concrete (2400kg/m3) cast within a reinforced steel frame made by bolting or welding formed or structural channels or beams. Inertia block shall be reinforced with 12mm diameter steel bars at 150mm centres. Inertia blocks shall have a minimum depth equal to one tenth of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 150mm deep. Minimum 50mm clearance between bottom of inertia block and supporting slab shall be allowed. The weight of the inertia base is to be determined by the inertia base/equipment mass ratio as recommended below : Fans : Pumps electric : min. 2 x unit weight min. 2 x unit weight
B.
C.
D.
2.10 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Electrical connections to the equipment motors shall be made with long floppy length of flexible cables and piping resiliently supported. EQUIPMENT MOUNTING Submit catalogues of proposed equipment complete with manufacturer's specification to the Supervision Consultant for review. Mechanical equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights (such as pumps) and equipment subject to wind loads (such as roof top equipment e.g. cooling towers, chillers) shall be mounted on spring isolators with travel limit stops. The installed and operating heights of the vibration-isolation equipment shall be identical. Maintain a minimum clearance of 10mm around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring to prevent interference with the spring action. Keep travel limiting stops out of contact with isolator top plate and bolts during normal operation.
2.11 A.
B.
C.
Page 72 of 317
D.
Unless otherwise specified, all floor-mounted equipment shall be set on concrete plinth. 1. All fans and motors shall be isolated with spring isolators complete with double-layer neoprene pads separated with 1.6mm steel shims. 2. Each AHU shall rest on spring isolators of minimum 25mm static deflection with two layers of 8mm thick neoprene waffle pads. There shall be no significant casing radiation due to such installation. All pipes connected to AHUs shall have flexible pipe connectors. 3. Vibration isolation equipment shall also comply with chiller manufacturers recommendations. All pipework between chillers and associated equipment shall be resiliently supported. All water pipes shall be isolated with 13mm thick felt or resilient pads under the pipe strap or clamp. Piping to chiller shall include flexible connectors. Fan coil units shall be suspended with two layers of 8mm thick neoprene hanger. All pipes connected to fan coil units shall be isolated with rubber isolation sleeves. Pumps shall be mounted upon raised concrete plinth (150mm) and incorporating an inertia block 2 times the total weight of pump and motor. System resonant frequency shall be lower than the pump blade passage frequency or motor rpm whichever is lower. In-housed type spring (minimum 50 mm static deflection) in series with 2 layers of 8mm thick neoprene pads shall be used to support the pump and inertia block. Cooling towers shall be supported by restrained type spring in series with 2 layers of neoprene isolator with minimum 65mm static deflection. All springs and supports shall be hot dipped galvanised. OTHER ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT AND NON-VIBRATION EQUIPMENT All other mechanically and electrically associated equipment that is capable of causing undue vibration and noise shall be vibration isolated with 25mm static deflection spring and neoprene 2 layers of isolators. To short-circuit noise and vibration transmitting paths, all non-vibrating equipment shall be isolated with neoprene friction pad. It is the responsibility of the Sub-contractor to include the cost of such work in his Sub-contract price.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.12 A.
B.
C.
PART 3 PRODUCT (ACOUSTIC REQUIREMENTS) 3.01 A. GENERAL The total noise level arising from all simultaneously operating mechanical and electrical plant as well as regenerated aerodynamic noise, whether it be ductborne, structurally transmitted, or airborne, shall be limited to specified limits. Acoustic treatment shall be applied to all ductwork and equipment by all means such that the noise level is maintained at all times. The noise level shall be measured at 1.5m above the floor level, except next to the AHU room or other plant rooms where the measuring points shall be 1.5m from the room walls. Provide acoustic products of the appropriate size and capacity to meet the dynamic insertion loss and self noise requirements and is required to follow the instructions from the manufacturers or vendors of these products.
Page 73 of 317
B.
C.
D.
E.
Acoustic products shall be produced by a reputable, established manufacturer. A single, approved manufacturer shall supply all sound attenuators. All self-noise and dynamic insertion loss data shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of ASTM E477-80 to the latest revision. Unless otherwise specified, perforated galvanised steel sheet shall have 2.4mm diameter holes at 4.8mm staggered centres. Carry out noise level test in the factory or approved testing laboratory for AHU, FCU, fan, VAV terminal according to ASHRAE Standard 36 or BS 4856 Part 4.
F.
G.
H.
3.02 A.
SOUND ATTENUATORS Sound attenuators shall consist of an outer casing of 18 gauge thick galvanized sheet steel, sound absorbing materials and internal baffles, splitters and supports. Casings shall be tested to 2 kPa and shall show no more than 2% leakage or distortion in this condition. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. End flanges shall be made from galvanized mild steel or rolled steel angle, as determined by the Supervision Consultant. Attenuators shall be fitted to ductwork using neoprene gaskets between bolted flanges. The geometry of selected attenuators shall not result in requirements for sharp transformation in adjacent ductwork, shall not interfere with adjacent services or with the aerodynamic performance of the system or encourage regeneration of noise local to the attenuator, all to the satisfaction of the Supervision Consultant. The size of the attenuators shall not be less than the cross sectional area of the duct. Sound absorbing materials shall be fiberglass or mineral wool held in place with at least 5% compression to prevent voids due to settling. Absorbing material density shall be minimum 48 kg/m3 faced with minimum 0.5mm (26g) perforated galvanized steel sheets. Acoustic infill and sound absorbent materials shall be tested to withstand air velocities of 20m/sec without evidence of material breakdown, migration or dusting. Where noise attenuators are located at a position not immediately adjacent to the noise source, ductwork between equipment and attenuator must be constructed from sheet metal of minimum thickness 1.2mm and internally lined with 50mm thick 48 kg/m3 acoustic lining. Where sound attenuators are to be located close to a turning elbow, the minimum separated distance shall be 3D, where D is the duct diameter or equivalent diameter. Air velocity through sound attenuators shall be no more than 7.5 m/s and have a pressure drop not exceeding 75 pa. All acoustic infill and materials shall have Class 1 Surface Spread of Flame and Class O rating testing to BS 746. ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
B. C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.03
A. All acoustic lining shall comply with the National Fire Protection Association Standard NFP 90A UL 181 Class 1 Requirements.
Page 74 of 317
B. All acoustic lining shall have a thermal conductivity rating of not more than 0.036 W/m K at a mean temperature of 24oC and shall be of the semi rigid batt type manufactured from mineral wool or fibre glass, having a density of not less than 48kg/m3. C. Insulation shall comprises 25mm or 50mm thick semi rigid butts faced with perforated foil laminate sheet similar to Sisalation 450 or approved equivalent or 0.6mm thick perforated zinc anneal sheet as itemized below having a free area of approximately 10%. Alternatively for velocities less than 10 metres per second, perforated foil may be deleted and replaced with neoprene coating and perforated aluminium foil. Insulation shall be adhered to the ducts with an approved type adhesive and fastened with welded pins and speed clips located at not more than 400mm centers. D. All joins between insulation butts shall have the surface layer lapped and adhered together or pop riveted as appropriate in the direction of the air flow. E. All end pieces shall be complete with sheet metal nosing and all corners shall be firm with angles formed from galvanized sheet steel. F. Acoustic lining shall have sound absorption coefficients of not less than following: Frequency (hertz) Thickness (mm) 25 (foil laminate) 50 (foil laminate) 25 (performated zincanneal) 50 (performated zincanneal) 125 .01 .22 .10 .18 250 .19 .52 .14 .38 5000 .43 .73 .37 .73 1000 .71 .94 .75 .90 2000 .73 .94 .92 .88
G. Acoustic lining in masonry ducts shall be as for sheet metal ducts as previously specified except that pressed 1mm thick galvanized steel Z sections shall be located at approximately 1000mm centers to support the full weight of the butts in a horizontal direction. H. The galvanized steel Z sections shall be firmly attached to the masonry wall with expanding type masonry anchors or at not more than 450mm centers. I. Pins and speed clips shall be used as for ductwork except that approved cement type fixings shall be used for direct and firm attachment of pins to the masonry wall in lieu of welded type. The duct dimension shall be increased accordingly to maintain the clear air way dimension as per drawing after the inclusion of the internal acoustic lining. ACOUSTIC PANELS Acoustic panels shall be 100mm thick and constructed of 0.8mm perforated and 1.2mm solid galvanised steel sheet for the interior and exterior facings. Acoustic infill shall be 48 kg/m3 fibreglass or mineral wool. Internal panel reinforcement shall be a minimum of 1.2mm galvanised steel and spaced so that span does not exceed 600mm. Perimeter and internal reinforcement and panel steel shall be welded and riveted to form a rugged metal-sheathed acoustical panel. Spot welds shall not exceed 75mm on centres.
J.
3.04 A.
B. C.
Page 75 of 317
D.
The sound transmission loss (STL) and sound absorption coefficients of the panel when tested in accordance with ASTM E90-61T and ASTM C423-65T respectively shall be as follows: Octave Band Centre Freq. (Hz) 63 20 125 21 0.89 250 17 1.20 500 38 1.16 1K 48 1.09 2K 58 1.01 4K 58 1.03 8K 58 -
STL (dB) Absorption 3.05 A.
ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE Acoustic enclosure shall be provided to equipment as indicated on the Drawings or required to meet the specified noise criteria. Acoustic enclosure shall be constructed of 2 layers of 13mm plaster board/cement board and 50mm thick 48kg/m3 fibreglass insulation. Access door shall be of solid construction of the same acoustic insulation proportion as the enclosure. Ducts specified with external lagging (where shown on drawings) shall be encased with minimum 25mm thick 48kg/m3 fibreglass and two layers of 13mm plaster board/cement board. NOISE BREAK-IN/BREAK-OUT Where ductwork, piping and services pass through walls, floors or ceilings the penetration shall be acoustically sealed in the following manner. A 12-20mm clearance all around the duct shall be filled with acoustic infill either rockwool or fibreglass of high density. Acoustic infill to be tightly compressed and mastic caulking applied to provide airtight seal over all exposed infill. Ensure that all pipes and duct penetrations are well sealed acoustically and that there is no noise leakage through the penetrations and no vibration or vibration-induced noise due to the mechanical installation is noticeable in any part of the building.
B.
C.
D.
3.06 A.
B.
C.
PART 4 EXECUTION 4.01 A. FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT Erect floor mounted equipment on 150 mm high concrete pads over complete floor area of equipment. Mount vibration eliminating devices and concrete inertia blocks on housekeeping pads. VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS Have vibration isolator manufacturer determine mounting sizes. manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with
4.02 A.
B.
Installed vibration isolation system for each floor or ceiling supported equipment shall have a maximum lateral motion under equipment start-up or shut down conditions of 6 mm. Restrain excess motions by approved mountings.
Page 76 of 317
4.03 A.
MOUNTING SYSTEMS EXPOSED Protect mounting systems exposed to weather and other corrosive environments with factory corrosion resistant coatings. Hot dip galvanized metal parts of mountings (except springs and hardware). Cadmium plate and neoprene coat springs. Cadmium plate nuts and bolts. PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS MOUNTING Mount packaged air handling units which are not internally isolated directly on stable bare steel spring isolators. Where units to be mounted are furnished with internal structural frames and external lugs (both of suitable strength and rigidity), or without any severe overhangs, no additional structural frame provided beneath unit. Integrally mount motor on slide rails. PIPE SUPPORT Support piping as follows: 1. Resiliently support all suspended piping connected to isolated equipment. 2. Provide resilient diagonal mountings or other approved devices to limit piping motion due to equipment start-up or shutdown, to a maximum deflection of 3 mm. EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION Allow for expansion and contraction when selecting and applying isolation materials. NOISE LEVELS Isolate equipment to attain the noise criteria (NC) levels as specified in the Particular Specification. After systems have been balanced, take sound measurements throughout the complete range of audible frequencies from 63 Hz through 8000 Hz, in each occupied area above, below and beside each Mechanical Equipment Room and where directed. Plot readings on noise criteria NC curves. Modify, as required and at no additional cost to the Sub-contract, the fan distribution and other mechanical systems to achieve the specified noise criteria. Submit a report, including sound curves, to substantiate that equipment has been isolated adequately, and that acceptable noise levels have been attained. Provide a list to indicate equipment in operation at time of readings taken. Make sound measurements in accordance with the American Standard Method for the Physical Measurement of Sound, ANSI S1.2. Sound measuring equipment shall be Type 2 Class I in accordance with ANSI Standards S1.4 or S1.11.
4.04 A.
4.05 A.
4.06 A. 4.07 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
END OF SECTION
Page 77 of 317
SECTION 15250 INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. B. WORK INCLUDED Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install thermal insulation, vapour barriers and finishes for mechanical work as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specifications. SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples and specification sheets of all types of insulation materials specified in this Section of the Specifications.
1.02
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. B. All insulation pertaining to Division 15 shall be carried out by one firm specialising in insulation work. Provide insulation and covers in strict accordance with authorities governing combustibility and fireproofing of materials and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Provide non-combustible insulation, jackets and finishes having a Flame Spread/Smoke Developed rating meeting authority requirements. Attain a complete and continuous vapour barrier over insulation applied to cold and dual temperature piping, sheet metal and equipment. Use field applied Reinforced Foil Flame Resistant Kraft vapour barrier jacket. Apply to piping, fittings, valves and inline components, sheet metal and fittings and equipment. Seal longitudinal and circumferential laps. If vapour barrier jacket is not lapped, seal joints with self-adhering 100mm wide plain aluminium foil tape, or adhere 100mm wide aluminium foil tape with adhesive. Jacketing with self-adhesive laps and self-adhesive vapour barrier tape will be an acceptable alternative closure system. Cover all exposed insulation and insulation finishes with glass cloth with anti-fungal coating. An acceptable alternative recovering will be PVC fitting covers and jacketing, installed as per manufacturers instructions, and conforming to the specified Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating meeting authoritys requirements. Cover insulation and insulation finishes outside the building or exposed to the weather with water proof & anti-fungal type vapour barrier coating (2 coats) and cover with Aluminium cladding 0.8mm thick-pipes fittings, valve, etc. with aluminium fasterners, clips, bands.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G. Contractor to quote fibreglass insulation with factory applied vapour barrier, Aluglass facing, that
has Zero water vapor permeance value subject to a cost saving

2.02 A. PIPE INSULATION All chilled water pipe shall be pre-insulated.
B. This insulation shall be factory insulated, and shall be of the pipe-in-pipe without air gap type. Manufacture shall be only by personnel specialising in the production of pre-insulated piping
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 8. Section 15250 - Insulation Page 78 of 317
systems, and the system shall be reviewed by the Supervision Consultant prior to installation. C. The casing of galvanised iron of the spiral formed locked seam type shall be provided for all preinsulated pipes. Alternatively, HDPE casing can be considered D. The insulation shall be rigid polyurethane foam, specially formulated to ensure a satisfactory performance in both manufacture and operation, and shall be of thicknesses as detailed in the manufacturers relevant literature, or as recommended by the manufacturer. In no case shall the insulation thickness be less than 40mm for pipe up to 80mm in diameter, and 50mm for pipe exceeding 80mm or exposed pipe. The insulation shall be fire retardant to BS 476 Part 6 and acceptable to Civil Defence. E. The foam shall be able to withstand the maximum design temperature of 1300C, have a closed cell content by volume of not less than 90%, and a nominal thermal conductivity of 0.023 W/m K at 20 C or better. These criteria shall be substantiated with independent test certificates that shall be included with the tenders on request. F. Manufacturer shall have proven track records, and the foam shall be injected into the annulus between service pipe and casing by one shot factory process in such a way to ensure an uniform, average, minimum in-place density of 60 kg/m3. Products in which the insulation is introduced into the free ends of the pipe/casing assemblies, and allowed to "free foam" will not be acceptable. G. Eccentricity of the service pipe shall not be greater than 15% of specified insulation thickness. H. Supports shall be sized to ensure adequate support to the casing, without crushing the insulation and shall be generally to the manufacturers recommendations or as specified elsewhere. I. The finish shall be as for pipework exposed to view, as detailed elsewhere in this Specification to approval. The Installer shall be responsible for ensuring that he obtains complete installation recommendations from the preinsulated pipe manufacturer, and that these are followed throughout the installation.
J.
K. Condensate drain pipe shall be insulated with 25mm thick fire-retardant type Armaflex insulation or approved equivalent. L. Valves, strainers, fittings, etc shall be insulated with site injected polyurethane with same thickness as pipe insulation. All insulated valves, strainers, flanges, fittings, etc. shall be provided with 0.6mm thick galvanized split boxes arranged for easy removal. The box is to enclose the valve handle and to have a lid for valve access. A glass cloth insertion shall be provided to allow the insulated boxes to be removed without damage done to the insulation. The insulatin on the pipe immediately adjacent to flanges shall be neatly swaged off to allow for easy removal of bolts. M. At the point of support, specially prepared blocks of high density polyurethane foam material shall be positioned to ensure the integrity of the vapour barrier by bonding the supports to the insulation. N. Flexible connector shall be insulated with 50mm thick fibre glass with double sided aluminium foil vapour barrier. 2.03 SHEET METAL INSULATION
A. Prior to finishing of insulation of hot and cold exposed rectangular ductwork, provide corner beads
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 8. Section 15250 - Insulation Page 79 of 317
similar to Roll-on Type. B. Apply glass cloth and anti-fungal type vapour barrier over insulation on cold and dual temperature ducts. C. Circular silencers and acoustic plenums with at least 50 mm acoustic internal insulation need not be externally insulated. D. Air-conditioning system ductwork lined with acoustic insulation shall also be insulated externally. E. Provide one of the following insulation types for external sheet metal, and as scheduled in the External Sheet Metal Insulation Table: 1. Type D1: ACI Duct Board Insulation with Thermal Conductivity of 0.033 w/mk, Owens Corning Rigid Vapour Seal Duct Insulation, Schuller 814 Spin-gGlas with FSK Facing, Manson Spin-Glas Rigid Insulating Board with reinforced foil facing, or Knauf Rigid Insulation Board with FSK facing. Density shall be not less than 48kg/cubicmetre. Impale on mechanically fastened pins located at not greater than 300mm centres. Secure with speed washers. But joints tightly together and seal washers, breaks and joints with self-adhering 100mm wide plain aluminium tape, or adhere foil with Childers CP82 or Bakelite 230-39 adhesive. 2. Type D2: ACI Duct Wrap Insulation with thermal conductivity of 0.037 w/mk, Owens Corning Flexible Duct Insulation, Schuller Microlite Type 75 Duct Wrap, Manson Microlite Insulation or Knauf Duct Wrap, 16kg/cubicmetre density with factory applied reinforced foil facing. Adhere insulation to duct surface with Childers CP82 or Bakelite 230-39 adhesive, which shall be applied in strips 150mm wide at not greater than 300mm centres. Butt edges of insulation tightly together, and seal breaks and joints of facing with self-adhering 100mm wide aluminium tape or adhere foil with Childers CP82 or Bakelite 230-39 adhesive. External Sheet Metal Insulation Table. No. 1. 2. 3. Flexible Ducts Field fabricated casings Air-conditioned supply and return duct exposed to weather Duty Insulation Type D2 D1 D1 Thickness 25mm 40mm 50mm Vapour Barrier Yes Yes Yes
PART 3 EXECUTION 1.01 PROTECTION
A. Protect the work of other trades with tarpaulins. B. Protect the work of this trade from being defaced by other trades. Make good any damage and leave in perfect condition ready for final painting. C. Insulated pipework and ductwork on roof or within plantroom shall be provided with 0.8 mm aluminium cladding.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 8. Section 15250 - Insulation
Page 80 of 317
1.02
INSTALLATION
A. Apply insulation over clean dry surfaces, firmly butting all sections together. B. Apply insulation, vapour barriers and insulation finishes in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations. C. Do not cover equipment nameplates with insulation. D. Coordinate related work with other Divisions. E. Pump, valves, fittings and accessories in the chilled water circuit shall also be proper insulated by using either the same material as pre-insulated pipe or high density fibreglass. Galvanised external jacket with paint finish shall also be provided.
END OF SECTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 8. Section 15250 - Insulation
Page 81 of 317
SECTION 15300 FIRE HYDRANT AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labor, material, equipment and appliances, and perform all operations for the work as outlined in the specifications and delineated on the Drawings for the installation of complete combined Fire Standpipe and Sprinkler System. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with these specifications and the Drawings. Secure and pay for permits, fees and inspections required for the approval of Fire Standpipe and Sprinkler systems. Perform hydraulic calculations, and file the shop drawings and the calculations with Factory Mutual and the local civil defence authorities for their approval. C. The Sub-contractor for this work shall be held to have read all of the tender requirements, the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions, and in the execution of work he will be bound by all of the conditions and requirements therein. D. Following is a brief outline and description of the work included, but shall not be considered as complete and all inclusive: 1. Pipe and Fittings 2. Joints 3. Hangers and Supports 4. Pipe Sleeves 5. Valves 6. Fire Department Connections and Auto Ball Drips 7. Wall Hydrants 8. Sprinkler Cabinets 9. Identification Tags 10. Tests 11. Sprinkler Heads 12. Waterflow Switches 13. Fire Extinguishers 14. Pressure Alarm Switches (for Dry Pipe Valves) 15. Deluge Valves 16. Tamper Switches 17. Fire Pumps and Jockey Pumps. 18. Hose reel 19. Landing Valves 20. Fire hose cabinets E. Hazard classification Apartment Light Hazard Office Light Hazard Podium Ordinary Hazard Group 2 Carpark Ordinary Hazard Group 1
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 9. Section 15300 Fire Hydrant and Sprinkler System
Page 82 of 317
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and equipment shall be produced in a plant of recognized reputation and regularly engaged in the production of pipes and/or equipment conforming to the specified standards. A single manufacturer shall produce all the pipe of the same type supplied for the work. Materials and equipment shall be new, of makes and kinds specified herein, or as indicated on the Subcontract Drawings, without exception. B. All material and work to be in accordance with applicable portions of the latest revisions and editions of the following standards unless otherwise indicated. 1. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 1996 Edition 2. NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, 1996 Edition. 3. NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, 1996 Edition. 4. NFPA 70 The National Electrical Code. 5. NFPA 72 The National Fire Alarm Code, 1999 Edition. 6. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials 7. ANSI American National Standards Institute 8. AWWA American Water Works Association 9. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 10. FM Factory Mutual 11. IBC International Building Code 2000 12. IFC International Fire Code 2000 12. NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguisher 13. NFPA 22 Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection. 14. Local Codes and Regulations C. All equipment shall be UL-listed , FM approved and local civil defence approved. D. The complete fire protection installation shall be made by an approved installer, who shall be on the approved list issued by the civil defence authority ABU DHABI specializing in sprinkler and fire protection work, having not less than five (5) years experience in installing systems of comparable size. E. Sub-contractor shall submit proof of valid license to perform work in the ABU DHABI. F. If any of the requirements of the above are in conflict with one another or with the requirements of these specifications, the most stringent requirement shall govern. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE FITTINGS
A. Pipe 1. Galvanised steel pipe, Schedule 40 seamless, conforming to the latest standard specification for welded steel pipe of the ASTM A-795. B. Fittings 1. Sizes 50 mm and smaller: Cast steel or malleable iron fittings, 2,000 kPa. Cast iron may be used for drain pipe fittings. 2. Sizes 65 mm and larger grooved fittings Zeroflex (3,000 kPa), Firelock (2,000 kPa), or ductile iron ASTM A-536. 3. Branch outlets shall be grooved type or mechanical T-branch connections, with Grade "E" standard pressure resilient gasket (Grade "E" O-Ring for Style 925). 4. Fittings and couplings for galvanized pipe shall be galvanized. 5. All couplings and fittings shall be provided by a single source supplier.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 9. Section 15300 Fire Hydrant and Sprinkler System Page 83 of 317
2.02
HOSE REEL & FIRE HOSE CABINET
A. Hosereel shall be of the type approved by Civil Defence. B. Rubber hose shall be continuous, non-kinking reinforced rubber complying with BS 3169 or approved equivalent. Connection of hose to both outlet bulb assembly and to nozzle shall be by steel cadmium plated hose clips. C. The reel shall be of rigid construction using at least 2.0mm pressed steel. It shall rotate freely on leak proof bearings and be fitted with pivoted nylon rollers to allow easy run-out of the hose. D. The approved nozzle shall be chrome-plated brass of 6.5mm bore. It shall be adjustable for jet or spray pattern with complete shut-off E. Provide cabinets 1.2mm thick mild steel with 1.5mm thick door and trim. Provide door with hollow channel construction, with full length semi-concealed piano hinge, rounded corners and 5mm thick full clear float glass. F. Cabinets shall be fully recessed type or suitable for surfaceor recess mounting, as indicated on drawings. Provide outside trim for flush mounting. G. Overall size of cabinet shall be 815mm x 750mm x 200mm deep and shall comply with civil defence requirements. H. Provide fire hose complete with brass couplings, screw threads and tailpiece. I. J. Provide adjustable, plastic type combination spray, fog nozzle with shutoff (UL/FM listed 150 psi). Equip each fire hose cabinet with one 4.5kg (10 lbs) CO2 and dry chemical powder fire extinguishers. LANDING VALVE
2.03
A. Landing valve shall be of the type approved by Civil Defence. B. The landing value shall comply with the requirements of BS 5041 Part 2 or approved equivalent. They shall be a purpose-made fitting with flange to BS 4504 or BSP screwed inlet, instantaneous female coupling outlet fitted with a removable brass plug secured by a chain handwheel. C. Every landing valve shall incorporate pressure reducing valve or discs to prevent the outlet under flow conditions to maximum pressure required by Civil Defence. D. The landing valve shall be closed by turning the handwheel in a clockwise direction and the direction of opening shall be permanently marked on the operating wheel by an embossed arrow and the word OPEN. E. Every landing valve shall be kept shut with padlock and leather strap. The packlocks used shall be a master-key type. 2.04 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Provide in each fire hose cabinet, a multi-purpose 4.5kg dry chemical powder and CO2 fire extinguishers as per CD requirement. B. Provide in transformer vault, generator room, machine room and all electrical and telephone rooms, a carbon dioxide Type 50BC rating, Insulated handle, hose and horn discharge assembly, self closing level squeeze grip operation, fully charged, labeled by Underwriters Laboratories with mounting wheelcarts where required. C. Provide extinguishers wall brackets type as recommended by extinguisher manufacturer for non cabinet fire extinguishers.
Page 84 of 317
2.05
VALVES
A. Gate Valves 1. Similar to Stockham G-670, UL approved, bronze body, OS&Y, rising stem, flanged ends, 2,000 kPa. 2. Sizes 50 mm and smaller, similar to Stockham B-153. B. Check Valves 1. Victaulic Series 717 or approved equal. C. Butterfly Valves 1. UL-listed and FM approved, indicating type with supervisory monitoring switches, ductile iron body, similar to Victaulic Series 708 or 708-W. D. Provide tamper switches for all valves controlling flow in fire standpipe and sprinkler systems. E. Tamper switches to be installed and adjusted by the Sub-contractor. F. Provide valved bypass on valves 150 mm and larger. Pressure rating of bypass valve shall be equal to the pressure of the main valve. G. Provide 300 mm wide wrought iron or steel ladder for valves with operating mechanism located more than 2 m above a floor or landing. 2.06 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. All Fire Department Connections (FDC) shall be equipped with a single 100 mm HYDRA STORZ quick-connect fitting with a 30-degree down angle and suite to couplings of local fire brigade department. B. Chrome plated, iron body mounted construction with 150mm (6 inch) nominal diameter flanged bottom/back outlets, 4nos 65mm (21/2 inch) nominal diameter instantaneous male inlets with chain and cap, integral spring loaded check valve, drain valve etc complete with cabinet (as per architectural specs/typical details shown in fire protection drawings) as per local civil defence requirement. C. Words Sprinkler and hydrant cast-in on escutcheon and the labeling details as per local civil defence requirement. 2.07 AUTO BALL DRIP
A. 20 mm bronze with both ends threaded, similar to Potter-Roemer Fig. 5982. B. Install in horizontal position, pipe to spill over floor drain. 2.08 WALL HYDRANT
A. Elkhart 171 (or approved equal) 100 mm connection with HYDRA STORZ quick-connect fitting. B. Words Wall Hydrant cast-in on escutcheon. C. Elkhart 164 (or approved equal) Valve Control with escutcheon with the words Valve Control cast-in. 2.09 DRAINS
A. Provide valves and/or plugs at base of risers and other locations required for complete drainage of system. 2.10 HOSE VALVE ASSEMBLIES
A. Polished brass angle body polished trim and red cast iron wheel handle, 2,000 kPa.
2.11
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and supports shall be provided and installed for all piping as required by this specification and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work, and shall be approved by the Supervision Consultant. Support piping independently from structure. B. All hangers and supports shall be made of steel or other durable and non-combustible materials. Wood, wire, or perforated strap iron shall not be used as permanent hangers or supports. Hangers that penetrate finished ceilings shall be provided with a chrome- or nickel plated escutcheon plate manufactured by Grinnell, or approved equal. C. Hangers and supports shall be installed so as not to interfere with the free expansion and contraction of piping, and all nuts and bolts shall be drawn up tight. D. Except where specified elsewhere, hangers for pipes shall be adjustable wrought steel, clevis type, similar to Grinnell Figure No. 260, or approved equal. Hangers shall be complete with bolts, rod and two nuts for each bolt. The diameter of hanger rods shall be as follows: Pipe Size Diameter of Rod 20 mm 50 mm 10 mm 65 mm 85 mm 13 mm 100 mm 125 mm 16 mm 150 mm 20 mm E. Small tubing to gauges, controls, or other equipment installed on any apparatus shall be secured in place with bolted clips. F. All vertical piping shall be firmly supported by riser clamps properly installed to relieve weight from fittings and piping at base of risers. Vertical pipes shall have riser clamps not to exceed 4.5 m spacing. G. Where required, furnish and install heavy anchorage to the pipe against movement from expansion and contraction and secure the approval of the Supervision Consultant for the method of installing the anchorage before the work. H. Horizontal piping shall be supported at intervals not greater than 3 m spacing and at all changes of direction. I. Where static pressure exceeds 650 kPa, provide support to prevent upward movement at the end of branch lines and arm-overs where sprinklers are below ceilings, where required by NFPA 13. J. Pipe clamps shall be one type similar to P-2008 through P-2020 with nut bolt to fit Unistrut as manufactured by Unistrut Products Company, or approved equal. PIPE SLEEVES
2.12
A. Furnish, install and be responsible for the location of proper sleeves for all pipes passing through floor, walls, partitions or other building construction. Where sleeves occur in concrete construction, they shall be set before concrete is poured. B. Set sleeves and anchors in a suitable manner so that they will not become displaced. Sleeves for piping passing through walls and floors in concealed spaces shall be cut flush with walls or floor. All sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, and of such a size as to permit piping and piping insulation to pass through sleeve. C. Sleeves passing through foundation walls or exterior walls, or where seepage may occur, shall be thoroughly waterproofed by removing all loose material and caulking with oakum and lead wool tightly around pipe or exterior as well as interior surface. Finish off interior surface with cement. Finish off exterior surface with two layers of felt, mopped on with hot asphalt, making for
an absolutely waterproof installation. All waterproofing must be performed before any backfilling is done. D. On all pipes passing through fire rated walls and ceilings, in finished areas, and where pipes are exposed to view, furnish and install plates on each side of the wall, Grinnell No. 13 chrome- or nickel-plated, or approved equal. Plate shall be large enough to cover sleeve opening and pass insulation. Clamp plate firmly to pipe by means of setscrews. E. Sleeves passing through walls and floors between rooms shall be filled from both ends of sleeve with fireproof insulation material of a fire rating equal to that of the wall or floor. 2.13 AUTOMATIC FIRE PUMP
A. Fire pumps, jockey pumps, associated controllers, and transfer switches shall be provided by a single source supplier. B. Refer to Pump Schedule on drawings. 1. Pump shall be capable of delivering 150% of rated capacity at not less than 65% of rated head. C. Pump shall comply with NFPA 20 and certified by either UL or FM. D. Pump shall be close-coupled to a HI/NEMA JM frame, vertical, ODP electric motor NEMA Design B, and 1.15 service factor. Locked rotor current shall not exceed the values specified in NFPA 20. E. The pump and motor shall be floor mounted on a cast iron floor pedestal.
F. Pump shall be of the centrifugal constructed for quiet operation. base mounted type, especially designed and
G. Pump - Shall be of the horizontal split case design as shown on drawings, making possible complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. Motor pump connection shall be of the flexible coupler type. The pump shall use a mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall face against a Remite insert. The pump shall be equipped with oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings for smooth and quiet operation. H. Motor - Shall be drip proof, 2900 RPM and shall be especially selected for quiet operation and shall be so stamped. The horse power of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure nonoverloading of the motor through the capacity range of the pump.
I.
Installation - A concrete base 8 inches higher than the surrounding floor shall be provided. Construct base and install as shown by the detail on the drawings. Provide a minimum of four 1/2" anchor bolts from concrete to pump base.
J.
Provide required Underwriters' accessories including: 1. Discharge fittings. 2. Suction and discharge pressure gauges. 3. Main relief valve. 4. Enclosed sight cone with glass bull's eye. 5. Casing relief valve. 6. Automatic air relief valve. 7. Hose valve header with two hose valves.
G. Motor controller(s) shall be UL listed and FM approved specifically for fire pump service, enclosed with automatic transfer switch, isolating means and required accessories including current failure, pump operation and phase reversal on line side of motor starter, alarm contactors and shall be Firetrol No. FTA1900 automatic start, manual stop, across-the line type rated for kW
specified and including voltage surge arrestors, or approved equal. Motor controller shall be reduced voltage type. H. Automatic transfer switch(es) shall be UL-1008 listed and tested, Firetrol Model FTA900, factory mounted and interwired with the fire pump controller. The controller and transfer switch shall be capable of interrupting a short circuit current at least equal to the available short circuit current in the controller supply circuit. 1. Rating shall be suite the electricity demand and meet the requirement of Civil Defence. 2. Contacts shall be silver plated, arching type with arc barriers and arc chutes. 3. Accessories: a. Test switch in cover. b. Green pilot light to indicate "Normal" position. c. Amber pilot light to indicate "Emergency" position. d. Push-to-test emergency indicating pilot light with long life lamps and fuses. e. Adjustable time delay on retransfer to normal: f. 0 - 25 minutes plus 5 minutes unloaded running time for the generator. The time delay shall be by-passed automatically upon failure of the emergency source. g. Number of closed auxiliary contacts shall be 1 on normal, 1 on emergency. 4. Withstanding rating shall be 200,000 amps. 5. Isolating means shall be a manually operable, molded case switch, horsepower rated and suitable for the interrupting of the motor locked rotor current a. Provide an isolating switch ahead of the emergency input terminals of the automatic transfer switch. b. Provide auxiliary contacts for remote audible and visual signals indicating that the switch is in the open position. c. Withstand rating shall not be less than the transfer switch rating. I. If required by the project conditions the entire assembly shall be delivered in parts and assembled in place under the supervision of the authorized manufacturer's representative. Pipe pump casing to spill over to the floor drain.
J.
K. Fire pump flow measuring system/devices approved by Civil Defence shall be provided. 2.14 JOCKEY PUMP
A. Terminal Jockey Pump: Refer to Pump Schedule on drawings. B. Pump shall be of the vertical type, multistage, centrifugal, with cast iron casing, stainless steel fitted, and coupled to motor. C. Motor: Provide vertically mounted, drip proof motor with drip cover. D. Controller: Provide jockey pump controller with required accessories including running timer, control circuit transformer and fuses, similar to Firetrol No. FTA500. 2.15 FIRE PUMP TEST MANIFOLD
A. Cast brass angle inlet body. Size of inlet and number of outlets shall be in accordance with NFPA 20. Brass NRS hose gate valves shall be supplied with every other valve having a loose bonnet as required for installation, female NPT inlet x 65 mm male hose thread outlet, 65 mm caps and chains. 450 mm long polished brass cover sleeve and brass identification plate lettered "PUMP TEST CONNECTION", similar to Potter-Roemer 5860 Series.
B. Provide all required accessories for complete pump test (hose, nozzles, pitot tubes, etc.). Perform test in the presence of the Owner's representative. 2.16 FIRE PUMP TESTING EQUIPMENT
A. Hose: provide 65 mm inch cotton rubber lined hose, two 15 m lengths. B. Nozzles: three 65 mm inch x 375 mm x 30 mm open tapered red enameled galvanized cast iron nozzles, similar to Croker-Standard No. 18-G. C. Hose saddle racks: wall hung steel red enamel finish hose saddle racks, similar to CrokerStandard No.135. Attach where directed by the Supervision Consultant to wall construction with backing plate. Provide two racks for each 30 m. of hose. D. Spanner wrenches: three galvanized malleable iron type with holders, similar to Croker-Standard No. 2205. E. Provide 12 washers. F. The pump shall be hydrostatically and performance tested prior to shipment. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than one and a half times the no flow (shutoff) head of pump's maximum diameter impeller plus the maximum allowable suction head, but in no case less than 1600 kPa. Characteristic curve of pump performance, efficiency and brake horsepower shall be drawn from the test results and witnessed by the Supervision Consultant. G. The pump manufacturers representative shall provide start-up services and be present at the field acceptance test. Start-up services shall include checking for proper bearing lubrication and adjustment of controls for satisfactory system operation H. Start-up services shall also include field-testing of the pump controls and motors from the point of power supply to the controller through the motors. The tests shall verify the equipments electrical and operational integrity and shall provide a baseline for a future preventative maintenance program. The Static (de-energized) Tests shall include measurements of resistance imbalance (hot spots), inductance imbalance, capacitance imbalance and leakage to ground of the wiring and the motor. Dynamic (operational) Tests shall include measurements of voltage, full load amps, power factor and power consumption. The test results shall be presented in the form of a hard copy and a computer disk formatted to the specifications. 2.16 ALARM SWITCHES
A. Provide paddle type alarm switches for wet pipe systems. Provide Alarm Pressure Switches for dry-pipe systems. B. Waterflow alarm switches shall be UL listed Reliable Model A or similar with pneumatic retard mechanism. C. Alarm switches shall be installed and adjusted by the Fire Sprinkler Sub-contractor. D. Provide flow detection and valve closed interface with the Fire Alarm System. 2.17 FLOOR CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. Prefabricated, UL-listed and FM approved assembly consisting of a grooved end body, flow
switch, inspectors test valve and pressure gauge, as manufactured by Grinnell Fire Protection Systems or approved equal. B. Provide a check valve at each connection to the riser. C. Provide check valve at drain before connection to drain riser. D. Provide flow detection and valve closed interface with the Fire Alarm System. 2.18 IDENTIFICATION
A. Signs, charts and tags shall be provided as described in NFPA 13. B. Painting finish (type, quality, and colour) to all fire protection pipework shall comply with the requirements of Civil Defence. 2.19 SPRINKLERS
A. All sprinkler heads shall be UL listed and FM approved. Sprinklers shall be rated for ordinary temperatures (165 deg. F) except as required near heaters or locations where elevated temperatures may normally be expected or as otherwise indicated on the Sub-contract Drawings or required by local fire regulations. B. Sprinkler heads shall be by reliable Automatic Sprinkler manufacturer or approved equal, as follows: 1. Sprinkler heads in areas without hung ceiling and above wood ceiling-panels shall be automatic spray upright heads, chrome finish. 2. Standard coverage sprinkler heads in hung ceilings where indicated on the drawings shall be automatically recessed adjustable heads, chrome finish. 3. SiADWEAll sprinkler heads where indicated on the drawings shall be recessed horizontal siADWEAll sprinklers, chrome finish. 4. Extended coverage recessed pendent sprinkler heads where indicated on the drawings shall be recessed extended coverage sprinklers, chrome finish. 5. Institutional-type sprinkler heads shall be chrome finish, pendent and/or siADWEAll type. 6. Sprinklers for all public mall areas shall be fully recessed type with colour finish plate approved by the Supervision Consultant. 7. All sprinklers shall be provided by a single source supplier. 8. All sprinkler cap/cover plate finish shall be submitted for review and Approval by the Supervision Consultant. 9. Quick response sprinkler shall be used for Hotel guest room and Service Apartment Unit and all the apartment area as mentioned in the drawings 2.20 SPRINKLER CABINETS
A. Provide spare sprinkler emergency cabinet and spare stock of sprinklers heads conforming to NFPA 13. Sub-contractor shall provide no less than 24 spare heads of each type and/or temperature rating. B. Sprinkler emergency cabinets shall be approved equal, UL and FM approved. C. Cabinet shall be constructed of 22-gauge steel with prime coat and manufacturer's baked enamel finish in color selected by the Supervision Consultant. Cabinet(s) shall be located in Fire Pump Room(s). Final location shall be as directed by Supervision Consultant.
Page 90 of 317
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL
A. Install a complete combined fire standpipe and sprinkler system with all piping, valves, hangers, signs, valves, tests, etc., as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. B. Furnish and install all drain piping, flushing, connections, drain plugs, drain valves, etc., at drain points and all low points. C. Seal all valves, not provided with tamper switches, in open position by approved means. D. Flushing connections shall conform, to NFPA 13. Include pressure gauges and 1" inspector's test connections. E. Piping shall generally be run parallel to walls and beams. Before finalizing the location of any piping, consult with other trades so as to avoid interfering with their work. F. Care shall be exercised in the installation of the piping so that the system will drain by gravity, back through branches. G. All electrical devices associated with and/or listed within this Section including power and control wiring with the exception of main source of power from the buildings electrical system shall be the sole responsibility of this Sub-contractor. This shall include but is not limited to conduit, wiring, termination of wiring, etc. 3.02 TRAINING
A. Provide instruction of operating personnel: 1. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper starting sequences, operation, shutdown and maintenance procedures, including normal and emergency procedures. 2. Instruction shall be by personnel skilled in operation of equipment. Instructions for major equipment shall be provided by equipment manufacturers' representatives. 3. Arrange to give instructions by system and not by building areas. 4. Instruction sessions for overall building system operation to be held on three days each drawing per 2-week period. 5. Instructions on automatic controls shall be by manufacturer's representative. 3.03 TESTS A. General: 1. The entire works shall be fully tested in stages as the work proceeds and on completion of work as applicable. 2. To provide during normal working hours, all necessary labours, instruments, equipment, materials, fuel, power and maker's representatives, to carry out such tests as may be necessary to satisfy the Supervision Consultant that the installation meets the requirement and intent of the specification as well as such tests required by Civil Defence. 3. All tests shall be made in the presence of the Supervision Consultant or his representative or any inspecting authority. 4. Tests described hereinafter and including all tests prescribed by the Authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out. Any tests proved unsatisfactory shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the inspecting parties. 5. To provide skilled technicians/Supervision Consultant to commission the plant and associated controls to the satisfaction of the Supervision Consultant. The technicians/
Supervision Consultants will be required to demonstrate the correct procedures in starting and stopping the plant, running the various items of equipment under automatic and manual control and the correct maintenance of the plant. 6. Water flow rates of all equipment shall be adjusted to design conditions. Complete results of adjustments shall be recorded and submitted. B. Factory Tests: 1. The following items of equipment shall be tested at the manufacturer's works or elsewhere as appropriate. `Type-Test' certificate shall be provided as stipulated in the following subclauses. In all cases, factory test certificates or type test certificates shall be submitted in triplicate to the Supervision Consultant. a. Pumps `Type-Test Certificates for head discharge, speed and power input (BS 599). b. Electric Motors Type-Test' Certificates in accordance with BS 5000. For motors of 40 kW output and above, routine individual test certificates in accordance with BS 5000. c. Starters and Control Gear `Type-Test' Certificates (BS 587). For control panels as a whole, routine (individual) high voltage test in accordance with BS 587. d. Main Switchboard 2. The following tests shall be performed in the presence of the Supervision Consultant: a. Inspection of switchboard including wiring, electrical and mechanical connections; b. Mechanical tests; c. Primary and secondary injection tests to commission and calibrate all measuring, protection and control circuits and associated components; d. Continuity and dielectric tests; e. Power frequency and pressure test; f. Functional check of all control wiring. g. Vales, Cocks and Fittings Type-Test' and approval certificate for pressure test and compliance with the regulations laid down by the local Water Authority. h. Fire Annunciator Panels, Smoke and Heat Detectors `Type-Test' certificate from approved authorities such as LPC/FOC, UL or FM. C. On-Site Testing and Commissioning: 1. Two months prior to completion submit for the Supervision Consultants approval a detailed programme for conducting on-site acceptance tests and commissioning. 2. Start up, operate, test and adjust the systems in accordance with the agreed programme. The setting shall be supervised by the Supervision Consultant's representative, who shall remain on site until the equipment is operating satisfactorily and accepted by the Supervision Consultant. Advise and co-ordinate with the manufacturer's representatives so that all testing is carried out according to the agreed programme. 3. The whole installation shall be given the following tests to bring the plant into running order. The Supervision Consultant shall be given reasonable notice together with a copy of recorded test results, generally not less than seven (7) days, regarding the nature of tests, the time and location. Acceptance tests will only be witnessed by the Supervision Consultant when the submitted tests results are found satisfactorily. 4. All instruments, tools, material and labour required to perform these tests shall be provided. 5. Before the tests are carried out, remove connected equipment and components which are liable to damage under test, and shall provide and fix all the necessary gauges, blanking flanges, etc.
6. During system erection, the following tests shall be carried out: a. Hose Reels 1) The manufacturer's recognised test certificate for the hose reels shall be submitted to the Supervision Consultant for scrutiny and approval before their installation on site. 2) The Supervision Consultant shall select at random hose reel for site testing conforming to the Civil Defences requirements. b. Pipework Load Tests 1) The Supervision Consultant shall select at his discretion any section of pipework for the following load tests as recommended in NFPA. 2) Hangars shall be capable of withstanding the test loadings given in the NFPA Rules. 3) When installed and subjected to the test loadings, the hangar shall not rupture, pull out, distort or otherwise be damaged and hangars shall not show permanent distortion resulting in a change in level or material position of the pipe to be supported in excess of 8 mm. If in-situ tests are conducted, appropriate safety precautions must be taken. 7. Prior to the system start-up, the following inspection, tests and pre-commissioning treatment shall be carried out: a. Tanks and Level Switches 1) The tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned with water and drained before city mains supply will feed in. 2) Also before city mains supply will feed in, the level switch shall be simulated for the various cut-in and cut-out settings. b. Pressure Switches 1) The testing equipment arrangement for pressure switches and pressure gauges shall be as shown on the drawings or of an approved equivalent. 2) The testing equipment shall be suitable for nominal working pressure of 25 bar (PN 25) conforming to the BS, e.g. the pipework shall conform to BS 1387:1967 Table 3 for class C heavy galvanised mild steel tube. 3) The pressure settings corresponding for pump cut-in (lamp and buzzer energised) and pump cut-out (lamp and buzzer de-energised) and reset differentials shall be tested by applying the hand jacking pump or by opening the test valve. 4) The pressure gauges to be tested shall be connected as shown on the drawing in lieu of the pressure switch. The gauges to be tested shall be regarded acceptable when the pressure readings of all three gauges are the same throughout the jacking pressure range varied by applying the hand pump. c. Flow Switches 1) The testing equipment for the flow switches shall be a as shown on the drawings or of an equivalent approved by the Supervision Consultant. 2) The calibration test equipment shall provide a flow of 60 dm3/min over the vane of the flow switch in the direction shown, to be confirmed by the direct reading flow meter. 3) The flow switch contacts shall make with energisation of the lamp and the buzzer, upon a flow not greater than 60 dm3/min flowing over the vane in the correct direction. d. Hydrostatic Tests 1) All parts of the water circuit shall be filled with water before hydrostatic pressure testing, and pump running tests for verification of pressure and flow rate, are conducted.
Page 93 of 317
2) The hand jacking pump shall be applied to increase the system pressure to 2 times the working pressure or 1.5 times the working pressure plus 3.5 bar whichever is the lower but in any case not less than 7 bar. The pressure shall be maintained for a period not less than 24 hours. 3) Where any section of pipework or equipments unable to withstand the maximum pipework test pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipework test then that section of pipework or equipment shall be re-tested at the appropriate test pressure. 4) The working pressure for various systems shall be as shown on the drawings. 5) Before performing the hydrostatic test, the following system component shall be fulfilled: For Hydrant, Standpipe and Hose Reel Systems All isolating gate valves shall be closed. All hose nozzles shall be opened. All isolating valves shall be closed. The pump isolating valves shall be opened. For Sprinkler System All gate valves shall be closed fully except the valves around the check meter position which shall be opened. All the main stop valves and the subsidiary stop valves shall be opened or closed in order to provide isolated water tight sections for the hydrostatic pressure testing. The pressure switches shall be isolated by the relevant valves or cocks. The test and the drain valves shall be closed. The sprinkler inlet isolating valve shall be closed. e. Cleaning, Flushing and Pre-treatment 1) Prior to start-up and satisfactorily hydraulic testing, clean the entire installation including all fittings and pipework and the like after installation and keep them in a new condition. All pumping systems shall be flushed and drained at least once through to get rid of contaminating materials. All pipes shall be rodded when necessary to ensure clearance of debris, cleaning and flushing shall be carried out in sections as the installation becomes completed. 2) All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced. 3) When the entire systems are reasonably clean, a pre-treatment chemical shall be introduced and circulated for at least 8 hours. Warning signs shall be provided at all outlets during pre-treatment. The pre-treatment chemical shall: Remove oil, grease and foreign residue from the pipework and fittings. Pre-condition the metal surfaces to resist reaction with water or air. Establish as initial protective film. After pre-treatment, the system shall be drained and refilled with fresh water and left until the system is put into operation. Details and procedures of the pre-treatment shall be submitted to the Supervision Consultant for approval. f. Electrical Tests 1) Electrical tests shall comply with the current edition of IEE regulations and requirements enforced by local authorities. 2) Electrical insulation tests earth electrode resistance test and cost amenity test shall apply to busbars, isolators and other equipment and wiring where applicable. 3) A 500V DC instrument shall be used to check the insulation resistance. The reading shall not be less than 1 mega-ohm in all instances.
Page 94 of 317
4) Function simulation tests shall be performed to ensure that the systems have been installed to the control requirements as described in the specification therein. g. Electrical Tests 1) The direct coupling of the pump drives shall be dismantled before the pump motor control panel is energised. 2) Demonstrate to the Supervision Consultant of acceptable clearances of the coupling alignment for ensuring satisfactory power transmission. 3) The coupling shall not be re-mated again till the correct motor rotation has been demonstrated with power drawn from the energised pump motor control panel. h. Pump Churning Test 1) After the electrical pump motor control panel has been energised, pump churning tests shall be performed with the pump discharge valve closed. A separate test shall be conducted for each pump. With each pump running for thirty minutes, the following results shall be obtained at a 3-minute intervals: 1) The temperature of the churning water and the tank water. 2) The flow rate of the churning water to be measured by collecting the flow into a metal tank via a plastic hose. 3) The temperature of the motor casing with the pump room door being closed. 4) The pump room temperature at a point close to the ceiling slab and at a point 600 mm above finished floor level adjacent to the room door. 5) The tank water temperature. j. Pump Operating Test Ensure to the satisfaction of the Supervision Consultant that the installation or portion thereof which has been set to work complies with all requirements including the following: 1) That the plant and apparatus shall be of robust construction and of capacity for the duty specified. 2) That all valves, switches, controls and the like are properly regulated and capable of proper operation and in the case of valves are capable of being shutoff. 3) That all apparatus shall be silent. 4) That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately. 5) That all services are tested in accordance with the details of the relevant clauses of this Specification. 6) Pump control tests for the hydrant and wet and dry systems at the pump motor control panels shall be integrated with other relevant test requirements for those systems in this Specification. 8. The various systems shall be operated for the following system performance tests: a. Hydrant, Standpipes and Hosereel Systems 1) The systems shall be tested to confirm that the pressure and flow rate, and the throw of water from a standard branch pipe and hose line fitted to each hydrant point and each hose reel nozzle shall conform to Civil Defences requirements. 2) All isolating valves and all nozzle on/off valves shall be lubricated. 3) Starting of pumps shall be by loosening the glass cover rather than by breaking glass. 4) The (hydraulically) remotest standard outlets shall be connected with 30 mm to 70 mm non-perforating hose and an appropriate branch pipe and suitable pressure and flow measuring devices according to NFPA requirements for flow and pressure verification test. 5) The same measurement shall be carried out for the (hydraulically) nearest outlets.
i.
Page 95 of 317
6) The hydraulically remotest hose hydrant nozzles shall be tested for a throw of jet not less than 6 m when the hose is arranged to be squeezed by the self-closing doors it has to pass through, i.e. when the doors are not kept open intentionally. 7) The same throw requirement shall be satisfied for the (hydraulically) nearest hose nozzle. 8) Pump cut-in and cut-out, pump lead-lag test, test for water level high level, low level alarms and the like shall be integrated into the system running test as far as possible. b. Sprinkler System 1) The system shall be tested to confirm that the pressure and flow rate and control scheme conform to NFPA requirements. 2) The start and stop of each jockey pump and each main pump shall be tested by opening/closing of the test and drain valve stemming from the installation valve. 3) The water flow rate and pressure for each installation shall be tested by using the proving of water test equipment (i.e. direct reading flow meter) according to NFPA. At the same time, the motor gong shall sound properly. During the test, the main duty pump shall be in full operation within 30 seconds, and for the standby pump if required, within 45 seconds. 4) The end-of-pipe test valve at the hydraulically remotest end of the system shall be opened for testing the flow switch. 5) Other end-of-pipe test valves shall be selected by the Supervision Consultant at his discretion for flow switch alarm testing with simultaneous purpose of testing the pressure switches. 6) Each set of pressure switches shall be tested by opening end-of-pipe test valves for starting of jockey pumps, sprinkler main pumps. D. Statutory Authorities Tests and Inspections: 1. As and when notified in writing or instructed by the Supervision Consultant, submit as-built shop drawing and attend all tests and inspections carried out by the Local Authorities, and shall forthwith execute free of charge any rectification work ordered by the Supervision Consultant as a result of such tests and inspections which determine non-compliance with Statutory Regulation. Some of these tests may take place after the issue of Practical Completion and the Sub-contractor shall make all allowances in this respect. 2. Submit of all necessary forms and shop drawings/as-built drawings to the Statutory Authorities which shall conform in layout to the latest architectural plans submitted kept by these Authorities. 3. The submission shall comply with the requirements set forth in the current Codes of Practice and circular letters of the Statutory Authorities. The shop drawings to be submitted shall be forwarded to the Supervision Consultant for checking before submission. 4. Ensure that his submission shall not delay the subsequent inspection and test, otherwise he shall be fully responsible for any consequence due to his delay. E. Preliminary Commissioning Checks: 1. Ensure that all equipment is thoroughly cleaned, lubricated and checked for serviceability before setting to work. Particular attention is drawn to the removal of building debris from the pipework systems. 2. Special attention is drawn to the need for thoroughly flushing out all pipework systems to ensure that all foreign matter is removed. 3. All automatic controls and safety devices shall be inspected and checked for service ability before the working fluid or electricity is applied to the system. F. Commissioning:
Page 96 of 317
1. When the various installations have been completed and the preliminary commissioning checks carried out, the Sub-contractor shall set to work, regulate and calibrate all system in the entire installation. Special attention shall be paid to the following items: 2. That all valves, switches, controls, etc. are regulated and capable of proper operation and in the case of isolation valves that they are capable of tight shut off. 3. That all apparatus is silent in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. 4. That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately. 5. That all services are tested in accordance with the details in the relevant clauses of this Specification. 6. Operate pumps, pressure reducing sets, etc. to ensure that all control systems are functioning correctly and are properly set, sequenced or interlocked. G. Final Acceptance Tests: 1. Following commissioning of the entire installation, and prior to issue of the Completion Certificate. The Sub-contractor shall carry out final acceptance tests in accordance with a programme to be agreed with the Supervision Consultant. 2. Should the results of the acceptance tests show that plant, systems and/or equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures as given in this Specification, the Sub-contractor shall adjust, modify and if necessary replace the equipment without further payment in order that the required performance be obtained. 3. Where acceptance tests are required by the relevant Authorities having jurisdiction, these tests shall be carried out by the Sub-contractor prior to the issue of Completion Certificate to the acceptance of the Authorities. 3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Brush and clean all work prior to concealing, painting and acceptance. Perform in stages if directed. B. Painted or exposed work soiled or damaged: Clean and repair to match adjoining work before final acceptance. C. Remove debris from inside and outside of materials and equipment. D. Flush out piping after installation. E. Adjust valves and automatic control devices F. Disinfections 1. Disinfect underground water mains after installation and test in accordance with: a. AWWA Standard C-60. G. The Sub-contractor shall provide written proof of testing to the Supervision Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Page 97 of 317
SECTION 15360 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS INSTALLATION PART 1 WORK INCLUDED 1.01 GENERAL
A. This Specification includes the complete design, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of the entire L.P. Gas installation. It shall also include the co-operation with other Contractors/Contractors involved on the site in the co-ordination, programming, scheduling and the sequence of installation of the works in all circumstances where this is stipulated in this Specification or proves necessary in practice. B. Comply into Division 1, general requirements and all documents referred to herein. C. The specialist Contractor executing the LPG Installation shall have at least five (5) years relevant experience in Abu Dhabi. D. System designed and installation shall meet the requirements of Local Authorities and Civil Defence Approved. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. LPG installation should be done in accordance with this Specification and associated Drawings, and without abrogating the more extensive details described elsewhere in the Specification and Drawings, includes (but shall not be limited to) the following: 1. Supply and installation of underground storage tanks, filling lines, inlets, etc. 2. Supply and installation of pressure regulation systems, emergency shut off system, piping, valves, and all necessary accessories. 3. Unless otherwise specified, the work also includes the initial supply of sufficient quantity of Liquefied Petroleum Gas for testing and commissioning. 4. Supply and installation of all electrical works including gas leak detection system, cables, conduits, wirings, isolators, etc. for the LPG installation. 5. Painting of pipework and equipment. 6. Testing and commissioning of all equipment. 7. Submission of shop drawings, as-built drawings, test results, operation and maintenance manual. 8. All other works necessary for the proper functioning of the complete installation. 9. Liaison with Government Authorities having jurisdiction, submission, and obtaining approval over the installation to obtain all necessary certificates and approvals including the completion of all forms and preparation of all documents for necessary submission purpose and the payment of any fees or charge. 10. Training of Employer's staff for proper operation of the entire system. 11. Maintenance and operation of the entire LPG system during the defect Liability Period.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 10. Section 15360 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Installation
Page 98 of 317
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL
A. This section of specification covers the general requirements for storage tanks, pipework, valves and fittings unless the general requirements are abrogated by specific requirements elsewhere in the Specification or Drawings. B. The MEP Contractor shall design, supply and install all storage tanks, pipework, valves and fittings necessary for the correct and satisfactory operation of the LPG system covered by this Specification. 2.02 STORAGE TANKS
A. Storage tanks shall be fabricated as per BS5500/ASME Code and meet requirements of local authorities and Civil Defence. B. The MEP Contractor shall supply and install storage tanks with capacity as specified in the Equipment Schedule. C. Tank Controls Each tank should be equipped with at least: 1. A continuous liquid level indicator. The liquid level indicator (float gauge) gives the approximate indication of the liquid level inside the tank in percentage. 2. A maximum level gauge. 3. A Shut-off device of each connection of the outlet pipes for both gaseous and liquid phases and in addition, an excess-flow valve for the liquid phase. 4. A double check filler-valve on the filling connection if the filling point is located on the tank; if the filling point is located at the end of a pipe branched to the tank, it shall be equipped with a back check-valve at the filling end and the connection of such pipe to tank shall be equipped with another check-valve. 2.03 PIPING MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be compatible for use with LPG under the service conditions to which they are subjected. B. All pipes above ground shall be carbon steel, seamless, minimum schedule 40. C. Underground pipes shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDP) pipe suitable for gas system application where applicable.
2.04
PIPE JOINTS / FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe 1. Joints in steel pipes of 50mm nominal bore and smaller shall be welded, flanged or screwed. Steel pipe joints over 50mm nominal bore shall be welded or welded flanged. 2. Jointing of steel pipes by gas welding shall be in accordance with BS2640 and welding by electric arc shall be in accordance with BS2971 or AWS B2.1. Electric arc welding shall only be used on pipes of 125mm nominal bore and larger. Qualified welders shall be used. 3. Jointing compounds for screwed connections shall be resistant to LPG and shall comply with BS5292 or ASME B1.20.1. B. HDPE Pipe
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 10. Section 15360 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Installation Page 99 of 317
1. Polyethylene pipe fittings with thermal fusion joints suitable for gas system application. 2.05 VALVES
A. General 1. All valves shall be made of steel, bronze or forged brass. Non-metallic parts for valve seals, gaskets, diaphragms, etc. shall be resistant to the action of LPG under service conditions to which they are subjected. 2. All diaphragm valves shall be fitted with renewable diaphragms. Back seating shall be provided to isolate the gland packing when the valve is open for repair or inspection. Screwed ends shall be to BS1740:Part 1. Taper threads and flanged end shall be to BS1560: Part 2 or BS4504. 3. All valves shall be fitted in accessible positions and shall carry clear indication of the direction of operation required to open and to close the valve. Clockwise rotation of the lever of spindle shall close the valve. 4. All valves shall be approved and comply with ANSI Z21.15, ANSI Z21.21 or ASME B16.33. B. Excess Flow Valves 1. Excess flow valves or emergency valves shall be installed in the correct flow direction and shall intend to close upon excessive discharge of vapour or liquid resulting from a downstream rupture in hoses and piping system. The flow rate for closure of the valve shall be substantially above normal service flow rate to prevent premature closing, but shall in no case exceed 1.5 time the normal service flow rate. C. Non-Return Valves 1. Non-return valves shall be suitable for liquid or vapour use in LPG cylinders/bulk tanks or in-line application. The valve shall be fitted with soft seat for tight shut-off so that piping can be blown down for maintenance without leakage. D. Isolating Valves 1. Isolating valves shall be of globe type with ductile iron bodies and stainless steel stems to resist corrosion. The valve seat shall be suitable for long-lived leakproof services. Steel ball valves shall be to BS5351 or ANSI Z21.15, ANSI Z21.21 or ASME B16.33. E. Quick-acting Shut-off Valves 1. Quick-acting shut-off valves shall be of lever operation and shall design to close tight in the direction of arrow. F. Pressure Relief Valves 1. Pressure relief valves shall be spring-loaded and be fully automatic in operation. The valves shall have an effective rate of upward discharge to protect a system against excess pressure. The outlet vent connection shall terminate vertically with a self-detachable weatherproof cap complete with chain at least 3m above ground level with an ultimate vertical section of minimum 2m in length. 2. Each pressure relief valve shall be plainly and permanently marked with the following: a. Manufacturer's identification including catalogue or type number; b. Start to discharge pressure;
c.
Certified capacity in terms of air at Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP)
G. Hydrostatic Relief Valves 1. Hydrostatic relief valves shall be installed in pipelines and hoses located between isolating valves or blank flanges to protect a system against excessive pressure caused by thermal expansion of contents. The pressure relieving device shall be fixed in such a way that it will not discharge excessive pressure endangering personnel or equipment. The valve shall be fitted with a self-detachable weatherproof cap complete with chain. H. Pressure Gauges 1. Pressure gauges shall have stainless steel cases with dials not less than 75mm diameter. They shall be installed at high, intermediate and low pressure stages to indicate the service pressures. Calibration shall be in kPa. 2.06 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Pressure regulators/governors shall be compatible for use with LPG and shall be suitable for service conditions as required. The material, construction, performance and testing requirements for regulators of different pressure stages shall conform to BS3016:1983 or UL144 except otherwise specified. B. All pressure regulators/governors shall be sealed and locked against unauthorised adjustment after final testing and commissioning. 2.07 GAS DETECTION
A. The LPG Contractor shall provide the gas detection system as shown on the Drawings and in compliance with the Civil Defences requirement. 1. Gas Detector Panel a. Master controller similar to OLDHAM Model or equivalent with master alarm relay board and I/O relay board for interfacing with fire alarm panel and main gas solenoid valve. 2. Gas Leak Detector a. Similar to OLDHAM" Model CSC87 or equivalent. 3. Gas detection panels shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system. 2.08 EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SYSTEM
A. This system shall include: 1. An EPs: 24 V.D.C., c/w charger and batteries. The EPs can be incorporated in the control panel. 2. Cables and accessories 3. Electrical switch (close to the Control Panel), this system will be connected to solenoid valve (24V) in the distribution panel.
Page 101 of 317
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MATERIALS
A. All parts of the work installed under this Specification shall be painted with approved first quality enamel paints of quality, colours, and brands as approved by the Supervision Consultant. B. The requirement for painting of all pipework and ductwork is in addition to the colour coding or banding specified in the Specification. C. Paint shall be selected to withstand the temperature on the surface which it is applied, and shall be suitable in all respects for the environmental conditions in which it shall be located. D. All paint used shall be of one manufacture as approved by the Supervision Consultant, and finishes shall be full gloss unless otherwise instructed by the Supervision Consultant E. All painting for outdoor installation shall be provided with epoxy paint. F. Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the Contractor shall propose the colour scheme to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
A. To comply with relevant requirements of Section 15410. 3.03 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. To comply with relevant requirements of Division 16. 3.04 SIGNS
A. Labeling 1. All emergency control/valves shall be labeled to show their ON and OFF positions. The label shall be a permanent notice clearly marked "LPG Emergency Valve" and prominently displayed near such control/valves. Similarly, a permanent notice marked "LPG Main Control Valve" for the LPG main control valve outside the building shall also be provided. 2. Pipe line must be provided LPG mark/printed mark. B. Warning Signs 1. The LPG Contractor shall provide "NO SMOKING" and "LPG" signs and shall prominently display them on or adjacent to each point of entry to the LPG installation. 3.05 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. General 1. The LPG system shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with the relevant codes published by: a. Abu Dhabi Civil Defence b. LPG ITA (UK) Code of Practice 2. After a system is assembled, it shall be checked for leak before. Before trying to locate leaks, built up the pressure in all parts of the system. 3. Central LPG system should be tested by using inert gas. 4. This testing should include filling line, risers pipes and all other parts installed.
5. If the pressure gauge shows no drop in pressure an hour or more, raise the test pressure and test again. Do not exceed the pressure prescribed by the code. If pressure show no decrease during a 1 to 24 hour period, the system is safe to operate. Purge the test gas from the system, evacuate by the deep vacuum, two or three step vacuum method, and charge the system. The unit should be ready to operate. 6. If leak is found, purge the system to the atmosphere open the system at the leak point, inspect all parts, replace any defective parts, clean and assembled it again. If a soldered or brazed joint is leaking, flux heat, and take the joint completely apart. Clean and assemble, then repeat the leak detecting procedure. If no leaks are found, this part of this unit is ready to operate. 7. Testing and commissioning results shall be submitted to the Supervision Consultant for approval. B. L.P. Gas Storage Tank 1. Storage tank shall be Hydraulic tested and certified (if required by local Authorities). 2. The tank installation and associated pipework and equipment must be inspected to ensure that comply with these recommendations. 3. The tightness test at LPG vapour pressure must be carried out. 4. After assembly, all piping using at non-reduced pressure must be tested at not less than 1.5 times the maximum pressure that will be reached in service. C. Pipework Risers 1. The test pressure shall be not less than 1.5 times the maximum working pressure.
END OF SECTION
Page 103 of 317
SECTION 15365 GAS SUPPRESSION ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM INTENT
A. The requirements of Sections 15010 shall also govern work specified herein. B. This specification intends to describe a "total flooding" fire protection and extinguishing system. The system shall be provided and installed in the areas indicated on the Sub-contract drawings, in full compliance with all applicable codes and standards. 1. The system as described shall be installed, tested, and delivered to the owner in first class condition. The system shall include all required cylinders, valves, gasses, gas delivery piping and nozzles, release control panel, detection, raceways, interconnecting wiring and software to accomplish the requirements of this specification and the Sub-contract drawings, whether itemized or not. 2. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products of the manufacturer, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of fire suppression and analog fire detection devices for over ten years. 1.02 APPROVALS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this publication to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. The latest version of each listed publication shall be used as a guide unless the authority having jurisdiction has adopted an earlier version. 1. Factory Mutual (FM.) a. FM AG Approval Guide 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. b. NFPA 72 Standard For The Installation, Maintenance And Use of Protective Signaling Systems. c. NFPA 90A Standard For The Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems. d. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. e. NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems. 3. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.(UL) a. Appropriate UL standards for coordinated system. b. ULFPED 4. Material, Equipment and system Acceptance by local authorities. 1.03 MANUFACTURERS REPRESENTATIVE
A. Provide the services of a representative or technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. The technician shall supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. The technician shall provide the required instruction to the owner's personnel in the system operation, maintenance and programming.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 11. Section 15365 Gas Suppression Alarm System
Page 104 of 317
1.04
SUBMITTAL
A. Prior to the start of work, the Sub-contractor shall provide a complete and comprehensive submittal for review by the Supervision Consultant in accordance with Division 1 and Section 15010. The complete submittal shall include, but not be limited to, all of the following material: 1. Power calculations. a. Supervisory and alarm power requirements for all equipment. b. Justification showing power requirements and battery capacity calculations of system power supplies. c. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs in worst case condition. d. Calculations for fill density of gas containers and documentation of pipe sizes as required for system approval. 2. Complete manufacturer's catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements. 3. Submit panel configuration and interconnection of modules and all other data as required to make an informed judgment regarding product suitability. 4. The Sub-contractor shall submit copies of UL listing and FM approval data showing compatibility of the proposed device or appliance and the panel being provided. 5. Details and technical literature of the gas agent. 6. Complete drawings covering the following shall be submitted by the Sub-contractor for the proposed system: a. Floor plans showing all initiating, communication devices, end of line, supervisory, indicating appliances, output control devices, cylinders, pipe routing and size, and nozzles. Raceways shall be shown, marked for size, conductor count with type and size, showing the percentage of allowable National Electric Code fill used. b. Wiring diagrams showing points of connection and terminals used for all electrical connections to the system devices and panels. 7. A complete proposed system database including a description of all logic strings, control by event programming and point identification labels on a high density floppy disk and in a formatted, printed form, capable of off site editing, uploading and downloading shall be submitted for evaluation by the Supervision Consultant. A programming manual shall accompany the submitted program and shall be adequate to allow understanding, operation and modification of logic by the system owner for entry into the program. Software shall be provided to analyze and verify the validity of the program proposed to assure that the system is in compliance with the U.L. requirements for a NFPA 72 system. a. Additional software shall be furnished to check all program changes after software editing and list all functions effected by the editing changes to allow selective retesting of the system covering all program items impacted by the changes. 8. Statements shall be included, with copies of required licensing, verifying the qualifications of the installer as specified. 1.05 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION
A. The system shall be a complete, electrically supervised multiplex style fire detection and extinguishing system with intelligent analog alarm initiation, to be device addressable and annunciated as described and shown on the drawings. B. The system shall be UL listed for the release of total flooding extinguishing gases. The components of the extinguishing system shall be cross-listed with detection system and in conjunction shall comprise a single system intended for detection and extinguishing of fires.
Page 105 of 317
1.06
SYSTEM PRE-ALARM OPERATION
A. All hazard area smoke detectors shall be programmed to a sensitivity level that is extremely sensitive. This sensitivity setting shall be below the standard UL required sensitivity range. The purpose of this Pre-Alarm function sensitivity setting is to alert the occupants that a emergency condition may exist and should be investigated. Should a true emergency be determine by the alerted investigator, a manual station can be activated. 1. Activate sound alert and visual pre-alert signal. 2. The detector in a pre-alarm mode shall be programmed to light its LED alarm indicating lamp. 3. Pre-alarm activation shall be programmed as trouble causing. 4. Activate per alarm signal to the building alarm system 5. If the pre-alarm condition environmental conditions revert back to non alarming conditions, the device shall clear itself. B. Systems providing Pre-Alarm features shall be capable of manually testing Pre-Alarm features from the control panel by detector, by address. Testing shall allow for the verification of all associated output functions. This requirement is necessary due to the very sensitive levels that Pre-Alarm devices are capable of. It would be impossible to smoke test a detector to verify PreAlarm settings.
1.07
SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION
A. Manual Station: When manually activated, shall initiate the discharge of agent into the protected space with no delay. Stations shall be located at each exit discharge door. Mounting height shall be 1.2 m to the activation handle above finish floor. B. First Smoke Detector In Alarm: Shall cause the following actions and indications; 1. Activate the hazard area alarm strobes. 2. Activate the pulsating sounding mode for hazard area audible alarm horns. 3. Activate the alarm signal to the building alarm system. 4. Activate the release of magnetically held doors. (If equipped) 5. Display a custom message describing the device originating the alarm condition, at the fire alarm control panel and/or remote LCD enunciator. 6. Activate system alarm printer indicating device type, time, date and custom alarm message. (If equipped) 7. Flash detector alarm LED indicator. 8. Record within the non-volatile system historical memory, the occurrence of all alarm events including time, date, location and device ID. This memory shall be sized for a minimum of 800 events. C. Abort switch should be a 90 second, recycling, momentary activation abort station. D. Second Smoke Detector In Alarm: Shall cause the following actions and indications; 1. Activate the continuous sounding mode for hazard area audible alarm horns. a. Second detector programming shall be any other detector within the hazard. 2. Activate the shut down sequence for HVAC supply within the hazard area via the Fire Alarm System. Shutdown exhaust ventilating equipment within the space and close all associated dampers to seal the room. a. Re-start of normal HVAC functions shall not be made capable unless the system has been reset. b. A firemans By Pass switch shall be install adjacent to each system control panel to allow the starting of HVAC systems. 1) Switch shall be keyed.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 11. Section 15365 Gas Suppression Alarm System Page 106 of 317
2) Switch shall be monitored by an addressable interface module. 3) Activate GAS release solenoid: a. In addition agent release, an in-line piping pressure switch shall be provided, which shall be wired to cause illumination of Fire Agent Discharge signs outside the hazard area upon activation. The purpose of lighted warning signs is to provide positive confirmation of discharge and to warn occupants of the hazard. (See drawings for locations.) b. Power for sign illumination shall be system power or emergency power and approved by the Supervision Consultant. 4) Activate alarm signal to the building alarm system 5) Display a custom message describing the device originating the alarm condition, at the fire alarm control panel and remote LCD annunciators. 6) Activate system alarm printer indicating device type, time, date and custom alarm message. (If equipped) 7) Flash detector alarm LED indicator. 8) Record within the non-volatile system historical memory, the occurrence of all events with the time and date of occurrence and the device initiating the event. This memory shall be sized for a minimum of 800 events. PART 2 - SYSTEM PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFERRED MANUFACTURER
A. Refer to Particular Specifications. 2.02 DETECTION AND RELEASE CONTROL PANEL
A. The control panel shall be manufactured for mounting as indicated on the drawings. B. The gas suppression system control panel shall be Cerberus Pyrotronics model MXL addressable series or equivalent, modular in construction and shall include, but not limited to the hardware, software and firmware requuired to perform the following system functions: 1. Surface mounted steel cabinet with indicator viewing windows, hinged door and cylinder lock, dead front construction, and factory finished in baked enamel. When the keyed outer protective is opened, the panel shall be dead front with no terminals, wiring, circuit cards or batteries exposed to view. The dead front covers shall be individually hinged and secured by captive quarter turn latches for access by service personnel. 2. System power supplies, including necessary transformers rectifiers, regulators, filters and surge protection required for system operation, with the capacity to power the system in a worst case condition with all devices in alarm and all local indicating appliances active without exceeding the listed ratings. The system devices shall display normal and alarm conditions consistently whether operating from normal power or reserve (standby) power. 3. System 16 bit core processor, with internal operating system processing incoming alarm signals and issuing output commands required as a result of the alarm reception by system programming or manual commands. Total system response time shall not exceed 2.5 seconds on a system configured to the maximum capacity. All system processors shall be supervised by individual watchdog circuitry furnishing automatic restart after loss of activity. Systems with a single watchdog circuits for all processors shall no be acceptable. 4. Style 4 system digital communication capabilities as required to allow the control panel to communicate with remote circuit interface panels, annunciators, and displays. All communications shall be conducted in a digital format. Systems processing signals using pulse width or voltage level techniques are not considered acceptable.
Page 107 of 317
5. Style 4 analog signaling circuitry allowing communication with, and receipt of alarms from 120 points, consisting of a maximum of sixty intelligent analog alarm initiating and sixty intelligent controllable output devices. 6. Output circuits for the operation of audible and visual alert and release indication devices shall be provided as required by system configuration. Circuits shall be current limiting using self restoring solid state limiting components. Circuits requiring manual reset, board or fuse replacement shall not be considered acceptable. 7. Output circuits for the supervision and activation of supervised electrical solenoids for the release of the gaseous flooding extinguishing agent. Circuits shall be current limiting using self restoring solid state limiting components. 8. System shall have the capability of supporting remote indication via RS-485 System Network as indicated on the drawings. 9. The enclosure for the system shall provide complete dead front construction with no wiring, circuitry or batteries visible when the protective door is opened. 10. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of a complete power down condition. It shall return to an on line state as an operating system performing all programmed functions upon power restoration. Systems requiring battery backed-up memory devices shall not be acceptable. 11. The system shall incorporate the following controls and display items in addition to those previously described: a. System display consisting of an 80 character back lighted alphanumeric super twist LCD display readable at any angle. Thirty two character customer defined custom messages shall describe the location of the active device. 1) The system shall be programmed to allow troubles occurring and restored in the system to be automatically removed from the display queue, eliminating the necessity for individual acknowledging of these events. This feature shall not affect the historical logging of events as programmed. b. As a minimum, an LED display for "ALARM", "AUDIBLE SILENCED", "SUPERVISORY", "TROUBLE", "SECURITY", "POWER ON" and "PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLED". c. Touch activated membrane switches for "ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE", "AUDIBLE SILENCE", "SUPERVISORY ACKNOWLEDGE", "TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE", "SECURITY ACKNOWLEDGE", "RESET", "DISPLAY HOLD" and "DISPLAY NEXT". d. Touch activated membrane switches, programmable to perform a minimum of twelve custom functions such as select logic, disable, bypass automatic control commands or other special functions as required by the system user. e. Ten digit keypad for the passcode entry to perform programming and maintenance functions. 1) All membrane switches shall be tactile with audible feed-back when pressed. 2) The system shall be capable of supporting a minimum of four supervised remote LCD annunciators or system remote control locations. Additional unsupervised LCD annunciators shall be supported as required for system configuration. 3) Software defined logic module as required for each alarm initiation point, capable of controlling any combination of the system output functions using as logic factors; counting, verification, time, day, holiday, type of device, "and", "or", "not", "timer", "all", "any", flip-flop, D latch, and up to 32 levels of password security for programming, operation and service shall be possible. 4) Software logic modules and system database shall be programmed using a DOS compatible program on any IBM compatible computer. It shall be possible to program or edit the system database off site after downloading from the control panel. 5) Environmental compensation software driven logic for adjusting the alarm threshold windows on detectors to compensate for accumulating contamination and keep detector response sensitivity constant. The software shall compensate for either
Page 108 of 317
over-sensitized or de-sensitized units, raising a system flag when a detector approaches the allowable limits of adjustment, indicating a requirement for cleaning. 2.03 DETECTION AND RELEASE CONTROL SYSTEM POWER SUPPLIES
A. System primary power 1. Primary power for the control panel and the secondary power battery chargers shall each be obtained from the building emergency power source via fused cut-out. a. Each circuit used for primary power shall be capable of being measured and the voltage displayed via the LCD alphanumeric display on the control panel when in the service mode. B. Secondary power supply 1. Provide sealed gelled electrolyte batteries as the secondary power supply for the fire alarm control panel and each system circuit interface panel. The battery supply shall be calculated to operate its load in a supervisory mode for twenty four hours with no primary power applied and, upon restoration of primary power, operate its alarm mode in all call mode for fifteen minutes. Batteries shall be sized at 120% of the calculated size to compensate for deterioration and aging during the battery life cycle. Battery calculations shall be submitted to justify the battery size. Batteries shall be housed in the control cabinet or a separate cabinet with adequate cell separation to prevent accidental discharge. 2. Provide battery charging circuitry for each standby battery bank in the system low voltage power supply or as a separate circuit. The charger shall be automatic, adjusting the charge rate to the condition of the batteries. Battery charge rate and terminal voltage shall be read using the fire alarm control panel LCD display in the service mode, indicating directly in volts and amps. Meters reading in percentage are not acceptable. Charger shall be housed in the main fire alarm control panel or the battery cabinet. 2.04 INTELLIGENT DEVICE PROGRAMMER / TESTER
A. Furnish as a part of the installed system, a UL listed programmer and tester, complete with the following features: 1. The programmer shall be portable with internal rechargeable battery and charging supply sufficient for four hours of use before requiring recharging. 2. The programmer shall set and verify the device address and perform a device test to assure operation within the UL defined detection window. This programming and testing shall be done independent of the control panel and system wiring. 3. The programmer tester shall dynamically display the detector chamber analog voltage in real time. 4. Systems not supplying a portable tester shall provide a calibrated UL listed smoke generator for the testing of detectors. A four hour portable power supply shall be furnished to power the calibrated smoke source during the NFPA mandated tests. Detectors shall not be installed until after the construction clean-up of all trades is complete and final. Detectors that have been installed prior to final clean-up by all trades shall be cleaned or replaced in accordance with Chapter 7 - NFPA 72 - 1996. 5. Each addressable analog smoke detector shall be individually field tested prior to installing the device at its designated location to ensure reliability after shipment and storage conditions. A dated log indicating correct address, type of device, sensitivity and initials of the technician performing test shall be prepared and kept for final acceptance documentation. After testing, the detection devices and base shall be labeled with the system address, date and initials of installing technician. Labeling shall not be visible after installation is complete.
Page 109 of 317
2.05
SMOKE DETECTORS, LIGHT REFRACTION (PHOTOELECTRIC)
A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings, intelligent analog smoke detectors with features and characteristics as follows: 1. Detectors shall be programmable as application specific, selected in software for a minimum of eleven specific environmental fire fingerprints unique to the installed location. The technology required for these detectors shall eliminate the possibility of false indications caused by dust, moisture, RFI/EMI, chemical fumes, air movement and other deceptive phenomena while factoring fire burn rates, obscuration rate changes and hot/cold smoke phenomenon into the alarm decision to give the earliest possible real alarm condition report. Detectors shall be programmed with pre-alarm features. 2. The devices shall be protected by software in both the logic circuitry and the communication circuitry against undesirable effects from proximate electrical and electronic devices such as fluorescent light fixtures, variable frequency motor controllers and other sources of RF interference. 3. The detector shall be addressed, tested and programmed prior to installation using a UL listed programmer/tester. The detector readout shall yield a discreet electrical value for status tracking and logging for determining maintenance and cleaning requirements. 4. Detectors shall incorporate triple technology microprocessor chips including analog, digital and EEprom technologies on the single device. Surface mount technology, full shielding of the circuit board and RF attenuators on each field wiring connection point shall protect the detector from RF and line interference spikes. Integral algorisms shall be programmed to reject common sources of interference such as florescent fixtures. a. Address and sensitivity assignments shall be programmed electronically and devices requiring dip switches, rotary switches, staples or jumpers are not acceptable. 2.06 FIRE DETECTOR BASES
A. Detector bases shall be Cerberus Pyrotronics (or equivalent) low profile twist lock type with screw clamp terminals and self wiping contacts. Bases shall be installed on an industry standard, 100 mm square or octagonal electrical outlet box. 2.07 MANUAL STATIONS, INTELLIGENT
A. Provide intelligent manual stations (dual action) where shown on the drawings, to be flush or surface mounted as required. 1. Station shall be equipped with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the connection of field wiring. 2. The manual stations shall be addressable and identifiable by the local control fire alarm panel, and by the Network System. a. Address assignments shall be set electronically and reside within the station in non volatile memory. Devices using rotary switches, pins, jumpers or staples are not acceptable. 3. Surface mounted stations where indicated on the drawings shall be mounted using a manufacturer's prescribed matching baked red enamel outlet box. 4. Where indicated on the drawings, stations shall be key operated. 5. Stations shall be identified (permanently labelled) as manual gas suppression system release device. 2.08 INTELLIGENT SYSTEM INTERFACE MODULE
A. The intelligent interface module shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The unit shall incorporate a custom microprocessor based integrated circuit which shall provide communication with main fire control panel. The interface module shall supervise and monitor normally open or
normally closed dry contacts. The interface module shall report the contacts status to the control panel. The intelligent interface module shall be dynamically supervised and uniquely identifiable by the control panel. The intelligent interface modules address shall be set by electronic means only, no mechanical means such as dipswitches, rotary dials or by inserting programmable pins shall be used. The intelligent interface module shall be used to uniquely identify field devices such as water flow switches, tamper switches, OS&Y valves or as directed by these specifications and project drawings. Modules shall be supplied to meet the project requirements. 2.09 EVACUATION SIGNALS
A. Furnish and install, as required, where shown on the drawings, type MT signals with the following characteristics and capacities: 1. Appliance shall be electronic and use solid state components. Electro mechanical alternatives are not approved. Each electronic signal shall provide eight (8) field selectable alarm tones. The tones shall consist of: TONE, HORN, MARCH TIME HORN, CODE-3 HORN, CODE-3 TONE, SLOW WHOOP, SIREN and HI/LO. a. Tone selection shall be by durable dip switch assembly and not clips or jumpers. The audible and the strobe shall not operate from a single signaling circuit. Audible notification circuits shall be on dedicated circuits. b. The device shall provide two output sound levels: STANDARD and HIGH dBA. The HIGH dBA setting shall provide a minimum 5 dBA increase in sound output at nominal voltage. The HIGH anechoic dBA measurement at 10 feet at the alarm HORN SETTING shall be 101 dBA minimum for MT and 99 dBA minimum for MT Strobes, at nominal voltage. c. Operating voltages shall be 24VDC using filtered power or unfiltered power supply. All models shall have provisions for standard reverse polarity type supervision and IN/OUT field wiring using terminals that accept #12 to #18 AWG wiring. d. Signals shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or equivalent with solid state circuitry. Strobe shall meet UL 1971 and produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the Listed input voltage range. The strobe intensity shall be rated per UL 1971 for 15/75 candela here 15 candela UL 1971 Listing with 75 candela intensity near-axis. e. Xenon strobe with a minimum repetition rate of 1 HZ, not exceeding 3 HZ and a maximum duty cycle of 40% with a pulse duration of .2 seconds. f. Unfiltered or clear filtered white light. g. Compression type terminals shall be provided for the connection of field wiring up to #12 AWG. Terminals shall be provided for each of the output tones and strobe. 2.10 MANUAL RELEASE ABORT STATIONS
A. Furnish manual system release abort stations where shown on the drawings, having the following features: 1. Single action spring loaded switch, with normally open control contacts (minimum two). 2. Red, one and one-half inch diameter mushroom style push cap. 3. When operated, the push-button shall activate a 90 second delay the release of the extinguishing agent. If permitted to return to its normal "out" position, while the release control circuit is still in the activated condition, the cycle of delay will revert to eventual release. 4. Each abort station shall be monitored, as a supervisory causing device, with an addressable interface module. 5. The abort switch shall be provided on a steel, double gang plate, painted yellow and labeled "EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM ABORT STATION" in red letters. 6. The station shall be provided for surface mounting with matching back box or flush mounting, as indicated by symbols on the Drawings.
2.11
EXTINGUISHING SUB-SYSTEMS
A. The system shall meet all performance parameters as detailed in NFPA 2001. The extinguishing system shall be complete and operational and include but not be limited to the following components: 1. Agent storage container with valve: a. The extinguishing agent shall be stored in a DOT approved type 4BA or 4BW container capable of being filled in one pound increments. Storage cylinders of seamless steel construction shall not be deemed acceptable. b. The extinguishing agent shall be stored as a liquid, having a natural vapor pressure of 66.4 psia at 77NF., and super pressurized to 360 psig at 70NF. with dry nitrogen. c. Cylinder valve bodies shall be brass. Valves of other materials shall not be deemed acceptable. d. Storage cylinders shall be provided with a safety rupture disk and an integral internal pressure gauge, color coded for fast reference of pressure readings. Rise in internal pressure due to high temperature shall rupture the safety disk, venting the extinguishing gas before pressure critical to the survival of the cylinder are reached. e. Cylinder shall be equipped with a low pressure supervisory switch, reporting the supervisory condition to the release control panel. f. A liquid level indicating device shall be standard on all cylinders. This device shall be used a reliable means of indicating agent weight during routine servicing, eliminating the requirement for removal of the cylinder for weighing. 2. Discharge nozzles as required. a. Discharge nozzles of brass construction with female threads shall be used to distribute the extinguishing agent. b. Nozzles shall be available in 1/2" through 2" sizes with 180N and 360N dispersion patterns. c. Nozzles shall be FM Approved and UL listed. 3. Electric solenoid operated releasing devices as required: a. The extinguishing agent discharge shall be activated directly from the control panel via a supervised electrical control of the solenoid. b. The releasing device shall be removable for service and testing from the cylinder without the need for de-pressurizing the cylinder. Electrical tests of the solenoid shall be possible while removed from the cylinder and no part replacement shall be required as a result of the test. 1) The use of explosive squibs, disks, or other expendable parts requiring replacement after discharge is not acceptable. 2) Systems containing components requiring replacement due to a dated life span shall not be acceptable. c. The releasing device shall be also equipped for direct mechanical operation, providing a manual means of release. The device shall be provided with a manual lever and a faceplate with precise instructions for the mechanical activation of the system. d. Agent discharge shall occur from all containers as a result of actuation of the manual mechanical operation, electrical manual operating station or completion of the selected logic sequence as a result of automatic detection within the space being protected. 4. Gas suppression system extinguishing agent as required furnishing the specified concentration in the hazard being protected.
Page 112 of 317
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Show a general layout of the complete system including equipment arrangement. It shall be the responsibility of the Sub-contractor to verify dimensions and assure compatibility all other systems interfacing with the fire alarm system. 1. Identify on the drawings, conduit and conductor sizes and types with number of conductors in each conduit. Provide each conduit and device with a unique identification. For addressable alarm initiation devices, the system identifier shall be the system address for that device. Signals shall be sequentially numbered as the address of the controlling module 2. Indicate on the point to point wiring diagrams, interconnecting wiring within the panel between modules, and connecting wiring to the field device terminals. 3. Provide mounting details of Releasing control panel and other boxes to building structure, showing fastener type, sizes, material and embedded depth where applicable. 4. Identify on the drawings, cylinder locations an agent distribution piping with discharge nozzles. Indicate structural bracing details for distribution piping and cylinder mounting. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with the requirements of NEC, NFPA 70, NFPA 72 and NFPA 72E. B. Fasten equipment to structural members of building or metal supports attached to structure, or to concrete surfaces. 3.03 CONDUCTORS
A. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each with wire markers at every splice and terminal point. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible. 1. All wiring shall be supplied and installed in compliance with the requirements of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70, Article 760, and that of the manufacturer. 2. Wiring for analog loop circuits and speaker circuits shall be 18 AWG twisted. Wiring for strobe and audible circuits shall be a minimum 18 AWG. 3. All splices shall be made using pressure connectors. All connectors shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturers recommendations. 4. Crimp-on type spade lugs shall be used for termination of stranded conductors to binder screw or stud type terminals. Spade lugs shall have upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors. B. Permanently label or mark each conductor at both ends with permanent alpha-numeric wire markers. C. A consistent color code for fire alarm system conductors throughout the installation. 1. The Sub-contractor shall submit for approval prior to installation of wire, a proposed color code for system conductors to allow rapid identification of circuit types. D. Wiring within sub panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and maintenance.
Page 113 of 317
3.04
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
A. Complete and submit to the Supervision Consultant in accordance with NFPA 72, Article 1-7.2 (1993 Edition.) 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing, general: 1. All intelligent analog devices shall be tested for correct address and sensitivity using test equipment specifically manufactured for that purpose. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the system address, initials of the installing technician and date. 2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses. a. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses. b. The acceptance inspector shall be notified before the start of the required tests. All items found at variance with the drawings or this specification during testing or inspection by the acceptance inspector, shall be corrected. c. Test reports shall be delivered to the acceptance inspector as completed. 3. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests shall be made available by the Sub-contractor. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests: a. Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed equipment. b. Multimeter for reading voltage. current and resistance. c. Intelligent device programmer/tester. d. Laptop computer with programming software for any required program revisions. e. Two way radios, flashlights, smoke generation devices and supplies. f. Door fan test equipment as required to test for enclosure leakage (room integrity test). Systems requiring release of agent for approval are not acceptable. g. All required pipe pressure test meters to indicate acceptable system installation for distribution of extinguishing agent. 4. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the Sub-contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the acceptance inspector and Supervision Consultant. 5. System wiring: fire alarm circuits shall be tested for continuity, grounds, and short circuits. B. Acceptance testing: 1. Written acceptance test procedure (ATP)for testing the fire detection and extinguishing system components and installation will be prepared by the Supervision Consultant in accordance with NFPA 72, NFPA 72E NFPA 72H and this specification. The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, circuits, and programming. 2. A program matrix shall be prepared by the Sub-contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving "any", "or", "not", "count", "time", and "timer" statements; the complete output equation shall be referenced in the matrix. 3. A complete listing of all device labels for alpha-numeric annunciator displays and logging printers shall be prepared by the Sub-contractor. 4. The acceptance inspector shall use the system record drawings in combination with the documents specified under paragraph 3.01 During the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the ATP, the acceptance inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and correct subsequent system operation in the event of: 1) Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog signaling circuit. 2) Open, shorted and grounded network signaling circuit. 3) Open, shorted and grounded conventional zone circuits. 4) Open, shorted and grounded evacuation signal indicating circuits. 5) Intelligent device removal. 6) Primary power or battery disconnected. 7) Incorrect device at address. 8) Printer trouble, off line or out of paper. b. System alarm indicating appliances shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed. 2) Audibility and visibility at required levels. 3) Programmed solenoid activation for release of extinguishing agent under all logic conditions as specified. c. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) Correct message display for each alarm input at the control panel, each remote alpha-numeric display. d. System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) Correct zone transmitted for each alarm input. 2) Trouble signals received for disconnect. e. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows: 1) System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time as specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified for a period as specified. 2) System primary power shall be restored for forty eight hours and system charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully charged battery bank. 3) System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the fire alarm control panel using the test codes and displayed on the LCD display. 5. Upon completion of the release control testing, room integrity tests shall be conducted by the equipment manufacturer's representative in the presence of the Supervision Consultant's representative. a. Visual inspection shall verify the integrity of door bottom seals, dampers, weather stripping, caulking and foam sealant to assure that the protected area will contain the extinguishing agent for the required ten minutes. While the required work being inspected may be performed by other trades on the project, the responsibility for determining that corrective action is required shall rest with the Sub-contractor. 1) The Sub-contractor shall have the responsibility for determining the integrity of the room and shall be responsible for retesting if the tests fail due to excessive leakage or equipment failure after the corrective action has been completed. The piping shall be pneumatically tested in a closed circuit for a period of ten minutes at 150 psig. At the end of the ten minutes, the pressure drop shall not exceed 15% of the test pressure (30 psig). While pressurizing the piping, pressure shall be increased in 50 psig increments. A flow test using nitrogen shall be performed on the piping network to verify that flow is continuous and the piping nozzles are unobstructed. 6. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed during the ATP procedure, at the discretion of the acceptance inspector, the test shall be terminated. a. The Sub-contractor shall retest the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test documentation to the acceptance inspector.
Page 115 of 317
b. The acceptance inspector may elect to require the complete ATP to be performed again if, in his opinion, modifications to the system hardware or software warrant complete retesting. 3.06 SERVICES
A. The Sub-contractor shall warrant the entire system against mechanical and electrical defects for a period described in the Sub-contract general conditions. B. The Sub-contractor shall offer for the owners consideration at the time of system submittal a priced inspection, maintenance, testing and repair Sub-contract in full compliance with the requirements of NFPA 72H and NFPA 2001. 1. The services offered under this Sub-contract shall be performed at no charge during the first year after system acceptance and the owner shall have the option of renewing for single or multiple years up to five years at the price quoted upon completion of the warranty period. 2. The Sub-contractor performing the Sub-contract services shall be qualified and listed to maintain ongoing certification of the completed system to the UL for specific installed system listing. C. The Sub-contractor shall furnish training as follows for a minimum of four employees of the system user: 1. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms. 2. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions from the system control panel. 3. Training in the testing of the system including logging of detector sensitivity, field test of devices and response to common troubles. 4. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 8 hours, but shall be sufficient to cover all items specified.
END OF SECTION
Page 116 of 317
SECTION 15410 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKS INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide complete plumbing, sanitary and gas installation as specified and shown on the Drawings. C. Trenching and backfilling required in conjunction with underground piping furnished under this Section shall be as specified in applicable Sections of Division 2 and shall be included as Work under this Section. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance of components and methods specified herein shall comply with all applicable Federal, State and Local laws, ordinances, regulations and codes, and the latest industry standards including, but not limited to the entities listed below. 1. Abu Dhabi and UAE Code and Regulations 2. ADDC / ADWEA 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), B31.1 Power Piping 6. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 7. Water regulation certificate. 8. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 9. In addition, specific provisions cited herein shall govern for the associated specific application. 10. NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code 11. NFPA 58 Standard for the Storage and Handling of LPG 12. EN 752 (all parts) Drain and Sewer System outside Buildings 13. EN 12056-1: Gravity drainage systems insides buildings Pt 1: General and performance requirement. 14. EN 12056-2: Gravity drainage systems insides buildings Pt 2: Sanitary pipework, layout and calculation 15. EN 12056-4: Gravity drainage systems insides buildings Pt 4: Wastewater lifting plants 16. EN 12056-5: Gravity drainage systems insides buildings Pt 5: Installation and testing, instructions for operation, maintenance and use 17. BS 6700: Specification for Design, installations, testing and maintenance of services supplying water within buildings and their cartilages 17. Uniform Plumbing Code for Plumbing Installation 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Plumbing piping and appurtenances, of types and sizes required, shall have been satisfactorily used for purposes similar to those intended herein for not less than three years. B. Entities performing the Work of this section shall have experience on at least two projects involving complexities similar to those required under this Sub-contract.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 12. Section 15410 Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances Page 117 of 317
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Clean all pipe sections of foreign matter and cover ends with temporary sheet metal closures or plastic end caps of sufficient tightness to prevent entry of foreign matter prior to shipping to the construction site. B. Store pipe, fittings, valves and other components at the construction site on pallets or raised platforms with suitable coverings satisfactory to the Supervision Consultant to protect them against damage and weather. C. Inspect all pipe, fittings, valves and other components for damage before moving them from storage to the point of installation at the construction site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements shall be part of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE, FITTINGS AND FLANGES
A. Unless otherwise shown on the Sub-contract Drawings, provide pipe (and tube), fittings, and flanges in accordance with the "Pipe, Fittings, and Flanges Schedule" specified below, including gaskets, bolts, nuts, washers and other pressure containing parts necessary for the complete installation of piping systems. B. Nipples shall be extra-heavy shoulder type. No close nipples shall be used. All nipples shall have designation mark of the manufacturer and shall conform to ASTM pipe specifications for system served. C. Gaskets for flanges shall be 1.5 mm thick (after compression) rubber or neoprene, full-faced, and punched bolt holes. D. Unions shall be malleable iron, threaded, conforming to ANSI B16.39. PIPE, FITTINGS, AND FLANGES SCHEDULE SYSTEMS Sanitary (Soil & Waste) Drainage & Vent Pipe (Underground and aboveground except otherwise specified) Sanitary (Soil & Waste) Drainage & Vent Pipe (Villas and Apartments Building internal piping) Domestic Water Main Pipe (from water tank to riser) and underground / buried pipes High density polyethylene pipe Polyethylene pipe fitting with thermal fusion joint suitable for pressure system.
Page 118 of 317
PIPE uPVC Pipe
FITTINGS AND JOINTS uPVC pipe fittings with solvent weld joints for above ground and Push fit joints for underground.
uPVC Pipe Stainless Steel coupling for hubless pipe
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 12. Section 15410 Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances
Risers and horizontal distribution
Polypropylene pipe
Vertical drop inside the toilets, kitchen pantry etc. Hot water Application Horizontal distribution
XLPE/ PEX pipe Polypropylene pipe
Polypropylene pipe fitting with thermal fusion joints suitable for pressure system to DIN 8077 and 8078 suitable for water temperature of 20 80 deg. C Cross linked polyethylene pipes and fittings to DIN 16892 and 16893 Polyprolylene pipe fitting with thermal fussion joints suitable for pressure system to DIN 8077 and 8078 suitable for water temperature of 20 80 deg.C Cross linked polyethylene pipes
Vertical drop inside the toilets, kitchen pantry etc. LPG Gas Pipework in basement including risers (with fire-rated enclosure) Distribution from sub-meter to all draw-off points Swimming Pool - After the break tank, all. 2.02 ACCESSORIES
XLPE/ PEX pipe
API pipe
Light gauge copper pipe Unplasticised PVC pipe Class E
Screwed thread with welded joints from size 65 mm diameters and above. Copper compression fittings or capillary joints and split-in flange welded to pipe from pipe size 65 mm diameter and above. UPVC fittings solvent weld joint
A. Pipe Identification 1. Provide pipe identification in accordance with Section 15190. 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install, fabricate and provide all pipe hangers and supports adequate to support and guide the piping, allow for forces imposed by expansion joints, roof deflection and expansion, satisfy structural requirements and maintain proper clearances with respect to adjacent piping, equipment and structures. B. Hangers and supports shall include guides, anchors, stops, restraints, welded attachments, insulation shields, saddle strands, stays, braces, bolts, nuts, washers, expansion bolts, pipe clamps, beam clamps, and supplementary structural steel for pipe hangers and supports. C. Keep the different types of hangers to a minimum. Provide clevis type hangers for all sizes and trapeze hanger for multiple pipes run, additional hanger shall be provided within 350mm from the joint. D. Suspend hangers from beam, shall use clamps to MSS SP-58 type 21 or 28. E. Support vertical piping with steel riser clamps to MSS SP-58 type 42. F. Trapeze type hangers of steel construction, with hold-down U-bolts, shall be used for two or more pipes which have a uniform slope throughout.
Page 119 of 317
G. Base hanger loads on weight of pipe supported, weight of insulation covering and weight of fluid being transported. H. When loads between supports can be expected to cause a sag in the pipe in excess of 3 mm, reduce spacing as necessary to stay within such a limit. I. Where vertical adjustment can not be provided by supporting rods provide and install a forged steel turnbuckle with top and bottom lockouts having a vertical adjustment of 150mm, minimum. Do not hang piping from other piping and ductwork,
J.
K. Vertical pipes shall be supported on every floor and at intervals between floors so that no more than 3 m of pipe is unsupported. L. Provide protection shields to MSS SP-58 type 40 for all insulated piping at all points of support. Shields shall be 300 mm long, galvanized steel plate with a radius suitable for the required applications, including insulation; the minimum shield thickness shall be 1.5mm. M. Tabs in metal deck construction shall not be used to support pipe or equipment. N. Provide pipe anchors where necessary to restrain forces due to thermal expansion and contraction of pipe. O. Anchors shall be adequately installed to rigidly oppose forces acting on them and shall be embedded in structural concrete or connected to the building structural steel framework. P. Provide pipe guides where necessary to confine movement along the centerline of the pipe due to thermal expansion and contraction between anchors. Guides shall be adequately installed and placed, generally between 6 m to 10 m on centers and an equal distance from the expansion loop. Q. Expansion anchors, self-drilling expansion shields, power driven studs and similar devices shall not be used, unless specifically approved by the Supervision Consultant. R. Unless otherwise specifically approved, hanger rod size and horizontal spacing shall be within the following limits: 1. Steel Pipe: Pipe Size Max. Hanger Minimum Spacing Rod Size 12.5 mm to 25 mm 2.5 m 10 mm 35 mm to 50 mm 3.0 m 10 mm 65 mm to 3 85 mm 3.5 m 12.5 mm 100 mm and 125 mm 3.5 m 15 mm 150 mm 3.5 m. 18 mm 200 mm 4.0 m 22 mm 250 mm and 300 mm 4.5 m 22 mm 2. Plastic and Copper pipe: Pipe Size 12.5 mm to 30 mm 35 mm and 50 mm 65 mm to 85 mm
Max. Hanger Spacing 1.2 m 1.5 m 2.0 m
Minimum Rod Size 10 mm 10 mm 15 mm

Page 120 of 317
2.04
SLEEVES, SEALS AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Pipe Penetration through Walls, Partitions and Floors 1. Piping passing through masonry or concrete walls and framed partitions shall have a trim opening cut no greater than necessary for the installation of a sleeve secured therein. Sleeve shall be 12.5 mm in diameter larger than the diameter of the insulated pipe. Sleeve shall be flush with the finished wall or partition surface. 2. Sleeves through concrete floors for piping shall have the opening 12.5 mm in diameter larger than the diameter of the insulated pipe passing through. Floor sleeves shall project one inch above floor slab. 3. Pipe insulation shall be omitted at penetrations through fire-rated barriers. In all cases pack the annular space between the pipe (whether insulated or uninsulated) and sleeve with mineral wool. Additionally, at penetrations through fire-rated barriers seal the annular space to retain the fire integrity of the fire-rated barrier with nonhardening through-penetration firestops having F-ratings, compatible with the fire ratings of the barriers in which they are installed, per ASTM E814. Firestop systems shall be UL-approved. 4. Sleeves in walls and floors shall be galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40 for sizes up to 250 mm and 10 mm wall thickness for 300 mm and larger. Sleeves in partitions shall be 20-gauge galvanized sheet metal. 5. Piping in exposed areas, passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be fitted with chromium-plated cast brass escutcheons with fastening set screws. 6. Piping passing through floor waterproofing membrane shall be provided with a lead flashing or a copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe and shall be set over the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 250 mm above the floor. The annular space between the flashing and the pipe shall be sealed watertight. 7. Piping passing through roof construction shall be provided with counterflashing, consisting of steel rainhood secured all around the pipe and overlapping the flashing. B. Pipe Penetration through Exterior Foundation and Pit Walls 1. General a. All penetrations for piping through perimeter foundation walls and subgrade pit walls shall be provided with the pipe sleeves and seals as shown on the Sub-contract Drawings. b. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 for sizes up to 250 mm and 10 mm wall thickness for sizes 300 mm and larger. All pipe sleeves shall be galvanized steel, set into foundation walls with anchors and water stop plates. 2. Reserved 3. Interlocking Modular Seals (Link-Seal) a. Where "Link Seal" is shown on the Sub-contract Drawings, seal shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking sealing element links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and the sleeve. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeved opening. The seal shall provide electrical insulation between the pipe and wall. b. The inside diameter of each wall sleeve shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe, seal, and any coating or insulation to ensure a watertight joint. c. Install sleeves and seals in accordance with the seal manufacturer's instructions to provide a watertight installation.
d. Seals for perimeter foundation wall penetrations shall be two individual sealing units in tandem unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Single sealing unit shall be used for pit wall penetration unless otherwise shown on the Sub-contract Drawings. e. Seals shall be Thunderline Corp. "Link-Seal", or approved equal. 2.05 INSULATION OF CONDENSATE PUMP DISCHARGE
A. Condensate pump discharge pipe and condensate drain pipe shall be insulated with 19 mm thick fire-retardant type closed cell insulation similar to Armaflex or approved equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Piping 1. Install piping as shown on the Drawings and straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls, neatly spaced, with risers plumb and true. 2. Piping shall pitch back toward system drain valve and any installed low points or pockets shall have a hose end drain valve. 3. Avoid tool marks and unnecessary pipe threads. Burrs formed when cutting pipe shall be removed by reaming. Before installing pipe, thoroughly clean the inside, free of cuttings and foreign matter. Cut all pipes square and smooth and make up all joints to required limits. 4. Erect all piping to obtain sufficient flexibility to prevent excessive stresses in materials and excessive bending moments at joints or connections. 5. Make changes in pipe size by the use of reducing fittings. Do not use reducing bushings except by approval of the Supervision Consultant. Do not use close or shoulder nipples. 6. Arrange water piping so that system can be completely drained. Where lines are purposely pitched for drainage, a uniform grade shall be maintained. Lines shall be so supported as to prevent pocketing of water. No lines shall have pockets due to changes in elevation unless proper provisions for draining are made. 7. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of doors and windows; shall not encroach on aisles, passageways and equipment; and shall not interfere with the servicing or maintenance of any equipment. Adjacent pipelines shall be grouped in the same horizontal or vertical plane. 8. Provide expansion loops as necessary for all plumbing piping to allow for thermal expansion and building movement. B. Pipe Joints 1. Threaded Joints a. Make up threaded joints tight using pipe joint Teflon compound or tape, applied on the male thread only. 2. Flanged Joints a. Make up flanged joints square and tight with gaskets. Dip bolts and nuts in mixture of graphite and oil immediately prior to installation. 3.02 FIELD TESTS
A. General 1. Perform tests as herein specified on the various piping systems or portions thereof prior to backfilling, painting, concealing or insulating. 2. Notify the Supervision Consultant and those authorities having jurisdiction, at least 48 hours in advance of making the required tests, so that arrangements may be made for their presence to witness the tests. 3. Provide and install all equipment and devices required in connection with tests. Provide all
4.
5.
6.
7. 8. 9.
necessary materials, supplies, labor and power for the tests. Should the tests reveal any leaks or deficiencies in piping installed under this Section, make the necessary repairs immediately, or, if required by the Supervision Consultant, replace defective work with new work without additional cost to the Authority. Repeat tests as directed until the entire installation is proven satisfactory. No temporary method of repairing leaks will be permitted. Where piping installed under this Section is connected to any existing system, such installed piping shall be isolated from the existing system during the performance of the required field tests, unless otherwise directed by the Supervision Consultant. The Supervision Consultant reserves the right to direct the Contractor not to isolate the newly installed piping from the existing system during the performance of the required field tests. In such event, the Contractor shall correct any revealed leaks or other deficiencies within the first 6m of the existing system, measured in any direction from the point of connection with the newly installed piping, all as directed by the Supervision Consultant and at no additional cost to theproject . Dispose of water removed from pipelines in a manner that will not cause damage to any property. Provide and install the required air vents in the piping system tested. All equipment, including water coolers, and all controls and instruments shall be isolated from the piping system during test, as well as during cleaning, disinfecting and flushing procedures.
B. On-Site Testing and Commissioning 1. Two months prior to completion of the Sub-contract Works, submit for the Supervision Consultant's approval a detailed programme for conducting on-site acceptance tests and commissioning. 2. Start up, operate, test and adjust the systems in accordance with the agreed programme. The setting shall be supervised by the manufacturer's representative, who shall remain on site until the equipment is operating satisfactorily and accepted by the Supervision Consultant. Advise and co-ordinate with the manufacturer's representatives so that all testing is carried out according to the agreed programme. 3. The whole installation shall be given the following tests to bring the plant into running order. The Supervision Consultant shall be given reasonable notice together with a copy of recorded test results, generally not less than seven (7) days, regarding the nature of tests, the time and location. Acceptance tests will only be witnessed by the Supervision Consultant when the submitted tests results are found satisfactorily. 4. All instruments, tools, material and labour required to perform these tests shall be provided. 5. Before the tests are carried out, remove connected equipment and components which are liable to damage under test, and shall provide and fix all the necessary gauges, blanking flanges, etc. 6. Prior to the system start-up, the following inspection, tests and pre-commissioning treatment shall be carried out: a. Tanks and Level Switches 1) Check sides and edges of sectional tanks for distortion. The tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned with water and drained before city mains supply will feed in. 2) Also before city mains supply will feed in, the level switch shall be simulated for the various cut-in and cut-out settings. b. Pressure Switches 1) The testing equipment arrangement for pressure switches and pressure gauges shall be as shown on the drawings or of an approved equivalent. 2) The pressure settings corresponding for pump cut-in (lamp and buzzer energised) and pump cut-out (lamp and buzzer de-energised) and reset differentials shall be tested by applying the hand jacking pump or by opening the test valve. 3) The pressure gauges to be tested shall be connected as shown on the drawing in lieu of the pressure switch. The gauges to be tested shall be regarded acceptable
when the pressure readings of all three gauges are the same throughout the jacking pressure range varied by applying the hand pump. c. Flow switches 1) The testing equipment for the flow switches shall be a as shown on the drawings or of an equivalent approved by the Supervision Consultant. 2) The calibration test equipment shall provide a flow of 60 dm3/min over the vane of the flow switch in the direction shown, to be confirmed by the direct reading flow meter. 3) The flow switch contacts shall make with energisation of the lamp and the buzzer, upon a flow not greater than 60 dm3/min flowing over the vane in the correct direction. d. Hydrostatic Tests 1) All parts of the water circuit shall be filled with water before hydrostatic pressure testing, and pump running tests for verification of pressure and flow rate, are conducted. 2) The hand jacking pump shall be applied to increase the system pressure to 2 times the working pressure or 1.5 times the working pressure plus 3.5 bar whichever is the lower but in any case not less than 7 bar. The pressure shall be maintained for a period not less than 24 hours. 3) Where any section of pipework or equipments unable to withstand the maximum pipework test pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipework test then that section of pipework or equipment shall be re-tested at the appropriate test pressure. 4) House drains shall be hydrostatically tested to a water head of 1.2m at the high end and not more than 2.4 at the low end and shall show no appreciable loss of water after elapse of two hours. 5) In every test, water used shall be left in the pipes until they are covered with earth or other trench filling material to a depth of at least 1m over the top of pipes and until permission is given by the Supervision Consultant for the water to be released. If after the Supervision Consultant has approved the sewer or pipeline and has given permission for the trenches to be refilled the pipes become damaged and loses water from any cause and/or admit subsoil water, The Contractor shall uncover the pipes and make good the defect made good and the pipes retested as before and all at the Contractors expense. 6) See details of hydrostatic test requirements below. e. Cleaning, Flushing 1) Prior to start-up and satisfactorily hydraulic testing, the Contractor shall clean the entire installation including all fittings and pipework and the like after installation and keep them in a new condition. All pumping systems shall be flushed and drained at least 3 timesthrough to get rid of contaminating materials. 2) All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced. 3) Sample shall be collected after re-filling and tested by approved Laboratory. Test rest shall conform to the WHO Guideline. f. Electrical Tests 1) Electrical tests shall comply with the current edition of IEE regulations and requirements enforced by local authorities. 2) Electrical insulation tests earth electrode resistance test and cost amenity test shall apply to busbars, isolators and other equipment and wiring where applicable. 3) A 500V DC megger tester shall be used to check the insulation resistance. The reading shall not be less than 5 mega-ohm in all instances. 4) Function simulation tests shall be performed to ensure that the systems have been installed to the control requirements as described in the specification therein. g. Pump Drives 1) The direct coupling of the pump drives shall be dismantled before the pump motor control panel is energised.
2) Demonstrate to the Supervision Consultant of acceptable clearances of the coupling alignment for ensuring satisfactory power transmission. Pump alignment shall be undertaken by specialist or the pump supplier in the presence of the Supervision Consultant. 3) The coupling shall not be re-mated again till the correct motor rotation has been demonstrated with power drawn from the energised pump motor control panel. h. Pump Operating Test 1) Ensure to the satisfaction of the Supervision Consultant that the installation or portion thereof which has been set to work complies with all requirements including the following: 2) That the plant and apparatus shall be of robust construction and of capacity for the duty specified. 3) That all valves, switches, controls and the like are properly regulated and capable of proper operation and in the case of valves are capable of being shut-off. 4) That all apparatus shall be silent. 5) That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately. 6) That all services are tested in accordance with the details of the relevant clauses of this Specification. i. Hydrostatic Tests 1) Storm and Sanitary Drainage and Vent Tightly close all openings in the entire system and fill it with water to the point of overflow above the roof. The water level shall be maintained for one hour. When piping is tested in sections, test piping with a pressure equivalent to a 1.2m water head. The water level shall be maintained for one hour. For piping added, relocated or replaced on existing systems, install a test tee at the lowest elevation of each added, relocated or replaced piece of pipe and fill it with water to overflow level of next highest fixture outlet or drain. The water level shall be maintained for one hour. 2) Domestic and irrigation Water Cap or plug all outlets, apply a hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times of maximum working pressure and sustain such pressure for one hour. 5% NDT test for all pipe joints 3) Gas Piping Generally the pipe network test shall comply with local authority regulation. Notwithstanding that, Distribution piping up to 10kPa is to be tested at 20kPa for a minimum of one hour. Distribution piping over 20kPa through 60kPa is to be tested at one 690kPa for a minimum of four hours. For testing, the piping shall be filled with air or an inert gas, and the source of pressure shall be isolated before the pressure readings are made. 100% NDT test for all pipe joints j) Smoke and peppermint test: 1. After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the entire drainage system shall be verified as to materials, and shall be tested and proven gastight by either a smoke test or a peppermint test. k) Cleaning and Disinfecting 1. The potable water system shall be disinfected prior to use by a method of disinfection in accordance with the applicable code. 3.03 STATUTORY AUTHORITIES TEST AND INSPECTIONS
A. As and when notified in writing or instructed by the Supervision Consultant, submit shop drawing and attend all tests and inspections carried out by Civil Defence, Water Authority and other
Statutory Authorities, and shall forthwith execute free of charge any rectification work ordered by the Supervision Consultant as a result of such tests and inspections which determine noncompliance with Statutory Regulation. Some of these tests may take place after the issue of Completion Certificate and the Contractor shall make all allowances in this respect. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of all necessary forms and shop drawings to the Statutory Authorities which shall conform in layout to the latest Architectural plans submitted kept by these Authorities. C. The submission shall comply with the requirements set forth in the current Codes of Practice and circular letters of the Statutory Authorities. The as-built shop drawings to be submitted shall be forwarded to the Supervision Consultant for checking before submission. 3.04 PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING CHECKS
A. Ensure that all equipment is thoroughly cleaned, lubricated and checked for serviceability before setting to work. Particular attention is drawn to the removal of building debris from the pipework systems. B. Special attention is drawn to the need for thoroughly flushing out all pipework systems to ensure that all foreign matter is removed. C. All automatic controls and safety devices shall be inspected and checked for service ability before the working fluid or electricity is applied to the system. 3.05 COMMISSIONING
A. When the various installations have been completed and the preliminary commissioning checks carried out, set to work, regulate and calibrate all system in the entire installation. Special attention shall be paid to the following items: 1. That all valves, switches, controls, etc. are regulated and capable of proper operation and in the case of isolation valves that they are capable of tight shut off. 2. That all apparatus is silent in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. 3. That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately. 4. That all services are tested in accordance with the details in the relevant clauses of this Specification. 5. Operate pumps, pressure reducing sets, etc. to ensure that all control systems are functioning correctly and are properly set, sequenced or interlocked. 3.06 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A. Following commissioning of the entire installation, and prior to issue of the Completion Certificate, carry out final acceptance tests in accordance with a programme to be agreed with the Supervision Consultant. Should the results of the acceptance tests show that plant, systems and/or equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures as given in this Specification, the Contractor shall adjust, modify and if necessary replace the equipment without further payment in order that the required performance be obtained. B. Where acceptance tests are required by the relevant Authorities having jurisdiction, these tests shall be carried out by the Contractor prior to the issue of Completion Certificate. 3.07 PAINTING
A. Upon completion of the installation, remove all protecting materials, thoroughly remove all scale and grease and leave in a clean condition for painting. Painting shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 9, Section entitled "PAINTING". END OF SECTION
SECTION 15420 DOMESTIC WATER VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. 1.02 A. WORK INCLUDED Comply with Division, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. Provide and install all valves as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Refer to General Requirements and Section 15010 for procedure and additional submittal requirements. 2. Furnish shop drawings and product data for valves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. GENERAL Provide valves of same manufacturer for all plumbing systems, including valves furnished with equipment. For copper tubing, provide solder-joint valves, or IPS-to-Copper adapter, sized for use with tubing and respective valve. Furnish valves designed for minimum PN16, unless otherwise specified. For flanged valves, provide companion flanges of same PSI rating-class of valve being used. Provide valves rated not less than 125-pound steam working pressure for plumbing systems unless indicated otherwise. Provide valve materials suitable for service and temperature of respective systems, especially with respect to discs, plugs, balls, linings, gaskets, and lubricants of globes valves, plug cocks, ball valves, etc. Provide valves at points shown and as required for complete isolation of equipment, branches off mains arranged so as to give complete and regulation control of piping systems throughout the building. Install valves, with neat appearance and grouping, so that all parts are easily accessible for maintenance. Provide valves as specified in valve schedule below. Figure numbers listed are given as standard for type and construction. Valves for similar service shall be of one manufacturer, including valves furnished with equipment.
B.
C. D. E.
F.
G.
H.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 13. Section 15420 Domestic Water Valves
Page 127 of 317
I.
Provide composition discs for bronze globes, angles or checks. Provide bronze discs for IBBM globes, angles, or checks except where otherwise specified or approved at recommendation of the manufacturer. Wheel handles to be non-heating style cast from malleable iron ASTM A197. Mark each valve at the factory with the following minimum information, engraved, stamped or cast on each valve or metal tag permanently attached to the valve. 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Catalog or Figure number. 3. Size and pressure class. 4. Arrows shall indicate direction of flow on check, globe, angle, non-return and eccentric plug valves. 5. Valves for fire protection systems shall be UL approved and shall bear the UL label. VALVES TAGS AND CHARTS Provide valve identification in accordance with Section 15010 and 15190. SAFETY AND RELIEF VALVES Consolidated or Watts, type and size as applicable, constructed and rated in accordance with ASME, and so stamped. Use Temperature and Pressure Relief valves for water heaters set with temperature relief at 210 F, Watts Model (40XL). Valves shall have capacity to relieve maximum possible generated energy while maintaining pressure in protected equipment at no more than 10 percent above vessel working pressure. Drain from relief valves shall spill to adjacent floor drain or to mop receptor. VALVE SCHEDULES Description 1. Gate Vales: 50 mm or smaller bronze body and wedge, with soldered brazed or threaded ends to suit. Rising stem type with a union bonnet. 65 mm and larger flanged iron body, bronze mounted, bronze stem, OS&Y, TFE imp. 2. Butterfly Valves: 65 mm through 150 mm with flanged end body for all services up to and including 2,000 kPa. Valve body shall be Bronze. Valves shall be bi-directional and provide bubble-tight shut-off and dead-end service at full rated working pressure. Disc seal (EPDM) shall be rated for service up to 100 degrees C.
J. K.
2.02 A. 2.03 A.
B.
C.
D. 2.04
Page 128 of 317
3.
Globe Valves: 50 mm and smaller, bronze body, screwed ends, rising stem, TFE imp. Stem material to ASTM B62. 65 mm and larger, flanged iron body bronze mounted, bronze rising stem, TFE imp. asbestos-free packing.
4.
Ball Valves: 6 mm to 50 mm WOG bronze body, screwed ends, teflon seats and seals.. Check Valves: 50 mm and smaller bronze body, screwed ends, swing type. 65 mm and larger iron body, bronze mounted, flanged, swing type. Provide silent, double center guided, conical spring type silent check valve on pumps discharge.
5.
6.
Gas cocks, AGA approved, UL listed: Line valves 50 mm and smaller, square head, cock wrench bronze. Line valves 65 mm and larger, short pattern, lubricated plug, including operating wrench.
7.
Air vent (manual): Same as gate valve (50mm and below) Bib taps: Brass for gardens, planters and plantrooms. Chrome plated or stainless steel for sinks in kitchens and utilities rooms. Strainers: For 50 mm and below, Y-type with stainless steel screen, 26 swg with 0.8 peforations. Screwed ends. For above 50 mm, Y-type sinle basket. 20 mesh stainless steel screen, bolted cover. Flanged end.
8.
9.
Page 129 of 317
2.05 A.
FLOW METERING AND BALANCING VALVES Provide as indicated on drawings preso B-Plus series flow metering and balancing value. Valve shall be installed on hot water return piping. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Reduced pressure principle, conforming to AWWA C506 and ASSE Standard 1013. Complete assembly with two spring-loaded toggle lever check valves, automatically operating pressure differential relief valve, shut-off valves and test cocks. All internal parts of check and relief valves must be removable or replaceable without removal of the unit from the line. 1. C. On domestic water service: Epoxy coated cast iron check valve bodies with bronze check seat and stainless steel relief valve seats. Install and maintained in accordance with ADDC / ADWEA requirements.
2.06 A. B.
2.07 A.
DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK VALVE UL listed, FM approved epoxy coated ductile iron, check valve bodies with bronze replaceable seats, 300 series stainless steel chemically resistant rubber check valve disc, stainless check components cover bolts, 1,100 kPa, with meter on bypass. Install and maintain in accordance with ADDC / ADWEA and Civil Defence Regulations. Cross-Connection Control, Department of Health and Water Authority requirements. Provide on fire standpipe and sprinkler services.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Provide all equipment with shutoff valves. Provide all valves strainers, check valves, except control valves and unless specifically sized, of same size as the pipes in which they are installed unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixture stops. All hand-controlled line valves are to be gate, ball or butterfly valves, except where throttling control or frequent operation is required, provide globe or angle valves, unless otherwise shown or specified. Install all globe and angle valves to close against the pressure. Position gate valves so that stems are in any suitable angle from horizontal to upright position. Install valves only in accessible locations. Do not install valves with stems pointing downwards unless specifically indicated. Wherever possible, install valves accessible from floor level. Provide operating handles for all valves and cocks. Provide adequate clearance for easy operation. Support line valves at the valve in addition to regularly spaced pipe supports shown and specified. Provide drain valves and hose adapters at all low points, etc. Install swing checks and gravity closing lift checks in horizontal position.
B.
C.
D.
E. F. G.
Page 130 of 317
H.
Provide discharge pipe from all relief and safety valves. Extend to over approved drain receptacle with air gap. Provide ball valves to isolate shock absorbers. Provide open-ended line valves with plugs or blind flanges. Where required for access provide access doors in accordance with Section 15010. TESTING Test valve bonnets for tightness. Test operates valves from closed-to-open-to-closed position while valve is under test pressure. Test automatic valves including solenoid, pressure relief valves, safety valves and temperature and pressure relief valves for proper operation at settings indicated. Insure that valves are field checked for packing and lubricant and that disc is for service intended. Replace leaking packing. Service valves which do not operate smoothly and properly with suitable lubricant before placing in operation. Test relief valves, safety relief valves, safety valves and temperature and pressure relief valves three times.
I. J. K. 3.02 A.
B.
C.
D.
END OF SECTION
Page 131 of 317
SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment required to furnish, deliver and install all work under this Section as required by the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide, install and perform all operations required for the complete installation of all piping specialties included but not restricted to the following: 1. Flashing 2. Nipples and couplings 3. Dialectric fittings 4. Cleanouts 5. Drip pans 6. Hose Bibs 7. Gauges 8. Thermometers 9. Deep-Seal Trap 10. Water Hammer Arrestor 11. Floor drains/ traps and gully traps 12. Expansion joints 13. Vacuum breakers 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provision of Sub-contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. Attention is directed to other Sections of these specifications which affect work of this Division. 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 for all items specified in this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLASHING
A. Copper flashing shall have a minimum weight of not less than 16 ounces per square foot, complying with ANSI/ASTM B-370. B. Lead flashing shall have a minimum weight of not less than 4 pounds per square foot, complying with ANSI/ASTM B-29. C. Flashing fittings for pipes through roof shall be galvanized cast iron fitting with counter flashing recess, 500mm. Extend flashing at least 500mm square around pipe and 18 high. D. Flashing for vent pipes through roof and roof drains shall extend a minimum of 600 mm square and around floor drains 600 mm square.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 14. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties
Page 132 of 317
2.02
NIPPLES AND COUPLINGS
A. Extra heavy pipe shall be used for nipples where the unthreaded portion is less than 37.5 mm inches in length. B. Close nipples will not be permitted, only shoulder nipples shall be used. C. Right and left couplings are restricted to water and gas pipe 30 mm and smaller. D. Brass ground joint unions are restricted to water pipe 30 mm and smaller. 2.03 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Provide dielectric insulating couplings which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping. 2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Use Y (and TY) fittings for cleanouts; full size Y for piping up to 100 mm and not less than 100 mm Y outlets for piping 5 inches and larger. B. Provide cleanouts for storm and sanitary piping at bases of stacks, at changes in direction of horizontal piping, and at 15 m intervals, minimum, on horizontal runs. C. Toilet room wall cleanouts shall be cast iron caulk ferrule and cast iron head seal plug with stainless steel cover and center screw. D. Cleanouts at changes of direction of above-floor piping shall be cast iron caulk ferrule with straight threaded, tapered bronze plug. E. All cleanout plugs shall be lubricated with graphite before installation. 2.05 DRIP PANS
A. Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion resistant sheet metal with watertight joints and with edges turned up 37.5 mm at location indicated on the drawings. Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 6 mm steel rod. Provide a 25 mm copper drain line connection at low point and piped to a mechanical equipment room floor drain or service sink. 2.06 HOSE BIBBS
A. Where shown on the Sub-contract Drawings, finish shall be rough brass in mechanical or nonfinished spaces. In all finished areas provide hose bibs polished chrome plated with polished chrome standard loose tee key. Provide matching vacuum breakers at each hose bib. 2.07 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. 100 mm diameter, black enamel cast aluminum case, black epoxy coated steel ring with shatterproof glass, stainless steel movement with bronze pinion and segment shaft. B. Provide dial with suitable range, brass pressure scrubber, brass tee-handle cock. C. Locate on water service, inlet and outlet of each backflow preventer, suction and discharge of pumps. 2.08 THERMOMETER
A. 100 mm diameter cast aluminum case, CP brass ring with heavy glass, vapor pressure or liquid actuated bronze Bourdon tube, adjustable angle or rigid union back or bottom connection with copper bulb. 1. Locate on water heater, outlet of thermostatic tempering valve, HW return piping, and as noted. 2. Locate at inlet and outlet piping of AHU/PAU, heat exchanger, cooling tower and chiller.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 14. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties Page 133 of 317
2.09
EEP-SEAL TRAP
A. Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, clean out where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated. 1. 50 mm: 100 mm minimum water seal 2. 65 mm and larger: 125 mm minimum water seal 2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. ASTM B 88, type K Hard drawn copper body, brass piston and threaded connector. Seal lubricant to be ADDC / ADWEA or recognized authority approved for use in potable water system. 2.11 FLOOR DRAINS (ALL FLOOR DRAINS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DEEP SEAL TRAPS)
A. Finished Areas: 1. Epoxy coated cast body with reversible clamp device and adjustable 125mm diameter nickel bronze 6 mm thick strainer secured with stainless steel screws 100mm throat on strainer. I quarry or ceramic tiled areas use 125mm square satin finish strainer. B. Combination Funnel and Floor Drains (in Mechanical rooms): 1. All epoxy coated cast body with adjustable collar and 150mm epoxy coated coated full opening grate with 100mm x 230mm oval funnel. C. Unfinished Areas: 1. All epoxy coated cast body with seepage flange, adjustable collar, clamping device and 150mm diameter grate. D. Pit Drain: 1. All epoxy coated pit drain for use in elevator pits with slotted grate, bronze back water valve and clamping device sized as indicated on drawings. E. Area Drains: 1. All bronze 387 x 287mm area drain complete with adjustable flange, sediment bucket, heavy duty nickel bronze grate and 100mm drain connections. 2.12 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Duco cast iron body with adjustable bronze expansion sleeve, peking gland and graphite peking and bronze bolts and wing nut. Installed in vertical position only. B. Horizontal storm drain expansion joints shall be flanged end, maximum working pressure of 1000 kPa, working temperature of 450 C, test pressure of 1500 kPa, single hinged bellows.
Page 134 of 317
2.13
VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Bronze body, chrome-plated, provide check valve at the outlet side of vacuum breaker. 2.14 GULLY TRAP / CARPARK DRAIN
A. Cast iron body to ADM approved standard. 2.15 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof Drain: 1. Epoxy coated body with deck clamp, extension, bearing pan, water proofing flange, secured aluminium dome. 2.16 MANHOLES
A. Manholes 1200mm diameter pre-cast or poured in place concrete complete with frames, covers and GRP liner in accordance with current Municipality/Drainage Department Standards, refer to section 15300 & 15425. 2.17 MANHOLES/GULLY TRAPS COVERS
A. All covers shall be ductile iron with black bitumen coating. Manhole covers shall have clear opening of 600 x 600 mm. B. All manholes and gully traps shall be vented as per drainage department requirements. Gully trap covers shall have clear opening of 300 x 300 mm. C. All manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1976 part 1.
D. Internal Manholes: All internal manhole covers shall be bolt down air tight double seal recessed type, they shall be insitu concrete filled with surface finish to match surrounding floor. Covers shall be medium duty, locking and sealed. E. External Manholes: Covers in paved areas shall be medium duty, double seal, and recessed type. They shall be insitu concrete/pavement filled with surface finish to match surrounding floor. F. Covers subject to vehicular traffic shall be kite marked heavy duty, single seal, non-rock with square push fit seal plate complete with lifting key-holes.
2.18
. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES DOMESTIC WATER
A. Provide Downstream of each pressure reducing valve. B. Pressure relief valves to be set at 517 kPa (75psi). C. Construction 1. Threaded bronze body. 2. Stainless steel trims. 3. Tee operated handle for setting pressure. 4. Automatic reseating of Teflon disc. 5. Rubber diaphragm. 2.19 WATER LEVEL INDICATOR WATER RESERVOIRS
A. Provide multi water level, side mount indicator for installation inside the domestic water reservoir. B. Indicators to indicate both high, intermediate, and low water levels. C. Level indicator to comprise of. 1. Buna N Float. 2. 316SS Stem of length suitable for depth of reservoir.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 14. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties Page 135 of 317
3. 4.
6mm (1/4) npt MOUNTING THREAD Single pole single throw switches to indicate a. Low Level b. Intermediate Level c. High level
5. Foot for resting on bottom reservoir. 6. Side mounting with wiring exiting above water line 7. Wiring from switches to receiver transmitter. D. Provide top supports and mountings. E. Level indicators to be suitable for 240 volt/1ph/50Hz source of powder. F. Level indication to be listed by UL or equal regulations association. 2.20 FLOAT VALVES
A. Provide modulating, pivoted controlled flat valve in each of the water reservoirs. B. Constructions. 1. Bronze body to BS1212 Part 1 Size 50 (2) 2. Brass fulcrum minimum 736mm (29) 3. Brass piston with 0 ring seal. 4. Threaded end with lock nuts to BS2779 5. Removable phosphor bronze seats 6. Pressure rating 200 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 1 m horizontally of electrical equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Hang from structure with rods and building attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying. B. Install flashing on all drains set in membrane floors and roofs and all other areas as specified herein. C. The bellows element of expansion joints shall be protected from damage, dents, scores, arc, strikes, weld spatter and other damage can cause the joint to fall. Damage joints should not be used. Anchors, guides and support must be installed and tested in accordance with code and manufacturer requirements. D. All the equipment and fittings shall be installed and tested accordance with manufacturer requirement and recommendation.
END OF SECTION
Page 136 of 317
SECTION 15450 DOMESTIC WATER EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Provide as necessary for a complete system of plumbing equipment, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Refer to General Requirements and Section 15010 for procedures. 2. Furnish submittals including characteristic curves which show horsepower, capacity and efficiency. 3. Furnish manufacturers written product date. Equipment Brochure and Service Manuals: 1. Before requesting acceptance of work, furnish five sets of manufacturers equipment brochures consisting of: a. Equipment and components, descriptive literature. b. Performance data, model number. c. Installation instructions. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance and repair instructions. f. Spare parts. g. Lubrication instructions. 2. Assemble manufacturers equipment manuals in chronological order following the specification alpha-numerical system using heavy duty three ring binders.
1.03 A.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. WATER PUMPS General: Pumps shall be so selected that the operating duty point is within 5% of the maximum efficiency point. The pump casing so selected shall have ample space to take an impeller one size larger than that capable of performing the operating duty. 1. The pump shall have a speed of not more than 1500 rpm unless otherwise approved by the Supervision Consultant. All pumps and motors shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation. Vibration isolators shall be provided for all pump sets. 2. Facilities shall be provided to prevent starting of pumps when the water tank is at low water level. An indicator for this low water level alarm shall be provided and interfaced with the Building Management System. 3. Facilities to select which pump to be duty pump and standby pump automatically shall be provided and be interchangeable.
Page 137 of 317
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 15. Section 15450 Domestic Water Equipment
4. Leakage from pump gland shall be drained to the nearest floor waste. 5. Pump curves for all pumps offered shall be submitted. All curve indicating excessive shut-off head will not be approved. 6. Each pump shall be provided with a gate valve at suction and discharge, approved check valve at discharge, approved strainer at suction, flexible connections at pump suction and discharge, eccentric reducer at suction, concentric reducer at discharge, pressure gauges at suction and discharge, circulation relief valve and automatic air relief valve. 7. Appropriate vibration isolation mountings shall be provided for each pump sets. 8. Supply and install a control panel on 16 swg drip proof metal cubicle enclosing the control switchgear and other electrical and control components for each pumping installation. All sensors shall be connected to a separate extra-low voltage termination compartment within the control panel. 9. Power supply to all sensors and external devices associated to the control and monitoring of the pumps and tanks shall be taken from the pump control panel. B. Pumps: 1. Pumps shall be of capacities as shown on the drawings. 2. Pumps shall be in-line horizontal or vertical multistage centrifugal pumps with constant speed. Pumps shall be complete with mechanical seals with its faces of tungsten carbide against tungsten carbide. Transfer pump shall be end-suction centrifugal type. The pump shaft shall be of 316 stainless steel, spline type, while the impellers, intermediate chambers and outer sleeve shall be of 304 stainless steel. The cast iron parts in contact with water shall be electro-coated with primer so as to prevent the formation of rust. 3. Each pump shall be checked and regulated for proper differential pressure, voltage and amperage draw. This data shall be noted on a permanent tag or label and fastened to the pump for owner reference. C. Sump Pumps 1. Sump pumps shall be of the encapsulated fully submersible type. Pump with spiral casing shall be of cast iron with stainless steel spiral and shall be complete with inlet strainer, cable gland, replaceable bronze wear ring. Impeller shall be of the adjustable type. The pump will be able to work entirely or partly submerged in the pump water. The pump shall be capable of handling water containing relatively abrasive solutions and shall be of pedestal type. The pump shall be able to operate continuously at its rated output regardless of whether the ejector water is above or below the water surface. The pump shall be able to operate under the same conditions. 2. The motor shall be housed within the pump casing and shall be sealed from the pump chamber by a double mechanical seal. The mechanical seal shall be of tungsten carbide. The motor starter for non-submersible usage shall be insulated against moisture and heat to a minimum of Class "F". The shaft shall be of stainless steel and shall be integral with the pump impeller. 3. Sump pumps above 2 kW shall be provided with over temperature protection in the stator windings. Sump pumps above 1.0 kW shall be of 3-phase power supply. 4. All submersible pumps installed in the wet pump sump shall integral with a automatic hydraulically operated flush valve. The flush valve shall be of cast iron construction and mounted on a special boss of adequate thickness casted integrally on the pump housing near the discharge outlet. During each pumping cycle, the flush valve shall operate to flush and clean the pump sump of sludge and sedimentation by thoroughly mixing the water automatically before discharge. The action shall ensure the sump to be clean and minimise maintenance. 5. Each pump shall be capable of delivering not less than the quantity of fluid against the operating head as indicated in the drawings. 6. Each pump shall be capable of handling dry suction condition for a reasonable period without harm.
Page 138 of 317
7. Submit for approval the characteristic curve of all pumps offered. Any curve indicating excessive shut off head will be rejected. 8. Among others, the following fittings shall be required for the pump installation: a. Gate valve at discharge; b. Check valve at discharge; c. Flexible connection at discharge; d. Float or level electrode control. 9. Where multiple sump pump installations are shown in the drawings, they shall be automatically and sequentially controlled, started and stopped. The automatic sequential operation system shall be activated by means of multi-electrode sensors similar to "National", "OMRON" type or approved equivalent. In addition, there shall be provided a klaxon or siren alarm when the last (or standby) pump is activated or failed to activate. They shall be provided with duty selector for alternating the duty pump selection automatically. 10. All starter and control panels shall be constructed to conform to the requirements as specified in Division 16. All starter panels shall be provided with spare contacts for monitoring of stopped-running-tripped condition, and alarm condition for future remote or Building Management System usage. 11. The control and starter panel shall have: a. On-load isolator for the incoming main; b. MCCB for each pump; c. Starters and contactors for each pump; d. Overload relays for each pump; e. Automatic changeover switch; f. Manual and automatic selector switch for each pump; g. Start and stop switch for each pump; h. Level controller relays; i. Alarm muting and reset push button; j. Control system "ON-OFF" switch; k. Indicating lamps for main on, overload trip, motor run and stop, high and low level; l. HRC fuses as required. 12. Connections to the sump pumps shall be in flexible butyl rubber or EPR insulated cables of sufficient rating. Where the cables are exposed, they shall be suitably protected in steel conduit. 13. All joints shall be sealed water-tight and made corrosion-proof. 14. All electrical works shall comply with the Specification set out in Division 16. D. Floatless Type Level Switch in Water Tanks: 1. Supply and install floatless type switch probes in the water tanks as indicated below and shown on the drawings. a. Upper Floor Tanks 1) High level alarm (over-flow); 2) Low level alarm; 3) Low level cut-in of transfer pumps; 4) Low level cut-out of booster pumps; 5) High level cut-out for the transfer water pumps; 6) Earthing probe. b. Main Tank at Ground Level 1) High level alarm (over-flow); 2) Low water level cut-out for the transfer water pumps; 3) Earthing probe; 4) Low level alarm. 2. Each probe shall be of the correct length for the particular application and tank location. Electrodes shall be of polished stainless steel 20 mm OD. Electrode holders shall be weatherproof in all respect.
Page 139 of 317
3. The earthing probes shall be connected and wired to the building earth systems of the building. 4. Each set of electrodes shall be installed inside a 230 mm diameter PVC pipe acting as a wave barrier. 5. The level switch set shall operate with a stepped down voltage at 24V maximum. Stepped down transformers shall be provided for each set of control probes and shall be installed inside centralised control cubicles inside pump room. 6. Mechanical steel stuffing boxes shall be used. E. Control of Duty / Standby Pumps: 1. Operation of the duty and standby pumps shall be carried out by the following method: a. Automatically by means of pressure sensor (i.e. pressure switches); b. Manually by means of a local start/stop push buttons on pump local motor control panel and emergency stop switch. c. The pressure switch shall be installed next to the manual release valve. When the pressure drops to the pre-determined level, a signal will be sent to the pump local motor control panel to start the pump. d. Automatic controls shall be operated by electronic, floatless type level switches.
F. Pump Indicator: 1. The following audible and visible indication shall be provided at the pump local control panels as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2.02 2.03 Red "overflow level" indicator with buzzer for the associated water tanks; Amber "extra high water level" indicator for the associated water tank; Amber "high water level" indicator; Amber "low water level" indicator; Red "pump trip" indicator for each pump; Green "pump on" indicator for each pump; "Pump electrical supply healthy" indicator for each pump; Amber "remote/local" status indicator.
EJECTOR SYSTEMS (NOT APPLICABLE) DOMESTIC BOOSTER PUMP SETS
A. The fully automatic domestic water booster set with variable speed controller shall be of robust design, supplied ready for connection. Booster pumps and pressure tanks shall be mounted on a vibration absorbing mild steel baseplate. Each set shall comprise of the following: 1. Triplex type approved pattern horizontal end suction centrifugal pumps. 2. One (1) set pressure tank with rubber bag. 3. One set factory assembled pre-wired fully automatic control cubicle (variable speed controller) in weather-proof mild steel enamel finished steel enclosure. 4. Associate pipework including control valves, water hammer absorbers, check valves, flexible connectors, pressure regulating valves, located in the common pump delivery pipe etc. 5. Vibration-absorbing baseplate. 6. Pressure gauges, pressure switches, and safety valves, etc. 7. Thermal relay, indicator lamp, fuse magnetic controller auxiliary relay, alternative relay, terminal board. 8. 70% pump efficiency. B. Only one pump is in operation at a time, the other one on standby. The pumps are changed over after each cycle by an automatic device. But the second pump will be automatically switched on when the water pressure drops down to the minimum set pressure and then the two pumps are
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 15. Section 15450 Domestic Water Equipment Page 140 of 317
in parallel operation with one in variable speed and the other at full load. For three pumps, if the water pressure drops still lower than the setting level, the third pump will be automatically switched. Dry running protection should also be provided. C. Pressure tank shall be of stainless steel cylindrical pre-changed pressure vessel with epoxy or polypropylene anti-corrosion lining in the internal surface. A rubber bag shall be fitted for separation of the water nitrogen gas. Externally treated in synthetic enamel. An approved type valve shall be fitted for pre-pressure adjustment. Baseplate is manufactured in heavy gauge fabricated mild steel, zinc plate finish. D. All pipings, flexible connectors, gate valve and non-return valves and strainer shall be as described in the Pipework, Fitting and Valves Section. The following accessories shall be provided; 1. One (1) no. pressure gauge with syphon pipes and isolating valves in the pressure tank air chamber. 2. Three (3) nos. adjustable pressure switches for incoming and outgoing pressure adjustable individually and low water pressure (no flow) cut-out of booster pumps. 3. One (1) no. bronze drain cock at the bottom of the pressure tank. 4. One (1) no. 25mm diaphragm type safety valve at the air chamber of pressure tank. A test certificate for the performance and test pressure of the tank issued by the manufacturer must be submitted. WATER TRANSFER PUMPS
The unit shall be a packaged factory assembled and tested unit complete with duty/stand-by pump, interconnecting pipe work in copper, bronze valves, safety devices and pre wired control panel. Pump set shall in general comply with the requirements of clause 2.1 except that pumps shall be vertical multistage type. Control of pumps shall be as follows: 1. Pumps switching shall be controlled by float switches installed in the roof storage tank. 2. A low level float switch installed in the underground storage tank shall prevent dry running of pumps.
2.03
2.04
STORAGE WATER HEATER
A. Heater shall have 10 bar working pressure and be equipped with extruded high density anode. B. All internal surfaces of the heater exposed to water shall be glass-lined with an alkaline borosililate composition that has been fused-to-still by serving at a temperature range 76oC to 87oC. C. Tank shall be insulated with 65mm of rigid polyurethane foam insulation. D. Each heating element shall be controlled by an individually mounted thermostat and high temperature cut-off switch. All internal circuits shall be fused. E. Outer jacket shall be of bake A enamel finish. F. Electrical junction box with heavy duty terminal block shall be provided. G. Heater kW 2.2kW for 80 and 1.5kW for 50 . H. The contractor shall submit 5 years warrenty. 2.05 A. WATER CALORIFIERS AND ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS General: 1. Calorifiers shall be engineered and constructed for using hot wateras the prime source of heat. . The shells shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Page 141 of 317
B.
Heating Elements: 1. The hot water heating coil shall be made of seamless copper, "U" tubes constructed from 20 gauge 20mm O.D. single wall copper tubing designed for a maximum working pressure of 1035 kPa. The interior and exterior of the U tubes shall be completely smooth and free from fins, scales, indentations or other extensions. 2. The heating elements shall be so arranged as to facilitate removal having regard to the access space available. 3. The tubes shall be uniform thickness throughout. The diameter and thickness shall not be reduced at the bends so as to alter the cross-sectional area of the pipes. 4. For each size ofheating coil, provide one mobile cradle for easy removal of the tube bundle. 5. Heating coil shall be factory sized and installed with a generously sized heating surface designed to ensure reliable operation.
C. Vessel: 1. The shell of the calorifiers shall be constructed of heavy grade mild steel, with internal copper lined not less than 1.6 mm ASME coded unless otherwise specified and shall bear the National Board stamp or to BS 853:1981 Part 1. To prevent vibration of the heating elements in the water stream adequate battles/spacers to hold the elements in position shall be provided inside the shell. 2. The steel shell shall be fabricated and joints made by welding. The lining shall be single welded and the welding shall be carried out with the lining in place. The space between the shell and the lining shall be vacuumed to entirely remove the air and moisture trapped therein. 3. All part of the calorifiers in contact with water shall be lined with copper and all connections shall be bronzed flange to BS 4505 suitable for the required system working pressure. 4. Designed for 861 kPa working pressure and hydro statically tested at 1.5 times working pressure. D. Insulation: 1. The vessel shall be externally insulated with a minimum of 50 mm thick 64 kg/cu.m density heavy duty fibre-glass protected by a 1.2 mm thick galvanised steel cover cladding with paint finish. Fittings: Each calorifier shall be furnished with the following as minimum requirements: 1. All flanges for water inlet, outlet and return to conform BS 4504 and suit the required working pressure with PN 16 minimum. 2. Drain valves 3. Access manhole to BS 853 shall be provided in each calorifier. The access shall have bolted flange joints complete with insulating gasket. The minimum clearance of the manhole shall be 400 mm diameter. 4. The water side of the access manhole shall also be copper lined similar to the shell and ends. 5. Lifting lugs 6. Pressure and temperature gauges at water inlets and outlets. Pressure gauges shall be complete with syphon and cock. 7. ASME coded pressure relief valve 8. Tappings for control thermostat 9. Anti-vacuum valve 10. Open vent pipe 11. Element sequencer for distributing water evenly on heating elements, Contactors, switches, etc., by alternating order in which they operate. 12. Pilot lights indicating heater staging and power "ON". 13. Ammeter, voltmeter and kWH meter.
E.
Page 142 of 317
14. Door interlock switch to interrupt power to calorifier when control cabinet doors are open. However, the switch shall be manually defendable to allow authorised personnel to service heater with doors open. 15. Fused control unit transformer and branch circuit fusing. 16. One auto and one manual reset high temperature limiters and lockout switches. 17. Dry contacts for remote indications and ON-OFF controls. F. Controls: 1. Each hot water calorifier shall be equipped with the following control for automatic operation and safety protection: a. An immersion type proportioning thermostat senses the temperature of the leaving water together with a ten-step controller shall regulate the incoming hot water valves in steps so as to maintain the temperature of the leaving water at 60 degree C to meet the hot water demand fluctuation. The calorifiers shall be started up in a smooth sequence with the manual adjustable time delay (0-30 minimum) for each step control. b. A high limit thermostat for overheat protection with manual reset shall be provided on hot water heating systems. c. Self contained three-way diverting valve to regulate the flow of heating water through coil shall be provided.
2. The following features shall also be provided and interfaced with BMS to enable remote monitoring and control: a. Hot water system circulation pump; b. Control circuit ON/OFF switches; c. Local manual heater ON/OFF switch with indicating lights; d. Low water level cut-off; e. Auto-off/manual selector switch for heater control; f. Local/remote selector switch. g. Overflow alarm 2.06 HIGH RATE SAND FILTER
A. The filters shall be of vertical type and filters. B. The rate of filtration shall not exceed 600 litres per sq meter per minute. The filtration rate selected by the Contractor shall be in compliance with the manufacturers recommendation so as to give satisfactory result. C. Each filter shall be provided with an air release valve at the highest point, wash water sight glass, pressure gauge, flowmeter and draw-offs for taking sample of raw and filtered water. D. The filter tank shall be fabricated of stainless steel 316 or fibre glass for a maximum working pressure of 350kN/sqm. The test pressure shall be 2 times the working pressure. The tank shall be adequate strength to resist all stresses from maximum loading with a safety factor of 4. The hydraulic test shall be in accordance with UNE 53-300-75. The maximum operating temperature is 52oC. The internal components of the filters are made from PVC and PP and all metal fasteners shall be stainless steel 316. E. A multi-positions valve shall be provided for each filter and it shall register positively in each of five marked positions: filter, backwash, re-circulate, drain and close.
Page 143 of 317
2.07
WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. General 1. Supply and erect all water storage tanks of the capacities as shown on the drawing and equipment schedule. 2. Tanks shall be of ADDC / ADWEA approved sectional panel type, fabricated and assembled in compliance with the requirement of ADDC / ADWEA Water Department. 3. All tanks shall be supplied with a ten-year warranty from the tank manufacturer. 4. All Roof domestic potable cold water storage tank shall be of hot pressed glass reinforced plastic (GRP) sectional tanks. Non-domestic potable water storage tank shall be of pressed steel to SS 22 with ADDC / ADWEA approved lining. The minimum physical size and effective cap cuts are to be as show on the drawings. 5. All tanks shall be insulated with 50mm of insulation the minimum r value of 0.0035 W/m/K suitable for external conditions and with 10 year lifetime guarantee. 6. All tanks shall be compartmented into tow compartments and there shall be adequate stays and ties to give a rigid tank after installation. 7. All steel items in direct touch with water to be made from Stainless steel 316 as per ADDC regulation 8. Each tank compartment shall be provided with the following: i. A GRP cover bolted to the walls with a lockable hinged access flap complete with Yale lock handle. ii. Flanged connections for water make-up, draw-off, drain and overflow pipework. iii. Isolation valves shall be provided at all make-up, draw-off and drain points. Float valves with copper ball shall be fitted on all make-up points. iv. Water level control switches including high and low level alarms shall be of the electromagnetic floatless type. v. Water level indicator as well as 2 nos air vent with mosquitos proof netting shall be provided. vi. An aluminium alloy cat ladder shall be provided inside and outside of each compartment. Size of ladders shall be of 350 mm wide with 50mm x 10 mm stiles and 20mm diameter rungs at 250mm cetrres. B. Installation 1. Each tank shall be installed on reinforced concrete piers. Shop drawings the requirements for the reinforced concrete piers shall be submitted and be approved by the structural engineer. 2. Between the tank and concrete piers, shall be adequately sized RSJ installed in accordance with the tank manufacturers recommendations. This supporting RSJ shall be thoroughly wire-brushed and painted with not less than two coats of cold galvanising paint. The provision of all RSJ shall be provided in this Sub-contract. 3. Tank panels shall be bolted together with an approved sealed strip to ensure a watertight joint. Bolts and nuts including washers shall be stainless steel. 4. Pressed steel tank shall be painted internally with two coats of an approved non-toxic epoxy paint or rust-inhibiting compound. The external surface of the tank shall be painted with an undercoat and two coats of furnished paint colour as determined by the Architect.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 15. Section 15450 Domestic Water Equipment Page 144 of 317
C. Warning System 1. The Contractor shall provide an automatic warning system to give warning of overflow and low water level in tanks. The system shall include floatless level switches, PVC electric wiring, two red indication lights and buzzer to show overflow or low water level and identification lights and buzzer to show overflow or low water level and identification lights in relation to the tank. The lights and buzzers are to be mounted on a hot-dipped galvanized steel panel of 20 swg thickness lockable and painted. Water level and overflow indication signals shall be interfaced with the Building Automation System. D. Disinfections of Water Supply System 1. Upon the completion of the entire cold and hot water supply installation, the Contractor shall sweep, mop and clean the water tanks and flush clean pump sets, distribution pipelines and pumping mains as required taking due care that the openings which connect to pipelines are properly plugged up and foreign matter prevented from entering. Only water from the public water supply shall be used for such cleaning. 2. The water storage tank shall then be filled with water mixed with sufficient decanted solution of chloride of lime to give a concentration of 40 ppm of free chlorine in the water. The tanks shall be filled with water containing 40ppm of free chlorine as many times as necessary until they are full. 3. The chlorine water shall be left in the storage tanks and pipework overnight and drained out completely the next day. The water supply system shall then be put into operation. 4. No worker shall be permitted to enter the tanks after chorine water has been admitted, the compliance with which shall be the Contractors sole responsibility. Should he be negligent in this matter, in the opinion of the engineer, he shall repeat the disinfection process until the engineer is satisfied, and at no extra cost, charges, expenses, etc., to the Contract. 5. Only workmen who have been examined and certified by the Government Health Authority to be non-carriers of water-borne disease shall be employed in the disinfection process. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. INSTALLATION Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturers printed recommendations. Provide valves at each piece of equipment to provide isolation of the equipment from its connected system.
END OF SECTION
Page 145 of 317
SECTION 15455 SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL A. Contract Documents 1. All work of this Section shall comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents for the Main Building works, with the Drawings, Schedules and with all other Contract Documents. B. Work Included 1. The supply of sanitary fixtures and fittings including water closets, urinals, wash basins, sinks, faucets/taps, hand dryers, water coolers, soap dispensers, flush valves and all accessories, sealants and the like to enable satisfactory installation of the sanitary fixtures and fittings 2. Provide all necessary data including manufacturers recommended Shop Drawings, installation procedures and maintenance manuals. 3. Refer to Plumbing & Sanitary Installation Specification for installation of sanitary fixtures and fittings. C. Related Works Specified Elsewhere 1. Toilet Partitions 2. Plumbing and Sanitary Installation 3. Sealant Work 4. Masonry 5. Stonework 6. Waterproofing & Insulation 7. Tile 8. Toilet Accessories D. Quality Assurance 1. American Standards : a. ASTM A167 2. British Standards : a. BS 1010: Part 2 b. BS 1254 c. BS 1876
: : : : : : : :
See Section 10160 Refer to Plumbing & Sanitary Specification See Section 07900 See Section 04200 See Section 04450 See Section 07100 See Section 09300 See Section 10800
Stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish, Type 302, 304L
Specification for draw-off taps and stopvalves for water services (screw-down pattern). Draw-off taps and above-ground stopvalves. Specification for WC seats (plastics). Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals Specification for quality of vitreous china sanitary appliances. Specification for urinals. Stainless steel slab urinals Specification for vitreous china washdown WC pans with horizontal outlet.
d. BS 3402
e. BS 4880: Part 1 f. BS 5503:
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 16. Section 15455 - Sanitary Fixtures & Fittings
Page 146 of 317
Part 3
Vitreous china washdown WC pans with horizontal outlet. Specification for WC pans with horizontal outlet for use with 7.5L maximum flush capacity cisterns Specification for wall hung WC pan. Wall Hung WC pan with independent water supply.Connecting dimensions. Wall hung WC pan. Materials, quality and functional dimensions other than connecting dimensions. Wall hung WC pan. Specification for wall hung WC pans for use with 7.5L maximum flush capacity cisterns Specification for wash basins. Wash basins (one or three tap holes). Materials, quality, design and construction. Specification for vitreous china bowl urinals (rim less type). Specification for plastics connectors for use with horizontal outlet vitreous china WC pans. Sanitary installations. Code of practice for scale of provision, selection and installation of sanitary appliances. Specification for close coupled suites with flush capacity of 7.5L maximum Pedestal wash basins. Connecting dimensions
g. BS 5504: Part 2 Part 3 Part 4
h. BS 5506: Part 3
i.
BS 5520
j.
BS 5627
k.
BS 6465: Part 1
l.
BS 7358
m. BS EN 31
n. BS EN 32 o. BS EN 37
Wall-hung wash basins. Connecting dimensions Pedestal WC pans with independent water supply. Connecting dimensions Sanitary tapware. General specifications for flow rate regulators Kitchen sinks. Connecting dimensions WC pans with integral trap Gravity drainage systems inside buildings. Sanitary pipework, layout and calculation
p. BS EN 246
q. BS EN 695 r. s. BS EN 997 BS EN 12056 Part 2
3. All materials furnished under this Section shall be in conformance with specified standards. 4. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to provide proof of acceptance for the use of the plumbing fixtures and materials or systems. 5. All fixtures shall bear the permanent indestructible brand names of the manufacturers and country of origin.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 16. Section 15455 - Sanitary Fixtures & Fittings Page 147 of 317
6. The minimum acceptable standard for materials furnished under this Section shall be not less than the latest edition of the British Standard (BS) for the respective materials to be furnished. In the absence of a specified BS, ASTM and U.L. shall prevail. All equipment is to be WRAS approved E. Submittals 1. Refer to Section 01300 on requirements on submittals. 2. Samples: a. Submit 1 set of samples of each item for approval. All approved samples of the sanitary wares and fittings are to be kept at the site for reference and comparison with subsequent deliveries. Any sanitary wares and fittings not complying with the approved sample will be rejected. b. Submit 1 set of all miscellaneous items that are required for connection with builders works. 3. Product Data & Certifications a. Submit 1 set of technical descriptive and installation information for all items prior to delivery. b. At the time of submission of tender, submit original copies of relevant brochures/pamphlets clearly marked out for easy reference and a complete schedule of sanitary wares and fittings. c. Certificates d. Submit all certificates of approval for each item from all the relevant authorities at the time of delivery. e. Submit two copies of Works test certificates in respect of goods and materials showing compliance with tests to British Standards (or any other comparable and acceptable standards) and with any additional tests specifically called for herein. f. Country of origin The Tenderer shall submit at the time of tender information on the country of origin of all sanitary wares and fittings, and in the event of the tender being successful, the Contractor shall submit certificates confirming this country of origin with each delivery. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements. (Local suppliers in parentheses) a. Bobrick (Al Shaya Trading, Dubai) b. Diethelm c. Dornbracht d. Duravit e. Elkay f. Kaldewei g. Toto h. Villeroy and Boch
2. Specified manufacturer's catalogue reference for each type of fixture/fitting listed herewith establish minimum acceptable standards for products specified in this Section. Other manufacturers offering equivalent and equal products shall be subject to SC 's review and approval. 3. The manufacturers and model numbers stated herewith are indicative only of the level of quality and general appearance of the accessories intended to be priced.
Page 148 of 317
B. Materials and Finishes 1. Fixtures listed herein are given to establish a minimum quality. All fixtures shall bear the permanent indestructible brand names of the manufacturers. 2. All fixtures shall be free from imperfections, true to line, angles, curves, smooth, watertight, and complete in every respect. 3. All fixtures specified to be of vitreous ware, shall be fired vitreous chinaware of the best quality, non absorbent and burned so that the whole mass is thoroughly fused and vitrified, producing a material white in colour, which when fractured will show a homogeneous mass, close grained and free from pores. The glazing and vitreous china fixtures shall be white, thoroughly fused and united to the body, without discolouration, chips or flaws, and shall be free from craze. Warped or otherwise imperfect fixtures will not be accepted. 4. All fittings, cast brass set screw escutcheons, faucets, taps, traps, exposed piping, and the like, shall be brass, chrome plated over nickel plate with polished finish. Any hanger nuts visible shall likewise be chrome plated over nickel plate. 5. Chrome plated or stainless steel pipes shall be used for supplies and drains exposed to view adjacent to all fixtures and where designated elsewhere. 6. All brackets, supports, hangers and the like used shall be hot dipped galvanised steel. C. Sanitary Fixtures & Fittings Selection Refer to schedules for Sanitary Fixtures & Fittings for selection. D. Delivery, Storage and Protection 1. Provide all necessary protection to all items to be supplied to enable the proper handling and storage on Site. 2. All materials and goods shall be delivered to the Site in a new condition, properly packed and protected against damage due to handling, adverse weather or other circumstances and, as far as practicable, they shall be kept in the packing cases or under protective coverings until required for use. Cost of uncrating for inspection and repacking on delivery to Site is to be borne by the Contractor. 3. Any items suffering damage in transit or on the Site prior to installation shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expenses. 4. In the case of materials which originate outside Abu Dhabi All materials shall be packed adequately and securely for safe transportation with due regard to the climatic conditions encountered in transit and on arrival. British Standard and supplements, or other comparable and acceptable codes, shall be used as a guide for standard of packing and package required PART 3 EXECUTION A. Installation 1. In accordance to manufacturer recommendation.
END OF SECTION
Page 149 of 317
SECTION 15480 FIRE STOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with requirements in Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of the Sub-contract Documents and acceptable to Civil Defence and NFPA 251 and 703. C. Provide fire stopping to all services passing through vertical and horizontal fire compartments. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and manufacturers installation instructions for all materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions sufficient for identification at the job site. B. Submit shop drawings showing proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings, and method of installation. Construction details shall accurately reflect actual job conditions. C. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets with product delivered to job site. D. Submit complete details of each type of penetration to be used indicating the proper U.L. approved fire stop system. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire stop system installation shall conform to requirements of qualified specification or manufacturer approved modifications, as supported by engineering reports. B. Install fire stop materials and systems as required by the Sub-contract Documents. C. Submit manufacturers product data, letter of certification, or certified laboratory test report that the material or combination of materials (fire stop system) meets the requirements specified in accordance with the applicable referenced standards. D. The fire stop compound shall not contain any solvents or inorganic fibres. The penetrations seal material must be unaffected by moisture and must maintain the integrity of the floor or wall assembly for its rated time period when tested in accordance with ASTM E8 14 (UL1479). The system shall have the same fire rating of the wall or slab through which the services penetrate. 1.04 FIRE STOPPING
A. Provide fire stop compounds for caulk, pour, trowel or pump application. Material must be capable of sealing openings around single or multiple pipes against fire, smoke and toxic gases, and maintaining rating with a thickness no greater than the structure. Material shall be approved by Civil Defence.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 17. Section 15480 - Fire Stopping
Page 150 of 317
B. Provide a damming material, where required, per manufacturers recommendations. C. Provide a fire stop system consisting of a material, or combination of materials, to retain the integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke or gases through penetrations in fire-rated barriers. It shall be used in specific locations as follows: 1. Penetrations for the passage of utility services through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor slabs and floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shafts. 2. Locations shown specifically on the drawings or where specified in other sections of the Subcontract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fire stopping materials/systems shall be flexible to allow for normal movement of building structure and penetrating item(s) without affecting the adhesion or integrity of the system. Necessary perforations for the inlet and outlet pipes shall be provided. B. Fires topping materials shall not require hazardous waste disposal of used containers/ packages. C. Provide fire stopping materials free of solvents which will not experience shrinkage while curing. PART 3 EXECUTION A. Application of fire stopping shall strictly comply with the recommendation of the material manufacturer and in the manner approved by Civil Defence and local authorities. If required by local authorities, fire stopping application shall be certified by licensed professional of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 17. Section 15480 - Fire Stopping
Page 151 of 317
SECTION 15495 FUEL OIL SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install complete mechanical systems for the diesel generator provided by Division 16, as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specifications. C. Provide the following: 1. fuel oil supply and return piping system 2. fuel oil storage facilities including fill and vent piping and level controls and monitors 3. fuel oil (initial fill for main storage tank before hand-over). 4. pump controls, alarms, and related control wiring 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Meet the requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 30), National Building Code, and all other local authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FUEL OIL PIPING
A. Pipe larger than 12 mm, Schedule 40 steel to ASTM A120. B. All piping exposed to the elements or exterior of the building shall be galvanized. C. Piping shall be schedule 40 black steel with malleable iron fittings. Provide check valves at each pump discharge and three-valve by-pass at each regulating valve. 2.02 JOINTS AND FITTINGS
A. Provide joints threaded with approved oil resistant jointing compound. B. For steel piping larger than 12 mm, provide screwed malleable iron fittings. 2.03 VALVES
A. Provide Crane, Kitz, Nibco, Showa, Toyo or Victaulic valves from one manufacturer, new, all brass/bronze construction and packed for oil use, to the following: 1. Gate valves 75 mm and smaller, 1000 kPa bronze, screwed ends, rising stem, solid wedge disc. 2. Globe valves 75 mm and smaller, 1000 kPa bronze, union bonnet, screwed ends with disc. 3. Check valves 75 mm and smaller, 1000 kPa bronze, screwed ends, horizontal swing check, regrinding type. 4. Ball valves 75 mm and smaller, 1000 kPa, brass or bronze body, two piece, full port, screwed ends, with chrome plated solid ball.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 18. Section 15495 - Fuel Oil Specialties
Page 152 of 317
B. Provide fuel supply fire safety ball valve complete with torque handle fusible link 2.04 FUEL OIL PUMPS A. Reference shall be make to Section 16482. B. Furnish and install fuel oil pump sets of sizes and capacities as shown in the drawings. C. Each pump set shall consist of the following basic parts completely assembled, piped and wired and ready for installation. 1. Fuel oil pumps: Positive displacement types directly connected by flexible couplings to explosion proof type motors. Include coupling guards. 2. Duplex suction and discharge strainer of line size, fitted with two brass filtering baskets with 1mm perforations. The strainer shall have a transfer handle for switch cover of filter baskets, which shall operate a plug type valve. 3. Relief valves with an adjustable range of 172 to 1034 kPa, st at 861 kPa. 4. Gauges: All gauges to be 115mm. (2) oil pressure gauges 760mm/0-414 kPa at suction and discharge side of the suction strainer. (2) oil pressure gauges 0-414 kPa at pump discharge and pump set outlet. 5. Oil pressure regulator. 6. Oil pressure switches, syphon mounted, installed to operate lead/lag, pump failure backup system. 7. Control panel: Provide factory assembled panel construction mounted on structural steel frame, completely prewired and containing the following components with specification comply with Section 16425 a. Pump motor circuit breakers b. Pump motor starters with overload protection and reset buttons c. Pump lead/lag system with lead pump selector switch d. Pump hand-off-auto switches e. Pump ON indicating lights f. Pump failure indicating light g. Control circuit power switch and transformer h. Numbered terminal strips and engraved nameplates i. Alarm bell j. Additional contacts for a trouble audio/visual alarm at the building central alarm panel upon the activation of any alarms at the fuel oil pump control panel k. System D.D.C. control equipment l. High oil pressure failure pilot light. m. Low oil pressure failure pilot light. n. Motor run pilot light for each motor. 8. Auxiliary contacts for BMS use to indicate each pump motor status. 9. Each pump shall be protected by an external relief valve and a solenoid valve for cutting of fuel supply during emergency. Include gate valves at the suction and discharge of each pump. 2.05 OVERFILL PROTECTION DEVICE
A. Provide Electronic Systems within Main Storage Tank. B. Provide Electronic Systems Weatherproof Enclosure with red/green indicating lights, audible high level and alarm silence pushbutton. Control unit shall incorporate SF-15H module with dynamic self checking, and high level failsafe feature. C. Install Control Unit at Oil Fill Station.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 18. Section 15495 - Fuel Oil Specialties Page 153 of 317
D. Provide interconnecting signal wire between probe and electronics. E. Provide engraved nameplate at Controller Location stating "Fill only when green light is flashing. Stop if red light comes on. Notify Building Engineer." 2.06 LEVEL INDICATION A. Provide level meter at each of main tanks. Locate adjacent to tank. B. Provide shielded capacitance probe and 20 mADC transmitter, with dual DPDT high/low level relays, in the main fuel oil storage tanks. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL FUEL SYSTEM PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Slope fill and vent piping to storage tank. Provide swing joint pipe connections. B. Terminate the oil tank vent in a manufactured vent fitting. C. Provide an alarm whistle on vent piping. D. Provide manufactured lockable fill cap. E. Coordinate fuel oil connections at generator. 3.02 WIRING AND CONTROLS
A. Fuel pumps shall be able to run at all times. Fuel shall recirculate from day tank to main storage tanks. B. Wire low level switch on day tank to boiler control panel to annunciate low fuel alarm. C. Wire high space temperature switch in boiler and generator control panel to annunciate ventilation failure alarm. D. Field calibrate all level controls. Provide 24 VDC power to level controls, connected to emergency power source. E. Provide all wiring and devices necessary to implement the pump and alarm/trouble controls described in this section. F. Solenoid valve shall be provided at the fuel pump outlet and it shall be shut to cut off fuel supply in event of fire in the building. 3.03 TESTING
A. Test fuel oil (to storage tank and pipework) system to NFPA standards. B. Cooperate with Division 16 in testing of the complete installation. END OF SECTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 18. Section 15495 - Fuel Oil Specialties
Page 154 of 317
SECTION 15496 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
A. The work includes the provision of all labour, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Employer, all fuel oil storage and distribution work in accordance with drawings and specifications. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The installation shall comply with NFPA30, BS2594, Abu Dhabi Civil Defences requirement and Abu Dhabi Environmental Pollution Control Authoritys requirement. 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings indicating sizes, types, location and method of installation. B. Product Data: Manufacturers printed data, catalog cuts, recommended method of installation. C. Submission form and drawings for the fuel tanks required for Abu Dhabi Civil Defence and Environmental Pollution Control Authority submission, the submission shall be prepared, endorsed and submitted to Abu Dhabi Authority by the Contractor Professional Engineer. D. Details of the contractors professional personnel who tests and certify all the fuel tanks. E. Detail fuel circulation shop drawing incorporate manufacturer engineering input complete with pump sizing calculation endorsed by the Contractor and the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DAY TANK
A. A fuel storage day tank shall have a capacity minimum for at least 8 hours full load emergency back up located adjacent to this respective diesel generator set. Should the required 8 hours storage capacity exceeds 700 litre, additional separated fire compartment to Civil Defence requirement shall deem to include in this contract shall be incorporated to housed the fuel tank. B. High/low level indicators shall be installed at the engine control panel. An audio and visual alarm system shall sound when the fuel is at dangerously low level. C. A manual hand pump shall be provided. D. The system shall be complete with fuel supply and return pipes suitable size to transfer the fuel supply from the day tank to the engine.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 19. Section 15496- Fuel Oil Storage Tank Page 155 of 317
E. Overflow/vent should be installed to comply with the local requirement. F. Filter shall be provided at the draw-off line. Alarm shall be raised at the BMS, and simultaneously, audible and visual indication provided at the day tank vicinity to alert maintenance if the day tank is at high level. G. The tank shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 2594 and fabricated from good commercial quality galvanised steel sheet of 6mm thickness. The ends of the tank and all outlets shall flange and electrically welded throughout and slag/spatter removed. H. The voltage-free contacts shall be provided for connection to the Building Management System (BMS). I. All installations shall be carried out in accordance with NFPA 30, Civil Defence and all local authorities requirements inclusive of liaison, submission, endorsement and payment of all fees and charges for the testing and inspection on the whole installation. Fuel oil shall meet the requirement of Generator manufacturer.
J.
K. All tanks shall be completed with drip tray and leakage sensor complete with alarm. 2.02 BULK STORAGE TANK AND PIPING
A. The complete system shall include engineering, supply, installation, testing and commissioning the bulk storage fuel tank, pumps, piping, valves and control system. B. Submission and approval shall be obtained prior to installation. C. Suitability. The complete system shall be engineered and constructed for the conditions of use, and in particular: 1. It shall be compatible with the particular liquid or any other component with which it may be in contact; 2. It shall be resistant to any heat to which it may be exposed; and 3. Where subject to corrosion, it shall be sufficiently resistant to ensure a life span of 15 years. 4. It shall comply with Civil Defence requirement, relevant British standards and NFPA 30. D. All tanks shall be completed with leakage collection and leakage sensor complete with alarm. E. Flexible tube. Flexible tubing, piping or hose may be used only on condition that: 1. The use of such tubing is avoidable because of the need to provide for movement or to reduce the effect of vibration; 2. The tubing is of flexible metallic, metal-reinforced, armoured or other construction suitable for the working pressure, temperature, and the liquid being handled. F. Manufacturing and construction: The following general consideration shall be taken into account when manufacturing and installing any piping: 1. The layout shall take account of the needs for operating access, maintenance, replacement, drainage, etc. and shall ensure that any access ways are not impeded. 2. Supporting and fixing shall be secure and the piping shall be not unduly exposed to mechanical damage. 3. Protection against corrosion shall be provided wherever necessary. Particular attention shall be given to outside and underground locations or to any piping, which passes through or is embedded in any material likely to induce corrosion.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 19. Section 15496- Fuel Oil Storage Tank Page 156 of 317
Provision shall be made, wherever necessary, for the expansion or contraction of the piping and its contents. 5. Any trench in which pipes are laid shall be drained, and shall be of adequate dimensions to permit access to valves and fittings. 6. Any buried piping shall be protected from superimposed loads, ground settlement, etc. 7. Any necessary electrical bonding and earthing shall be provided. 8. Piping shall be painted and/or marked in a manner sufficient to permit ready identification of its contents. 9. Where piping is encased in concrete, means shall be taken to guard against corrosion and to provide for expansion. 10. Leakage sensors shall be included to detect the bulk storage tank and piping for monitoring purpose. 11. Provide fuel pump control panel that has remote fuel level indications and High/low level alarm indications with buzzer and acknowledge button interface with bulk fuel tank. G. Product Storage Requirement 1. Tanks must be vented. Tanks are manufacturing for operation at atmospheric pressure only. 2. Tanks shall be capable of storing liquids with specific gravity up to 1:1. 3. Maximum temperature. Tanks shall be capable of storing fuel oil at temperatures not to exceed 75oC at the tank interior surface. 4. Tanks shall be chemically inert to petroleum products. H. Accessories: 1. Anchor straps provide steel reinforced anchor straps for tank. Number and location of straps shall be as specified by manufacturer. Straps shall be standard as supplied by the tank manufacturer. 2. Certification Plate label shall be permanently affixed to each tank. 3. Flanged Manways a) The standard manways to be 600mm I.D. b) The manway will be furnished complete with gaskets, bolts and covers. I. The manufacturers price shall include the cost of all shipping permits and transportation to deliver the tank to the jobsite. The tanks shall be set on a 300mm of pea gravel and anchored to a concrete foundation with fiberglass hold-down straps as recommended by the manufacturer. Each strap shall be capable of withstanding the buoyancy load for the tank diameter.
4.
J.
K. The manufacturer of the tank shall submit shop drawings of the tank for approval. The shop drawings shall indicate the size, construction data, tapping connections, location of the tappings and hold-down installation. L. Performance Warranty: Tank manufacturer shall furnish a warranty stating as follows: We warrant that our tanks if installed in accordance with our instructions: 1. Will meet our published specifications and will be free from material defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year following date of original shipment; 2. Will not fail for a period of thirty (30) years from date of original shipment due to external corrosion; 3. Will not fail for a period of thirty (30) years from date of original purchase due to internal corrosion, provided the tank is used solely with fuel oil at temperature not to exceed 75oC.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 19. Section 15496- Fuel Oil Storage Tank
Page 157 of 317
4. Will not leak for a period of thirty (30) years from date of original purchase due to structural failure (defined as breaking or collapse) provided the installation is performed and validated by a qualified installation contractor and the tank is used as stated above. M. Alarm functions of the tank gauging systems follows: 1. Low level on tank: Flashing display on gauge and sounding of local alarm bell. Alarm silencing pushbutton silences bell, display continues to flash until situation corrected. 2.03 OIL FILL AND VENT TERMINALS
A. Furnish and install fuel oil pump sets of sizes and capacities as shown in the drawings. B Vent Heads Oil tank vent pipe terminal shall be provided with a weatherproof type vent head.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers recommendation. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS
A. When the system is energized make all required adjustments and test as per manufacturers recommendations for leakage. 3.03 SITE TEST
A. The generator fuel tank shall be filled with sufficient diesel fuel to BS2869 Class A prior to the site test. Upon completion hand over of the installation, the storage tank shall be filled with full tank. 3.04 PROTECTION OF TANK AND ASSOCIATED PIPE WORK AFTER HYDRAULIC TEST
A. Immediately after hydraulic testing of the tank, the Contractor will drain and dry it out and apply some protection coatings to the manufacturers recommendation on the interior surface of the tank to prevent rusting. B. The Contractor shall be responsible to drain all associated pipe work, fittings and valves after hydraulic test. All pipe work must be dried and flushed out with oil to remove any trace or water to prevent rushing. 3.05 PAINTING OF PIPE WORK
A. All pipe work, other than buried pipes, shall be painted immediately after installation with at least one coat of red primer and two (2) finishing coats of best quality aluminum paint approved by the Contractor. The colour will be determined by the Engineer on site. 3.06 VIBRATION CONTROL
A. The complete generator assembly shall be isolated on static deflection unhoused springneoprene in series isolator with non-skid neoprene pads. Start-up and shut down rocking restraint snuffers shall be provided at four corners of base frame.
Page 158 of 317
B. All fuel line pipes shall be cushioned with a layer of harnesss and neoprene pad at attached points. C. All pipe work and engine silencers shall be suspended on static deflection spring-neoprene inseries hangers. D. Detail calculation and proposal for justifying the size and provision shall be provided for Engineers review prior to the installation. 3.07 INTERFACE
A. As the fuel bulk tanks will be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be required to work closely and coordinate with his Fuel Tank Supplier for the satisfactory commissioning of the following: 1. To provide marshalling boxes for system interface with the fuel bulk tank installation, including the following status and alarm monitoring at the fuel pump control panel. a. Remote fuel level indications b. High/low level alarm indications with buzzer and acknowledge button 2. To coordinate and accommodate for the exact location of the mechanical fuel level indications inside the Fuel Pump Room. 3. To connect fuel supply and return pipes, inclusive of all necessary control valves from the service bulk tank to the fuel pumps.
3.08
HYDRAULIC TESTING OF FUEL BULK TANK AND PIPEWORK
A. Hydraulic testing is required for the bulk tanks and the associated pipework. B. During the hydraulic test, the following test pressure shall adopted: 1. 70 kPa for fuel bulk tank: per BS2594 2. 70 kPa for the associated pipework, valves and fittings. Test for two (2) hours, pressure drop shall not exceed 3%. C. The test shall be able to last for at least 3 hours without under deformation and leaking. D. The Contractor may require any pressure gauge employed to be tested and calibrated before use. Pressure gauges with full scale deflection readings more than three (3) times the test pressures shall not be used. E. The Hydraulic Testing of the fuel tank shall be witness by Contractor professional personnel and endorse the installation for any Abu Dhabi Authority.
END OF SECTION
Page 159 of 317
SECTION 15510 ACMV PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: 1. Except as otherwise specified, the work under this Section shall consist of providing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely furnish and install all piping, appurtenances and accessories shown, specified, or required, to make complete mechanical and refrigerant system, ready for operation, as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the Sub-contract Documents. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: 1. ASME 2. ASHRAE 3. ANSI 4. JIS 5. TIS 6. BS 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings 1. Valves 2. Strainers 3. Hangers, Supports and Anchors 4. Thermometers 5. Pressure Gauges 6. 1/30, 1/50, 1/100, 1/200 Scale Dimensioned Piping Layout 7. Schedule of Pipe and Fitting Materials and Weights PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE
A. Provide only new pipe, free from scale or rust, and of the material and weight specified under the various services. Properly mark each length of pipe at the mill for proper identification with name or symbol of manufacturer, Standards material designation and schedule number B. Provide steel pipe made from soft, weldable quality steel made by open hearth, electric furnace or acid bessemer process. C. Galvanized pipe shall be galvanized with prime western spelter by the hot process and not wiped.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 20. Section 15510 - ACMV Piping Systems Page 160 of 317
D. All copper tubing shall be of weight as required for service specified, in conformance with the ASTM designation B-88 for type L and type K tubing, hard or soft drawn. E. All nipples shall be of the shoulder type, shall be of the same materials as the pipe connected and shall have designation mark by the manufacturer. F. Pipe Schedule : See last page of this section. 2.02 FITTINGS
A. Type of fittings shall be as specified under the Fittings Schedule. B. All screwed couplings and shoulder nipples not exceeding 150mm same material as the pipe. in length shall be of the
C. Welding fittings shall be of the same material and schedule as the pipe to which they are welded. Welding elbows shall be long radius pattern unless clearance conditions necessitate the use of standard radius pattern. Welded tees shall be used where difference between main and branch is less than two (2) standard pipe sizes. When openings are cut in pipes where difference between main and branch are two (2) standard pipe sizes or larger, such branch connections shall be reinforced. All cutting oxide which may drop inside the pipe shall be removed before welding branch in place. D. Fitting material shall conform to the following specifications: 1. Steel Welding Fittings ASTM-A-106 or approved equal 2. Solder Fittings ASTM-B-88 or approved equal 3. Compression & Flanged ASTM-A-40-2 or approved equal Fittings 4. PVC Fittings ASTM or approved equal E. Flanges shall be of the same pressure rating as the fittings and valves in each service category. Welding neck flanges or slip-on flanges shall be used with flanged valves, equipment, etc., on welded lines. All flanges shall be drilled in conformance with pressure rating requirements and shall be faced and spot faced. Welding flanges shall be of steel. Laps shall be machined on front, back and edge, and loose flanges have face and bore machined. Flange gaskets shall be non-asbestos type. F. Solder for solder-type fittings shall be of 95% tin and 5% antimony except refigeration piping. 2.03 VALVES
A. Furnish and install all the valves shown on the drawings, specified herein, and/or necessary for the control and easy maintenance of all piping and equipment. Valves shall be first quality, of approved manufacture, shall have proper clearance, followers in the packing glands, and shall be tight at the specified test pressure. Each valve shall have the makers name or brand, the figure or list number and the guaranteed working pressure cast on the body and cast or stamped on the bonnet, or shall be provided with other means of easy identification. Valves manufactures shall be followed by other List. All valves of one type throughout the job shall be of the same manufacture. 2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Where piping near floor is supported from the floor, such supports shall be of pipe standards with base flange and adjustable top yoke.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 20. Section 15510 - ACMV Piping Systems
Page 161 of 317
B. Where piping is run above the floor and is not hung from the ceiling construction or supported from the floor, such piping shall be supported from the wall with J-hook hangers, expansion bolted to the wall. C. Provide approved steel pipe covering protection saddles for all insulated pipes, spot welded to pipes 65mm and larger. Pipe shall be supported with load bearing calcium silicate insulation. D. Provide all necessary support steel for installation of pipe hangers and supports. E. Pipe supports shall accommodate spring isolation hangers as indicated in Section Vibration 2.05 PRESSURE RATING A. Pipe work system including pipes, fittings, valves, flanges, couplings, etc. shall comply with the working pressure specified and as required due to building height or system operational requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all pipe, fittings, valves, strainers, hangers, anchors, expansion bends, and all accessories specified, indicated on the Drawings, or required to assure proper operation of all piping systems installed under this Section. B. The piping shown on the Drawings shall be considered as diagrammatic for clearness and may or may not, in all parts, be shown in its true position. This fact does not, in any way, relieve the Sub-contractor from responsibility for the proper erection of a system of piping in every respect suitable for the work intended as described in this Section. C. The drawings indicate generally the sizes and locations of pipe lines, but the right is reserved to direct changes in run and details of pipe work as necessitated by site conditions. All piping shall be of sizes indicated on the Drawings. Any pipe sizes not shown shall be proportional to the load carried at the same resistance as similar piping, or of sizes as directed. D. Install piping perpendicular and/or parallel to floors, walls, etc. Group piping and valves neatly and run them so as to avoid reducing headroom or passage clearance. E. Conceal all piping within finished areas wherever possible. Arrange all valves, controls, and accessories concealed in furred spaces and requiring access for operation and maintenance so as to assure the use of a minimum number of access doors. F. Install all piping in such a manner that the entire system can be drained of all water. Provide each low point in the system with a 25mm bronze hose gate valve having a bronze cap and chain on the outlet. G. Install the entire piping system with a view to an easy and even flow of fluid to and from all equipment and apparatus, with no sharp bends, quick changes of section or pockets. H. Make all joints tight without any packing, and if any leaks show, remake the defective parts with new material and not caulked. No bushings of any kind shall be used. I. Make changes in direction of pipe with fittings as specified.
Page 162 of 317
J.
Make final connections to all equipment. Follow equipment manufacturers recommendations as to pipe size and arrangement.
K. Provide dielectric fittings between dissimilar pipe materials. Fittings shall include a dielectric material such a Teflon or neoprene. L. Ream all screwed pipe prior to erection. Make screwed joints tight without the use of lead or filler of any kind except oil, graphite, or approved pipe compound. M. Cut brass pipe threads with special brass threading dies, and make up joints with lubricant. Use strap wrenches, or equivalent in making up brass pipe. Do not use wrench which gouge or scar the pipe. N. Flange joints shall be faced true, packed and made up perfectly square and tight. Each flange joint shall be provided with best grade steel bolts with square forgedheads and with cold pressed semi-finished hexagon nuts Bolts and nuts shall be dipped in a mixture of graphite and oil, just before installation. O. Install all valves so that they are readily accessible. Where required for operation of valves not accessible for direct operation, furnish and install chain wheel, guide and sufficient length of chain to operate from floor level. Provide Hooks for fastening chains out of the way. No valves shall be installed with the handle pointing downward. If, in the opinion of the Supervision Consultant, valves have been so installed as to create a hazardous and unsafe condition, relocate these valves as directed, without additional charge. P. Where it is not practical to avoid piping runs over or within 1.5 meter of electrical apparatus of any kind, including switchboards, transformers, panels, telephone equipment, motors, etc., such apparatus shall be adequately protected by drip pans. provide 20 drain outlets and piping discharge to sink, floor drain, or other approved equal. Q. Provide automatic air vents at all high points on pipework risers or along pipeline where air lock is deemed possible. Provide drain discharge for air vent and connect to nearest drain point. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide necessary structural members, hangers, and supports to keep piping in proper alignment and prevent transmission of thrusts and vibrations. Take care not to weaken building structure or penetrate waterproofing. Use only hangers and supports capable of screw adjustment after piping is erected. Hangers supporting piping expanding into loops. Bends and offsets shall be secured to the building structure in such a manner that horizontal adjustment perpendicular to the run of piping supported may be made to accommodate displacement due to expansion. All such hangers shall be finally adjusted, both in the vertical and horizontal directions, when the supported piping is at system operating temperature. B. Horizontal overhead pipes shall be supported by approved pipe hangers, spaced approximately 2.5 meter apart. In all cases, spacing of hangers shall besuch as to prevent sagging or the forming of pockets in the piping. Hangers shall not pass throught ducts. C. Vertical piping shall be supported by a pipe hanger within 30 centimeter of elbow. D. All hangers, rods, and associated components shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. No piping shall be permanently supported by any wire, rope, wood, or other makeshift device. E. Base flanges shall not be bolted to floor where cement coat waterproofing occurs or where membrane waterproofing would be punctured by bolt.
F. Underground piping shall be laid on solid undisturbed ground, except where crossing another trench or excavation adjacent to a building wall or foundation, and there piping shall be supported on approved foundations of concrete or brick piers or cradles as directed. G. The Sub-contractor shall adequately support and protect underground piping so that it shall remain in place without settling and without damage during and from backfilling. Any piping so settling or so damaged shall be replaced by the Sub-contractor without cost to the Sub-contract. 3.03 EXPANSION AND ANCHORS
A. Adequate provision for expansion shall be made in all piping by means of loops, bends, or offsets. Where necessary, approved guides shall be installed to direct the expansion. Where pipe lines join or where branches occur, provisions shall be made for the expansion of both lines. B. Piping shall be adequately anchored where necessary to localize expansion and contraction and prevent undue strain on the fittings and apparatus. Anchors shall be of heavy blacksmith construction welded to the pipe and fastenend to the structure. Provide all necessary steel for connections to structure. 3.04 WELDING
A. All welding shall be done by the oxyacetylene or electric arc welding process in accordance with the requirements set forth in Welding Pipe Joints of the Code for Pressure Piping. B. All steel pipe 65mm and larger may be purchased mill beveled or shall be machine beveled on both ends before welding. On odd lengths of pipe, beveling may be accomplished by means of the oxyacetylene cutting torch providing all paint, rust, scale, and oxide are carefully removed with hammer, chisel or file. Joints shall be prepared and welded to assure thorough fusion with bare metal, complete penetration, maintenance of alignment, and the production of a joint that shall develop the full strength of the pipe and that shall be leakproof in service. C. All foreign matter shall be removed from the ends of pipe lengths before tacking and welding. Pipe lengths shall be lined up straight and abutting pipe ends shall be concentric. Spacing and tuck welding shall be such as to prevent the pipe from lapping or getting out of alignment during welding operation. D. 5% of the welding joints shall be inspected by X-ray scanning that to be carried out by the Contractor.
3.05 TESTING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all labor, materials, instruments and equipment necessary to perform tests as indicated below and as required by Code. Tests shall be made after erection and before covering is applied or piping painted or concealed and as sections of mains are completed. The extent of the work completed before pressure tests are made shall be determined by the Supervision Consultant. B. Where controls and accessories are not manufactured to withstand pipe test pressures; they shall be properly protected against damage during such tests. C. Take care to avoid putting excessive pressure on mechanical seals, safety devices, etc. Fill the system and vent all air at least 24 hours before the actual test pressure is applied. Apply test
pressure when water and average ambient temperatures are approximately equal and constant. Maintain test pressure for not less than 2 hours without appreciable drop after the force (test) pump has been disconnected. D. Repair leaks appearing during the various pressure tests by replacing all defective materials or welds, and retest until the piping is found perfect. Caulking of screwed joints or peening of welds is prohibited. Wherever it is necessary to cut out a weld and the ends of pipe cannot be conveniently brought together, provide a short piece of pipe as required. E. Prepare and submit test reports in quadruplicate for all tests specified and for all tests required by local codes and regulations. F. All installed pipes shall be flushed and flushing water shall be drained off. 3.06 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Properly cap or plug all lines during construction so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Blow the piping system through after completion (for the purpose of removing dirt, grit, sand, etc., from all equipment and piping), for as long as it is required to thoroughly clean the apparatus. B. When directed, any section of the work, after it has been completed and satisfactorily tested, shall be put in actual operation by the Sub-contractor and operated by him for a period of two (2) days of 24 hours each, during which time any defects which may appear shall be remedied and any adjustements which may be necessary shall be made. 3.07 OPERATING AND TEST PRESSURES
A. Water Systems: 1. The operating pressure of piping systems shall be as specified or equal the static head of the system plus the shut-off head of the pump (if any) connected to that system but in no cause less than 1000 kPa. 2. All water services operating with design pressures above 2400 kPa shall be subject to a hydrostatic test pressure of 1.25 the design pressure by an approved gauge. 3. Water sytems operating with design pressures below 2400 kPa shall be subject to a hydrostatic test pressure of 1.5 of the design pressure, recorded by an approved gauge. 4. Special precautions shall be necessary to prevent damage to equipment, valves and fittings and also on lower sections of high rise buildings, and approval of the type and method of testing shall be obtained prior to proceeding. 5. All tests shall be conducted using treated water and pressures shall be maintained for a minimum of 24 hours without loss of pressure when corrected for ambient temperature change as necessary. B. Refrigerant Systems: 1. Refrigerant piping circuit shall be pressure tested to 3000 kPa for 24 hours, using dry nitrogen or anhydrous carbon dioxide. Pressure test shall be carried out with compressor discharge and suction services valves closed. The pressure test shall be immediately followed by evacuation simultaneously from both sides of the systems to an absolute pressure of 3-mm of mercury (i.e. the boiling point of water in the system is below 0 deg C) with compressor service valves open and vacuum pump running, The compressor service valves shall then be closed, and the vacuum pump isolated from the system. The evacuation test shall be deemed satisfactory if the absolute pressure rise over twelve hours does not exceed 4-mm of mercury measured on an approved mercury manometer or electronic vacuum indicator. On completion of the vacuum test the vacuum shall be broken and the system charged with refrigerant, and the whole systems hall be halide tested.
C. Testing of Condensate Drains: 1. All open drains shall be tested by capping off the lowest drain point and filling the line with the fluid being drained, and visuall ychecking all joints for leakage. No pressure testing is required.
PIPE SCHEDULE Service Condensate Drains Chilled water pipe Material uPVC Steel Type Class E Black, Seamless for pipes up to 250mmand ERW XS for diameters 300mm and above Air-coded split unit refrigerant pipe Copper Soft copper coil as per equipment manufacturer standard Schedule 40 Weight
Type of Pipework Black Steel Pipe
Joint Screwed sockets for pipework up to 50mm diameter with jointing compounds to BS 5292:1976 or welded joints (butt welded fittings for fuel oil pipe). Butt welded, flanged or mechanical coupling joints for pipework 65mm diameter and over. Compression joints to BS 864 : Part 2 in plant room. Capillary joints to BS 864 Part 2, elsewhere 67 mm size copper fittings and above shall be BW or equal non-ferrous weldable copper tube fittings. uPVC pipe fitting with solvent weld joints
Refrigerant Pipe
uPVC
END OF SECTION
Page 166 of 317
SECTION 15540 ACMV PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to herein. 1.02 EFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps. B. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code for Electrical Components and Installations. C. NEMA MG1 Standard for Motors and Generators PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. As indicated in the Section 15010. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Pumps shall be specifically manufactured for intended classes of service, with non-overloading characteristics throughout the operating curve (motors shall not operate in their service factor). Impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Impeller size shall be no more than 90% of casing size. Pump shall be factory tested at operating conditions, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Installation instructions shall be included with pump at time of shipment. B. Provide cyclone type abrasive separators to provide clean water flush to seals for all pumps on open systems, and all pumps over 5 kW on closed systems requiring flush. Separator materials and pressure rating shall be suitable for class of service and maximum working pressure of the pump. Provide sheet metal guard to protect separator from damage. Provide shut-off cocks with manual bypass line to allow separator to be removed for cleaning while seals continue to be flushed. C. Provide flexible connections and vibration isolation components for all pumps. D. Provide steel channel base for each pump with drip rim and drain connections. E. Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. F. Motors shall be high efficiency type (not less than 85%). G. Provide allowance for all necessary work in the field and shop to trim each pump impeller, if needed, for water balancing purposes. H. For all types of pumps listed below, bearing frame and pump internals shall be serviceable without disturbing motor or connected piping.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 21. Section 15540 - ACMV Pumps
Page 167 of 317
I.
For all types of pumps listed below, provide mechanical seals with carbon rings and ceramic faces, stainless or brass metal parts, stainless springs and synthetic rubber bellows. Seals shall operate satisfactorily to 225F. Unless otherwise stated in the schedules, all pumps shall be single stage.
J.
K. Provide tappings for pressure gauges at inlet and discharge of all inline and split case pumps. L. All couplings for variable speed pumps shall be capable of operating under all conditions without fatigue. M. All pump used shall be suitable to operate at the specified working pressure. O. Pump shall be selected with minimum 70% efficiency at peak operating conditions. 2.03 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Pumps shall be suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting. B. Pump body shall be of Cast Iron or Cast Steel to suit maximum working pressure. C. Impeller shall be non-ferrous, enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft and secured by a locking nut. D. Mechanically seal pump liquid cavity at motor shaft with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring suitable for continuous operation at 225F. E. A non-ferrous shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal. F. Pump bearing bracket shall have oil lubricated bronze journal and thrust bearings. Bracket shaft shall be alloy steel having ground and hardened thrust bearing faces. G. A flexible coupling shall be incorporated to damper starting torque and torsional vibrations. H. Provide casing wear rings, drains and vents. I. Pump shall be factory painted with at least one coat of high grade machinery enamel. Paint shall not contain ozone depleting substances. BASE MOUNTED PUMPS
2.04
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, flexible or close coupled as indicated, vertically split casing, for maximum working pressure. B. Casing: Cast iron or cast steel to suit maximum working pressure, with suction and discharge gauge ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge, separately supported on base frame. C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. Not larger than 85 percent of cutwater diameter, dynamically balanced. D. Bearings: Regreasable or permanently lubricated roller or ball bearings. E. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze or stainless steel shaft sleeve. F. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225F maximum continuous operating temperature, 175 pound working pressure. G. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 21. Section 15540 - ACMV Pumps Page 168 of 317
H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim. I. Motor: Do not exceed motor nameplate rating through entire range of pump curve for impeller diameter selected. SPLIT CASE HORIZONTAL PUMPS
2.05
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, flexible or close coupled as indicated, horizontally or vertically split casing, for maximum working pressure. B. Casing: Cast iron or cast steel to suit maximum working pressure, with suction and discharge gauge ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge, separately supported on base frame. C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. Not larger than 85 percent of cutwater diameter, dynamically balanced. D. Bearings: Regreasable or permanently lubricated roller or ball bearings. E. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze or stainless steel shaft sleeve. F. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature, 175 pound working pressure. G. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard. H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim. I. 2.06 A. Motor: Do not exceed motor nameplate rating through entire range of pump curve for impeller diameter selected. VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR PUMPING SYSTEM Pump Logic Controller The controller shall be specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications. The controller shall function to proven programs that safeguard against damaging hydraulic conditions including: a. motor overload b. pump flow surges c. hunting d. end of curve
The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting 4 analog inputs from zone Sensor/transmitters installed at locations to be agreed. The controller shall scan each analog input minimum once every 500 milliseconds. It will then select the analog signal that has deviated the greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each input signal shall be capable of maintaining a different set point value. The controller shall be field expandable to control multiple pumps in parallel and accept up to 16 analog inputs. This modification shall consist of nothing more than the addition of analog input modules and shall not require the use of special tools or factory reprogramming. Controllers not capable of being expanded to this level will not be acceptable. The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional-integral-derivative control function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be user adjustable over an infinite range. The pump logic controller shall be self prompting. All messages shall be displayed in plain English. The operator interface shall have the following features:
Page 169 of 317
a) Multi-fault memory and recall b) On-screen help functions c) LED pilot lights and switches d) Soft-touch membrane keypad switches. The readout shall be two lines of forty 0.50" brightly lit fluorescent characters capable of displaying the following values: a) Differential pressure in PSIG b) Pressure in PSIG c) Flow in GPM d) Temperature in degrees F or C e) Differential temperature in degrees F or C f) Kilowatt consumption g) Wire to water efficiency calculation h) Run hours calculation and duty notation The pump controller shall communicate to the Building Management System (BMS) by both hard-wired and serial communications. The following communication features shall be provided to the Building Management System (BMS) in hardwired form via 4-20ma analogue signals and digital outputs: a) Remote system start/stop. b) Failure of any system component (qty. 1, relay output from pump controller) c) Process variable (qty. 1 4-20ma analogue output supplied by pump controller) d) VFD speed (qty. 1, 0-10VDC analogue output supplied by pump controller e) Optional: Pump on/off status (qty. 3 relay output supplied by pump controller) The following communication features shall be provided to the Building Management System via an RS485 port utilizing suitable communication protocol: a) All sensor process variables b) Individual zone set points c) Individual pump failure d) Individual pump on/off status e) Individual VFD on/off status f) VFD speed g) Individual VFD Failure h) VFD bypass status (if automatic) i) Individual sensor failure j) Enclosure shall be NEMA 1. B. Adjustable Frequency Drive (AFD) The adjustable frequency drive (s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type, microprocessor controlled design. The AFD, including all factory installed options, shall have approval of Canadian Standards Association (CSA) or other equal International standards. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 ventilated for installation as a wall mounted or free-standing unit, depending on the amp rating. A handoff-automatic switch and speed potentiometer shall be mounted on the front of the enclosure AFD shall utilize a diode bridge rectifier to convert three phase AC to a fixed DC voltage. Power factor shall remain above 0.95 regardless of speed or load. AFDs employing power factor correction capacitors shall not be acceptable. Insulated gate bipolar transistors shall be used in the inverter section to convert the fixed DC voltage to a three phase, adjustable frequency, AC output. A DC line reactor shall be provided to
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 21. Section 15540 - ACMV Pumps Page 170 of 317
minimize harmonic and current distortion of the input power line. The following customer modifiable adjustments shall be provided: a) Accel time: 0.1 to 1800 seconds b) Decel time: 0.1 to 1800 seconds c) Minimum frequency: 0 HZ d) Maximum frequency: 120 HZ e) Analog input filter: 0.1 to 10 seconds f) Analog outputs: 10 to 1 gain g) Volts / Hertz ratio Speed reference signal shall be customer selectable for 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. The AFD shall be suitable for elevations to 3300 feet above sea level without derating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 50oC. AFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95% non-condensing humidity. The AFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English via a 40 character alphanumeric display: a) Frequency b) Voltage c) Current d) Kilowatts per hour e) Fault identification f) Percent torque g) Percent power h) RPM All AFDs shall be warranted for a period of 12 months after PAC. This warranty shall cover parts and labor. C. Adjustable Frequency Drive Bypass a) The variable speed pumping system shall be equipped with bypass for each adjustable frequency drive. b) Bypass shall consist of a main power disconnect with ground fault protection, a pair of interlocked contactors and a motor overload relay. All are to be mounted in the AFD enclosure. c) Bypass contactors shall be equipped with thermal motor overload protection. d) A drive-off-bypass switch shall be provided on the front of the AFD enclosure. D. Sensor /Transmitters Provide field mounted differential pressure sensor transmitter (s) in locations to be agreed. Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20mA dc signal indicative of process variable to the pump logic controller via standard two wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have stainless steel wetted parts with two 0.25 male NPT process connections. It shall be protected against radio frequency interference and shall have a watertight, NEMA 4 electrical enclosure capable of withstanding 2000 PSI static pressure with a 0.5" NPT conduit connection. Accuracy shall be within 0.25% of full span. E. Sequence of Operation The system shall consist of a pump logic controller, multiple pump/AFD sets, manual across the-line bypass, with manual and automatic alternation and pump staging. The pumping system shall start upon the closure of customer's contact when the pump logic controller Mode of Operation selector switch is in the REMOTE position. When the pump logic controller selector switch is in the LOCAL position, the
Page 171 of 317
pumping system shall operate automatically. Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller, indicative of process variable condition. The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, determined set points. When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level. The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of events to stage a lag pump. The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until they equalize in speed. Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. When the set point (and end of curve criteria) can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed destage sequence and continue variable speed operation. As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor. The redundant variable speed system shall be started through the pump logic controller. In the event of a system differential pressure failure due to a pump or AFD fault, the pump logic controller automatically initiates a timed sequence of events to start the redundant pump/AFD set in the variable speed mode. Upon multiple pump or AFD faults, the pump controller shall display an alarm condition through a plain English message and a flashing red indicator. The AFDs shall be locked out of service and the pump/motors may be manually started across-the-line with motor overload protection. In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters shall remain in the scan/compare program for control. The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmitter shall be displayed on the operator interface of the pump logic controller. In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, the AFD shall maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure. PUMP or AFD fault shall be continuously scrolled through the display on the operator interface of the pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the controller has been manually reset.
2.07
A.
CHILLED WATER PRESSURIZATION UNIT

The unit shall comprise break tank with lid, water connections with isolating valve and float valve, centrifugal pumps (duty/standby) with continuously rated single phase motor, pressure switch, pressure reducing valve with gauges and interconnecting pipework and valves, all mounted on to a mild steel base plate. A water meter shall be provided to monitor the quantity of water being added to the system during operation.
B. Expansion Tank The expansion tank shall be sized to suit the system water quantity unless a larger size is required for proper functioning of the system. The tank shall be fabricated from mild steel and shall be painted both inside and out after completion of welding. The tank shall be rated for operation at 16 Bar NP in accordance with the pressure test requirements of ASME or approved equal. The tank shall have a neoprene rubber diaphragm rated for continuous operation at 16 Bar NP. The tank shall be complete with all tappings for inlet (which may also be the drain,) air recharge, and pressure relief. A spare diaphragm shall be maintained by the Contractor at site during the warranty period and shall be handed over to the Owner in as new condition at the end of the warranty period.
Page 172 of 317
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by manufacturer. C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapour binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of published minimum efficiency curve. D. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 100 mm and over. E. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized shut-off valve, balancing and check valve on pump discharge. F. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. G. Provide drains for bases and seals. Pipe full size to and discharge over floor drains. H. Lubricate pumps before start-up. I. J. Install base mounted pumps on concrete base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place. Qualified millwright shall check, align, and certify base mounted pumps prior to start-up. Submit certificates for each pump to the Supervision Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Page 173 of 317
SECTION 15545 CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORKS INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Flushing and Cleaning of piping systems. C. Chemical feeder equipment. D. Treatment for closed systems. E. Treatment for open systems. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Submit Raw Water Analysis from site to include following information: 1. pH 2. Total Alkalinity 3. Chlorides 4. Silica 5. Hardness 6. Total dissolved solids C. Submit the following: 1. System installation drawings and diagrams. 2. Product Information Sheets on each component, device pump controller, valve, etc., being supplied for the systems. 3. Product Information Sheets and Material Safety Data Sheets on all chemical products being supplied. 4. Recommended feed rates on each chemical product. 5. Recommended operating conditions for each system including cycles of concentration, chemical test limits of Water Treatment system set points. 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. C. Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 22. Section 15545 - Chemical (Water) Treatment
Page 174 of 317
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. Company shall have local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel. B. The water treatment company shall meet the following minimum requirements: 1. It shall be regularly engaged in this type of work and service and shall have a specialist with at least five years experience in the cleaning and chemical treatment of systems of similar size capacity, and shall be in active responsible charge of all treatment work. 2. It shall either operate or have access to a laboratory equipped to analyze samples in accordance with the standard methods of the American Water Works Association and the American Society for Testing Materials. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical systems, and for delivery to public sewage systems. B. Conform to standards of ASHRAE, AWWA, ASTM and EPA 1.06 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date of Substantial Completion as specified below for following systems: 1. Cooling Towers (Condenser Water System) 2. Chilled Water System 3. Hot Water Boiler System B. Service: The Water Treatment Company shall include start-up of chemical treatment and provide on-going supervisory service through a minimum of monthly visits during the operating season to monitor the progress of the treatment program. Additional duties include training of Owners staff in the performance and interpretation of control tests and furnishing laboratory check analysis and reports on treated systems. Building staff shall be responsible for applying chemicals. Service shall be provided for a period from start-up to 12 months after Completion Certificate is issued. The Water Treatment firm shall be responsible for applying chemicals, adjusting bleed/blown down equipment and furnishing laboratory analysis for a period from start-up to 12 months after Completion Certificate is issued. Schedule of service visits shall be as follows. a. Cooling Towers (Condenser Water) Systems Weekly b. Chilled Water Systems Monthly c. Hot Water Boiler Systems Monthly C. Provide service and all required chemicals for initial cleaning, test equipment and all chemicals required from start-up to 12 months after Completion Certificate is issued. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services for the service period. D. All service visits shall be confirmed in writing to the Owner so that a complete record of service activities is available for examination by the Owner and the Supervision Consultant. Submit two copies of each report.
Page 175 of 317
E. Include eight hour training course for operating personnel, instructing them on installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems. Arrange course at startup of systems at the job site. F. Provide on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections. G. Legionella Pneumophilia Screening Tests shall be made on the cooling tower system a minimum of four times per year during the operating season. This test shall be performed by a qualified laboratory using Direct Florescent Antibody technique. The laboratory report shall state the number of Legionella Pneumophilia bacteria per milliliter. Reports shall be forwarded to the Owner and Supervision Consultant. The water treatment program shall be adjusted if necessary based on the test results. H. Carry out 30-day and 90-day tests of coupon racks to determine corrosion rate. Reports shall be forwarded to the Owner and Supervision Consultant. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Submit maintenance materials under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Provide sufficient chemicals for treatment and testing of all systems during warranty period. C. Provide one replacement media for the water filtration unit. D. Provide a test set complete with apparatus and chemical reagents for the determination of appropriate control test, including chloride, pH and any additional test as required by Water Treatment company. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CHEMICAL MATERIALS
A. Materials 1. System Cleaner: a. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products; sodium tripoly phosphate and sodium molybdate. b. Algaecide; chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or microbiocides such as quarternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or isothiazolones. 2. Closed System Treatment (Chilled Water) a. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH; polyphosphate. b. Corrosion inhibitors; boron-nitrite, sodium nitrite and borax, sodium totyltriazole, low molecular weight polymers, phosphonates, sodium molybdate, or sulphites. c. Conductivity enhancers; phosphates or phosphonates.
3. Condenser Water System Treatment (Cooling Towers): a. Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling; phosphonates, sodium polyphosphates, lignin derivatives, synthetic polymer polyelectrolytes, or organite phosphates.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 22. Section 15545 - Chemical (Water) Treatment Page 176 of 317
b. Acid to reduce alkalinity and pH. c. Corrosion inhibitor; zinc-phosphate, phosponate-phosphate, phosphonate-molybdate and phosphonate-silicate, sodium tolyltriazole, or low molecular weight polymers. d. Algaecide; chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or microbiocides such as quarternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or isothiazolones. 2.02 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS AND METERING PUMPS
A. General: Provide completely pre-assemble packaged chemical feed system. Package shall be hydraulically and electrically tested at the factory. Package shall be furnished with all required lubricants, special tools, and installation instructions. B. Pump: 1. Pump capacity shall be adjustable through 100% of the range by manual micrometer dial while the pump is running or stopped. Pump stroking speed shall not exceed 60 spm. All parts of the power train must operate submerged in oil. 2. The pump shall be sized to deliver the required capacity at 85% of maximum stroke length. Stroke adjustment shall be variable oil by-pass type mechanism, with the plunger powered through its entire travel. 3. The pump shall include an automatic vent and refill mechanism on the hydraulic side, which operates once each stroke. The pump shall have an external hydraulic relief valve which is adjustable. 4. Double ball check valves shall be provided on the discharge to ensure accurate repeatable metering. The pump valves shall be removable for cleaning or replacement without the need to disturb suction or discharge piping. 5. The pump shall be field convertible to automatic stroke adjustment without the use of special tools, and without the need to replace any major frame parts. 6. The pump shall be furnished with a factory-mounted driver suitably sized for continuous operation at the maximum relief setting. The motor shall be integrally mounted direct coupled. No belts or pulleys should be used in the drive train or for capacity adjustment. 7. The pump shall be able to deliver a flow at least 5 l/hr at 10 bar. C. Tank: The tank shall be constructed of polyethylene and furnished with a hinged or removable cover. Tank shall include connections for pump suction, drain, level gauge, chemical fill, dilution water, and relief valve return piping. Drain connection shall be separate from pump suction connection. Drain shall be located in the bottom of the tank. Suction outlet connection shall be on the side wall of the tank, a minimum of 50 mm above the bottom. Tank shall be furnished with level gauge and level switch. Liquid level switch shall be polyprophene housing with integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for connection to metering pump and low level alarm. D. Agitator: An angle plate mounted agitator with 304 stainless steal shaft and propeller shall be furnished. The mixer propeller shall operate at 1750 rpm. The purpose of the agitator shall be to maintain chemicals in homogenous suspension or solution. 2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. By-pass (Pot) Feeder: Fifteen gallon capacity. Include inlet and outlet connections, drain connections, level gauge sight glass with guards and 150 mm diameter feeding funnel, all valves, half inch sample valves and support legs.
Page 177 of 317
B. Drip Feeder: Plastic reservoir with coil of capillary tubing with probe, weight, charging syringe, and clip. C. Conductivity Controller: Packaged monitor controller with solid state circuiting, five percent accuracy, linear dial adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control function light, output to control circuit and recorder. D. Water Meter: Displacement type cold water meter with sealed, tamper-proof magnetic drive, impulse contact register, single pole, double throw dry contact switch. E. Solenoid Valves: Forged brass body globe pattern, normally open or closed as required, general purpose solenoid enclosure, and continuous duty coil. F. Timers: Electronic timers, infinitely adjustable over full range, 150 second and five minute range, mounted together in cabinet with hands-off automatic switches and status lights. G. Coupon Racks 1. Provide a coupon rack to monitor corrosion rates. The coupon rack shall be of prefabricated PVC bypass assembly and shall include: a. Four corrosion coupons tees b. Four corrosion coupons with holders c. Flow control valve d. Strainer 2. Additional corrosion coupons shall be provided depending on desired frequency of evaluation which shall be 60 days. Results shall be reported as mils per year with comments as to pitting erosion. H. A 120V circuit shall be provided to a junction box adjacent to the cooling tower and the water treatment equipment indoors. Provide controls transformers for meters, timers, solenoid valves, probes, etc. As required. 2.04 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide white enamel test cabinet with local and fluorescent light, capable of accommodating 4 10 ml zeroing titrating burettes and associated reagents. B. Provide the following test kits: 1. Alkalinity titration test kit. 2. Chloride titration test kit. 3. Sulphite titration test kit. 4. Total hardness titration test kit. 5. Low phosphate test kit. 6. Conductivity bridge, range 0 - 10,000 microhms. 7. Creosol red pH slide complete with reagent. 8. Portable electronic conductivity meter. 9. High nitrite test kit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Carry out complete water chemical analysis to confirm applicable treatment type and chemicals required.
Page 178 of 317
B. Remove all pipe caps and flange plates from headers and drain legs and remove all deposits from the systems. Ensure all strainers are clean and in place. C. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. Record in treatment report. D. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning. Where flushing and cleaning bypasses are provided ensure flushing and cleaning for the terminal devices and control valves is carried out separately to the remainder of the system. Do not flush general system through control valves, heat exchanges, coils, etc. 3.02 CLEANING SEQUENCE
A. Add non-foaming chemical detergent cleaner compatible with all system components and materials to closed systems at concentration recommended by manufacturer. B. Chilled Water Systems: Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. The draining of the flush water need to be collected in temporary effluent tanks and taken away to be discharged as per local municipality requirement. C. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of Supervision Consultant. D. Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill. E. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. F. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly and reassembly of components as required. 3.04 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT
A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and necessary piping. Install around globe valve downstream of circulating pumps unless indicated otherwise. B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. C. Provide 20 mm water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for test specimens. D. Provide chemicals as specified to maintain the following conditions in each closed water system: WATER PH Molybdate Nitrate Orthophosphate 1. System Controller a. An automatic control system shall be provided using conductivity for surface blowdown and water meter activation for proportionate feed of treatment chemicals. Provide timer activated sampling with solenoid valve, balancing valve, and conductivity probe. Pipe to blowdown tank.
7.0-9.0 50-100 ppm 500-700 ppm 5.0-7.5 ppm
b. The controller shall be a NEMA 12 steel enclosure with gasketed door, viewing window, lockable hasp-type door latch and either plug-in receptacles or knockouts for conduit installation. c. The controller shall have the following features and accessories for blowdown control: 1) LED bar graph readout display (micron/cm) 2) Spark-plug type sensor probe 600# WSP 3) Field calibration adjustment (internal) 4) Adjustable sample interval (1/4 to 3 hours( and duration (1/2 to 10 minutes) timers (front panel) 5) Electric solenoid or motor operated ball valve sized as function of boiler HP and pressure 6) HOA switch for the valve 7) Operate-Test switch uses a fixed resistor to simulate the sensor 8) Adjustable hysteresis or dead-band (internal) 9) High, low, normal conductance indicator lights (LED) 10) High or low conductance alarm light (flash or stead switch). Trip points are field adjustable. Flash or steady switch has a silence position switch 11) External alarm bell 12) Recorder output 0-5 volts 13) Illuminated Legend Valve Open, whenever blow-down is occurring.
2. The controller shall have the following features and accessories for chemical feed: a. Electrical contact head water meter sized as function of makeup. b. Solid state counter c. Solid state time d. Test switch e. HOA Switch for chemical pump f. Illuminated legend; Feed, when pump is activated g. Positive displacement metering pump having the necessary pressure rating and discharge capacity to meet system requirements and polyethylene mixing tank. Provide separate pump tank package for fee of oxygen scavenger to deaerator storage section and for feed of other chemicals to return condensate tank directly into boiler drum. E. Activate solution pumps when feedwater pumps are running. F. Provide 20 mm water coupon rack on each feedwater pump with space for test specimens. G. Provide liquid level switch in each solution tank to de-activate solution pump and agitator, and signal mechanical alarm system. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 CONDENSER WATER SYSTEMS (COOLING TOWERS)
A. Provide automatic condenser water control systems for corrosion inhibitor feed, blowdown and biocide feeds. Inhibitor application shall be make-up water meter activated, blowdown shall be conductivity activated, and biocide shall be make-up water meter fed with blowdown locked out to ensure biocide retention time. B. Control systems shall incorporate solid state integrated circuits and digital LED displays, in NEMA-12 steel enclosure. Provide gasketed and lockable door. C. Base dissolved solids control on conductivity and include the following in the controllers: 1. LED digital readout display (microhm/cm). 2. Temperature compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.
3. High, low, normal conductance indicator lights (LED). 4. High or low conductance alarm light (flash or steady switch), trip points field adjustable. Flash or steady switch shall have silence position. 5. Illuminated legend shall indicate ALARM whenever alarm condition exists. 6. Hand-off-automatic switch for solenoid bleed valve. 7. Illuminated legend shall indicate BLEED when valve is operated. 8. Adjustable hysteresis or dead-band (internal). D. Base inhibitor feed control on make-up volume and include the following in the controller: 1. Solid state counter (1-15 field selectable). 2. Solid state timer (adjustable 1/4 to 5 minutes). 3. Test switch. 4. Hand-off-automatic switch for chemical pump. 5. Illuminated legend shall indicate FEED when pump is activated. 6. Solid state lock-out timer (adjustable 1/4 to 3 hours) and indicator light. Lock-out timer shall deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits. 7. Panel totalizer (amount of makeup), electro-mechanical type. E. Biocide Programmer to Include: 1. 24 hour timer with 14 day skip feature to permit activation any hour of the day. 2. Precision solid state bleed lock-out timer (0 - 9 hours) and biocide pump timer (0 - 2-1/4 hours), clock controlled. 3. Solid state alternator to enable the use of two different formulations. 4. Digital display of the time of day (24 hours). 5. LED display of day of week (14 days). 6. Fast and slow clock set controls (internal). 7. Battery back-up so clock is not disturbed by power outages, quartz timekeeping accuracy. 8. Hand-off-automatic switches for biocide pumps. 9. Illuminated legend shall indicate BIOCIDE A or BIOCIDE B when pump is activated. F. Activate system on flow switch integral to panel. Provide water meter on system make-up, wired to chemical feed control system. G. Provide solution pumps to feed sequestering agent and corrosion inhibitor from solution tank into condenser water supply to tower. Provide agitator as specified. H. Provide conductivity controller to sample condenser water and operate solenoid bleed valve and piping to blowdown controller sampler wired to open when condensing water pump is operating. I. Introduce algaecide to tower by continuous feed with solution pump or solenoid valve on tank (chlorine). J. Provide liquid level switch in each solution tank to de-activate solution pump and agitator, and alarm bell. K. Provide 20 mm water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test specimens.
END OF SECTION
Page 181 of 317
SECTION 15625 WATER COOLED CHILLER (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1. 2. WORKS INCLUDED Comply with Division 1, General requirements and all documents referred to herein. Microprocessor controlled, air-cooled liquid chiller utilizing HFC-134a, screw or centrifugal compressors, and electronic expansion devices and specified or shown on the Drawings QUALITY ASSURANCE ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 550 certification program. ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590. ASHRAE Compliance: i. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration. ii. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements. 4. 5. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/ISESNA 90.1-2004. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chillers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
1.02 1. 2. 3.
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. For chillers charged with R-134a refrigerant, include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate certifying compliance. 6. 7. Comply with NFPA 70. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada, and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance. 8. 9. Green Seal Compliance: Signed by manufacturer certifying compliance with GS-31. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at outdoor temperature up to 52C degree.
10. Chillers shall be suitable for operation under normal power supply conditions expected in Abu Dhabi. 11. Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9002/BS5750, Part 2 Manufacturing Quality Standard. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturers recommendations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to ordering the equipment furnish the following information for each unit for endorsement: 1. Wiring and control diagram 2. Manufacturers shop drawings 3. Complete manufacturers printed catalogues 4. Physical dimensions and operating weights
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 23. Section 15625 Centrifugal Water Chiller Page 182 of 317
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Pipework connections and flange details Mounting and fixing details Complete materials specification Characteristic Curves Sound power characteristics (frequency spectrum)
B. Manufacturers shop drawings shall clearly indicate the construction and assembly of all chiller components including accessories. C. Mounting and fixing details shall include details and dimensions of chiller bases, fixing bolts, supporting steelwork, flexible connections, vibration isolators and any special builders work requirement. D. Characteristic curves shall show the energy consumption in kilowatts, pressure drop through the evaporator, chilled water flow rates and temperatures, etc., for each unit at 15%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full capacity at constant condenser entering water temperature. E. Sound power characteristic curves shall be in dB measured in accordance with ARI standard 575 for 15%, 25%, 505, 75% and 100% of full capacity. F. Each power consumption of the selected chillers shall not exceed the power input as indicated in the Schedules. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. General: 1. The chiller shall be of adequate strength to withstand the hydraulic and other forces encountered but in any case shall be capable of withstanding a minimum hydrostatic test pressure of 1.5 times of the system working pressure or as specified, whichever is the higher. 2. Water cooled chillers shall be suitable for continuous operation in the extremes of climate experienced in Abu Dhabi. 3. All chillers must be suitable for operation in parallel to give the required duties. 4. All water cooled packaged chillers, drives and accessories shall be of the highest commercial standard and shall be manufactured, constructed, rated and tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 30-78 and 15-78 and ARI Standard 590 or an approved equivalent standard. 5. Materials shall comply with the various ASME Standards, or other approved international standards. 6. All factory applied acoustical and thermal insulation including facing and adhesives shall be fire-resistant and shall conform to the requirements of the relevant authorities. 7. The air cooled chiller shall be of the single, outdoor packaged type completely factory assembled, piped, wired, charged with refrigerant and delivered complete with all starting gear, controls, instruments and safety devices. It shall include compressor(s), evaporator, air cooled condenser, starter and weatherproof equipment enclosure, all mounted on a continuous structural base for proper support and ease of rigging. The field connections required is external control circuitry, system water piping, and electrical power supply. 8. All units shall be dynamically and statically balanced after assembly. 9. The materials and items of equipment used in the refrigerant and water circuits shall not corrode or set up corrosion when in contact with the liquids and/or other metals. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion resistant materials and assembly methods must be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against galvanic interaction.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 23. Section 15625 Centrifugal Water Chiller
Page 183 of 317
B. Compressor: 1. Rotary screw or centrifugal compressor using R134a shall be used. 2. Alternatively, compressors could be reciprocating semi hermetic type and shall be fitted with automatically reversible oil pump, operating oil charge, suction and discharge shut off valves. Compressors shall be factory mounted on spring vibration isolators. The use of reciprocating compressor shall not introduce higher input power required and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. 3. The compressor motor shall be cooled by suction gas passing around the motor windings and shall be thermally protected. Manual restart shall be required after stoppage due to thermal or pressure overload. 4. A crank case heater shall be provided for reciprocating compressor and wired so as to operate whenever the compressor shuts down. 5. A minimum of two compressors with separate refrigerant circuit for each unit shall be provided. 6. Motor shall be of sufficient capacity to drive compressor throughout entire operating range without overload and with sufficient capacity to start and accelerate compressor without damage. C. Evaporator: 1. The evaporator shall be shell and tube type, with removable heads, the tubes shall be seamless copper. The evaporator shell shall be carbon steel. Tubes shall be integral finned seamless copper tubes individually replaceable. The evaporator shall be constructed and tested to 2,000 kPa on the refrigerant side and at least 1.5 times the system working pressure on the water side. 2. Electronic expansion valve for refrigerant flow control shall be used. 3. The shell shall be insulated with minimum 50mm closed cell foam insulation with aluminium jacketing. 4. Evaporator shall be manufactured, constructed and stamped to ASME Unfired Pressure Vessel Standard. 5. At least two independent refrigerant circuits shall be provided. 6. Water Box: Cast-iron or carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell. 7. Marine type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water box without piping connections. D. Water cooled Condenser: 1. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within shell. Shell is separate from evaporator. 2. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or seamless pipe. 3. Designed to prevent direct impingement of high-velocity hot gas from compressor discharge on tubes. 4. Provide condenser with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of refrigerant charge and condition. 5. Tubes: 1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other tubes. 2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube sheets. 6. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell.
Page 184 of 317
7. Intermediate Tube Sheets: Installed in shell and spaced along length of tube at intervals required to eliminate vibration and to avoid contact of tubes resulting in abrasion and wear. 8. Water Box: 1. Cast-iron or carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell. 2. Marine type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water box without piping connections. 3. Provide water boxes with lifting lugs or eyebolts. 4. Hinged water boxes. 5. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle. E. Safety Controls: Safety controls shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. high and low oil pressure low refrigerant pressure high condenser pressure high motor temperature timer for prevention of compressor short cycling flow switch for low chilled water flow refrigerant pump down control thermal overload for compressor and fan motors Local/Stop/Remote switch.
F. Casings: 1. Casings shall be constructed of heavy gauge industrial type galvanised steel panels securely bolted and reinforced in critical areas to form a rigid and durable structure. 2. Panels shall be bonderised to remove grease and dirt after fabrication and all external parts shall be coated with zinc phosphate and finished with baked enamel. All panels shall be insulated inside with surface coated fibreglass material. 3. Panels shall be of interlocking type with the base raised to prevent water from entering the unit. Screws shall be cadmium plated. 4. Proper corrosion resistant paint, if required, shall be provided so that the casing, cabinet, and all external components shall be capable of withstanding 500 hour salt spray test in accordance with ASTB B-117 Standard. G. Safety Controls: a. Unit controls shall include as a minimum: Microprocessor panel with LCD display and control key pad. Microprocessor control shall be able to have a high level interface with the BAS so that all alarm and monitoring signals can be read from the BAS. b. Shall be capable of performing the following functions: 1) Automatic compressor lead/lag switching. 2) For Secondary/Primary chilled water circuit, capacity control based on bypass flow rate as specified. 3) Capacity control based on return chilled water temperature with temperature sensing at chiller return header shall also be provided as an alternative control function. 4) Limiting the chilled fluid temperature pull-down rate at start-up. 2. Diagnostics: a. Display module shall be capable of displaying set points, time, system status (including temperatures, pressures, and percent loading), and any alarm or alert conditions.
Page 185 of 317
b. Control module, in conjunction with the microprocessor, shall be capable of displaying the output of a full load run test to verify operation of every switch, sensor, potentiometer, fan, and compressor before chiller is started. 3. Safeties: a. Unit shall be equipped with all necessary components, and in conjunction with the control system shall provide the unit with protection against the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) Loss of refrigerant charge Reverse rotation Low chilled fluid temperature Low oil pressure (each compressor circuit). Ground current fault. Thermal overload. High pressure. Electrical overload. Loss of phase. Loss of chilled water flow Ground cement fault Current imbalance.
b. Fan motors shall have inherent overcurrent protection. 9. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: Subjecting the controller to any of the following conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for replacement: 1. 2. 3. Overtemperature. Short circuit at controller output. Ground fault at controller output. Variable frequency controller shall be able to start a grounded motor. 4. Open circuit at controller output. 5. Input undervoltage. 6. Input overvoltage. 7. Loss of input phase. 8. Reverse phase. 9. AC line switching transients. 10. Instantaneous overload, line to line or line to ground. 11. Sustained overload exceeding 100 percent of controller rated current. 12. Starting a rotating motor. Motor Protection: Controller shall protect motor against overvoltage and undervoltage, phase loss, reverse phase, overcurrent, overtemperature, and ground fault. Automatic Reset and Restart: Capable of 3 restarts after controller fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Controller shall be capable of automatic restart on phase-loss and overvoltage and undervoltage trips. Visual Indication: On face of controller enclosure or chiller control enclosure; indicating the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Power on. Run. Overvoltage. Line fault. Overcurrent. External fault. Motor speed (percent).
Page 186 of 317
10. 11.
12.
8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 13. 14.
Fault or alarm status (code). DC-link voltage. Motor output voltage. Input kilovolt amperes. Total power factor. Input kilowatts. Input kilowatt-hours. Three-phase input voltage. Three-phase output voltage. Three-phase input current. Three-phase output current. Three-phase input voltage total harmonic distortion. Three-phase input current total harmonic distortion. Output frequency (Hertz). Elapsed operating time (hours). Diagnostic and service parameters.
Operator Interface: At controller or chiller control panel; with start-stop and auto-manual selector with manual-speed-control potentiometer. Chiller Capacity Control Interface: Equip chiller with adaptive control logic to automatically adjust the compressor motor speed and the compressor pre-rotation inlet vane position independently to achieve maximum part-load efficiency in response to sensor inputs that are integral to the chiller controls.
END OF SECTION
Page 187 of 317
SECTION 15710 COOLING TOWERS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKS INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to herein. B. Provide factory built, packaged type, low noise type induce draft cooling towers with access platforms including ladders. C. Provide resiliently isolated installation of cooling tower and condenser, water piping. Refer to section 15200 for isolation details. D. The cooling tower shall be factory and field tested for performance and noise measurements. 1.02 REFERENCES STANDARDS
A. ANSI / AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. ANSI / AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. ASME PTC 23 - Atmospheric Water-cooling Equipment D. Cooling Tower Institute (CTI) ATC 105 - Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling Towers. E. Cooling Tower Institute (CTI) STD 201 - Certification Standard. F. Each cooling tower shall complete with all necessary components and accessories required for complete installation and assembly. G. The performance of the cooling tower shall be rated to latest CTI standards. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site as per manufacturers recommendations. B. Factory assemble entire unit. For shipping, disassemble into as large as practical sub-assemblies so that minimum amount of fieldwork is required for re-assembly. C. Store and protect products proper to avoid any physical damages. D. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one set of matched fan belt, three spray nozzles for each cell, one spare gasket for each access door, one valve seat for each make-up or control valve for each set of cooling tower. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Submittals shall include fully dimensioned drawings of the towers including size and location of all access panels, piping and wiring connections. Include also operating weights including attenuators, capacity performance characteristics, details of all piping connections and controls
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 24. Section 15710 - Cooling Towers Page 188 of 317
elements, electrical details for motor at both speeds, construction methods and materials, acoustic performance data. Submittals shall include reference to screen showing all piping connections made and access requirements satisfied. C. Submit octave-band sound pressure levels from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz, inclusive, for the operating conditions specified as measured in a semi-free field environment at distances of 2 m feet and 15 m feet from each side of unit at the same distance above the center of the unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. As per Particular Specification. 2.02 GENERAL
A. Cooling towers shall be of the type specified and shape as shown on the drawing. B. Unless otherwise specified, cooling tower shall be single/multi cell, induced draft and cross flow type. C. The number of cells shall be as nominated in the Equipment Schedule. Each cell shall be capable of separate operation, adequately manufactured to withstand the maximum pressure imposed by wind forces normally encountered in the locality of the project at the elevation indicated on the drawings. D. Hot dip galvanising shall be minimum 0.122 g/cm2 to JISH8641-1982 Class 2 designation HDZ40, BS 729:1971 or approved equivalent. E. Drift or carry over shall not exceed 0.05% of the total water circulation flow rate. Drift eliminator shall be provided. 2.03 CASING
A. Structural framework, support legs and the like shall be fabricated from 3mm minimum thickness steel sheet. Unit panels, covers and the like shall be fabricated from 1.6mm thickness steel sheet. After fabrication, all assemblies shall be hot dip galvanised. B. Casings shall be of fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP). C. All joints shall be properly sealed against leakage and corrosion to the approval of the Supervision Consultant. D. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be of 316 stainless steels. 2.04 COLD WATER BASIN
A. Cold water basins shall be of fibreglass reinforced polyester (FRP). Each basin shall incorporate a sump fitted with stainless steel screened suction outlet connection, overflow, valve drain and float controlled make up connection. The water make up connection shall discharge not less than 50mm or 2 pipe diameters, whichever is the greater, above the rim of the basin. B. All towers shall incorporate connection of balancing pipes in multiple tower installations. C. Air inlet louvres shall be installed to prevent foreign objects from entering the water basin.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 24. Section 15710 - Cooling Towers
Page 189 of 317
2.05
HOT WATER BASIN
A. Hot water basins shall be as per section "Cold Water Basin" but with adequate support to prevent warping. A water distribution system comprising polypropylene metering nozzles to ensure even water distribution over the entire fill area. Flow control valves shall be provided to enable remote isolation of cells if required. B. FRP cover shall be provided to all open hot water basin. 2.06 WATER DISTRIBUTION
A. Provide aluminium alloy headers and PVC branches with distribution nozzles. B. The water distribution system shall be such that a flow of 150% of the specified capacity will not cause overflow or splashing. 2.07 FILL
A. Tower fill shall be corrugated honeycomb fire retardant PVC to provide maximum surface area for air to water contact and assure maximum heat transfer efficiency. B. Fill shall be easily removable for cleaning as required. C. The fill shall be able to withstand a maximum water temperature of 40C and resistant to ultra violet, rot, decay and biological attack. 2.08 FANS
A. Fans shall be gear or belt driven and statically and dynamically balanced. B. Fan shafts shall be type 316 stainless steel. C. Axial fan impellers shall be of aluminium alloy or glass reinforced nylon. D. Fan motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type suitable for the electrical supply available, operating at not more than 1440 rpm. Motor bearings shall be heavy duty ball and/or roller type selected for 100,000 hours life. Provide moisture proof seals. Preference will be given to towers with motors outside the fan cylinder. E. Motors shall be IP55 rated. All fans in each cooling tower shall be complete with fail-safe interlock such that if excessive vibration beyond a pre-set adjustable limit occurs, the fan automatically cease operation. Fan motor winding shall be Class F. F. Belt drives shall be one piece multi-grooved, weatherproofed and with provision to adjust tension. G. Gear drives shall be of heavy duty with spiral bevel gears. Gear boxes shall be weatherproofed. Lubrication lines shall be extended through the fan chamber for ease of maintenance. 2.09 ACCESS
A. Provide a hot dip galvanised or stainless steel access ladder to reach from floor level to the fan deck or water distribution system, for ease of inspection and maintenance. If stainless steel is used, ensure adequate protection against metal to metal corrosion. B. Provide an access door adequately sized to allow entry into the tower. Alternative means of access shall be provided as appropriate to suit the tower configuration.
2.10
NOISE LEVELS
Page 190 of 317
A. Noise levels of the cooling towers shall not exceed those stated in the Particular Specification and the maximum permissible properly boundary noise level stipulated in Code of Local Environmental Control Authority. If required, air attenuators shall be provided to meet the above noise criteria. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cooling tower shall be resiliently isolated from building structure. Tower shall be directly supported on rigid structural steel base frame to support isolator point loading. Isolators shall be provided between structural steel base and dunnage steel. C. Elevate towers to maintain maximum positive suction head on condenser water pump. D. Connect condenser water piping with flanged connections to tower. supply to tower and condenser water suction away from tower. Pitch condenser water
E. Connect piping with flanged union connections to tower as specified herein. Pitch to tower. F. Connect overflow and drain spill on roof over a splash block. G. Refer to Section 15200 for Noise and Vibration isolation requirements. Provide a minimum of six (6) base isolator supports per tower. All piping connected to towers shall be installed on isolators and include flexible connections. H. All vertical piping shall be supported independently of the cooling tower. Piping shall not put a strain on the flexible connections in the tower piping. Provide footing supports for all vertical piping. Provide miscellaneous steel to ensure all vertical piping shall be held rigid when free standing. I. Provide all field wiring from motor starters, local disconnects, heater switches, solenoid valve, level switches, cut-outs, etc. as shown on the drawings and specified. Water level control shall be by line voltage controls supplied by tower manufacturer. Control of basin water temperature shall be carried out via the DDC control system. Provide all relays and interlocks necessary to interface with Building Management System. Coordinate tower location, access requirements and piping connections with structure and with architectural screen to be placed around the cooling towers. All piping connections shall be made within the architectural screen. Maintain provisions for access.
J.
K. Inspect and thoroughly clean tower of any loose debris. Fill the tower with water, add commercial cleaner, and clean the tower and connected piping to remove mill grease and scale. Drain and flush the tower and refill to proper operating level. L. Place the tower in operation and adjust the bleed rate, adjust water solids control system and chemical treatment. M. Check the fan for proper operation and record motor current draw. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1. B. Test under actual operating conditions to CTI ATC 105 and verify specified performance. 3.03 MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES
Page 191 of 317
A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 1. B. Verifying installation of the cooling tower is in accordance with specifications and respective manufacturer's recommendations. Thoroughly clean before start-up. 3.04 FIELD TESTING
A. Cooling Tower Noise Measurement: On completion of installation, testing adjustment and balancing, noise measurements shall be conducted at the time when the air-conditioning system is fully operational. The measurements shall be scheduled when the activities in the building or outside the building do not influence the measurements. B. Measurement conditions: Noise levels will be measured at the locations and operating conditions identified in the specification. C. Witnessing of Tests: The Contractor shall notify the Supervision Consultant two weeks in advance before the measurements are scheduled to be conducted.
END OF SECTION
Page 192 of 317
SECTION 15755 HEAT EXCHANGERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: 1. Gasketed Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers. 1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. Boiler and Pressure Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels. 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturers specifications and technical data including performance, construction and fabrication. 1. Submit product data for each manufactured component. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedure, including specific requirements indicated. 1. Submit shop drawings for each system or assembly. C. Contract Closeout: Comply with Tender Invitation documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLAT AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Design Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Type: Counter-current flow. Designed to prevent fluid intermixing and leakage to outside of unit. Unit shall be sized with allowance for 15% expansion of capacity by adding additional plates. Moveable cover shall be provided with steel roller bearings. Bolted construction. Provide lifting lugs, designed to allow lifting of entire unit. United tested in accordance with ASME code. Provide ASME stamp and label on heat exchanger. Provide metal nameplate with location identification in accordance with schedule and include design flow for hot side and cold side, temperature in and out for hot side and cold side, pressure drop and design temperature differential.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 25. Section 15755 - Heat Exchangers
Page 193 of 317
B. Materials: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.02 Type 316 Stainless Steel Plates. Plates and gaskets shall be permanently marked to identify quality and material. Carbon steel frame coated with baked epoxy enamel. Stainless steel guide bars. Galvanized nuts and bolts. One-piece NBR gasket, impervious to ozone and other water treatment chemicals. Steel flanged pipe connections, 150 psig ANSI.
PLAT AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. As specified in Equipment Schedule. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ensure concrete base is provided as required. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers: 1. Comply with manufacturers recommendations. 2. Location and mount as indicated. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flush and clean all piping before connecting heat exchangers to prevent fouling. B. Ensure that heat exchangers are isolated from piping systems during initial stages of piping system cleaning to avoid fouling. C. Provide thermal relief valves in accordance with ASME requirements.
END OF SECTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 25. Section 15755 - Heat Exchangers
Page 194 of 317
SECTION 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install the sheet metal and ductwork systems as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Meet Standards described in the latest ASHRAE Handbook. B. Duct dimensions shown on Drawings are net, add the duct dimension if inside the duct is provided with acoustic duct lining. C. Fire dampers shall be UL listed and labelled, and meet requirements of NFPA-90A, or Equivalent International Standard acceptable to the Supervision Consultant. D. Meet the latest editions of the following standards: 1. NFPA 92A - Recommended Practice for Smoke Control System 2. NFPA 92B - Guide for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria & Large areas 3. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK
A. Ductwork shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel sheet. All duct dimensions indicated are net clear inside dimensions. Any conversion from the given shape shall be made without increasing air velocity or friction losses. B. Fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet metal unless other materials are specifically named. Duct installation shall conform to the following: 1. Ductwork shall be smooth on the inside and free of obstructions, vibration and rattle. 2. Fabricate ductwork, except as described in the next item, according to the following classifications (where applicable): a. Low Pressure: Velocities less than 10 m/s and static pressure in duct less than 500 Pa, positive or negative. b. Medium Pressure: Velocities 10 m/s and greater and static pressure in duct from 500 Pa positive or negative to 750 Pa positive or negative and up to 1500 Pa positive. c. High Pressure: Velocities 10 m/s and greater and static pressure in duct over 1500 Pa positive up to 2500 Pa positive. 3. Also comply with the following ductwork construction specification: a. Ductwork associated with all air-handling units shall be of medium pressure construction. b. Ductwork used in smoke exhaust/control, smoke purging, pressurization and all other emergency ventilation system shall be of high pressure construction. Minimum thickness of ductwork sheet metal shall comply with the local Fire regulations. 4. Provide duct transformation with expansion fittings having slopes not exceeding 1 to 7 and contraction fittings having slopes not exceeding 1 to 4. 5. Provide full radius tees, bends, and elbows for changes in direction except where square elbows are required due to space restrictions. Provide DuroDyne double thickness 0.8 mm turning vanes assembled in top and bottom rails in square elbows.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 26. Section 15800 Air Distribution Page 195 of 317
6.
7.
8. 9.
Provide balancing dampers free to move in either direction without binding and rattling. Construct dampers in low and medium pressure ductwork from 1.2 mm galvanized sheet metal. Use manual quadrants on small ducts. On dampers longer than 375 mm use push rods with ball joints. Use two push rods on ducts wider than 600 mm. Isolate equipment with neoprene 0.8 mm thick flexible connectors with finished fabric width not less than 150 mm. Flexible connectors shall have the same fire/temperature rating as the connecting ductwork. Provide 50 mm insulated sheet metal blank off panels behind unused portions of exterior louvers. Proprietary made duct joints such as Ductmate or approved equivalent shall be used. Seal all joints in low, medium and high pressure ductwork with Transcontinental MP for low and medium pressure or duct sealer for high pressure. Joints shall be sealed to conform to SMACNA standards as follows: Static Pressure Construction Class 90 Pa and up 500-744 Pa Up to 500 Pa
Seal Class a. b. c.
Sealing Required All transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. All transverse joints and longitudinal seams. Transverse joints
C. Construct round ductwork to meet high pressure duct standards and as follows: 1. Provide welded slip joint construction round duct fittings. Wipe pipe and fittings with duct sealer before assembly. Secure joints with self-tapping screws, then brush again with thick coat of duct sealer. 2. Provide dieformed round elbows through 200 mm dia. constructed from 1.1 mm galvanized steel. Provide 5 section construction for larger elbows. 3. Provide conical round tees. D. Flexible Ductwork: 1. Provide Flexmaster Triple Lock Aluminium, flexible ductwork upstream and downstream of air terminal control units and/or other locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. Construct ductwork from a tape of soft annealed aluminium sheet, spiral wound into a tube and spiral corrugated to provide strength and flexibility. Provide a triple mechanical lock to form a continuous secure air joint without the use of adhesives for pressures up to 2000 Pa. 3. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 90 and Underwriters Laboratories classification for round duct to specification 181 and comply with local Fire Authority requirements. E. Provide flexible ductwork in minimum lengths of 1500 mm and maximum lengths of 3600 mm for low pressure systems. For medium pressure systems restrict minimum and maximum lengths to 1200 mm. F. Provide kitchen exhaust ductwork as follows: 1. Meet NFPA Standard No. 96 and the requirements of the local governing authority. 2. Submit construction drawings and detail drawings when required by the governing authority. 3. Provide duct access doors at 3m intervals for inspection and cleaning purposes. 4. Provide 3mm steel duct with liquid tight continuous welded joints.
G. Provide fire cladding materials for smoke exhaust/control/purging ductworks installed outside fire-rated shafts as required by local Fire Authority. All smoke exhaust/control/purging ductwork shall be of 1.2mm galvanised steel. H. Provide stainless steel ductwork for dishwater exhaust. Construct from Type 304, 1.52mm material. Seal joints and seams water tight. I. Provide fire rated duct as follows:
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 26. Section 15800 Air Distribution Page 196 of 317
1. 2.
Fire rated material shall be of approved type with acceptable tested fire rating by Civil Defence. The material shall have adequate thickness and the same fire rating properties as the structure in which they are installed through.
3. Provide galvanised steel support channels at 600mm centres. The spacing between the fire resistance board and metal duct shall be packed with mineral wood. 4. The complete assembly shall be non-combustible. 5. Fire resisting board shall have zero indices for ignitability, spread of flame and smoke development, in accordance with BS 476 and as approved by Civil Defence. 6. Fire rated duct shall be supported independently by galvanised hangers. 2.02 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors for galvanized ductwork using 0.7 mm galvanized material with galvanized mounting frame and 25 mm rigid insulation between panels. Provide fastening devices to give tight closure. B. Provide access doors for stainless steel ductwork using 0.61 mm stainless steel with stainless steel mounting frame and 25 mm rigid insulation between panels. Provide fastening devices to give tight closure. C. Provide access doors for aluminium ductwork of 0.61 mm aluminium with aluminium mounting frame, and 25 mm rigid insulation between panels. Provide fastening devices to give tight closure. D. Provide access doors and removable panels in plenums and casings of 1.31mm galvanized material with 50 mm thickness fiberglass insulation. Equip doors with handles and hinges to open from either side (without risk of injury). E. Construct all access doors with double panels. F. Provide neoprene gaskets securely formed into door frames around the periphery of all duct access doors. G. Equip door frames for plenums and casings with hollow tubular gaskets. complete with 300 mm x 300 mm viewing ports. Provide all doors
H. Provide access doors at all fire dampers. Gasket used shall be of high temperature rating as per the fire damper rating. 2.03 ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
A. Rectangular Duct Liner: Permacote Linacoustic meeting ASTM C 1071 with air surface coated with acrylic coating treated with EPA registered anti-microbial agent proven to resist microbial growth as determined by ASTM G 21 and G 22. 1. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.70 or higher based on Type A mounting and tested in accordance to ASTM C 423. 2. Adhesive: meeting ASTM C 916. 3. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened. B. Round Duct Liner: Permacote Spiracoustic, rigid performed round liner, or Spiracoustic Plus with air surface coated with acrylic coating treated with EPA register anti-microbial agent proven to resist microbial growth as determined by ASTM G 21 and G 22. 1. Noise Reduction Coefficient of 0.70 as per ASTM C 423. (Type A mounting) C. Duct size to increase accordingly when acoustic lining applied. 2.04 FIELD ASSEMBLED PLENUM AND CASING CONSTRUCTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 26. Section 15800 Air Distribution
Page 197 of 317
A. Provide metal partitions, plenums and casings of not less than 1.61 mm galvanized sheet metal suitably reinforced with rolled angle sections. B. Provide metal partitions, plenums and casings with adequate strength for all operating conditions. Fabricate each sheet of material as a panel. Join panels by 40 mm standing seams on outside of casings and secure with bolts at 300 mm centres. C. Provide closure baffles around banks of coils, filters and other inline components. D. Provide 25 mm minimum size rolled structural steel angles where casing meets floor. Caulk joints to prevent air and water leakage. E. Flange and bolt casings on 150 mm centres to coils, blankoff panels and filler panels. F. Incorporate adjustable directional flow baffles into mixing plenums, to ensure complete mixing of outdoor and return airstreams with stratification not to exceed +2 deg C across the coil face at winter outdoor design temperature. 2.05 INSULATED PLENUMS AND CASINGS
A. Provide insulated metal sandwich panels for all exterior intake and exhaust air plenums consisting of prefabricated 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal panels and 50 mm rigid fiberglass insulation with interlocking joints securely fastened. B. Provide steel supports, joiner sections, floor channels, opening frames and sealing materials. Provide 1.31 mm minimum channel stiffeners at not greater than 800 mm centres. C. Connect corners and butt joints with 1.61 mm galvanized sections. Seal all joints with rubber mastic. Use angle joints to attach panel edges to walls. D. Construct entire plenum to resist deflection and seal sufficiently to avoid air leakage when subjected to a pressure differential between inside and outside of up to 2500 Pa. E. Provide access doors suitable for personnel pass through. 2.06 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Provide curtain type dampers to maintain fire rating integrity of membrane being pierced. Minimum rating to be 1-1/2 hours with 71 deg C fusible link to UL listing. Provide multiple dampers where sizes exceed code limitation. All fire dampers shall be approved by Abu Dhabi Civil Defence. B. Curtain blades under normal operating conditions shall be totally out of the air stream. C. Fire dampers shall have the same fire rating as the compartment wall or slab. D. Select dampers with air flow resistance not exceeding 13 Pa at design flow rates. E. Fire dampers to be with a factory fitted approved HEVAC installation frame 2.07 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Provide Class I dampers to maintain fire rating integrity of membrane being pierced. Minimum fire rating shall be 2 hours. B. Provide parallel blade type dampers, suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting. Provide multiple dampers where sizes exceed code limitations. C. Select dampers with air flow resistance not exceeding 13 Pa at design flow rates. D. The operation or the damper shall be controlled by fire alarm signal and automatic actuator.
Page 198 of 317
2.08
SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Provide Class I smoke dampers where indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide parallel blade type dampers, suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting. Provide multiple dampers where sizes exceed code limitations. C. Select dampers with air flow resistance not exceeding 13 Pa at design flow rates. D. The operation or the damper shall be controlled by fire alarm signal and automatic actuator. 2.09 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Provide counter-balanced heavy duty backdraft dampers suitable for use in temperatures from 10 deg C to 93 deg C. B. All backdraft damper shall be heavy duty grade/type suitable to be installed close to discharge side of the fan with high static pressure. Frames shall be 6063T5 extruded aluminium. Blades shall be formed aluminium. Bearings shall be molded synthetic and linkage 12 mm tie bars. Blade edge seals shall be extruded vinyl. Dampers shall be equipped with adjustable counterbalance weights attached to rear of blades. C. Refer to Drawings for locations, mounting direction and air flow direction. 2.10 INSULATED DUCTWORK INSIDE THE BUILDING
A. Please refer to Insulation Section 15255 for Specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHEET METAL INSTALLATION
A. Where necessary in order to attain the specified noise level criteria, provide acoustic insulation on all discharge side of fans and attenuators as follows: 1. 3000 mm for straight duct run box or 2. 1500 mm downstream of 1st elbow or 3. 1500 mm for each branch downstream of 1st tee. B. Provide final duct connections to all fume hoods and other individual canopies or hoods provided by others where required. C. Frame and install motorised dampers. Unless shown otherwise, attach each motorised damper module to the channel framing. D. Provide frames in ductwork for airflow stations. E. Provide test openings in all ducts entering and leaving air handling equipment. Install test openings at 150 mm intervals across the long dimension of rectangular ducts, and at 90 degree intervals around circular ducts. In insulated surfaces, provide extension to suit insulation thickness. Provide additional test ports in ductwork where required for air balancing. Submit drawings to indicate proposed locations. F. Make provisions in ductwork and plenums for installation of duct type smoke detectors and other control devices. G. Provide a stainless steel skirting around kitchen exhaust ductwork between hood connection and ceiling line where top of hood is below ceiling. H. Provide a sheet metal protection for leading edge of acoustic insulation. I. Slope ductwork down to exhaust hoods and other equipment connections. Provide drains at low points and pipe to nearest floor or funnel drain.
Page 199 of 317
J.
Provide neoprene isolation gaskets and nylon bolts at connections required for dissimilar metals.
K. Seal water tight all longitudinal and transverse joints in ductwork for swimming pool and change room systems. L. Seal water tight bottom and sides of intake and exhaust ducts connected to exterior louvers as follows: 1. Intake - from Louvre to air handling unit or fan. 2. Exhaust - from Louvre to 2 metres upstream of Louvre. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FIRE DAMPERS, SMOKE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Install dampers in approved manner suitably anchored to building structure in locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Install fire dampers complete with sleeve and full perimeter steel angle on both sides of barrier being pierced. Provide manufacturers recommended minimum clearance between masonry or non-combustible frame and sleeve. Sleeve shall accept actual size of damper with blades pocketed outside of air stream. C. Divide openings into smaller openings using fire resistant structures where openings to be protected require dampers larger than maximum UL listed sizes. D. Install dampers in a matter approved by Civil Defence. 3.03 TESTING
A. Duck leakage tests shall conform to Section 15995. 3.04 CLEAN UP
A. Vacuum clean the inside of all air handling systems, including fans, plenums, ducts, coils and terminal units to ensure that they are free from debris and dust.
END OF SECTION
Page 200 of 317
SECTION 15835 FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install fan coil units as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specification. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Units shall bear ARI labels certifying conformance to ARI-440. Equivalent Eurovent Standards is also acceptable. B. NC levels of fan coil units shall not exceed NC40 at high fan speed or NC35 at medium fan speed, assuming a room effect not greater than 8db. For FCU used in apartment bedroom and hotel guestroom, the unit shall be selected with noise level shall not exceed NC 30 operating at medium speed and the rated capacity. 1.03 PROTECTION A. Factory equip fan coil units with protective covers which shall remain in place immediately after installation, prior to start-up, to protect coils, fans, bearings and motors from damage due to dust infiltration during construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN COIL UNITS
A. Provide fan coil units in locations shown on Drawings. B. Construct from heavy gauge galvanized steel, reinforced and welded. Use zinc coated steel for interior parts exposed to moisture. Insulate casing with glass fibre blanket material. C. Provide standard size copper tube coils with aluminium fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Fit return connection with manual air vent. Construct coils to meet maximum working pressure required or specified. Provide female sweat connections. D. Equip two pipe fan coil units with single coils to achieve capacities as shown in the Fan Coil Unit Schedule. E. Equip units with a combination unitised drain pan and fan board assembly. Drain pans shall have a zinc protective coat and be insulated on the underside. F. Provide auxiliary drain pans (secondary drain pans) with drain fitting below fan coil units Provide drain pans complete with 9mm thick Armaflex insulation below valves stations servicing fan coil units. G. Provide centrifugal forward curved, double width, lightweight and corrosion resistant aluminium fan wheels. Provide galvanized steel fan housings. H. Provide positive three speeds, tap wound, shaded pole motors with built in overload protection. Provide pre-lubricated bearings or self-lubricated bearings for motor; the bearing life (L10) shall not be less than 40,000hrs. I. Provide motor 3-speed controller. J. Factory install all internal wiring between fan motor, controls and unit mounted readily accessible junction box. Provide terminals for single point field power connection. K. Provide unit mounted thermostats with control transformer and connect to control valves. L. Factory installs disposable filters with each unit. Provide one set of spare media.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 27. Section 15835 - Fan Coil Units Page 201 of 317
M. Provide types, sizes and capacities specified in the Fan Coil Unit Schedule. Cooling capacity based on medium speed fan operation. N. For unit used within false ceiling, provide factory built return plenum box. Access panel of sufficient size shall be provided at the plenum box for filter replacement. O. For unit used in exposed location, provide decorative casing with built-in air filter and air grilles. P. Coil air face velocity to be limited to 2.5m/s Q. Coil shall be ARI certified and labelled with selection sheet submitted for each unit. The selection sheet shall have ARI logo to proof that coil selection software is certified R. One unit to be factory performance tested for (water, air, and acoustic), this test to be conducted and witnessed by the client / project manager / and consultant representatives. S. Cooling coil shall be minimum 4 rows type. T. .All fan-units shall be provided with relays for thermostats protection based on current rating of each speed of fan coil unit fans. U. Power and control cables shall be provided in two separate conduits to avoid voltage induction. V. Fan Coil Unit performance test and witness shall be included in tender offer. The test shall be carried out for one unit of each model upon final approval from Supervision Consultant. The test shall be witnessed by Client, Project Manager, Consultant and ACMV Contractor representative. Test reports shall be submitted before delivery of units from factory. The test shall be carried out by approved independent laboratory. The independent laboratory details and method statement for testing shall be submitted for approval before commencement of testing. The test shall include the followings: a. Cooling performance b. Fan performance c. Motor performance d. Acoustic W. When the capacity of the fan coil unit provided by manufacturer is smaller than the capacity of fan coil unit specified in Equipment Schedule, and ACMV contractor and manufacturer propose to split one no. of fan coil unit into two no., the whole set of additional fan coil unint complete with additional electrical power supply, BMS control, conduits, ductwork, pipework, control valves, balancing valves, etc shall be provided without extra-cost.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units per manufacturer's requirements.
END OF SECTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 27. Section 15835 - Fan Coil Units
Page 202 of 317
SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORKS INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labour, material, and services to supply and install all air handling units and primary air handling units as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specification. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Meet the requirements of the following standards: AFBMA 9 AMCA 99 AMCA 210 AMCA 300 AMCA 301 Amca 500-D Amca 500-L ARI 410 NEMA MG1 NFPA 70 SMACNA UL 900 ASHRAE 62.1-2004 1.03 SCOPE Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings Standards Handbook Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Areodynamic Performance Rating Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from laboratory Test Data Laboratory Method of Testing Dampers for Rating Laboratory Method of Testing Louvers for Rating Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils Motors and Generators National Fire Protection Code HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible Standard for of Air Filter Units Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
A. Provide air handling units manufactured to the specific requirements of this project. Unit type and capacity shall be as shown and scheduled on the drawings. B. The unit manufacturer shall be responsible for the complete manufacture of units, all components, complete shop and field erection of units and all components, operation and performance of units under manufacturers nameplate. C. The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for coordination of the delivery of all units in compliance with construction schedule; provision of all necessary external piping, ductwork and miscellaneous connections required to complete the installation of the units in cooperation with and as recommended by the unit manufacturer. D. The unit manufacturer shall be responsible for provision of casing, fans, dampers, sound attenuation measures, electrical components, and all other unit and plenum components as specified in this section or other sections of this division and performance as shown in schedules or on drawings. E. Provide necessary appurtenances to perform as specified, whether or not expressly required by the Sub-contract Documents mentioned herein in conformance with good trade practice, as determined by the Supervision Consultant.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 28. Section 15850 -Air Handling Units Page 203 of 317
F. G.
Provide services of experienced field Sub-contractor employed by the manufacturer to supervise installation, testing and troubleshooting of units. AHU performance test and witness shall be included in tender offer. The test shall be carried out for one unit of each model upon final approval from Supervision Consultant. The test shall be witnessed by Client, Project Manager, Consultant and ACMV Contractor representative. Test reports shall be submitted before delivery of units from factory. The test shall be carried out by approved independent laboratory. The independent laboratory details and method statement for testing shall be submitted for approval before commencement of testing. The test shall include the followings: a) Coil performance b) Fan performance c) Motor performance d) Acoustic QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.04
A. Units shall be produced by a recognized manufacturer whose manufacturing process is ISO9001 certified. Their quality control procedures must be thoroughly documented to ensure a consistently high quality product. B. Provide proof of credentials of manufacturers staff as required by the Supervision Consultant. Provide evidence satisfactory to Supervision Consultant that the manufacturer has supplied units to prestigious projects in the last ten years. C. Certify conformance with performance requirements specified and shown on Drawings. D. Local service shall be available either directly from the factory or through the local certified factory representatives. E. Major components shall be products of recognized manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment and whose products are in compliance with industry standards. F. The following parameters shall establish the selection criteria and shall be as specified: airflow rates, external static pressures, and water flow rates. The following are to be as specified or improved: coil and filter face velocities, cabinet air leakage rate, inlet/discharge/radiated sound power levels, and internal static pressures/brake horsepower. G. Testing: 1. Test to ensure structural integrity, suitability under simulated operating conditions, system operation and minimum vibration levels as specified. Method statement shall be submitted for approval before commencement of testing Certify that each unit complies with design intent and Sub-contract Documents. 2. Following tests shall be performed: a. Pressure test each water coils. Pneumatically test coils for leakage by submerging in warm water and applying minimum 30 bar test pressure. Test certificates shall be submitted for each coil manufacturer fro record. b. One unit shall be air pressure tested with fans operating at shut-off pressures to ensure tight housing construction and integrity. c. Operate fans at design rpm, set fan drive and conduct complete vibration spectrum as specified. Fan, motor, drive and base assembly vibration shall be brought to within specified levels. Check motor and drive vibration with fan as assembly. d. Energize electrical devices to ensure operational integrity prior to shipment. Replace non-functioning items. e. Test casting panel acoustical, structural and physical properties performance independent recognized test laboratory. The independent recognized test laboratory details shall be submitted for approval before commencement of testing. Submit testing report before delivery of units.
H. Casing leakage shall be less than 1 % of design airflow at 1.25 times the design static pressure or 1.1 times the fans peak static pressure at design RPMs, whichever is greater. I. J. K. Fans shall conform to AMCA standards regarding testing and construction. Fans shall bear the AMCA certified performance rating seal for sound and airflow. Heating and cooling coils shall be ARI certified. Pre-filters and bag filters shall be ULC listed.
L. Units with factory wiring shall be CSA approved for electrical safety. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive adjustment and replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams, etc. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Units shall be shipped with all openings securely covered with wood and/or nylon reinforce plastic wrap and be water-tight. B. Accept products on site in factory applied protective wrapping, and factory installed lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 1.08 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product. 1.09 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturers Quality Assurance Manual. B. Submit shop drawings and product data. Shop Drawings shall be subject to approval of the Supervision Consultant. C. Shop drawings shall be clear and legible with an index format to identify different sections. Provide a cover page for each air handling unit, showing the project name, Sub-contractor, tagging information, revision submission date, leaving adequate space for approval stamps. D. Provide all technical information relevant to the product being provided, including but not limited to all the information shown in the schedules of the specification. It is the responsibility of the supplier to highlight any variances his equipment has with the requirements of this specification. E. Shop drawings shall include appropriately scaled CAD drawings. Drawing files shall be available through the Internet or as hard copies on disk. Provide website or e-mail address to obtain electronic documents. F. Product data shall include dimensions, operating and static weights, capacities, component performances, electrical characteristics, construction details, required clearances, field connection details, proposed test descriptions and sample reports, pressure drops, vibration isolation, gauges and finishes of materials.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 28. Section 15850 -Air Handling Units
Page 205 of 317
G. Submit fan manufacturers published performance curves, based on tests in accordance with current AMCA standards and in AMCA approved laboratory, to define sound power levels (PWL), re: 10-12 W for each of eight frequency band. H. Submit fan manufacturers published sound power level data based on actual test on fan sizes being furnished in accordance with current AMCA Standards. I. J. Provide fan performance curves depicting the operating point described on the schedule for each individual fan. Provide coil selection data sheets which bear ARI logo, clearly showing input data with proper consideration for altitude, air density, as well as clearly indicating the selected coils' output data.
K. Provide details showing condensate drain connection height and required P-trap height. L. Provide filter information, including initial air pressure drop, final air pressure drop, dust spot efficiency, final dust holding capacity, filter media description, filter frame details, filter replacement details, and filter gauge details if applicable. M. Submit air handling unit inlet, discharge, and radiated sound power levels at nominal capacity. N. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring; clearly indicating factory installed and field installed wiring and accessories. P. Submit material thickness and finishes details Q R Submit filter details with performance characteristics Submit damper details including housing and linkages.
S. Submit manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. T. Omission of any of the above information will cause submittal package to be immediately returned without review. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide factory assembled air handling unit in configuration as indicated and scheduled on drawings. Unit shall include all specified components installed at the factory. Field fabrication of units and their components will not be acceptable. B. If units are too big for transportation and shipping, units shall be modular type, Modular sections shall be field erected by experienced manufacturer of large custom air handling units that maintains experienced engineering and production staff. Coordinate shipping, split the units in omodular sections according to field restrictions. C. General manufacturing considerations shall include the following: 1. Steel construction shall be G-90 (275g/m2) galvanized steel. All galvanizing shall conform to ASTM- 653 or EN 10147. 2. Coils shall be arranged so that space between coils is a minimum of 24 inches, unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. 3. Fan compartment shall be arranged such that the space between the fan inlet(s) and the housing is a minimum of one fan diameter. 4. Arrangement of components shall be such that the coil face velocity distribution shall not vary more than 20% from the average coil velocity. Maximum air face velocity through coil shall not exceed 2.5 m/sec unless otherwise specified or accepted to the Supervision Consultant. 5. ARI certified and labeled, individual selection sheet to be submitted for each unit, selection sheet to bare the ARI logo to proof software for the same selected coil is certified. 6. Coil assemblies shall have provisions to facilitate total or partial removal from coil bank. Removable panels shall be provided on both sides of the unit.
Page 206 of 317
7. Multiple coil banks shall have coils independently supported. All coil pipe connections shall be extended through the unit wall casing by the unit manufacturer. No field pipe penetrations are allowed. 8. Outdoor and return air mixing boxes or plenum boxes shall be provided in front of filter sections for ducting connection. The boxes shall be complete with gear type aluminum parallel blades on/off dampers for ducting connection, access doors and all necessary accessories, etc. Outdoor and return air mixing boxes shall be arranged to minimize stratification. Air blending devices or mixing columns shall be provided as detailed on the drawings. 9. Housing shall be manufactured to minimize through metal construction and shall be provided with anti-thermal break in order to eliminate external water vapor condensation. 10. Housing shall be manufactured to minimize air and water vapor leakage. 11. Provide bolted flanged joints for ducting connection at unit discharge. 12. Droplet eliminator shall be provided for 100% outside air unit downstream of cooling coil. Droplet eliminator shall be stainless steel 304, minimum two (2) faces. It is ACMV contactor and manufacturer responsibility to provide droplet eliminator with sufficient faces (minimum two faces) to prevent condensate carry over D. One unit to be factory performance tested for (water, air, and acoustic), this test to be conducted and witnessed by the client / project manager / and consultant representatives 2.02 CASING SIDE AND ROOF PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A. Penta post framing shall be used. Housing shall be Penta-Post type aluminum profile framework complete with removable sandwiched panels, composite corner pieces, etc. 1. Fastener used to secure the panels to unit framework shall be stainless steel screws for indoors and outdoors units 2. Fasteners in aluminum construction shall be closed end aluminum rivets. B. All side and roof panels shall be constructed of minimum 50 mm thick double wall thermal acoustic panels. They shall have a minimum 50 mm wide cross section completely filled with minimum 48 kg/m density fiberglass insulation. The wall liner shall compress the insulation by 6 mm to provide sturdy and uniformly insulated panels. C. All side and roof panels shall be one-piece design to facilitate removal. Panels shall be assembled with mechanical fasteners such that each panel is individually removable. Panels shall be thermal break design of modular dimensions. There shall be thermal break between the exterior and internal panels. The side perimeter of external panel shall include a built-in PVC gasket acting as air seal D. Panel skin thickness, stiffener and frame spacing and thickness, and core density shall be manufactured to eliminate panel pulsation and to limit maximum deflection to 1/200th of any span at design positive and negative pressures. The minimum design pressure shall be equal to 1.5 times fan static pressure, at fan shut-off condition or 2000 Pa, whichever is greater. E. Exterior wall panels shall be a minimum of 16-gauge solid G-90 galvanized steel. The inner wall shall be a minimum of 20-gauge solid G-90 galvanized steel. Exterior panels shall be treated as follows: 1. Galvanized steel exterior panels shall be treated for painting and shall be epoxy painted. 2. All paint systems shall consist of one prime coat and two finish color coats shop applied to properly prepare surfaces. 3. Paint finish shall be protected from damage during shipment and field assembly. Any field touch up shall be completed to Supervision Consultants satisfaction. 4. Aluminum or stainless steel components need not be painted. 5. Inner casing shall be self-finished galvanized steel. E. Units must be suitable for pressure differentials up to 2,000 pa static pressure.
Page 207 of 317
F. The insulation media shall have long resilient inorganic glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Insulation shall be NFPA 90A rated and shall a density of minimum 48 kg/m3.. G. One unit to be factory performance tested for (water, air, and acoustic), this test to be conducted and witnessed by the client / project manager / and consultant representatives. H. The acoustic performance of the panels shall be tested by an independent laboratory per ASTM E90-04. The sound attenuation characteristics shall be the following: Acoustical Performance for Radiated Noise Transmission Octave Band Frequency (Hz) 50 mm Panels I. 2.03 Transmission loss (dB) 125 22 250 30 500 44 1000 53 2000 57 4000 63 38 STC
Provide sufficient sleeves through casing for differential pressure probes, temperature sensors, power supply cable, etc. Sleeves shall be complete with caps and seals. Eliminate cold bridging BASE CONSTRUCTION
A. Base shall be either steel beams or channel or formed galvanized steel. The minimum base height shall be manufactured to allow minimum of 150 mm from centerline of drain connection(s) to the bottom of the base. Provide steel lifting lugs at corners of each module or sufficient holes at base of each module for hosting purpose. 1. Steel base shall be steel beams or channel for direct bearing support for components in casing. The unit base shall be cleaned and shall be painted with primer and exterior enamel. 2. Galvanized formed base shall be constructed from heavy gauge formed galvanized steel around the perimeter of unit, with intermediate formed galvanized channels located at regular intervals. B. To minimize thermal conductivity and prevent condensation, the entire perimeter frame shall be uniformly insulated by provision of thermal break. C. Floor of all sections (e.g. fan section, filter section, air mixing boxes and plenum box, etc) of unit shall be provided with minimum 10 gauge aluminum treadplate. 1. Aluminum treadplate floor shall be installed on the base. The floor shall be, reinforced from below. D. The base shall be insulated with minimum 50 mm minimum 48 kg/m3 density fiberglass insulation with foil vapor barrier, held in place with weld studs and clips. Joints between insulation board sections shall be sealed with tape and mastic sealer. Bottom of base shall be underlined with a 18-gauge galvanized steel liner and sealed watertight at all joints and penetrations. Voids between this closure and rigid insulation shall be filled with fiberglass batts to full depth of joists. E. All service penetrations in the floor shall be fully sleeved and sealed at floor and sub-floor. A fully welded 50 mm sleeve extension above the floor shall be provided for water drainage protection. F. All duct connections or control dampers in the floor of the unit shall be covered with painted heavy gauge steel bar grating bolted in place, to prevent people and large objects from passing through the unit floor into the ductwork. Bar grating shall be manufactured for a maximum deflection of 6 mm under a concentrated load of 100 kg at mid span. G. All drain connections on floor mounted air handling units shall terminate at the side of the unit. Condensate drain pan connection shall be located to accommodate minimum 150 mm condensate trap height.
Page 208 of 317
2.04
ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SAFING
A. Access doors shall be double wall with skin thickness, stiffeners and insulation specified for the panels. Minimum clear opening of access doors shall be 600mm x height of door in accordance with the casing height, up to a maximum of 2200mm. B. Provide minimum 300mm diameter dual pane inspection windows. The windows shall be made of two 6 mm thick tempered glass panes separated by an air space. A desiccant pouch shall be placed in the air space to absorb any moisture. C. Door frames shall be made from 16-gauge galvanized steel with the outside of the door flush with the unit. The corners of the frame shall have a 75 mm radius and shall include self-gripping automotive gasketing to ensure appropriate airtightness and durability. D. Each door shall have two (2) "Ventlock " latches operable from either side of door and two (2) heavy-duty pin hinges. Hinges shall be zinc coated. Doors shall be removable by pushing the pins out of the hinges. Doors must open against the high pressure side. E. Provide removable access panels or doors, for removal of coils, fan and motor. Panels shall be bolted in place. Panels shall be factory sealed, air-tight without visible caulking on casing exterior. 2.05 BLOWER SECTION
A. Fan assemblies shall be completely isolated with structural steel spring vibration isolation bases. B. Fans shall be backward, curved single thickness blades. Fan wheels shall be constructed to next higher class when the operating speed at specified condition is within 15% of corresponding maximum class speed. C. Fan performance shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with AMCA standard test code for air moving devices. The fans shall have quiet and stable operation under all conditions. The fan manufacturer shall provide sound power ratings in the eight octave bands which shall be based on AMCA standards. Sound power ratings shall be in decibels referenced to 10-12 watts. The fan shall bear AMCA seal for Air and Sound performance. D. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory to ISO 1940 Grade G4 for motor power 15 kW and below, and Grade G6.3 for motor power above 15 kW. The fan balancing report shall be recorded and submitted as proof of the final dynamic balance at the factory. E. Fan and motor shall be mounted on all welded, , prime coated integral structural steel bases. F. Each fan shall receive a documented inspection by a qualified inspector. The inspection shall include welding, dimensions, bearings, and overall workmanship.
[
G. Fan impeller shall be built from steel, continuously welded to the rim and back plate, treated and painted with approved coating. Wheel diameters and discharge areas shall be in accordance with the standard sizes adopted by AMCA. Inlets shall be fully streamlined and housings shall be suitably braced to prevent vibration and pulsation. For fan up to 35 inches wheel diameter, housing is made up of hot dip-galvanized steel and shall be of galvanized lock seam construction. For fan above 35 inches wheel diameter, housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and shall be continuously welded throughout. The standard coating shall be durable and heat resistant up to 260oC. Fan shafts shall be solid and keyed to fan wheels. They should also be keyed to the sheaves for positive wheel to shaft interlock.
Page 209 of 317
H. The first critical shaft speeds shall be at least 125 % (Class I and II) and 142 % (Class III) of the fan's maximum operating speed. Bearings shall be manufactured for heavy-duty service with minimum L-50 life of 200,000 hours in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 and 11. Bearing ratings are to be based on the fans' maximum catalogued operating speed and horsepower. Pillow block bearings shall be either single row ball or double row spherical roller type. Bearing bars shall be rigidly fixed to the base (bearing supports mounted to the inlet funnel are unacceptable). Bearing supports shall consist of two or more full-length structure uprights. 2.06 ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
A. Air handling unit components shall be selected and/or manufactured to meet or exceed the acoustical performance requirements as specified for the entire operating range. It shall be the option of the manufacturer to provide a quieter fan(s), , baffles, aerodynamically manufactured and acoustically treated inlet to and discharge from fans in order to comply with the sound power levels specified. For units arrangement refer to equipment schedules and drawings. B. The Sub-contractor shall require that the unit manufacturers ensure that the units dimensions conform to the space requirements and access of the same into the building. Units will not be accepted that do not readily conform to the space and access conditions. Space limitations make units physical dimensions critical and must not exceed those indicated on the drawings. Manufacturers are required to meet the details of these specification requirements without exception. 2.07 MOTORS AND DRIVES
A. Furnish premium efficiency, IP55 totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), standard NEMA frame, squirrel cage induction, single speed, single winding, continuous duty, variable torque suitable for operation in vertical, horizontal or angular position, rigid ball bearing type motors. Bearing shall be selected for a minimum of AFBMA L-10 life of 20,000 hours life. Horsepower as shown on the schedule are minimum allowable. Refer to specification section 16482 for other requirements. B. All motors rated for use with variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty or drive duty motors, compatible with the drive to which it is connected. Use of motor with a VFD shall not adversely affect the operation, useful life, or warranty of the motor. 1. Motors shall have Class F insulation with embedded PTC thermistor to BS4999-111 2. Motor windings shall be spike resistant to withstand 1,600 peak volts. 3. Precaution shall be taken for motor shaft and bearing voltage in accordance with IEC 6003417. C. The motor shall be mounted on an adjustable slide rail motor base. The fan motors shall be factory wired to an external junction box through flexible steel conduit with PVC sheath of adequate length to cater for vibration isolation and blet tensoion adjustment. The external junction box is mounted at the external panel of AHU. D. Motors shall be supplied in accordance with electrical/mechanical specifications and schedules. They shall be mounted on slide bases for proper alignment and belt tension adjustment. E. Provide V-belt, cast-iron sheaves, and reinforced rubber belts (minimum of 2 belts per drive). The belts and drives shall be selected for minimum 150 % of the motor nameplate horsepower. Fixed motor sheaves shall be provided for all drives 15 kW and above on final balancing. Belts shall be of matched sets and factory pre-tensioned for normal operation. F. Belt drive types and service factor shall be in accordance with the general mechanical specifications. G. Provide a metal belt guard having sides and face of galvanized steel with openings for fan tachometer readings. Belt guard shall be sized to allow either sheave to be increased by two sizes. H. Coil air face velocity to be limited to 2.5m/s.
I. J. 2.08
Coil shall be ARI certified and labelled with selection sheet submitted for each unit. The selection sheet shall have ARI logo to proof that coil selection software is certified. Fans to be backward curved AMCA certified for performance and acoustic data. VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. An integral all welded structural steel, prime coated, vibration isolation base shall be provided for the fan and motor. Unpainted or galvanized, bolted together fan/motor bases are not acceptable. The base shall be tailored to accommodate the fan assembly, motor slide base, and space saving isolator mounting brackets. Minimum beam height-to-length ratio is 10% but the height shall not be less than 150 mm. Base shall be free- floating on all four corners, on spring type isolators. B. Spring isolators must be sized to support the final fan assembly (inclusive of the base) weight. The fan assembly shall be isolated from the cabinet by steel spring isolators. Fan thrust restraints shall be provided, to, prevent the spring isolator system from grounding against floor, walls, or tearing fan flexible connections. The minimum mounting deflection of spring isolators shall be as follows: Lowest Operating Speed (RPM) 300 500 and greater 2.09 WATER COILS Min deflection (mm) 90 50
A. Coils shall be fully enclosed within the section and shall have double wall galvanized floor construction consistent with the unit casing construction. B. Piping connections shall extend to the outside through rubber grommets. C. Coil(s) shall include galvanized steel blank off sheets to hold coil(s) rigid and prevent air from bypassing the coil(s). D. Removable 50 mm thick access panels shall be provided on both sides to remove coils through casing wall, normal to the direction of airflow, without disturbing other coil sections. E. Coils shall be housed in factory fabricated frame independent of unit casing, shall not sit in drain pan and shall be individually removable via coil tracks. Multiple coils shall be mounted on independent support structure. Directly stacking coils using coil casing as structural support for other coils is not acceptable. F. Drain pans shall comply with ASHRAE 62-89 and shall have a slope for positive drainage, constructed of 16-gauge 304 stainless steel and continuously welded. Drain pipe connections shall be 37.5 mm copper sweat fittings. G. Each coil tier shall have slope drain pans extending at least 150 mm in the direction of air flow, constructed of 16-gauge 304 stainless steel and continuously welded. Intermediate drain pans shall have 25 mm drains flowing into the units main drain pan. Pans must be fully cleanable without removing the coil. H. I. The drain point shall be located at the bottom of the pan to ensure complete drainage. Provide Cost-Gard condensate drain seal, to be shipped loose with unit together for field installation. Unit manufacturer shall coordinate required piping connections and condensate drain seal size on basis of condensate flow rate and internal negative pressure within the drain pan section.
Page 211 of 317
J.
Coils shall be tested and rated in accordance with air conditioning and refrigeration institute (ARI) standard 410. K. The complete coil core shall be tested with under warm water and be suitable for operation at the specified working pressure. Water coils shall be circuited for drainability without removing individual plugs from each tube. L. The primary surface of all coils shall be round seamless copper tubes. The copper tubes shall be arranged in staggered pattern. The secondary surface shall consist of rippled aluminum plate fins for higher capacity and structural strength. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous cover over the entire tube surface for maximum heat transfer. The tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire fin length. M. Water coils shall have copper headers, steel male pipe connections, a vent connection at the highest point, and a drain connection at the lowest point. N. Noil construction materials shall be as follows: 1. Coil Copper header thickness: 1.2 mm minimum wall thickness, brazed joints. 2. Tube material & thickness: Seamless copper tube 0.6 mm minimum wall thickness. 3. Tube bend: Brazed replaceable return bend of 0.8 mm wall thickness. 4. Fin material & thickness: Aluminium, 0.24 mm thick, not closer than 11 fins/inch. 5. Coil casing material: Type 304 stainless steel for chilled water, coil side plates shall be of reinforced flange type construction.
2.10
HEAT PIPES Heat pipes shall be included within the FAHU and wrapped around the main coil. The external fins shall be of aluminum with a minimum thickness of 0.15 mm. Fins shall be of the continuous plate type and louvered type. Tubes shall be of refrigeration standard seamless copper C108 for heat exchanger use. Tube diameter shall be 12 mm with a grooved inner surfaces and minimum root thickness of the tube shall be 0.35 mm. Casing shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum thickness of 1.6 mm. The casing shall incorporate tube plates and top and bottom plates around both precool and reheat pipe blocks.
2.11
AIR FILTER
A. Frame: 1. Filter bank framing shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel or extruded aluminum rack. 2. Aluminum framing members shall be at least 2.2 mm thick. Frames shall be suitable for upstream or downstream filter servicing, cut to size and pre-punched for easy assembly into modules of size to suit the AHU. 3. Framing shall be permanently gasketed to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. If required, provide suitable aluminum vertical support members to prevent deflection. Vertical supports shall not interfere with installation or operation. 4. Framing system shall incorporate factory installed positive sealing device for each row of filters, to facilitate installation and removal of cartridges while preserving seal between gasketed filter elements while the bank is in operation. B. Pre-Filter 1. Pre-Filter shall be provided and as specified in the Filter Section of this Specification. 2. Filter shall have with welded steel wire grid support. 3. Filter shall not unload or collapse under high velocity or static pressure. 4. Pre-filters shall be front loading upstream of the filter section, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Servicing of filters is from factory-made air mixing box / plenum box section located in front of filter section.
C. Final Filter 1. Final Filter shall be provided and as specified in the Filter Section of this Specification. 2. The enclosed filter frames shall be constructed of galvanized steel. It shall be constructed and assembled in such a manner that a rigid and durable enclosure for the filter pack is provided. The periphery of the filter pack shall be continuously bonded to the inside of the enclosing frame thus eliminating the possibility of air bypass. The enclosing frame shall be equipped with protective diagonal support members on both air entering and air exit side of the filters. 3. Provide factory fabricated and assembled walk-in front access filter frames. Servicing of filters is from factory-made air mixing box / plenum box section located in front of filter section. The frames shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel. They shall incorporate, extruded aluminum tracks and universal holding frames manufactured to accommodate the filters specified herein before. Provide for front access to filters with clips to hold filters in place. 2.12 FILTER GAUGES A. Provide and flush mount Dwyer Magnehelic 2003 AF dry air filter gauge, with a scale of 0 to 50 mm w.g. B. Static pressure tips, shut off valves and tubing with adjustable signal flag suitably marked to indicate need to change filter shall be provided and installed by the AHU manufacturer. C. One Magnehelic gauge shall be provided for each filter bank. 2.13 SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Smoke detector shall be provided at the return air duct and interfaced with fire alarm and BMS. 2.14 MARINE LIGHT
A. Provide factory-made marine light at each section of unit which is accessible (e.g. fan section, filter section, air mixing box / plenum box section, etc). Each marine light is controlled by individual on/off switch B. The construction of marine light shall be IP44. C. The marine light shall consist of a structural light fitting base with aluminum reflector and receptacle, and a structural glass globe protected by wire-mesh. D. The marine light shall come fitted with a light bulb complete with factory installed wiring and GI metal conduits (Class 4) and terminated with a factory installed on/off switch located external to the unit and near to the access door. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 Use all factory provided lifting lugs to rig the units or modules. Ensure that spreader bars are used to prevent damaging the cabinets. Lift modules in an upright position.
Page 213 of 317
A. Ensure housekeeping pads or mounting bases are level and in accordance with approved dimensions. Air handling units shall be installed with metal and waffle sandwich pads, Mason Industries type WSW or approved equal between unit base and housekeeping pad or mounting bases. B. Pipe condensate drain to nearest floor drain or condensate pump as indicated on plans.
C. Remove gussets, hold-down bolts and shipping fasteners. D. Remove fans' shipping restraints and level spring isolators. Adjust thrust restraints. E. Assemble modules together according to the installation manual. F. On completion of installation provide services of factory trained service Sub-contractor inspect and supervise the startup and checkout of the equipment. Do not start up equipment until the following operations are complete. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Automatic temperature control. Power connection to equipment. Shipping materials and shipping restraints have been removed. Unit leveled with isolators under the perimeter frame. Spring isolated components are off shipping supports and leveled. Filtration media is installed. Piping and duct connections are complete. Leak checks are complete on all water piping. Electrical interconnections are complete on multiple section units.
G. Check fan motors for rotation and amp draw for each phase. Record information on the start-up data sheets. H. Belt drives should be adjusted for tension and alignment. I. J. Execute start-up, complete report and send to the air handling unit manufacturer for verification and as acknowledgment of warranty commencement. Provide training to Facilities Management personnel.
END OF SECTION
Page 214 of 317
SECTION 15860 ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLULDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work all equipment indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Equipment to be standard products, selected from published literature of manufacturer. B. Meet the requirements of the following standards: ARI 1060 - 2001 ASHRAE 84 -1991 Eurovent 8/C/002 2004 EN 308 (June 1997) Rating to Air-To-Air Heat Heat Exchangers for energy recovery ventilation equipment Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers Rating Standard for the certification of Rotary Heat Exchangers Heat Exchangers Test Procedures for Establishing Performance of Air to Air and Flue Gases Heat Recovery Devices
C. ARI certification. (Heat wheel to be ARI certified and labeled, individual selection sheet to be submitted for each unit, selection sheet to bare the ARI logo to proof software for the same selected wheel is certified. Wheels to be UL listed along with the motors.)
1.03
SUBMITTAL DATA
A. Submit manufacturers latest published data for dimensions, materials, accessories and installation details. B. Submit full technical rating data based on tests in accordance with current ASHRAE and ARI standards and in an approved laboratory. Include manufacturers certified heat transfer performance curves. C. Operational and Maintenance Manual: Manufacturers instruction for operation and maintenance. D. Heat wheel to be ARI certified and labeled, individual selection sheet to be submitted for each unit, selection sheet to bare the ARI logo to proof software for the same selected wheel is certified. E. Wheels to be UL listed along with the motors.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 29. Section 15860 - Energy Recovery Wheel Page 215 of 317
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Equipment Schedule in Drawings for equipment duties, type and capacities. B. The heat recovery wheel shall recover energy from the toilet exhaust air to cool the fresh air supply upstream of primary air handling unit. The suction side of the toilet exhaust fan and suction side of the PAU will be connected to the heat recovery wheel. It is ACMV contractor and manufacturer who assemble PAU, heat recovery wheel and exhaust fan, responsibility to prevent cross contamination to fresh air supply by toilet exhaust air.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of energy heat recovery wheel of the types and materials, sizes and capacities specified herein and on the drawings, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years, as approved by the Supervision Consultant. B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the standards outlined in the Section 15010. C. Construction to comply with the requirements of the latest editions of ASHRAE and ARI Certify these energy recovery wheels by ARI or Eurovent for performance ratings and provide the ARI Performance Seal or Eurovent certificate when requested by Supervision Consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Rotary heat recovery unit shall be a complete factory assembled unit consisting of wheel, casing, purge sector, motor drive and etc. B. The unit shall enable both sensible and latent heat transfer between two air streams. C. The unit shall be tested and rated to ASHRAE Standard 84 and ARI 1060. D. Filter shall be provided at the intake side of the unit. . The filters shall be front load type. Factorymade plenum box shall be provided in front of filter frames for ducting connection. The requirement of the plenum box is specified in Section 15850. E. Two layers of neoprene pads shall be provided at the base of the unit for vibration isolation. F. Wheel: 1. The wheel shall be made of layers of corrugated and intervening flat aluminium foil or synthetic fiber-based media (substrate) with molecular sieve desiccant, of uniform width to ensure smooth surface. 2. The wheel material shall be bonded together to form a rigid transfer medium forming a multitude of narrow channels in the axial direction, thus ensuring a laminar flow. 3. The material shall be of hygroscopic type for transfer of both sensible and latent heat. The desiccant shall be Zeolite molecular sieve 3 or 4 to prevent cross contamination due to adsorption.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 29. Section 15860 - Energy Recovery Wheel
Page 216 of 317
4. The whole motor shall be chemically treated to prevent corrosion and ensure high affinity to moisture. 5. The wheel shall be cleanable by compressed air, low temperature steam or vacuum cleaning without affecting its latent heat recovery properties. 6. The transfer media shall be provided in an individually segmented arrangement and assembled into a rigid supporting spoke system to allow replacement of the media on a segment by segment basis. 7. The design of the wheel shall enable its removal from the AHUs conveniently without the latter being dismantled. G. Casing 1. Motor shall be mounted in a sturdy hot-dipped galvanised steel casing with air-tight access door and sealed against casing by means of wear resistant and adjustable seal. The motor specification shall comply with Section 16482 2. The seal shall be non-contact type and shall minimise carry-over to a maximum 0.2%. 3. The casing shall be equipped with purging sector. 4. The casing shall be of corrosion resistant materials suitable for intended use, and factory finished with epoxy or other approved corrosion resistant coatings. 5. Wheels and casings shall be relieved of residual stresses produced in the forming process. 6. Provide gasketed access doors to permit routine maintenance and inspection of motor and internal components. Equip housing with drain holes and plug. H. Drive 1. The wheel shall be belt driven along its perimeter by a constant speed weatherproof motor. 2. The motor shall be mounted on a self-adjusting base to provide correct belt tension. 3. For motors in the air stream, provide TEFC type motors. 4. The motor shall always be rotating when the system is in operation. Speed detector shall be provided to raise an alarm in the event when the motor stops running. I. Unit to have cross leakage/ cross contamination prevention as per Addendum Y of ASHRAE standard 62 2001. Air pressure drop for fresh air and exhaust air across energy recovery wheel cannot more than 200 Pa. Air velocity for fresh air and exhaust air across energy recovery wheel is minimum 2m/s and maximum 3.5m/s. To provide access door or removable access panel at AHU casing for motor servicing purpose. Heat recovery wheel performance test and witness shall be included in tender offer. The test shall be carried out for one unit of each model upon final approval from Supervision Consultant. The test shall be witnessed by Client, Project Manager, Consultant and ACMV Contractor representative. Test reports shall be submitted before delivery of units from factory. The test shall be carried out by approved independent laboratory. The independent laboratory details and method statement for testing shall be submitted for approval before commencement of testing. The test shall include the followings:
J.
K.
L. M.
Page 217 of 317
a) b) c) d) e)
Heat recovery wheel performance Fresh air flow Exhaust air flow Air velocity Fresh air pressure drop and exhaust air pressure drop across heat recovery wheel
A. Installation accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Follow SMACNA and AMCA recommended procedures for installations, belt guards, duct connections, etc. B. Provide flexible connections as described in specification Section 15890 Ductwork to provide sufficient separation of ductwork from energy heat recovery wheel assembly to prevent metal-tometal contact. C. Install motors with proper support and vibration isolation as specified in Section 15240 Sound and Vibration Control. D. Provide sufficient clearances around for access and servicing of components. Install equipment such that access doors, motors, belts, lubrication lines, electrical connections, etc. are readily accessible and not obstructed by other installations or structures. E. Tighten belt drives, taking into account the service factor and any other operating requirements of the drive. Exercise care for not over-tension belts. F. Check all bolts and fasteners to ensure proper tightness. Do not overtighten nuts and bolts. G. Check bearings and motor for proper lubrication, taking care not to over-lubricate. Use only lubricants recommended by the manufacturer.
3.02
STARTUP AND TESTING
A. Have manufacturers check out installed equipment for proper alignment and lubrication at time of start-up.
END OF SECTION
Page 218 of 317
SECTION 15865 FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLULDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work all fans indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Fans to be standard products, selected from published literature of manufacturer. B. Ratings to AMCA for sound and air delivery performance. C. ISO 1940/1 (BS6861-1) Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotor. D. ISO 18016-1 (BS6861-1) Mechanical vibration-Part 1:General guidelines 1.03 SUBMITTAL DATA
A. Submit manufacturers latest published data for dimensions, materials, accessories and installation details. B. Submit full technical rating data based on tests in accordance with current AMCA standards and in an AMCA approved laboratory. Include manufacturers certified fan volume-pressure performance curves, from shutoff to free delivery and certified sound power ratings. Correct all ratings and curves for altitude and temperature where applicable. C. Operational and Maintenance Manual: Manufacturers instruction for operation and maintenance. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Fan Schedule and Drawings for fan duties, type and capacities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fans of the types and materials, sizes and capacities specified herein and on the drawings, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years, as approved by the Supervision Consultant. B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the standards outlined in the Section 16482. C. Construct all fans to comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) Standards and Bulletins. Certify these fans by AMCA for air and sound performance ratings and provide the AMCA air and sound Performance and Construction Seal when requested by the Supervision Consultant.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 30. Section 15865 - Fans Page 219 of 317
1.06
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless noted otherwise, provide discharge direction and drive arrangement to suit space conditions and conform as closely as possible to the layouts shown on the Drawings. Deviations from overall dimensions of specified fans will not be accepted without written permission. Confirm before ordering, that equipment can be accommodated within space provided, indicating allowance for required service clearances. B. Provide fans that are quiet operating and non-overloading over the entire range of operation. C. Provide fan motors, starters, and controllers in accordance with Section 16482 Motors, Starters, Control Centers. Size motors to drive its respective fan when the fan is operating at a speed 5% in excess of that required to meet the scheduled fan performance. Do not select motors within the service factor for this range. D. Statically and dynamically balance fan wheels/impellers at the factory to ISO 1940-1 Grade G6.3. Acceptable dynamic loads on the bearings and acceptable vibration transmission into the support structure and foundation shall comply with ISO 10816-1 Zone A. Factory certify the balance and submit report for record before delivery of fans to site. E. Provide precision self-aligning bearings manufactured to prevent leakage of oil or grease. Provide cups, oil chambers, lubrication fittings in accessible locations for ease of lubrication. Provide heavy duty split pillow block bearings with tapered, double-row spherical roller assemblies. Provide bearings with AFBMA L-50 service life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum catalogued fan operating conditions unless noted otherwise. F. Provide copper lubrication leads, for lubrication of internal motors and bearings, extending to a capped termination point external to the fan casing. G. Extend wire leads on fans driven by direct motor drive from the motor junction box in air tight rigid walled conduit, to a junction box mounted external to the fan casing. H. On fans drive by belt drive, provide standard V-groove type belts and sheaves suitable for the service intended. Fan sheaves are non-adjustable type with removable machined bushings. For motors up to 3.7 KW, provide adjustable pitch type motor sheaves with double locking feature, to 10% above and below the rated fan speed. For motors larger than 3.7 KW, provide the necessary drive changes to adjust fan speed at operating capacity. Dynamically balance sheaves with over three grooves. For fan motors over 7.5 KW, provide at least two belts. Provide multiple belt drives capable of carrying the entire load with one belt broken. Provide perforated expanded metal or sheet metal belt guards, with grommeted tachometer ports at the fan and motor shafts, for all exposed sheaves and belts. Provide adjustable motor bases. I. J. For motors in the air stream, provide TEFC type motors. Provide solid hot rolled steel drive shafts, accurately turned and polished to a close tolerance where in contact with bearings. Secure fan wheels/impellers to the drive shaft by a key and keyway assembly. Shafts shall be sized for first critical speed and at least 1.43 times maximum speed for fan class. Manufacture fans of materials and finishes suitable for the service intended.
K.
L. Construct wheels/impellers exposed to normal atmospheres of mild steel, hot dip galvanized, and finished with two layers of factory applied non-scaling paint.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 30. Section 15865 - Fans
Page 220 of 317
M. Construct fans exposed to corrosive atmospheres of corrosion resistant materials suitable for intended use, and factory finished with epoxy or other approved corrosion resistant coatings. N. Provide fans exposed to elevated temperatures with components rated for high temperature service. Do not use belt drive assemblies exposed to the air stream. Use direct drive motors certified for high temperature service. O. Construct fans used to convey flammable vapours of non-sparking (non-ferrous) materials, and use explosion proof motors. P. Electrically ground fan and drive to prevent accumulation of static charge. Q. Completely house fan assemblies exposed to weather in weatherproof enclosures including motor and drive. R. Fan wheel/impeller and casing shall be relieved of residual stress produced in forming process. S. Provide fans used to exhaust grease laden vapours with motor drive and bearings completely external of air stream. T. Provide housings with integral inlet and discharge flanges, complete with bolt holes for duct connections. U. Where required or specified, provide variable speed drive as specified in Section 16484 Variable Speed Drives. V. Provide gasketed access doors to permit routine maintenance and inspection of motor and internal components. Equip fan housing with drain holes and plug. W. Equip fans connected to common duct or shaft with backdraft dampers unless motorised dampers are provided. X. Provide manufacturers certified sound power ratings with an octave band analysis. Make one set of these curves available to the supplier of sound and vibration control. Y. All fans outlet/inlet that are without connection to duct or plenum shall be provided with bellmouth and complete with protective screen at the opening. Z. All smoke exhaust fans used for fire emergency shall be rated to 300 degree Celsius for 2 hour operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Refer to Particular Specification. 2.02 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Scroll Type 1. Provide single width single inlet (SWSI), or double width double inlet (DWDI), to meet the duties of the fan as specified on the Drawings, enclosed in a scroll shaped fan housing. Fan scroll shall have airfoils and non-overloading characteristic.
Page 221 of 317
2. Weld fan blades to the hub plate and rim. 3. Fan housings are to be heavy duty gauge, continuously welded construction. Housings shall be suitably braced to prevent vibration or pulsation. Fan housings shall have spun, aerodynamically manufactured inlet cones or inlet ventures for smooth air entry into the wheels. All fan wheels shall have tapered spun wheel cones or shrouds providing stable flow and high rigidity. ` B. Tubular Type 1. Provide backward inclined or airfoil fan wheels to meet the fan duties as indicated on the Drawings, in a cylindrical housing, with integral inlet venturi and airflow straightening vanes, arranged to impart unidirectional air flow. 2. Weld fan blades to the hub plate and rim. Backward inclined blades may be securely riveted to the hub plate and rim. Precisely cast aluminium fan wheels and machine finish. 3. Match the wheel inlet ring to a close tolerance with integral deep spun aerodynamic venturi inlets. 4. Provide radial air flow straightening vanes at the fan discharge. C. Cabinet Type 1. Provide scroll type centrifugal fans, factory installed within a cabinet enclosure, and comply with the requirements of Scroll Type Centrifugal Fans. 2. Internally isolate fan and motor assemblies from the cabinet. 3. Provide gasketed access doors and panels for inspection and routine maintenance of the internal components. 4. Provide solid state variable speed controllers for small ceiling mounted direct driven exhausters and transfer fans. 2.03 AXIAL FANS
A. Propeller Type 1. Include propeller type impellers, complete with motors, and panel or ring mountings. 2. Vary fan blades in camber and twist from base to tip. 3. Construct impellers of die formed steel or aluminum attached to a central hub mounted on the fixed drive shaft. 4. Rotate fun hub on the fixed drive shaft using sealed ball bearings. 5. To eliminate overhang load on belted units, apply belt load to the hub in the same plane as the bearings. 6. Direct drive fans are only acceptable where belt driven units do not meet the performance criteria or direct drive is specified. 7. Provide panels or rings with spun venturi inlets suitable for wall mounting and structural angle supports of welded steel construction. 8. Provide basket type fan guards for exposed inlets and discharges. 9. Provide TEFC motors on all fans.
B. Vaneaxial Fixed Blade Type 1. Include impeller, motor, drive and cylindrical housing. 2. Construct fan blades, airfoil cross section, varying in camber and twist from base to tip, of dieformed steel or aluminium. 3. Fixed pitch fans shall have form impeller blades and hub in a single casting, or precision weld blades to the hub assembly. 4. Mount impeller directly on the drive shaft and secure in place with locking keyway assembly. Motor and impeller shall be removable from the inlet side of the fan. 5. Cross brace motor support base on direct drive fans to the fan housing for structural rigidity to prevent motor misalignment. 6. On belt drive fans protect belts and bearings from the air stream in an air insulated enclosure. Apply belt loads to the hub in the same plane as the bearings to eliminate overhang load. 7. Construct cylindrical fan housings of heavy gauge hot rolled steel with continuous weld seams. 8. Provide venturi inlet bell and discharge diffuser accessories of the same gauge and material as the fan housing. 9. Fan used for kitchen exhaust system shall be bifurcated with motor out of the air stream. 10. Fan shall be suitable for either vertical or horizontal mounting as shown on drawing. 11. Fan shall have factory mounted, rolled steel ring for flanged duct connections. C. Vaneaxial Adjustable Blade Type 1. Include impeller and hub, guide vanes, motor, drive and cylindrical housing. 2. Construct fan blades of die-formed aluminium, sized for the fan diameter. Blades cut down from longer sections will not be acceptable. Provide double thickness blades with airfoil cross section and profile, varying in camber and twist, from base to tip. 3. Provide fans designated as adjustable pitch fans with blades which can be individually manually adjusted in the field. Provide pitch indicators at the base of each blade. Secure blades in place with set screws or locking adjustment nuts. 4. Direct drive unit shall have impeller mounted on the drive shaft and secured with locking keyway assembly. Motor and impeller shall be removable from the inlet side of the fan. 5. Provide an aerodynamic spinner cap over the hub face of impellers, to protect and conceal blade adjustment bearings. 6. Construct guide vanes of heavy gauge material and match the camber and twist of the impeller blades. 7. Cross brace motor support base and motor bearing on direct drive fans to the fan housing for structural rigidity to prevent motor misalignment. 8. On belt driven fans, protect blades and bearings from the airstream in an air insulated enclosure. Apply belt loads to the hub in the same plane as the bearings to eliminate overhang load. 9. Construct cylindrical fan housings of heavy gauge hot rolled steel with continuous weld seams. 10. Provide venturi inlet bell and discharge diffuser accessories of the same gauge and material as the fan housing. 11. Provide companion flanges to receive sheet metal duct or flexible connectors. Companion flanges shall be of the same thickness as the fan flanges and provided by ACMV contractor 12. Axial fan used for kitchen exhaust system shall be bifurcated with motor out of the air stream.
13. Fan shall be suitable for either vertical or horizontal mounting as shown on drawing. 14. Fan shall have factory mounted, rolled steel ring for flanged duct connections. 2.04 ROOF EXHAUST FANS
A. Provide roof exhaust fans of the centrifugal, belt-driven type. Construct fan housing of heavy gauge aluminium. B. Construct all spun parts with a rolled bead for added rigidity and spun so as to seal the pores of the aluminium providing greater resistance against oxidation and deterioration. C. Provide all aluminium fan wheel of the centrifugal blower type backward inclined blades and a tapered inlet shroud. Statically and dynamically balance wheels. D. Provide inlet cone of aluminium centrifugal blower type. E. Enclose motor and drives in a weather-tight compartment, separate from the airstream. Provide air for cooling the motor to the motor compartment by way of an air passage from an area free of contaminated exhaust fumes. F. Provide motors of the heavy duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing type. Size drives for 165% of motor horsepower capabilities and of the cast iron type, keyed to the fan and motor shafts. Provide variable pitch drives. G. Construct fan shaft of steel construction, turned, ground and polished to precise tolerances in relationship to the hub and bearings. H. Provide drive belts of the oil-resistant, non-static, non-sparking type with life expectancy of over 24,000 hours. I. Provide bearings flanged and of the permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, ball bearing type. The entire drive assembly and wheel removable shall be a complete unit from the support structure without disassembling the external fan housing. Mount the complete drive assembly on rubber vibration isolation.
J.
K. Provide direct drive units of identical construction as belt drive units, except for drives, belts, and fan shaft bearings. L. Construct all belt drive units interior and exterior parts, including wheel, wheel hub, supporting posts, fan shaft, drive assembly, and all outside fasteners, of aluminium or non-ferrous material. Include a five-year warranty. 2.05 UTILITY SETS
A. Provide utility sets with fan characteristics and performance similar to those described for centrifugal fans. The bearings on these fans, however, may be of the light duty, single row, sealmaster type, pillow block arrangement, foot mounted. Mount the fan sheave in the overhung position, so that both sheaves and bearings may be changed if required, without dismantling the unit.
Page 224 of 317
B. Equip utility sets with belt guards and drain holes. 2.06 DOMESTIC VENTILATORS
A. Domestic ventilators include small capacity, low-noise fans of, ceiling-mount, duct fans, compact size axial and mini-sirocco type. B. Provide high-performance blades, totally enclosed powerful condenser motor, automatic oil circulation system, automatic shutters, decorative louvers, turbo fan, and all required accessories. C. Electrical characteristics shall be single phase. 2.07 AIR CURTAIN (NOT APPLICABLE)
2.08
CARPARK VENTILATION SYSTEM
A. General 1. Car park areas must be ventilated using inline ducted fans system. The system must be designed supplied and commissioned by specialist supplier. 2. The proposed supplier must have minimum 15 years of experience in manufacturing various fans. He should have minimum 2 installations of large car parks in use with similar system in the Gulf. The supplier must have ISO 9001, 14001 & 18001 certifications. 3. The ventilation system shall be designed generally in accordance with approved documents B & F of the building regulations for UK. The system must be designed to provide minimum 10 air changes per hour, in the event of fire, in order to clear and dilute smoke across floor. All the inline ducted fans must be rated for 300C/2 hours.
B. Basis of Car Park Ventilation 1. For CO concentrations of up to 50 ppm provide around 6 air changes per hour for pollution control (CO). 2. For CO concentrations of over 50ppm provide minimum 10 air changes per hour by running inline ducted fans at high speed. 3. In case of fire provide safe escape corridor for people to escape by running inline ducted fans at high speed to give minimum 10 air changes per hour.
C. Principle of Car Park Ventilation 1. Principle of car park ventilation system is to provide mechanical ventilation by using inline ducted fans and temperature rated ductwork. The car park is divided into eight zoned areas, each serviced by twin exhaust fans. Fresh Air is drawn into the car-parks via the entrance ramps except in zone 1 & 5 where air is ducted from above throughout the zone via twin inline ducted supply fans. 2. Each fan room shall be provided with sufficiently sized acoustic louvers and motorized smoke dampers. Minimum two (2) fans are to be located in each fan room or inside shaft. All extract fans shall have 2 speeds.
Page 225 of 317
D. Logic of Operation: Inline Ducted Fans Low High CO Up to 50 ppm Fire Remarks
All fans run on part load. Net ACPH around 6 Fans in fire zone run on full load. Net ACPH around 10
1. Position of ventilation point indicated on ventilation drawings is indicative only. Exact position of ventilation point must be obtained from specialist supplier after carrying out detailed CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics) analysis. 2. Contractor should co-ordinate all MEP services with respect to ventilation duct positions. Should any of ventilation duct to be relocated for site coordination or for any other reason, the revised position must be confirmed by specialist supplier of car park ventilation system. If required CFD analysis shall be redone.
E. Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD): 1. There is no statutory requirement about how the air shall be distributed. Designing in ventilation system in accordance with UK Building regulation documents must be done with caution, as it would be possible to do so and derive a system that was inadequate. If the air distribution is not properly addressed the air extracted could short circuit areas of the car park. 2. Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) is an effective way of ensuring that the air distribution is sufficient to effectively ventilate the car park. Rather than simply complying with regulations, CFD offers the opportunity to provide an engineered solution to car park ventilation. 3. This process involves constructing a 3D model of the car park. Air inlets and extract points would then be added and modeled for pollution to identify any 'dead spots'. 4. Car park fans and the proposed duct routing would then be introduced into the model and the model would be re-evaluated until all 'dead spots' has been removed. 5. Criteria for CFD will be as follows: a. Minimum air velocity across the car park should be over 0.1 m/s. b. There shall not be any dead spots where there is not much of air movement. c. Proper care must be taken for opening such as ramps etc, which are open to atmosphere or to other levels. d. Normal Mode: i. - Inline ducted fans operation in low speed. ii. - Inline ducted fans providing air equivalent to minimum 6 air changes per hour. e. Emergency (FIRE) Mode: i. - Inline ducted fans in operation in high speed. ii. - Inline ducted fans providing air equivalent to minimum 10 air changes per hour. III. CFD shall be run separately for pollution & emergency modes. IV. CFD should be carried out by a third party & not by the manufacturer.
Page 226 of 317
6. The following shall be submitted for engineers approval / information from the CFD analysis. a. 3D model for all levels. (All obstructions within 500mm deep below slab shall not be modeled). b. Velocity (Air speed) profile across complete floor at 3 levels such as 0.5 m, 1.5m & 2.5m above floor level highlighting spots below 0.1m/s velocity. c. Particle flow animation. The result of CFD will be the optimum location of ventilation grille for a better air movement throughout the car park. 7. The CFD software shall be used to model the airflow generated by both air movement equipment and convection from heated surfaces. The minimum basic equations used by the software shall be: a. b. c. d. Conservation of Mass (The continuity equation) Conservation of Linear Momentum (Newtons Second Law) Conservation of Energy (First Law of Thermodynamics) These basic equations are represented collectively as partial differential equations.
8. The software shall use the mathematical method of Finite Volume Analysis. The model is divided into adjoining finite volumes with the conservation equations represented in algebraic form being solved iteratively for each finite volume. 9. A Cartesian grid built up in the solution domain determines the finite volumes, known as grid cells. The grid is automatically lined up with the geometry of the structure and ventilation system components in the model. 10. The software shall calculate solutions for pressure (P), temperature (T), x-velocity (u), yvelocity (v) and z-velocity (w). Pressure and temperature shall be calculated at the centre of grid cell and the velocities calculated at each face of the grid cell. F. Inline Axial Flow Fans 1. Axial fans shall be direct driven type. Axial fans to be selected for the capacity as indicated in the schedules (maximum deviation allowed is +/- 2%). Static pressure indicated in the drawings/schedule is for indication only. Contractor shall calculate the static pressure requirement as per approved drawings and submit for engineers approval. 2. Rating of fans shall be at standard air condition i.e., air temperature of 200C and 1.2kg/m3 density. Extract fans should be rated for 300 deg C for 120 mins & the supply fans should be suitable for working at 59 deg C ambient 3. Axial flow fans shall be suitable for installation as indicated on the drawings. 4. Fan manufacturer shall have minimum 15 years of experience in the manufacturer of similar products. In addition, the manufacturer shall have a local office or a representative in UAE with both having experienced after sales support and service/ maintenance engineers. 5. Fan manufacturing facility shall have BS EN ISO 9001.94 or better quality certification. 6. Fan ratings shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA Publication 211 and comply with the requirements of AMCA Certified Ratings Program or equivalent European standards
7. Axial flow fans performance shall be approved / certified by AMCA, and established in accordance with ISO 5801:1997 or BS848: Part 11 1997 installation type D method of testing air performance and BS 848 Part 2 1985 for method of noise testing. 8. Axial fans shall consist of: a. Casing (covering both the impeller and motor assembly. Free inlet, ducted discharge fans can have shorter casing.) b. Impeller. c. Electric motor d. Motor mounting bracket / frame. e. Anti vibration mounts (Spring type for fire rated fans) f. Bell mouth inlet & Guard (for free inlet fans only) g. Inlet guide vanes for capacity more than 160,000 cmh h. Maximum fan speed should be limited to 950 rpm 9. Fan casing and motor mounting assemblies shall be manufactured from heavy gauge mild steel to BS1449 Part 1, 1972 or latter, Grade HR14 (Minimum thickness 3.00mm for fans up to 630mm diameter. 5.0mm for diameters for above 630mm and 8 mm for diameters 1400 mm & above ). Fans shall be provided with inlet and outlet flanges integral of fan casing for connection to ducting network. Flanges shall be pre-drilled with holes for bolts. All welding shall be continuous. 10. Complete casing and flanges shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacture to BS 729:1971 or latter at a rate of 0.46 kilograms of zinc per square meter for fans up to 800mm diameter or 0.61 kilograms per meter square for 800mm diameter and above to ensure complete corrosion protection. (No welding or drilling shall be carried out after galvanizing process). 11. Impellers shall be with high efficiency aerofoil section field adjustable pitch angle blades clamped to Hub. Impeller blade angels shall be set & fixed at factory but are field adjustable within motor power limits. 12. Impeller hub and clamp plates shall be precision die cast in LM6 aluminium alloy to BS1490:1970 or latter and shall be X-rayed after casting using real time Radiography inspection to verify the quality of casting and to ensure stable casting. 13. The fan blades shall be of an aerofoil section, high pressure die cast from LM6 aluminium alloy and include traceability of batch identification and be X-rayed prior to machining to ensure sound casting. X-ray report must be submitted to engineer. 14. Impellers shall be non-overloading type and capable of running continuously up to 20% higher than the selected speed. 15. Impellers shall be statically balanced and dynamically checked to minimum balancing accuracy of G6.3 or better as per ISO1940/1:1986. 16. The pitch angles of the fan blades shall be individually adjustable and shall be able to provide laboratory evidence that the impeller has been adequately stressed at the highest speed supplied. 17. The impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and keyway to BS4235:1972 or latter. Axial location shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft together with a retaining washer and screw, fitted into a tapped hole in the end of the shaft. The screw shall be locked in position. 18. The aerodynamic design of the fan/impeller shall be such that the maximum power absorbed by the fan occurs within the normal working range and has a non-overloading characteristic.
19. Fans shall be directly driven by electric motors unless otherwise specified, suitable for 380~415V/50Hz/3Ph power supply. Motors shall be either B3 foot or B30 pad mounted type, totally enclosed air stream rated, non ventilated or fan cooled depending on the application. 20. Motor shall be supplied with sealed for life bearings with an L10 bearing life of at least 20,000 hours when calculated using ISO 281 for rated fan duty. 21. Motor winding shall have Class F insulation with Class B [80K] temperature rise as a minimum. Motor performance shall be in accordance with BS5000: Part 99: 1975 or latter and IEC34-1. Motors unless mentioned elsewhere shall be rated for ambient temperature of 500C. Motors for smoke extract fans should be with Class H insulation & suitable for working at 300 deg C for 60 min 22. All motors shall have protection to IP55 standards and be fitted with drain plugs. Motors shall be wired to an external terminal box with the same level of protection as the motor. 23. All free inlet fans must be provided with inlet bell mouth and guard. Where fans directly discharge air into a chamber, a conical diffuser must be provided for higher efficiency. 24. Inlet and outlet guards shall be provided where indicated on the drawings/schedules. Guards shall be manufactured from mild steel wire and rod, all welded assembly, and shall be hot dipped galvanized after manufacture. Guards shall comply with BS848: Part 5. 25. Fans shall be provided with attachable mounting feet/plates where indicated for horizontal or vertical mounting fabricated from mild steel. Mounting feet/plates shall be hot dipped galvanized after manufacture. 26. All fans shall comply with the European Machinery Directive and carry the CE mark. 27. All fans shall be manufactured using 100% recyclable materials. G. High temperature fans (Smoke Extract). 1. In general construction of fans shall be as per specification for standard axial fans. 2. Where specified fans supplied shall be rated for once only operation of 300C for 1hour. 3. Fan motors must be sized to have the power to allow the fan to handle air at normal ambient temperature to allow periodic testing at ambient temperature. Fan motors that have been derated to the power required to handle the hot fire smoke are not acceptable as the fans must be capable of handling relatively cool smoke during the early stages of the fire without overloading the motor. 4. High temperature/smoke extract fans shall have approval by the UAE civil defence authority. 5. Fire rating of fans should be independently tested in accordance with EN 12101-3. Necessary documentation as proof must be submitted to engineer. 6. Fans shall be driven either by 2 speed class H motors (1:2 ratio). Please refer schedule / electrical diagrams for details.
Page 229 of 317
A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as known on the Drawings. Follow SMACNA and AMCA recommended procedures for fan installations, belt guards, duct connections, etc. B. Provide flexible connections as described in specification Section 15890 Ductwork to provide sufficient separation of ductwork from fan assembly to prevent metal-to-metal contact. C. Install fans and motors with proper support and vibration isolation as specified in Section 15240 Sound and Vibration Control. D. Provide sufficient clearances around fans for access and servicing of components. Install fans such that access doors, motors, belts, lubrication lines, electrical connections, etc. are readily accessible and not obstructed by other installations or structures. E. Bump start fans to check that fan wheel/impeller rotation corresponds to the desired direction of air flow. Correct fans found to be rotating in a direction opposite to that desired. F. Tighten belt drives, taking into account the service factor and any other operating requirements of the drive. Exercise care not to overtension belts. G. Check all bolts and fasteners to ensure proper tightness. Do not overtighten nuts and bolts. H. Check bearings and motor for proper lubrication, taking care not to overlubricate. lubricants recommended by the manufacturer. I. Use only
Provide a drain at the bottom of the housing for fans discharging upward from the roof. Pipe drains from housings of interior fans discharging directly up through the roof indirectly to a floor drain. Pipe drains from housings of kitchen grease exhaust fans to a grease interceptor. Provide reinforced galvanized steel inlet and discharge guard screens for all floor fans without inlet or discharge ductwork.
J.
K. Fan supplier shall provide static pressure calculations for all fans based on actual shop drawing for Supervision Consultant review before final selection of fans.
3.02
STARTUP AND TESTING
A. Have manufacturers check out installed equipment for proper alignment and lubrication at time of start-up.
END OF SECTION
Page 230 of 317
SECTION 15870 PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Precision-type AC units to be standard products, selected from approved manufacturers. B. Fan ratings to AMCA for sound and air delivery performance. C. Fans shall be factory balanced, statically and dynamically to AMCA Standards. D. Cooling coils shall be ARI certified. E. Equivalent Eurovent Standard is also acceptable. 1.3 SUBMITTAL DATA A. Submit manufacturers latest published data for dimensions, materials, accessories and installation details. B. Submit full technical rating data (electrical, capacity, etc.). connection drawings. Include piping and electrical
C. Operational and Maintenance Manual: Manufacturers instruction for operation and maintenance. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Equipment Schedule and Drawings for sizes, arrangements and capacities. B. The space shall be maintained at the following environmental condition: 1. Temperature Set Point and Offset 2. Relative Humidity Set Point and Offset 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms approved and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in Abu Dhabi. 22 50 1oC 5%
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 31. Section 15870 - Precision Air Conditioning Unit
Page 231 of 317
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the standards stipulated in the specification. 1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. These specifications describe requirements for a self-contained, factory-assembled precision-type AC unit. B. The manufacturer shall confirm all equipment to be fully compatible with heat dissipation requirements of the room.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECISION AC UNIT
A. Cabinet and Frame Construction The frame shall be constructed of welded tubular steel. It shall be painted for maximum corrosion protection. The exterior panels shall be insulated with a minimum 1 in. (25.4mm), 1.5 lbs. (.68 kg) density fibre insulation or equivalent. The exterior panels shall be as powder coated. B. Filter Chamber The filter chambers shall be an integral part of the system, located within the cabinet serviceable from front or either end of the unit. The filters shall be rated not less than 30% efficiency (based on ASHRAE 52-76). C. Fan Section The fan shall be the centrifugal type, double width double inlet, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced as a completed assembly to a maximum vibration level of two mils in any plane. The shaft shall be heavy duty steel with self-aligning ball bearings with a minimum life span of 100,000 hours. The fan motor shall be mounted on an adjustable slide base. The drive package shall be two-belt, constant speed, sized for 200% of the fan motor horsepower. The fans shall be located to draw air over the A-frame coil to ensure even air distribution and maximum coil performance. An option for variable speed drive should be included in the bid. D. Evaporator Coils Coils shall be constructed of seamless copper tube completed with mechanically bonded and chemically treated aluminium fins. E. Infrared Humidifier The humidifier shall be of the infrared type consisting of high intensity quartz lamps mounted above and out of the water supply. The evaporator pan shall be stainless steel and arranged to be serviceable without disconnecting high voltage electrical connections. The complete humidifier section shall be pre-piped ready for final connection. The infrared humidification system shall use bypass air to prevent over humidification of the space served. The humidifier shall be equipped with an automatic water supply system. The system shall have an adjustable water-over-feed to prevent mineral precipitation.
Page 232 of 317
F. Electric Reheat The electric reheat coils shall be low watt density, fin tubular construction, protected by thermal safety switches controlled in three stages minimum. G. Advanced Control Processor The advanced control processor shall be microprocessor based with a front monitor LCD display panel and control keys for user inputs. The controls shall be menu driven with on-screen prompts for easy user operation. The system shall allow user review and programming of temperature and humidity set points, alarm parameters, and setup selections including choice of control type. A password shall be required to make system changes. For all user selections, the range of acceptable input (temperature, humidity, or time delay) shall be displayed on the monitor screen. The system shall provide monitoring of room conditions, operational status in % of each function, component run times, date and time, and analog and digital inputs and outputs (depending on manufacturers standard) from sensors provided by others. 1. Control The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions: *Temperature Setpoint 65-85oF (18-29oC) *Temperature Sensitivity + 1o to 5oF (1 to 3 oC) in 0.1oF (.1oC) increments *Humidity Setpoint 40-60% R.H. *Humidity Sensitivity + 1% to 10% R.H. All set points shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor panel. Temperature and humidity sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using the front monitor panel controls to coordinate with other temperature and humidity sensors in the room. 2. Predictive Humidity Control The microprocessor shall calculate the moisture content in the room and prevent unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding to changes in dewpoint temperature. 3. In addition, the system shall provide the following internal controls: a. System Auto-Restart For start-up after power failure, the systems shall provide automatic restart with a programmable time delay. Programming can be performed either at the unit or from the central site monitoring system. b. Front Monitor Display Panel The microprocessor shall provide a front monitor LCD backlit display panel with 4 rows of 20 characters with adjustable contrast. This display (along with front mounted control keys) shall be the only operator interface required to obtain all available system information such as room conditions, operational status, alarms, control and alarm setpoints, and all user selections including alarm delays, sensor calibration, DIP switch selections, and diagnostics. All indicators shall in language form. No symbols or codes shall be acceptable.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 31. Section 15870 - Precision Air Conditioning Unit Page 233 of 317
c.
Alarms The microprocessor shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of any of the following conditions: High Temperature Low Temperature High Humidity Low Humidity Change Filters Loss of Air Flow Main Fan Overload Humidifier Problem Custom Alarms Each alarm (unit and custom) can be separately enabled or disabled, selected to activate the common alarm, and programmed for a time delay.
d. Audible Alarm The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm. e. Common Alarm A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user selected alarms with a remote alarm device. f. Remote Monitoring All alarms shall be communicated to the central site monitoring system with the following information: date and time of occurrence, unit number, and present temperature and humidity. g. Control Type The user shall be able to select the type of control the advanced microprocessor will use. Selections available shall be intelligent, proportional, and tunable PID (proportional, integral, and derivative gains). The intelligent control shall incorporate control logic that uses methods to maintain precise, stable control. If tunable PID is selected, the user shall be able to program each of the three gains. h. Analog/Digital Inputs/Outputs The system shall include customer accessible analog/digital inputs/outputs (depending on manufacturers standard) for sensors provided by others. The analog inputs/outputs shall accept a 4 to 20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal. The gains for each analog/digital inputs/outputs shall be programmable and shall be able to be monitored from the front panels. i. Diagnostics The control system and electronic circuity shall be provided with self-diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting. The microcontroller board shall be diagnosed and reported as pass/not pass. Control inputs shall be indicated as on or off at the front monitor panel. Control outputs shall be able to be turned on or off from the front monitor panel without using jumpers or a service terminal.
j.
Data Collection The control system shall maintain accumulative operating hours of compressors, reheats, humidifier, and fan motor. The ten most recent alarms shall also be retained.
k.
Communications The microprocessor shall be compatible with several remote monitoring and control devices.
H. Accessories Provide the following components: 1. Disconnect Switch (Locking Type) The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high voltage section of the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the outside of the unit with the door closed, and prevent access to the high voltage electrical components until switched to the OFF position. 2. Firestat The firestat shall immediately shut down the unit when activated. The firestat shall be mounted in the electrical panel with the sensing element in the return air. 3. Condensate Pump The condensate pump shall have a minimum capacity of 100 GPH at 20 ft. (378 1/hr at 6m) head. It shall be complete with integral float switch, pump and motor assembly, and reservoir. 4. Water Sensors Provide a minimum of two (2) solid state water sensors under the unit. 5. Flow Switch The flow switch shall activate the alarm system should the chilled water supply be interrupted. The switch shall be factory mounted and wired. 6. Floor Stand The floor stand shall be constructed of welded tubular steel frame. The floor stand shall have adjustable legs with vibration isolation pads. 7. Temperature and Humidity Recorder Provide a 7-day/24 hour temperature and humidity recorder of the full scope, two pen, surface mounted type with 100 recording charts, one red and one blue bottle of recording ink. Recorder shall be a 220 volt, single phase, 60Hz power supply. 8. Smoke Detector The smoke detector shall immediately shut down the unit and activate the alarm system when activated. The smoke detector shall be mounted in the electrical panel with the sensing element in the return air compartment.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRECISION AIR CONDITIONG UNITS A. General Install the precision-type air conditioning units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturers recommended clearances. B. Electrical Wiring Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturers electrical connection diagram submittal to electrical contractor. C. Piping Connections Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. D. Field Quality Control Start up mainframe coolant units in accordance with manufacturers start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
Page 236 of 317
SECTION 15880 SPLIT / MULTISPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Split / Multisplit-type AC units to be standard products, selected from approved manufacturers. B. Fan ratings to AMCA for sound and air delivery performance. C. Fans shall be factory balanced, statically and dynamically to AMCA Standards. D. Cooling coils shall be ARI certified. 1.03 SUBMITTAL DATA
A. Submit manufacturers latest published data for dimensions, materials, accessories and installation details. B. Submit full technical rating data (electrical, capacity, etc.). connection drawings. Include piping and electrical
C. Operational and Maintenance Manual: Manufacturers instruction for operation and maintenance. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Equipment Schedule and Drawings for sizes, arrangements and capacities.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms approved and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in Dubai. B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the standards outlined in the General Notes. 1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. These specifications describe requirements for a self-contained, factory-assembled split / multisplit-type AC unit. B. The manufacturer shall confirm all equipment to be fully compatible with heat dissipation requirements of the room.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 32. Section 15880 - Split/Multi-split Type Air Conditioning Unit Page 237 of 317
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SPLIT/MULTISPLIT-TYPE A/C UNIT
A. General 1. Air conditioning units shall be of the air cooled split type and shall be standard products of approved manufacturers. 2. The units shall be designed for quiet operation with all moving parts mounted on anti-vibration mountings and carefully balanced to ensure minimum vibration. 3. Each unit shall be of standard design and construction, having refrigerant of an approved non-toxic, non-flammable type, and shall incorporate accessory items set out below. Allowance shall be made for the provision of all these items if these are not provided in the manufacturer's standard equipment. 4. The indoor fan coil units shall consist of fans, cooling coils and associated pipework and controls equipment. The outdoor air-cooled condensing units shall consists of compressors, condenser coils and fans, associated pipework and control equipment. 5. Each unit shall have compressor(s) quantity as indicated in the Equipment Schedule and each compressor shall have its independent refrigerant and electrical circuit. 6. Cooling capacities shall be as stipulated in the Equipment Schedule and certified by ARI/ASHRAE. B. Casing 1. Casings shall be constructed or folded and reinforced zinc anneal sheet or a structural steel frame clad in zinc anneal sheet to support all items of equipment, and shall be treated for prevention of corrosion. Casings for outdoor installation shall be of weather proof finish with galvanised or special coating finish with zinc chromate and a finish coat. 2. Casings for housing coils and supply air fan shall be internally lined with 25mm thick fibreglass or mineral wool insulation in rigid form faced with scrim. 3. Casings for housing compressors shall be acoustically treated to achieve the specified acoustic level. 4. Removal panels shall be provided for access to all internal components to facilitate convenient installation and maintenance. C. Compressors/Controls Compressors of fully hermetic or accessible hermetic type with suction gas cooled motor shall be complete with all necessary accessories and controls for safe and efficient operation and shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. Starters complying with the requirements of power supply authorities. High refrigerant pressure safety cutout for unit with a cooling capacity over 13 kw. Low refrigerant pressure safety cutout for unit with a cooling capacity over 13 kw. Oil pressure (manually reset) safety cut out for accessible hermelic compressor with a cooling capacity over 40 kw. 5. Positive lubrication. 6. Service valves at suction and discharge of each compressor.
7. Liquid moisture indicator sight glass. 8. Compressor crankcase heaters for unit with a cooling capacity over 13 kw. 9. Pumpdown control for unit with a cooling capacity over 40 kw (A tight-closing solenoid valve in the branch of each evaporator required). 10. Individual compressor fault indication 11. Time delay relay for compressor 12. Compressors shall have 5 years guarantee D. Evaporation Coils 1. Coil shall be constructed of seamless copper tube complete with mechanically bonded and chemically treated aluminium fins. 2. For units with multiple compressors, all compressors shall have an independent coil with its own expansion valve and solenoid valve. 3. Heavy gauge insulated galvanised drip trays shall be provided under each evaporator coil. E. Fans 1. Fans shall be of centrifugal type and shall be adequately rated to provide the air quantities specified. 2. Fans shall be full double width, double inlet, forward curved, multi-blade fans statically and dynamically balanced. Fan wheels shall be mounted on an adequately size shafts with 200,000 hours bearing. 3. Fans shall be direct drive type with field adjustable speed tap or driven by a vee belt drive correctly aligned with pulleys capable for replacement as necessary to achieve the air quantities specified. 4. The exact fan speed and fan motor size shall be determined by Sub-Contractor having regard to the resistance of all elements of the air conditioning systems to be provided and installed, including ductwork and fittings with a 20% safety factor for motor sizing. F. Air Cooled Condensers 1. Air cooled condensers shall be constructed with copper tubes and chemically treated chemically treated aluminium fins. Fans shall be of propeller type. 2. Each compressor shall be connected to its independent condenser coil amply sized to dispose the heat rejection. 3. Condensers shall be provided with spring loaded pressure relief valve and line valves. 4. Condensers shall be designed for suitable refrigerant working pressure G. Air Filter 1. All units shall be complete with washable aluminium filters and thermostat controls. H. Refrigerant Piping 1. Refrigerant piping shall be of soft copper coil to equipment manufacturers standard. 2. The suction line shall be insulated with 20mm closed cell elastomeric thermal insulation (Armaflex Class 1) suitable for service temperatures up to 125oC. 3. The refrigerant piping shall be adequately sized.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SPLIT/MULTISPLIT-TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. General Install the split/multisplit-type air conditioning units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturers recommended clearances. B. Electrical Wiring Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. C. Piping Connections Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. D. Field Quality Control 1. Start up mainframe coolant units in accordance with manufacturers start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 32. Section 15880 - Split/Multi-split Type Air Conditioning Unit
Page 240 of 317
SECTION 15885 AIR FILTERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install all air filters indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specification. 1.02 PROVISION REQUIREMENTS
A. Meet filter arrangement and type specified. B. Provide sufficient filter media and size filter banks: 1. To limit maximum face velocity across filters to 2.54 m/s or less to meet manufacturer's recommendations 2. To ensure filters occupy maximum face area within unit enclosures 3. To limit initial filter pressure drops to specified values C. Use manufacturers standard modular size wherever possible. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall have experience of supplying filter to similar project of not less than 5 years. B. All filter performance rating (pressure drops and efficiency) shall be rated to the latest relevant ASHRAE standard. C. Flame spread rating shall comply with the requirement of NFPA and local Civil Defence requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRE-FILTERS
A. Provide 50 mm thick pleated media disposable type filter consisting of non-woven cotton polyester fabric media, media support grid and enclosing frame. B. Do not exceed 25 Pa initial resistance at 2.54 metre/second approach velocity. C. Meet average efficiency as per ASHRAE 52.1-1992 and ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 with average arrestance of 90%. D. Provide welded wire grid media support, 96% free area, bonded to the media and formed to effect radial pleat effect. E. Provide enclosing frame, constructed of rigid heavy duty high wet strength beverage board with diagonal support members bonded to air entering and leaving side of each pleat.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 33. Section 15885 -Air Filters Page 241 of 317
F. Filters shall be listed by UL as Class 2. G. Pre-filters shall be provided for all kitchen make-up fans, all outdoor air supply fans, all primary air-handling units, all air-handing units, all carpark intake fans, and all other supply air fan for mechanical ventilation systems. 2.02 FINAL-FILTERS
A. Provide 600 mm deep, high holding capacity bag filters (after the pre-filter) for all primary airhandling units and air-handling units B. Do not exceed 88 Pa initial resistance at 2.54 metre/second approach velocity. C. Meet average efficiency of 70% to 80% per ASHRAE 52.1-1992 and ASHRAE Standard 52.21999, with average arrestance of 97%. D. Filters shall be listed by UL as Class 2. 2.03 FILTERS FOR INDOOR AC UNITS AND FAN COIL UNITS
A. Provide 8 to 10 mm thick synthetic fiber media air filters and install throughout the entire surface area allocated for the air filter at the back of the indoor AC unit and fan coil units. B. Meet average arrestance of 75-80% per ASHRAE 52.1-1992 and ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999. C. Initial filter pressure drop shall not exceed 25pa at 2.54 metre/second approach velocity. D. Coordinate closely with indoor AC unit and fan coil unit manufacturer to ensure that air flow performance is not hampered by pressure drop/resistance rating of the air filter. E. For decorative type indoor unit and fan coil unit, provide filter as per manufacturers standard. 2.04 HOLDING FRAMES
A. Provide 75 mm deep galvanized holding frames, with gaskets, four holding clips per filter per frame, interframe seals and frame stiffening bars for upstream servicing only. B. Provide filter housing for side or bottom access constructed of 1.61 mm galvanized steel with two access doors, extruded aluminium tracks, individual Universal Holding Frames and static pressure taps upstream and downstream of filter stages. C. For ceiling-concealed, ducted-type indoor AC units, provide the necessary stiffeners and frames for the specified filter media. D. Filter access shall be either right or left for AHU to facilitate future maintenance based on actual site conditions and installation arrangements. Similarly, filter access for FCU shall either be right, left or bottom. The location of access shall be confirmed to the manufacturer prior to order. 2.05 AIR FILTER GAUGES
A. Provide across each air handling unit and primary air handling unit filter installation, an inclined manometer type draft gauge kit, similar to Dwyer 250-AF Series.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 33. Section 15885 -Air Filters
Page 242 of 317
B. Include static pressure tips and three port vent valves. C. Provide 0 to 500 Pa range. D. Not required for indoor AC units and fan coil units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Filters shall be properly packed in plastic bags and store in dry locations on site prior to installation into the system. Handle filter with care while installation to avoid damaging of filter frames and media material. Cover filter section before fan system is turned-on for testing and commissioning. B. Arrange filters for upstream servicing or side access, to suit air handling/Fan Coil unit installation. C. Take all necessary precautions including blanket filter media coverage over the entire filter installation for protection during construction and start-up. D. Initially install one (1) set of filters during testing and commissioning. Then replace filters immediately prior to acceptance. Finally, turnover one (1) set of spares to Owner during project handover.
END OF SECTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 33. Section 15885 -Air Filters
Page 243 of 317
SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL
A. All work shall be subject to the General Conditions or shall comply with the requirements of the contract. B. Requirements of Section 15010 shall also govern work specified together with all applicable paragraphs of other Division 15 sections. 1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15190 Mechanical identification B. Section 15200 Noise, Vibration and Seismic Control C. Section 15250 Insulation D. Section 15800 Air Distribution E. Section 01660 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Systems 1.03 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Turning vanes B. Volume and splitter dampers C. Damper regulators D. Fire and Smoke Dampers, Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers E. Backdraft dampers F. Duct access doors G. Access door hardware H. Blanking plate I. J. Blanking panel Perforated plate
K. Duct test openings L. Flashing M. Bird screens

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 34. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories Page 244 of 317
N. Drip pans O. Equalizing Grid 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. D. UL 555 and UL 555S- Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers. E. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and test Manual. F. AMCA 500- Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of General Conditions and Division 1 as applicable. B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers, duct access doors and duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. Show all duct accessories on ductwork shop drawings. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of General Conditions and Division 1 as applicable for fire dampers. D. Submit schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating type, size, static pressure and noise levels and location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. General: Flexible duct connectors shall be made of approved flame retardant fabric with flame spread rating of not over 25 and a smoke developed rating of less than 50. Connectors shall not exceed 10 inches in length. Temperature rating shall be the same as the associated ductwork. 2. The flexible duct connector shall meet UL 214 - Tests for Flame Propogation of Fabrics and Films, and Federal Test Standard 191 for abrasion, leakage, radiation resistance, tear and tensile strength.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 34. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories
Page 245 of 317
3. Flexible duct connectors shall meet the following requirements as outlined in Table below: Service Continuous Temp. Range Abrasion Resistance Leakage Resistance Minimum Radiation Resistance of Fabric Tear Strength Tensile Strength Model - (Duro Dyne as standard) Indoor -40F to 180F 15,000 cycles 350 19x106 100/100 240/220 MB6X Outdoor -25F to 250F 500 cycles 250 19x106 12/12 225/300 MF6D High Temp. -75F to 500F 125 cycles 400 19x106 50/40 200/150 MF6T
B. Turning Vanes: 1. Same material as the ductwork in which they are installed. 2. Three inch and lower pressure classification systems: SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Standards 1985, except as noted. Also refer to drawings for short radius elbows. 3. Single width turning vanes with 3/4-inch trailing edge and 2-inch radius. Type Y blades for ducts 36 inches or less in width; type Z blades for ducts greater than 36 inches wide. 4. Three inch and higher pressure classification system: SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Standards 1985, except as shown. 5. Small double thickness vanes with 2-inch inside radius. 6. Vane length not to exceed 36 inches. Provide separate equal size sections for greater lengths. C. Volume Dampers: 1. Manual adjustable volume dampers shall be extended mount indicating and locking quadrant type. 2. For ductwork with pressure classification 500 pa or higher or Seal Class A regardless of pressure class, penetrations shall be provided with sealed assemblies, end bearing or approved equal. For insulated ducts provide proper assembly, with 50 mm handle extension for externally insulated ductwork. 3. Damper blade shall be 13 mm smaller in each dimensions than the size of duct in which they are installed. 4. In ducts greater than 12 inches high, provide opposed-blade-type dampers, 200 mm wide maximum. 5. Damper blades shall be two gauges heavier than adjoining ductwork, 16 gauge minimum and shall be riveted to supporting rods. Hem over edges parallel to rods. 6. Fabricate all damper blades, axles, and frames of the same material as the ductwork in which they are to be installed. 7. Steel Construction: a. Hat shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 1.6 mm thick, with mitered and welded corners; Axles 13 mm round minimum or hexagonal stock; Galvanized steel tie-bars and brackets; roll formed galvanized steel blades. 8. Aluminum Construction: a. Hat shaped, 2.5 mm thick minimum aluminum sheet channels or extruded aluminum channels with mitered and welded corners; Non-ferrous axles 13 mm round minimum or hexagonal stock; Galvanized steel tie-bars and brackets; roll formed 2.5 mm inch thick minimum aluminum sheet blades or 1.2 mm thick minimum extruded aluminum blades. 9. Bearings: Molded synthetic material or bronze oilite, spacing 48 inches maximum.
10. Volume control dampers shall be AMCA certified to clause 550-89.
Page 246 of 317
D. Concealed volume damper operator: 1. Provide concealed volume damper operator for all volume dampers located above inaccessible ceilings and where indicated on the drawings. Regulator shall be embedded in the finished ceiling or wall material so that the unit shall be flush with the finished ceiling. Cover plate shall not exceed 20 mm diameter. Provide complete workable system as required for damper operation. E. Fire and Smoke Dampers, Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: 1. General a. All fire dampers shall be UL listed. They shall comply with the following specification or local building regulations, whichever is more stringent. b. Dampers operating with blades closing in any direction other than by gravity pull shall be assisted in closing by a heat resistant, reel-type stainless steel spring. c. Combined fire and smoke damper installation or independent smoke and fire damper installation is required for all ductwork which penetrates fire rated walls, floors and ceilings. Smoke dampers are required in all smoke rated partitions. In accordance with NFPA and COP d. All dampers guaranteed by the manufacturer to close against air flow. Provide locking closure, UL listed spring assembly. Bear UL label as dynamic damper. e. Provide dampers for rectangular, oval and round duct connections as required. f. Provide duct access panel at each fire and smoke damper, and smoke control damper suitably sized and located for inspection and resetting. Coordinate ceiling or wall access doors as specified in Section 15010. g. Dampers shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA fire damper guide and manufacturer's instructions. h. Dampers shall be tested in accordance with the most recent edition of UL-555. They shall be classified for dynamic closure to a minimum 12 m/sec and 1000 pa static pressure for horizontal air-flow, air flow up and air flow down. i. Dampers shall be marked with a UL classified rating and maximum velocity/pressure rating for each horizontal and vertical installation. j. Use multiple section where the largest single section available is not large enough. 2. Curtain Type Fire Dampers a. Dampers shall be approved fusible link self-closing spring loaded type. Fusible link shall be of appropriate melting temperature. Blades shall be out of air stream (damper in open position), and shall not reduce the net free area of duct below that shown on drawings. b. Damper construction shall be of same material as the ductwork in which the damper is installed. c. Frame shall be fitted with angle iron stop and stainless steel spring latch, and shall be securely fastened to building construction. d. Dampers shall be suitable for use in dynamic and static systems as applicable. Dampers for active smoke control systems shall be dynamic rated. e. Damper shall be rated 1 hour minimum unless otherwise noted, bear UL- Fire Damper Label and shall be constructed and installed as required by UL555. f. Each damper shall include sleeve and retaining angle furnished by the damper manufacturer. 3. Smoke dampers: a. Frame shall be a minimum of 16 gage galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with tabbed corners for reinforcement. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve turning in an extruded hole in the frame. b. The blades shall be airfoil shaped double skin construction with 14 gage equivalent thickness. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically
Page 247 of 317
locked in blade edge (adhesive or clip fastened seals not acceptable) and shall withstand temperature up to 250 C. c. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel flexible metal compression type. Blade action must be opposed. 4. Combination fire smoke dampers a. Same specification as smoke dampers plus additional clauses below. b. Each combination fire smoke damper shall be 1 1/2 hour fire rated under UL Standard 555, and shall further be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. F. Fire and Radiation Ceiling Dampers: 1. 1/2x1/2 x12 gauge steel channel welded frame; No. 16 gauge, maximum 6 inch wide blades with heat retardant blanket secured to blade with rivets. 2. The closure assembly shall use a stainless steel torsion spring closure spring assembly. The damper shall meet UL classified as a three hours heat stop. 3. For lay in diffusers, manufacturer shall provide a ceramic thermal blanket which shall lay over the diffuser between the fire damper and ceiling tile with a 50 mm minimum overlay. G. Backdraft Dampers: 1. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction for low leakage. 2. Steel Construction: Backdraft dampers shall have 12 gauge galvanized steel channel frame with 14 gauge press formed steel subframe and 16 gauge reinforced galvanized steel blades with edge seals and synthetic bearings. Dampers shall be manufactured for velocities up to 17.5 m/sec. 3. Aluminum Construction: Frames shall be 6063TS extruded aluminum, 2.25 mm wall thickness and mitered corners. Blades shall be formed aluminum of 0.6 mm thickness with extruded blade seals and synthetic bearings. Linkage shall be concealed in frames. Dampers shall be manufactured for velocities up to 17.5 m/sec. 4. Damper shall be low-leak, counter balanced, parallel blade type. Dampers shall be counterbalanced to begin opening at 7 pa static pressure and full open at 25 pa static pressure differential. 5. Dampers shall not have leakage rate exceeding 7 m3/hour per square foot of face area at 125 pa pressure. H. Duct Access Panels/Doors: 1. Provide proper pressure and leakage rated, gasketed, duct mounted access panel/doors. In insulated ducts, access doors/panels shall be insulated double wall, thermally equivalent to ductwork insulation. Gauges of door material, no. of hinges, no. and type of door locks shall be as required by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. 2. Unhinged doors shall be chained to frame with minimum length of 150 mm to prevent loss of door. 3. For seal Class A, hinged, screwed or bolted doors are not acceptable. Access doors shall be leakage rated, neoprene gasketed UL 94 HF1 listed. 4. Door metal shall be same as the attached duct material. 5. For grease and high temperature ducts, door assembly shall be rated for at least 2.5 times of the carrying fluid temperature. 6. The minimum sizes shall be 300 x 300 mm unless otherwise agreed by the Supervision Consultant where smaller size is more practical to meet space constraints. 7. Frame duct opening for each door with a continuous 25 mm by 25 mm by No. 12 gage sheet metal angle, of the same material as the duct in which installed, riveted to the exterior surface of the duct opening.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 34. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories Page 248 of 317
8. Lap inner face of door over duct opening, a minimum of 6.5 mm on all four edges of the free duct opening. 9. Provide all doors with a 20 mm wide sponge rubber or felt gasket, around all four sides of duct opening. 10. Wherever possible, install doors so that air pressure differential tends to keep door closed. 11. On doors of systems where fan is scheduled for 1000 pa S.P. or greater, provide painted signs appropriately worded as follows: CAUTION DOOR CLOSES WITH AIR PRESSURE CAUTION DOOR OPENS WITH AIR PRESSURE I. J. Blanking Plate: 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, painted matt black cut to size as required. Blanking Panel: Construct from 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal sandwich with 25 mm thick rigid board fiberglass insulation. Attach insulation to metal with adhesive fasteners and edge tape. Overlap front and back metal plates and tack weld at 3 centers.
K. Perforated Plate: Construct from 16 gauge galvanized steel with circular holes equally distributed and equally sized to achieve the free area required. Galvanized after perforating. L. Duct Test Openings: 1. Cut or drill temporary test holes inducts as required. Cap with threaded metal caps. 2. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fitting to clear insulation. M. Flashing: 1. 16 gage minimum ducts through roof, material to match duct material soldered watertight, flashed and counterflashed, and provided with storm collars to secure watertight construction. N. Bird Screens: 1. No. 14 gage,12.5 mm galvanized wire mesh set in galvanized steel frame. Stainless steel wire mesh and frame when exposed to outdoors. O. Drip Pans: 1. 18 gage, galvanized sheet metal 50 mm deep, solder-jointed, with drain piped to nearest air gap waste, unless specifically shown otherwise. Extend coil drip pans under coil valving. Provide suitable dielectric gasket to connect dissimilar metals. P. Equalizing Grid: 1. 75 mm thick aluminum honeycomb grid with 10 mm openings securely fastened inside a 16 gage galvanized steel duct section 150 mm long. 2. Grid and casing in outside air intake duct 304 stainless steel. Q. Spin Collars: 1. For each flexible duct connection off of a main or branch duct to a ceiling diffuser and for each outlet off the ventilation ductwork to the plenum air provide a spin collar with a positive locking balancing damper.
Page 249 of 317
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install ductwork accessories as specified herein and in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. B. Turning Vanes: Where centerline radius is less than 1.5 times the duct width (on supply, return and exhaust ductwork), elbows shall be radius throat with radius heel and full length splitter vanes when required. When centerline radius ( r ) divided by duct width (w) is less than 1.5, provide the following number of splitter vanes: (r/w)Centerline radius/duct width 1.49 < (r/w) < 0.7 0.69 < (r/w) < 0.6 0.59 < (r/w) < 0.55 No of vanes 1 2 3
C. Flexible Connections: Provide ductwork connected to air-handling equipment and fans unless the fan is internally isolated, with flexible fabric connections and all necessary transformation pieces as required. Do not use flexible connections on life safety smoke exhaust fans. Coordinate with requirements of section 15240 Noise and Vibration control. 1. For round duct connection, install fabric connectors a minimum of 75 mm in length for ducts having a maximum diameter of 450 mm and a minimum of 125 mm in length for duct diameters over 450 mm in size. 2. Secure fabric connectors tightly to fans, casings and ducts as follows: a. Secure round connectors with No. 12 US gage by 25 mm wide galvanized steel draw bands. Secure bands with bolts and nuts. b. Secure rectangular connectors with 25 mm by 3 mm thick flat galvanized steel bars, with screws or bolts on 200 mm centers maximum, or with sheet metal slip joints. Tightly crimp fabric into sheet metal joint and secure complete joint with sheet metal screws on 150 mm centers maximum. c. Allow at least 75 mm slack in connections. 3. Fabric connectors may be factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled units, with minimum No. 24gage metal edges, secured to fabric with double lock seams. 4. Do not paint fabric connectors. 5. Provide flexible connector in ducts spanning structural expansion joint. D. Volume Dampers: Provide manual adjustable volume dampers, with extended mount indicating and locking quadrants: 1. On each supply, return and general exhaust take-off. 2. At each take-off to register, grille or diffuser. (Not all are shown on drawings). 3. Note: All required volume dampers may not be indicated on Drawings, but dampers shall be provided as necessary for system balancing. E. Duct Access Doors: In addition to access doors required for inspection, maintenance and adjustment, provide access doors every 15 m to facilitate duct cleaning. F. Volume Dampers: Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts, and at each take-off to register, grille or diffuser. All required volume dampers may not be indicated on drawings, but shall be provided as necessary for system balancing.
Page 250 of 317
G. Fire and Smoke Dampers: 1. Provide fire and smoke dampers, smoke dampers or fire dampers as appropriate at locations where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components. 2. Fire dampers must be included at all floor changes; at entry and take-off at shafts in all supply, return and exhaust ductwork. 3. Install with required perimeter mounting angles and sleeve. Sleeve depth shall be a minimum total of 150 mm larger than wall or floor thickness to allow 37.5 mm on each side for angle attachment, plus additional 25 mm on each side for breakaway duct connections. 4. Dampers shall be installed per SMACNA with breakaway connections and nosing on duct liner. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards 5. Provide access panels at each location of sufficient size to repair internal link as previously specified under access door/panel section. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction. 6. All damper openings in drywall assemblies shall be framed. H. Backdraft Dampers: Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. I. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. . Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
J.
K. Provide galvanized wire mesh screens on all indoor duct openings that do not contain grilles or access panels, and stainless wire mesh screens behind all intake and exhaust louvers. L. Flashing: Match ductwork material soldered watertight. Solder side seams at least 12 from bottom. Provide suitable dielectric gaskets to join dissimilar metals. M. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans under piping running over electrical equipment, ceiling hung air conditioning or air handling units with drain piped to nearest air gap waste. N. Combination fire smoke dampers: Division 15 shall furnish and install. Coordinate with control associated with fire alarm systems and for control connections by BAS system. O. Automatic Dampers: Install automatic damper as shown on Drawings, and as specified. Provide proper sealed wall penetrations.
END OF SECTION
Page 251 of 317
SECTION 15920 REFUSE CHUTE (GARBAGE CHUTE) Part 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and division 1 specification sections, apply to this section 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes Refuse Chutes B. Related Sections includes the following: 1. Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical materials and methods 2. Division 16 Section Basic Electrical materials and methods 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual component and profiles, and finishes for chutes.
B. Shop Drawings: For chutes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, weights, operational clearances, and attachments to other work. Indicate method of field assembly. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power , signal and control wiring and electrical interfaces 2. Indicate water and fire protection interfaces C. Product Certificates: For each type of chute, from manufacturer to include material certifications D. Operational and Maintenance Data: Provide operation and maintenance manuals 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire rated door assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to the authorities for fire ratings indicated.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 35. Section 15920 Refuse Chute
Page 252 of 317
1. Intake Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2 hour fire rated with 250 deg F maximum temperature rise over 30 minutes. 2. Discharge Door: Approved door panel construction in accordance with NFPA 82 3. Access Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2 hour fire rated with 250 deg F maximum temperature rise over 30 minutes. B. Electrical components, devices and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, article 100, by UL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities. C. Standard: Provide Chutes in full compliance with NFPA 82 1.05 MAINTENANCE SERVICE The manufacturer shall maintain the ability to supply spare parts and components, for a period of ONE year from the date of commissioning. Maintenance to be performed monthly. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect chutes and accessories to prevent physical damage and deterioration from other construction and from weather. B. Provide covers for the intake doors. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All labor and materials furnished in connection with the garbage chutes shall be subject to terms of conditions of the general contract conditions. Upon receipt of notice from the owner of any failure of any portion of material or workmanship furnished, the failure shall be corrected at no additional cost to the owner. B. No device will be accepted that will not give perfect satisfaction without excessive maintenance and attention. If it becomes evident during the guarantee period that the equipment is not functioning properly, or in accordance with specification requirements, or , if in the opinion of the clients representative, excessive maintenance and attention must be employed to keep equipment operating, remove equipment and install a new device meeting all requirements as part of the work until satisfactory operation on installation is obtained.Period of guarantee shall start anew from date of completion of new installation performed in accordance with foregoing requirements.
Page 253 of 317
Part 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide Chutes manufactured by one of the following, subject to full compliance with all requirements: 1. 2. 3. 2.02 A. 1. Chab Industrial Co.LLC Zenath Metal Industries LLC Ostermeire FZE CHUTES CHUTE MATERIAL: Constructed of type 304 Stainless steel of 16 gauge thickness and in accordance with BS 1703 and Chute parts extending above roof shall conform to ASTM A 176, TYPE 430 Stainless steel CHUTE SIZE: 600 mm diameter (24 inches). Selected diameter shall apply to the entire length of the chute from the discharge door at the base of the chute to the top of the vent (up to 1.2 meter above the roof) CHUTE VENT: Chute vent consisting of flashing, vent body, solid top cap with bird screen. The safety vent shall be designed to normally exhaust the chute riser of odor, keep inclement elements out and (in the event of rapid combustion or sudden explosion) provide complete relief within the chute riser, so the intake doors will not be blown open. 2.03 A. DOORS Intake door assemblies: The intake door shall be constructed with 16 gauge stainless steel and suitable for side opening. The door shall carry the UL B label( 1-1/2 hour 121 deg C), covering size, design and construction of the door, frame, latching, and closing mechanism. Fabricate doors of stainless steel and provide self closing and self latching devices. Door size shall be minimum 15 inches wide by 18 inch high, side hinged with cylinder lock. Install door frame flush with the finished wall. Provide cylinder locks, keyed the same for all dispatch stations. Furnish enough keys for each chute. Stamp letters GARBAGE CHUTE KEY on each key tag to identify location of use.
B. 1.
C.
1.
Page 254 of 317
2.
Provide a 15 inch by 15 inch access panel with UL B label (1-1/2 hour, a21 deg C) covering size, design and construction of the door, frame latching and closing mechanism. Locate where indicated on the drawings. Surface of the door and frames to be unmarred by lapped joints, bolted frame, screws or rivets. Frame trim to be of 16 gauge type 304 stainless steel and polished integrally with the door. Door and frame mounted into the intake throat with sheet metal screws into anchor plate and straps, welded to intake throat making door and frame readily removable without marring the finished wall. Door to be equipped with single motion T-handle and keyed lock. Provide intake doors, shroud door and connector door, with electric interlocking mechanism. The electric interlocking shall be of the fail safe system designed to allow only one chute door in a riser to be opened at a time. At all times, the doors shall be positively locked until the attendant presses the push button release for the door to be used. When this door is opened, the other doors shall be electronically locked out while the chute is in use. The system shall be UL tested. Each intake door shall have a pilot lamp showing when the door is locked. The shroud shall be no less than 45 degree angle, but shall be 60 degree when possible. Provide master switch at the bottom of the chute to lock out all the doors during cleaning period or maintenance. Clearly letter on the intake door in letters of approx. one inch high, the word GARBAGE. Raise or incise letters in door face in permanent manner. Raised lettering shall be metal or plastic with metal attachment. Outlets / Discharge: Chute to have 16 gauge aluminized steel type A open end chute discharge fire proof rolling steel door with 165 F. Fusible link hold open on an inclined track at the bottom of the chute to close automatically when the ambient temperature reaches 165 F. FLOOR SUPPORT FRAMES The manufacturer shall provide 40 x 40 x 6mm R.S.A. frames with welded clamp bands, the clamp band to have a 3mm rubber insert as a sound isolator. All fixing nuts and bolts to be provided. The frame shall be rust proofed after manufacture.
3.
4.
5. C.
1. 2.
3.
D.
E.
2. 04 A.
Page 255 of 317
2.05 A.
FIRE DAMPER The base of the chute shall terminate with a sliding gate type fire damper that carry the UL B label (1-1/2 hour 121 deg C), covering size, design and construction of gate, frame and closing mechanism. Dampers shall conform to UL 555. Provide chute fire dampers with an electric interlocking mechanism so that no intake doors can be opened in the riser in the event of activation of the fire damper. SPRINKLER SYSTEM Provide inch flushing spray head and inch sprinkler head above the highest intake. Provide additional inch sprinkler heads at every second intake counting from the top. CHUTE CLEANING The manufacturer shall provide a factory fitted electrically powered automatic chute cleaning system. The chute cleaning system, to be fitted above the topmost entry section, shall have its own separate housing and side-hung, stainless steel faced lockable access door. The cleaning system shall consist of a cylindrical housing with two bands of stiff nylon brushes firmly attached, a geared electric motor, cable, stabilizing weight, flushing head spray and the manufacturers standard electric logic control installed to ensure efficient cleaning of the internal surfaces of the chute. DISINFECTANT AND SANITIZING UNIT A factory fitted disinfectant and sanitizing unit shall be provided. The unit shall be automatic in operation and capable of injecting odor counteractant into the water supply of the automatic brush cleaning system. EXHAUST FAN The manufacturer shall provide a factory fitted foul air exhaust fan, the fan to be fitted internally in the refuse chute vent pipe. An access door will be provided for servicing the fan. The fan shall be protected above and below by lightweight mesh screens, which are to be removable for cleaning.
B.
2.06 A.
2.07 A.
2.08 A.
2.09 A.
2.10 SOUND DAMPENING A. Provide factory applied sound insulation with sprayed on sound deadening material.
Page 256 of 317
PART 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. EQUIPMENT Shall be protected at all times from physical damage. INSPECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION The manufacturer shall inspect the area of installation, verify any dimensions and advise of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. FABRICATION General: Factory assembled chutes to greatest extent practical with continuously welded or lock-seamed joints without bolts, rivets, or clips projecting on chute exterior. Spiral chute sections shall not be permitted. Include intake door assemblies and metal supporting framing at each floor, chute expansion joints between each support points Equipment access; Fabricate chutes with access for maintaining equipment located within the chute, such as flushing and sanitizing units, fire sprinklers, and plumbing and electrical connections. INSTALLATION General: The manufacturer shall where instructed, provide experienced technicians from his own staff to install the chute. The chute shall be installed in compliance with the manufacturers standard instructions and shop drawings. Comply with NFPA 82 requirements and with chute manufacturers written instructions. Assemble components with tight, slip joints for expansion. Anchor securely to supporting structure to withstand impact and stresses on vent units. Install chute and components to maintain fire-resistive construction of chute and enclosing chase. Install chute plumb, without obstructions that might prevent materials from free falling within chutes Chute offsets: Offsets / Bends in the chute, if required shall be made the same diameter as the chute of 18 gauge and have an additional layer of 13 gauge layer reinforcing the impact area or other reinforcing as recommended for the project conditions by the manufacturer. Offsets are not to deviate more than 15 off the vertical axis of the chute below the highest intake, nor more than 45 off the vertical axis above the highest intake without decreasing the chute diameter. Anchor roof flanges of chute vents before roofing and flashing are installed or after the installation of the roof curb. Intake and discharge doors: Interface door units with throat sections of chute for safe, snag resistant, sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users.
Page 257 of 317
3.03 A.
B.
3.04 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock system to demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly. Complete test operation before installing chase enclosures. Test fire sprinklers for proper operation Operate sanitizing unit through one complete cycle of chute systems components. Do not remove labels of independent testing and inspecting agencies. CLEANING After completing chase enclosures, clean exposed surfaces of chute systems components.
H. I.
3.05 A.
3.06 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING A. Demonstrate the entire system will operate as specified. Test all lines in sequence by the passage of five test runs of material from each station. Demonstrate the operation of station controls by a minimum of five test runs when dispatch buttons are operated simultaneously at 2 or more separate stations. The Engineer and Clients personnel shall witness the pre-test and final inspections
B.
3.07 ACCEPTANCE A. The manufacturers certificate of acceptance shall be signed by the Local Authorities, main contractor, Engineer or client, on successful completion of this work.
END OF SECTION
Page 258 of 317
SECTI ON 15940 AI R TERM NALS I
PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 W ORK I NCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to provide air terminals as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section of the Specifications. 1. 02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Provide equipment performance rated in accordance with ADC (Air Diffusion Council) Equipment Test Code 1062GRD 84, 1S0 Standard 5135 and 1S0 Standard 5219.. B. Meet the noise criteria levels specified in Section 15010 and 15200. 1. 03 SHOP DRAW NGS I
A. As part of air terminal shop drawing submittal, submit a light troffer shop drawing showing method of connection and compatibility with the light fixture. 1. 04 SAM PLES
A. Submit air terminal samples when requested by Supervision Consultant. B. Air terminals to have third party test certification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 01 GRI LLES, REGI STERS & DI FFUSERS
A. Provide grilles, registers and diffusers from one manufacturer. B. Provide grilles, registers and diffusers for air quantities and locations shown on Drawings. C. Refer to Schedule for description of types. D. Equip each supply air terminal with a volume control damper and an equalising grid. E. Provide mitred corners for external flange. F. Provide end cap for continuous linear diffuser terminating at walls and partitions. G. To provide factory applied external paint finish to match with Supervision Consultant finishes and ceiling. Colour of paint finishes shall be approved by the Supervision Consultant.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 36. Section 15940- Air Terminals
Page 259 of 317
H. Provide opposed blade volume control damper for each grille, register, and diffuser including those used for return/exhaust air. Adjustment of the dampers shall be made from the face of the grille, register, and diffuser. I. Unless otherwise specified, grilles, register, and diffusers with backed enamel colour paint finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTI ON 3. 01 I NSTALLATI ON
A. Provide air terminals in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final reflected ceiling plans. B. Provide plaster frames for units installed in plaster finishes for grilles and diffusers. Fit frames tightly to prevent leakage and smudging.
END OF SECTI ON
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 36. Section 15940- Air Terminals
Page 260 of 317
SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Constant-volume air systems. Dual-duct systems. Variable-air-volume systems. Multizone systems. Induction-unit systems.
Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. b. c. Constant-flow hydronic systems. Variable-flow hydronic systems. Primary-secondary hydronic systems.
1.3 A. B. C. D. E.
DEFINITIONS AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 37. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of System
Page 261 of 317
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS LEED Submittal: 1. Air-Balance Report for LEED Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B.
Qualification Data: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. Certified TAB reports. Sample report forms. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Instrument type and make. Serial number. Application. Dates of use. Dates of calibration.
C.
D.
E. F. G.
1.5 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by local authorities. 1. 2. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by local authorities. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by local authorities TAB technician.
B.
TAB Conference: Meet with Engineer on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: a. b. c. d. The Contract Documents examination report. The TAB plan. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
Page 262 of 317
C.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. 2. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. E. 1.6 A.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Engineer. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Section 5, "Instrumentation." PROJECT CONDITIONS Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. As described in ASHRAE 111,
B.
1.7 A.
COORDINATION Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TAB SPECIALISTS 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the approved by local authorities.
3.2 A.
EXAMINATION Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
B.
Page 263 of 317
C. D.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 15 Section Metal Ducts are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
E.
F.
2.
G.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
H. I.
J.
K.
L.
M. N. O. P.
Page 264 of 317
3.3 A. B.
PREPARATION Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. 2. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.
3.4 A.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABCs "National Standards for Total System Balance" [ASHRAE 111] and respective local authority regulations and standards. 1. B. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. 2. 3. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C.
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in and metric (SI) units.
D.
3.5 A.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
Page 265 of 317
B. C.
D. E.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaustair dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. Check for airflow blockages. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts." PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
F. G. H. I. J. K. L. 3.6 A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.
2.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. b. c. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.
d.
3.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. 5.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.
Page 266 of 317
6.
7.
Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in fullcooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. 3.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C.
Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
D.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
2.
3.7 A.
PROCEDURES FOR DUAL-DUCT SYSTEMS Verify that the cooling coil is capable of full-system airflow, and set mixing boxes at full-cold airflow position for fan volume. Measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate controls of mixing boxes and to overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing boxes. 1. If insufficient static pressure exists, increase airflow at the fan.
B.
Page 267 of 317
C.
Test and adjust the constant-volume mixing boxes as follows: 1. 2. 3. Verify both hot and cold operations by adjusting the thermostat and observing changes in air temperature and volume. Verify sufficient inlet static pressure before making volume adjustments. Adjust mixing boxes to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse readings or by measuring static pressure at mixing-box taps if provided by mixing-box manufacturer.
D. E.
Do not overpressurize ducts. Remeasure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate controls of mixing boxes and to overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing boxes. Adjust variable-air-volume, dual-duct systems in the same way as constant-volume, dual-duct systems; adjust maximum- and minimum-airflow setting of each mixing box.
F.
3.8 A.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. 2. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
B.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.
Page 268 of 317
a.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
7.
8. C.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. Record final fan-performance data.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. 2. 3. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air systems. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
D.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. Measure static pressure at the sensor. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Page 269 of 317
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
3.9 A. B.
PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS Set unit at maximum airflow through the cooling coil. Adjust each zone's balancing damper to achieve indicated airflow within the zone.
3.10 A.
PROCEDURES FOR INDUCTION-UNIT SYSTEMS Balance primary-air risers by measuring static pressure at the nozzles of the top and bottom units of each riser to determine which risers must be throttled. Adjust risers to indicated airflow within specified tolerances. Adjust each induction unit.
B.
3.11 A.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. Check liquid level in expansion tank. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
B. C.
6. 7. 8.
3.12 A.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Engineer and comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps."
Page 270 of 317
2.
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions.
3.
4. B.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
C.
D. E.
F.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. 2. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
G.
3. H.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
I. J.
3.13 A.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.
Page 271 of 317
3.14 A.
PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Balance the primary circuit flow first and then balance the secondary circuits.
3.15 A. B. C.
PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each piece of equipment. Measure and record upstream and downstream steam pressure of pressure-reducing valves. Check settings and operation of automatic temperature-control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves. Record final settings. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. Verify the operation of each steam trap.
D. E.
3.16 A. B. C. D. E. 3.17 A.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS Measure water flow through all circuits. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings. PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. Motor horsepower rating. Motor rpm. Efficiency rating. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.
Page 272 of 317
3.18 A.
PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments furnished by chiller manufacturer. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
3.19 A.
PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the following tests and record the results: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air. Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower. Measure cooling-tower spray pump discharge pressure. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup water system. Measure flow through bypass.
3.20 A. B. C. 3.21 A.
PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS Verify proper rotation of fans. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record compressor data. PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow. Steam Boilers: Measure and record entering-water temperature and flow and leaving-steam pressure, temperature, and flow.
B.
Page 273 of 317
3.22 A.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. Water flow rate. Water pressure drop. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. Airflow. Air pressure drop.
B.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Nameplate data. Airflow. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. Calculated kilowatt at full load. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
C.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil: 1. 2. 3. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. Airflow. Air pressure drop. Inlet steam pressure.
D.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. Airflow. Air pressure drop. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.23 A.
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. Check the refrigerant charge. Check the condition of filters. Check the condition of coils. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
Page 274 of 317
B.
Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. New filters are installed. Coils are clean and fins combed. Drain pans are clean. Fans are clean. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
6. C.
Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. 2. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. Balance each air outlet.
3.
4.
3.24 A.
TOLERANCES Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3. 4. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.25 A.
REPORTING Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
B.
Page 275 of 317
3.26 A.
FINAL REPORT General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. 2. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Pump curves. Fan curves. Manufacturers' test data. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data.
C.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Title page. Name and address of the TAB contractor. Project name. Project location. Architect's name and address. Engineer's name and address. Contractor's name and address. Report date. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. Summary of contents including the following: a. b. c. Indicated versus final performance. Notable characteristics of systems. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. 13. 14. 15.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. Conditions of filters. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
Page 276 of 317
D.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. Water and steam flow rates. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. Terminal units. Balancing stations. Position of balancing devices.
E.
Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 2. Unit identification. Location. Make and type. Model number and unit size. Manufacturer's serial number. Unit arrangement and class. Discharge arrangement. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). Number, make, and size of belts. Number, type, and size of filters.
Motor Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. Motor make, and frame type and size. Horsepower and rpm. Volts, phase, and hertz. Full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
3.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Fan rpm. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s). Return airflow in cfm (L/s). Outdoor-air damper position. Return-air damper position. Vortex damper position.
Page 277 of 317
F.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. 2. System identification. Location. Coil type. Number of rows. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c. Make and model number. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). Tube size in NPS (DN). Tube and fin materials. Circuiting arrangement.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Average face velocity in fpm (m/s). Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa). Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa). Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C). Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).
G.
Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. System identification. Location. Make and type. Model number and unit size. Manufacturer's serial number. Fuel type in input data. Output capacity in Btu/h (kW). Ignition type. Burner-control types. Motor horsepower and rpm. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
Page 278 of 317
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C). Air temperature differential in deg F (deg C). Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW). High-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW). Manifold pressure in psig (kPa). High-temperature-limit setting in deg F (deg C). Operating set point in Btu/h (kW). Motor voltage at each connection. Motor amperage for each phase. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h (kW).
H.
Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btu/h (kW). e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s). Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Heat output in Btu/h (kW). Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Air velocity in fpm (m/s). Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C). Voltage at each connection. Amperage for each phase.
2.
I.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. System identification. Location. Make and type. Model number and size. Manufacturer's serial number. Arrangement and class. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
Page 279 of 317
2.
Motor Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Motor make, and frame type and size. Horsepower and rpm. Volts, phase, and hertz. Full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). Number, make, and size of belts.
3.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Fan rpm. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
J.
Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. System and air-handling-unit number. Location and zone. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). Duct size in inches (mm). Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s). Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
K.
Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. System and air-handling unit identification. Location and zone. Apparatus used for test. Area served. Make. Number from system diagram. Type and model number. Size. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m)
Page 280 of 317
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Air velocity in fpm (m/s). Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). Final air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Final velocity in fpm (m/s). Space temperature in deg F (deg C).
L.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. 2. System and air-handling-unit identification. Location and zone. Room or riser served. Coil make and size. Flowmeter type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
M.
Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. Unit identification. Location. Service. Make and size. Model number and serial number. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). Pump rpm. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). Motor make and frame size. Motor horsepower and rpm. Voltage at each connection. Amperage for each phase. Full-load amperage and service factor. Seal type.
Page 281 of 317
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). Actual impeller size in inches (mm). Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s). Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). Voltage at each connection. Amperage for each phase.
N.
Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. b. c. d. e. Instrument type and make. Serial number. Application. Dates of use. Dates of calibration.
3.27 A.
INSPECTIONS Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. Check the following for each system: a. b. c. d. e. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
2.
B.
Final Inspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Engineer. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Engineer. Engineer shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
2. 3.
Page 282 of 317
4.
5.
If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C.
TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: 1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
2.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.28 A.
ADDITIONAL TESTS Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
B.
END OF SECTION
Page 283 of 317
SECTION 15990 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS/BMS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to herein. B. Comply all relevant requirements stipulated in Division 15 and 16, and EN60780 (all parts) Telecontrol Equipment and System. C. Provide Building Automation Systems (BAS) and associated automatic controls and remote monitoring systems in accordance with sub-contract Documents. D. A complete site wide integrated BAS System shall be provided, in coordination between Infrastructure and Buildings contractors and as per the typical data point summary and control schematic attached in appendix B The BAS system shall cover the following location subdivided into packages as below: 1. Under infrastructure package 1.1 Lifting Stations 1-2-3 1.2 All electrical substation 1.3 Gate houses 1.4 Irrigation station 1.5 All ancillary outbuildings within site boundaries 2. Under Buildings Package 2.1 Apartment Buildings A, B, C, D & E,F,G,H 2.2 Community Centre 2.3 Car Park 2.4 Fire Command Center (FCC) 3. Under Dedicated Packages 3.1 District Cooling Plant DCP 3.2 Sewage Treatment Plant STP The scope of work under each package and for all locations shall be as described here below: Engineering Supply and installation of DDC Controller and Peripheral Devices (as per list of data points) including all necessary components and interfaces between controlled/monitored equipment and DDC controllers. Supply and installation of all required network interfaces (signal amplifiers, switchers, etc) as per BAS manufacturer recommendations, to enable best communication and data among the different location and central BAS station located in the FIRE Command Centre FCC. All power and control wiring inside the location/building. Software integration of all data points under the package into the central BAS stations, including all required programming. Testing and commissioning. Installation and Operation Manual IOM. Training of Designed staff Warranty and maintenance as per the present specification. The network interconnection between the above mentioned locations and the BAS central station shall be under the infrastructure package including suitably sized dedicated containment and
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 38. Section 15990 - Building Automation System (BAS) Page 284 of 317
cables/ wires as per the recommendations of BAS manufacturer. The containment and wiring running inside the Community Center to connect all locations to the BAS central station shall be under the infrastructure package. The infrastructure contractor shall established the most suitable routing and develop the related shop drawings in close coordination with building contractor and specialist BAS sub-contractor. E. The BAS system shall be designed and configured such that the central equipment in the FCC shall be able to control and monitor all BAS points. In this regard, the system shall be fully compatible between Infra structure and Apartment Buildings. A schematic diagram for BAS networking has been included here after. This diagram is purely indicative, and does not constitute a physical wiring diagram. 1.02 GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. WORK INCLUDED 1. The Building Automation & Control Systems (BACS) manufacturer shall supply a fully integrated building automation system, incorporating Direct Digital Control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring, controlling and subsystems as herein specified. 2. The entire processing system shall be in complete compliance with the BACnet standard: ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995. The system shall use BACnet protocols and LAN types throughout and exclusively. 3. The wiring & installation of the control system shall be performed by the MEP Contractor under the guidance of the BACS supplier with the shop drawings, flow diagrams, bill of materials, component designation or identification number and sequence of operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer. 4. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed especially for this project. 5. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least five years. 6. BACS manufacturer shall be responsible for all BACS Schematics and Control Wiring Diagrams for a complete and operable system. B. WORK BY OTHERS 1. Mechanical contractor shall install all Peripherals, wells, valves, taps, dampers, flow stations, Flow meters, Electrical Meters, DDC Control Panels etc. 2. Mechanical contractor shall provide the Containment System for the Peripherals, DDCs etc. 3. Electrical Contractor shall provide: a. 230V power to all BACS and/or temperature control panels b. Wiring of all power feeds through all disconnects starters to electrical motor. c. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed control devices not furnished by BACS manufacturer C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. The BACS system shall be designed, commissioned and serviced by manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have an in-place support facility within 60 Kilometers of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed contractors are not acceptable.
2. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall be manufacturers latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements. 3. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9001 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and Servicing). The intent of this specification requirement is to ensure that the products from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System and Framework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for this project. 4. This system shall have a documented history of compatibility by design for a minimum of 10 years. Future compatibility shall be supported for no less than 10 years. Compatibility shall be defined as the ability to upgrade existing field panels and extend new field panels. D. CONTROL DRAWINGS 1. Submit all Control drawings for review before proceeding with procurement or site specific software development and according to a schedule to be established with the consultant. 2. Submit Drawings for all equipment to be provided, including but not limited to: a. b. c. d. Software packages Management station central equipment Specification data sheets of each hardware component or software module. Schematic diagrams showing system configuration and interconnection of management stations and all field panels in accordance with the specified level 1 and level 2 networks. e. Schematic diagrams for all building systems showing control devices, instrumentation, product interconnection, panel wiring, interlocking and component tag identification as well as written sequence of operation. Show panel spare capacity. f. Descriptive data of all operating, user and application software including complete operators manuals, programmers manuals, and alphanumeric mnemonic point name convention sheet. g. Other drawings as appropriate. General advertising type literature is only acceptable as additional support information. 3. Submit 4 sets of final as-built documentation including the above items and complete with troubleshooting procedures. 4. Provide final documentation to serve the diverse needs of personnel concerned with instruction, operation, procurement, installation and maintenance. 5. Shop drawings and final documentation will be reviewed to ensure that such documents are in keeping with the intent of this specification and fully meet the requirements in terms of content and format. Make all required changes to this documentation at no additional cost. 6. Delivery of the final approved documentation, in hardcover 2-ring or 4-ring binders with index page and index tabs, is required before the Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued. 7. Maintain a complete and current copy of all reviewed Shop Drawings at the job site. E. REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. Provide electrical material and installation in accordance with the appropriate requirements, and in accordance with applicable sections of the current edition of the applicable local codes for electrical work and signaling systems. Install wiring in conduit or approved totally enclosed raceways. Do not use cable raceways or troughs. Approved ceiling plenum cable
is acceptable where permitted by the local Authorities. 2. Provide electrical and electronic equipment, which meets the CE conformity requirements as defined in CE directive 89/336/EEC Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC. 3. All control products provided for this project shall comprise a BACnet internet work. Communication involving control components (i.e., all types of controllers and operator interfaces) shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995, BACnet. 28 ASHRAE GUIDELINE 13-2000 4. Provide Terminal Unit Controls which is LonMark compliant. 5. Modem interfacing provisions shall meet EIA RS232C. Modems shall comply with the local required communication protocol with minimum transmission rate of 28,800 baud. 6. All equipment and systems installed under this Contract shall meet following specifications on electromagnetic compatibility: a. Interference immunity according to EN50082-2 b. Emitted interference according to EN50081-1 c. Provide equipment which functions and meets all detailed performance criteria when operating in the following minimum ambient condition ranges:
d. Operating Temperature - 0 to 52 deg C [32 to 122 deg F] (Class 3K5 to IEC 721) e. Relative Humidity 10% to 85% non condensing (Class 3K5 to IEC 72) f. 1.03 Electrical power service of single phase, 230V AC +/- 10%, 50 Hz nominal
TECHNICAL PROPOSAL DURING TENDER STAGE
A. Submit a detailed technical proposal to illustrate compliance with the specification. B. Provide a description of the proposed system, along with a block diagram, to describe the system, workstation computers and all peripheral equipment, communication interfaces, LANs, LAN cards, all active hubs and repeaters, network layout, all bus layouts, panels and controllers. The intention is to provide a written system description along with diagram to show the vendors proposal to meet this specification without necessarily showing each and every control panel and local controller required for the entire project. C. Provide a description, with illustration, of the interactive operator interfaces, graphical and text based including the dynamic system graphics. E. Provide a description and examples of the various reports specified. F. Provide a technical description of all hardware components. G. Provide a description of the vendor/Sub-contractor showing organisation and location of staff, recent related experience with references, local facility description and address, local servicing capability and hardware parts availability, training staff. H. Provide vendors standard specification literature for hardware included. PART 2 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) 2.01 GENERAL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE The architecture of the Building Automation System shall consist of three levels: A. The Field Level B. The Automation Level C. The Management Level
2.02
THE FIELD LEVEL 1. The Field Level shall consist of a distributed network of LONMark FCU Controllers and Lighting Controllers (Application Specific Controllers) sewage booster sets, etc. 2. The functions of the Controllers are: a. Physical connections to field devices such as sensors, actuators, transducers and relays b. Conversion of analog outputs from engineering units to physical variables such as 0100% to a Modulating signal. c. Reporting changes from field devices to the automation level d. Translating commands from the automation level to output signals e. Local control functions such as PID control loops, interlocks, local calculations and execution of default start/stop time schedules 3. LONMark FCU Controllers shall be provided under this contract 4. Each FCU Controller shall operate as a stand-alone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities, including PI loop control, independently of other controllers in the network. 5. For fault tolerance, a dedicated FCU Controller shall be provided for each VAV box or FCU. It is the intent that the failures of any one FCU Controller not affect the operation of more than one FCU. A common controller for FCUs serving different areas shall not be acceptable. These controllers shall be looped with a LON bus cable and connected to the automation level via an interface unit. 6. In general the Controller shall comply with the following specifications a. b. c. d. e. f. For 2 or 4 pipe FCUs, with or without changeover PID control Downloadable application software LONMark compatible bus communication To be integrated to the management station software Control of AC 24 V PWM valve actuators, 3 point AC 24 V valve and damper actuators, or electric heating coils g. Volt-free relays for fan control h. Operating Voltage 230 V i. Internal fuse, thermal, automatic reset j. Connectable to 1 room unit 7. The application specific controller shall have a socket for connecting commissioning a service terminal/tool. It shall be possible for to read, write and change parameters/ programs of any application specific controller connected on the LON bus. 8. The application specific controllers shall be capable of working in conjunction with Return Air Sensor for the Public Areas/Common Areas FCUs. The Controller shall be selected f to meet the description written in Control Schematic.
A. GENERAL
2.03
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
A. The Controllers shall utilize standard protocols at all levels. The following protocols are to be used at the various levels. 1. 2. 3. Management Level BACnet, Ethernet TCP/IP,LON Automation level BACnet on LON Field Level Lontalk with LONMARK profiles
Page 288 of 317
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 38. Section 15990 - Building Automation System (BAS)
2.04
THE AUTOMATION LEVEL
A. GENERAL 1. The automation level shall comprise of General Purpose Controllers. The controllers shall be native BACnet devices in compliance ANSI-ASHRAE 135-195, BACnet. 2. At this level, the building services systems are controlled and monitored by the freely programmable automation stations. Typically, the full range of plant functions within a building is distributed to a number of automation stations, all of which are capable of standalone operation. The automation stations are interconnected to form a network with a "flat" topology, both for peer-to-peer exchange of data and for communication with one or more operator units and with the management level. All automation stations in the network are of equal status and each automation station can initiate or execute a communications service at any time. The management level communicates with the automation level via the BACnet protocol. There is no need for special "data concentrators" such as data servers or gateways between these two levels. This makes it possible to connect a management station directly to the automation level network. It shall be possible to use Clients Ethernet/IP infrastructure as the transmission medium for the building automation and control system network. The automation stations record plant values via analog and binary inputs (AI, BI) and pass control signals to the plant via analog and binary outputs (AO, BO). The physical inputs and outputs are either located directly in the automation stations or connected remotely via a field bus. In case DDC controllers are communicating with remote I/O modules the polling cycle between I/O modules and DDC shall not be more than 0.5 second B. HARDWARE 1. The DDC Controller shall be UL or CE listed. DDC controller shall be installed at site in enclosure as specified elsewhere in the specification. The number of DDC controllers shall be adequate to connect to the number input/output points required. Each DDC outstation shall be installed with a minimum of 5% spare point capacity such that additional points may be connected by adding an end device, wiring and programming. 2. The DDC Controller shall be designed to be mounted in a mechanical room environment with a rated operating temperature range of 0C to 50C. If the proposed DDC Controller is not rated to 50C, DDC enclosure shall be equipped with a fan for ventilation. 3. The DDC controllers shall be provided with minimum 32bit microprocessors to carry our required control and management functions. The required control & application programs for each DDC shall be stored in a FLASH memory. The controllers shall have a minimum of 3MB of FLASH memory and 1.5MB of RAM. The data backup in case of power failure for application and parameters stored in the FLASH memory shall be for minimum period of 10 years. 4. Each DDC Controller shall be equipped with a battery-backed real-time clock. The intent is that if communications with the system controller is interrupted then the DDC Controller is still capable of using a default seven-day start/stop schedule. 5. Each DDC Controller shall have a dedicated service port to plug in the portable operator's terminal (POT). It shall be possible to read, write and change any parameters on a bus by plugging the POT to any one of the Controllers on the communication trunk. The portable operator's terminal shall have a visual and audible alarm with mute facility on its fascia. The POT shall have minimum three password levels. Separate cabling for connecting the POT shall not be acceptable. Changing the parameters locally from any Outstation shall be done by POT which is truly portable and hand held and not via Laptops.
6. The DDC Controllers shall be fully programmable to meet the sequence of operation and future modifications. For ease of support and documentation, the preferred method of programming is graphical. 7. The automation stations for the primary plant incorporate the following functions: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. Measurement and control and the associated processing of the input and output signals Trend data logging Monitoring of process variables and generation of alarms Distribution of alarms and alarm acknowledgements Storage of alarms Acknowledgement and reset of alarms Implementation of calendar and 7-day programs Replication of global data to ensure consistency Resolution of references to other automation stations Administration of clients for change-of-value notifications Monitoring of process variables for changes of value Exchange of data with clients and other automation stations Execution of the life-check function Monitoring of hardware and software functions, and generation of an event when a fault is detected p. Event distribution q. Time synchronization r. Daylight saving time change s. Processing of BACnet access routines for operation and monitoring by one or more clients t. Various error handling procedures (e.g. for the exchange of data) 8. Apart from the freely programmable control functions DDC convenient management functions such as: a. Alarm management with alarm routing throughout the whole management (simple, basic and enhanced) with safety automatic transmission monitoring b. Time schedulers c. Trend functions d. Remote management functions e. Access protection for the whole network with individually categories 2.05 THE MANAGEMENT LEVEL A. GENERAL 1. The Management Level shall consist of a distributed network of Operator Workstations. The function of the Operator Workstation is to provide a user-friendly operator interface and to provide data archiving facilities. For system reliability, the Workstations shall not be required to perform any of the control features. 2. The management station shall be capable of the following: a. Display of graphical representations of the plant overlaid with live data b. Monitor and operate / influence process devices c. Receiving of alarm messages from the process level and directing them to the appropriate reporting device e.g. printer, pager, fax, e-mail, SMS shall provide integrated network. Three level alarm control transmission and
defined user profiles and
Page 290 of 317
d. Monitor process devices for communication problems and other device faults. e. Adjusting time strategies in the process level. f. Long term storage of logged data from the process devices. g. Archiving / retrieve data to/from long term data storage h. Display graphically the logged data i. Custom application programming 3. Any PC, which is required to perform the control features as specified, is considered to be a file server. To distribute the processing and for fault tolerance, it is the intention to avoid the use of a file server in the architecture. 4. The management station shall allow supplier independent integration of further subsystems. 5. Management level network a. The management shall be able to deal with the high data traffic with complex data structures between management stations and between the management station and the process level. b. The management stations shall be able to support current and future building management standard and propriety protocols in order to allow backward and forward compatibility. c. The network technology must be based the IT standards Ethernet and TCP/IP, and be compatible with the latest LAN, WAN technology.
d. When connected to an IT network this can be either a dedicated IT network for the building management stations or own the clients IT network. e. When connected to a client's IT network, the management stations and process devices connected to that network have to co-exist with the other network devices. f. Where the system works over more than one building over a large area (WAN -Wide Area Network), the client will be responsible for Data management devices ensuring the BACS can send information over routers, fire walls etc
B. HARDWARE 1. The hardware platform for the BACS Workstation shall meet the following specification: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Pentium microprocessor running at least at 2.5 GHz or latest. 1024 Megabytes of RAM Memory 80 GB of hard disk space 17 Super TFT monitor Standard keyboard and mouse 54 x CD R/W Drive Multimedia features
2. One No. Workstation shall be provided, to be located at a suitable Location as decided during submittal stage. The Workstation shall be provided with two 80-column dot matrix printers with tractor feed paper. One printer shall be used to print operator-requested information such as reports and the other printer shall be used to print messages sent by the Message Management feature. C. SOFTWARE 1. Management Station Operator Interface a. Provide an operator interface based on Microsoft Windows 2000 with true pre-emptive
multitasking, multi-user capability running on standard PC platforms. The BMS software shall use Windows authentication method for enhanced security. The BMS software shall have a feature of automatic logoff in the event no user interaction is detected for a certain period of time. b. A proprietary operating system will not be acceptable. c. The User Interface shall be based on a basic taskbar, which is always visible, and which provides at all times a summary of the most important system information and essential system functions which are: Control of access privileges and security mechanisms for access to program modules and third-party software at log-in and log-out. Alarm summary which indicates for at least 3 priority groups the number of active alarms, system message status, site connection status and time and date. User- and password-dependent access to systems and sub-systems. Automatic user-specific start sequences Facility to establish and terminate connection to various sites Simultaneous connection of at least of 4 sites via serial connections / 50 sites via LAN/WAN connections for a comprehensive overview on geographically distributed projects.
d. Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed simultaneously online, and in any combination, via user-sized windows. Operator shall be able to drag and drop information between applications reducing the number of operation steps. System access control for individual access to sites, applications, functions and objects Dynamic colour graphics and graphic control with minimum of following features Hierarchically linked, animated high-resolution bit-map colour graphics (XGA 1024 x 768 pixels) Choice of 2D and 3D symbols with animation based on status Direct access to setpoints, parameters, operating modes , alarms, time-programs, on-line and off-line trend data features Dynamic multi-tasking with all active pages Monitoring and operation of plant at several levels Flexible operation of multiple pages using plant viewer navigation bar combined with standard handling of windows Navigation to all other management station software applications User-definable page size Jump tags for jumps on the same level or between levels ToolTips for all dynamic objects, with the option of 'User', 'Technical' or 'System' information Context-specific information (e.g. data sheets) can be attached to any dynamic object Capable of graphics to be printed in colour or monochrome All 32 bit graphic file formats supported by Windows can be imported (e.g. AutoCAD, PCX etc.,) Dynamic display of the Psychometric chart, enabling easy simulation of the air conditioning processes.
e. Plant operation with explorer all objects shall be displayed in a graphical tree structure in order to access points which are not included / defined in the graphics f. Alarm handling all the alarms shall be displayed in a graphical tree structure in order to locate alarms quick and easily. As a minimum, the system shall support the following features
Operation and manipulation of alarms (based on user privileges) Alarm message printing Alarms printed independently of the management station (direct connection at automation level) Automatic pop-up windows for immediate display and operation of alarms (including pop-ups in 3 party programs) Audible or multi-media alarm indication Continuous overview of all active alarms from site (updated automatically, displayed in order of priority, option of personalized view) Graphics based topological view of alarms Chronological alarm view Option of displaying detailed information Direct access to associated plant graphics Comprehensive filter and search criteria (time, date, priority, discipline, alarm status etc.,) Colour coding based on alarm priority / alarm status (screen and printer) Alarms for out of limit values (high, low), change of state, run-time limits exceeded etc., Option of repeating unacknowledged alarms at regular intervals Creation of reports, with facility to print or export alarm data to 3 party programs for further analysis Facility to save user-defined filter criteria User-specific configuration of the alarm view including on-line configuration
rd rd
g. Alarm routing is an important feature of the BACS. The BACS shall have the following features Routing of alarms to alarm printer, fax, pager or mobile phone Time schedule for each message recipient Alarm routing based on priority Alarm routing based on discipline (HVAC, Security etc.,) Alarms routing to person responsible at site Alarm routing based on text Alarm routing to person(s) responsible for specific equipment or systems Option of manual transmission of messages from the management system h. Trend data module, including dynamic trend data definition and graphical presentation On-line or off-line real-time data Simultaneous display of up to ten signals per window Absolute or relative time intervals Zoom, scroll and cursor features for faster data analysis Flexible, easy-to-use scaling feature with charts displayed in 2D or 3D Drag-and-drop feature for trend views with automatic scaling and data export Off-line data logging triggered manually, automatically, or on a time or event basis Logging and intermediate storage of off-line trend data operates independently of the management Automatic upload from automation level to local or remote management stations Management station display and archiving of on-line and off-line trend data Print-outs of trend data Easy export of data to 3 party software Facility to export trend data directly to auxiliary programs such as ADP (Advanced
rd
Page 293 of 317
Data Processing) or to 3 party software such as MS-Excel i. History Logging Module for alarms, user actions, system events and messages The module shall be categorized into the following sections
rd
ALARM LOG contains all incoming alarms in chronological order SYSTEM LOG shows at a glance if a printer somewhere in the system has run out of paper, or a hard disk is full. Communication events are also recorded here, showing for example when communication was established or terminated USER LOG lists al the activities carried out by the user at the management station, unauthorized attempts, modification of parameters, set points etc., STATUS LOG to check the status of all incoming messages The Log Viewer shall have the following features Storage of alarms routed to the management station Storage of all system messages (from printer, communications, management station, modem etc.,) Storage of all user activities performed at the management station Facility to enter and store user comments on events and activities Facility to display, at a keystroke, detailed information on every entry Extensive filter options to focus and reduce the volume of information displayed Comprehensive search features for fast access to information Facility to display an overview of data for a given day or week Once defined, filter and search criteria can be saved for future re-use Compact archiving of virtually un-limited number of entries (depending on hard-disk capacity) Automatic data management and archiving functions Facility to create and print log summaries j. Export of log entries for further analysis with 3 party software (e.g. MS access) Ser specific configuration of log view can be adapted directly on line
rd
Scheduling Module for operation and programming of the time programs. The timescheduler shall have the following features 7 day time programs Exception programs (local, building-wise or system-wise) Direct display of time programs within Plant viewer graphics Simple graphics programming of switch times Graphics based overview of all time programs in the system Graphics based overview of a 7 day programme including all exception programmes Graphics based overview of all plant points affected by a time programme Direct entry of various operating modes (comfort, stand-by, energy hold-off) Easy creation, modification and deletion of all time programmes Scroll features for fast access to specific weeks or days Storage and processing independent of management station Automatic synchronization of all time programmes in a system Support of different time zones (remote managed sites0 Option of synchronization via radio clock Printed reports in various display forms
k.
Remote communications software, supporting remote access from/to process devices on

Page 294 of 317
automation via: AutoDial links (both dial-up and dial-down) ISDN facilities Ethernet / TCP/IP Local Area Networks TCP/IP Wide Area Networks 2. Portable Operator Terminal a. Furnish a Portable Operators Terminal that shall be capable of accessing all system data. This device may be connected to any point on the system network or may be connected directly to any controller for programming, setup, and troubleshooting. This device may be connected to any point on the system network or it may be connected directly to controllers using the BACnet PTP (Point-To-Point) Data Link/ Physical layer protocol. b. Data shall be displayed on a LCD screen which shall also provide functions and operation using function keys. The following functions shall be offered by the Operators Terminal in English language : List all Analog input and Output variables ,digital switching status and switching commands, immediate display of alarm messages ; set system parameters at the user and programming levels, list hours run and maintenance logs, alarms and reports. To protect data from unauthorized access, 3 passwords protected operating levels shall be provided. c. The POT shall also graphically display trends, time schedules etc. D. INTEGRATION OF SECONDARY SYSTEMS 1. Integrations shall be carried out at the most appropriate level within a system, depending on the functions and interaction required. 2. If interaction is required between different sub-systems, the integration shall be carried out at either the automation or field level. 3. Link to a third party software package such as a Planned Preventive Maintenance package or an Energy Monitoring package shall be carried out at the management level. 4. When sharing alarm and historical information with Maintenance Management and Energy Management packages, the management system shall provide the information in a standard commercially available format e.g. MS Access and using standard mechanisms e.g. ODBC. 5. Real-time live information shall be transferred from the management system to a third party package e.g. MS Excel, either by a standard inter-application mechanism e.g. DDE or OPC or by developing a connection by using a documented API for the management system. 6. The Secondary System Supplier shall provide the necessary line drivers and cables, documentation and support to make the connection into the device that will provide the protocol conversion (an Industry Standard Open Protocol). The BMS shall perform and provide all functionality as provided to it by the Secondary System Supplier via this integration channel. 7. The BACS shall have the ability to Integrate with Systems that conform to the Echelon Corporations LonWorks LonMark technology utilizing LonTalk Communications Protocol. The Interface to the BMS shall be in either of the 2 methods (a) LON Data taken from the LON Bus and connected to the BMS Management station by a standard Echelon designed interface e.g.: PCLTA10, SLTTA10. In this mode of Integration the Lon data is taken from the LON bus and interfaced to the BMS via OPC server. (b) The Lon System shall be able provide the BMS with their configuration files i.e. .xif Files for integrating to the BMS. 8. The BACS shall have the ability to integrate with EIB Systems .The Integration shall be done at the Automation or Management Level providing a 2 way communication between the connected systems. The Engineering for EIB shall be done using the ETS EIB Tool.
R, TM R
9. The Secondary Systems which shall be Integrated to the BACS are (as per Project Requirements) (To be confirmed) 10. The System shall have the ability to interface with the Building BAS network covering Community Centre and Apartment Blocks (fibre optic network) that supports the following communication protocols or high level interface. 1) BACnet 2) MODBus 3) LonTalk 4) SNMP 5) EIB 6) Ethernet OR 7) TCP/IP E. DOCUMENTATION In order to have clear system documentation, the following documents have to be provided: 1. System diagram 2. Wiring diagram 3. Lists of parameters For hand-over all documents must be up to date and provided with the date. F. SERVICES The type and scope of the required services are described below. The rates for engineering, commissioning and adjustment must contain all services required to ensure optimum operation of the plants. G. ENGINEERING/PLANNING In addition to the required, complete documentation, the service must include: 1. analysis of all functions together with the contractor 2. binding information about conditions of connection of equipment 3. scheduling and co-ordination with the contractor and design engineer H. COMMISSIONING/ADJUSTMENT Function-oriented commissioning includes the following services, which are to be provided by BACS specialist: 1. 2. 3. 4. I. verification of the external connections of the equipment verification of the data transfer channels of the system loading and testing of all basic and user programs belonging to the equipment optimization of the control parameters
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC RELATED EQUIPMENTS 1. Conditions

o
2. All controls shall be capable of operating in ambient conditions varying between 10 to 52 C and 90% r.h. non-condensing. 3. Conduit Entry 4. All control devices shall, unless provided with a flying lead, have a 20-mm conduit knockout. Alternatively, they shall be supplied with adapters for 20-mm conduit. 5. Ancillary Items 6. When items of equipment are installed in the situations listed below the BACS/ Control
7.
Specialist shall include the following ancillary items: Weather Protection
8. All devices, which are exposed to the atmosphere, are to be weatherproofed. All controls, peripherals and associated accessories serving Chillers, Roof Mounted Air Handling Units and other equipment which are exposed shall be protected from Dust, Rain and Solar Radiation (UV). Adequate protection shades etc., shall be provided by the MEP contractor 9. Pipe work Immersion 10. Corrosion resisting pockets of a length suitable for the complete active length of the device, screwed 1/2" or 3/4" BSPT suitable for the temperature, pressure and medium. 11. Duct Mounting (Metal or Builders Work) 12. The MEP contractor shall provide mounting flanges, clamping bushes, couplings, lock nuts, gaskets, brackets, sealing glands and any special fittings necessitated by the device. J. SAMPLES Samples of all types of room mounted equipment (i.e. detectors, thermostats, etc.), Valves & Actuators shall be provided by the BACS/Controls Specialist for approval by the Consultant/Engineer. The Products shall be the same make as the BMS Make and or equal to unit BAS requirements. K. ACCURACY Control and measuring devices shall have the following limits of accuracy: Temperature Pressure Humidity : : : +/- 1 C over the range of 0C to 50C +/- 1.5% of measured value +/- 5% r.h over the range of 10 to 90% r.h
o
1. Air: Plus or minus 0.2 C of measured temperature, plus or minus 2.5% of measured RH, 2.0% of measured static pressure. 2. Water: 0.5% of the measured flow rate; 2.0% of the measured pressure; 0.2C of the measured temperature. 3. BTU Calculation: PT100 4-wire temperature sensor; electromagnetic flow meter with accuracy 0.25% of measured flow rate; 6 digit display selectable from kWhr, MWH and BTU. 4. Electrical: Plus or minus 1.5 3% of measured value for voltage and current, 5% of measured value for power factor and 0.5% of measured value for kWh. Plus or minus 1% for frequency. Plus or minus 10% for light level. 5. Water Temp: Plus or minus 0.1% over full operating range.
[
A.
Data Pick-Up: 1. Digital input from devices shall be obtained from isolated, dry type contacts (no grounds, no voltage) of either normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) configuration. Live contact inputs that have voltage present, shall be provided with isolating devices to meet dry contact requirements. 2. Flow data shall be received from Electromagnetic flow meter similar to Rosemount equivalent and approved having an output current of 4-20mA. 3. Provide any necessary voltage and current transducers, voltage and current transformers, kWh transducers, frequency transducers etc. 4. Start-stop relay module shall contain relays for start-stop functions at the remote point, with relays mounted and factory wired to numbered terminal strips. Start-stop signal may be in form of momentary or latching type signal and shall be field programmable. 5. Proper segregation shall be maintained throughout for cable wiring carrying different voltage range such as start/stop control cable and digital alarm cable, etc.
L. AVERAGING ELEMENTS
Averaging elements shall be used downstream of the Cooling Coil and Upstream of the Heating Coil and shall have a minimum capillary length of 8.2 m. The capillary element shall be serpentine across the whole duct. Where the span of the element is less than 1 m then it shall be fixed with purpose-made clips and may be unsupported across the duct. Where the span of the element is above 1 m then it should be supported on Unistrut or similar rigid support. The element shall be clipped every 200m and the supports and hangers shall be adequate to prevent vibration of the element. M. PRESSURE SWITCHES FOR AIR SYSTEMS 1. Pressure switches for Air Systems shall be diaphragm operated. Switches shall be supplied with air connections permitting their use as static or differential pressure switches. 2. The switch shall be of differential pressure type complete with connecting tube and metal bends for connections to the duct. The housing shall be IP54 rated. The pressure switches shall be available in minimum of 3 ranges suitable for applications like Airflow proving, dirty filter, etc. The setpoint shall be concealed type. The contact shall be SPDT type with 250 VAC, 1A rating. 3. Shall be supplied suitable for wall mounting or mounting on ducts in any plane. It should be mounted in such a way so that the condensation flow out of the sensing tips. Proper adapter shall be provided for the cables. 4. The set point shall fall within 40%-70% of the scale range. Shall have differentials adjustable over 10%-30% of the scale range. N. AIR FLOW SWITCHES 1. The Airflow switches shall be selected for the correct air velocity, duct size and mounting altitude. 2. Where special atmospheric conditions are detailed in the Motor Control Panel Equipment Schedules, the parts of the switches shall be suitably coated or made to withstand such conditions. Any variations from standard shall be detailed in the Tender. O. WATER FLOW SWITCHES Water flow switches shall be selected for the correct water velocity and pipe size and mounting attitude. P. ROOM TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY DETECTORS 1. The temperature sensor shall have sensitivities such that a change at the detector of 0.2 C from the stabilized condition is sufficient to start modulating the corrective element. 2. The temperature sensor shall be with silicon sensor having positive temperature coefficient. The sensor shall be field wired using an unscreened cable to a base plate. The sensor housing shall plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed without disturbing the wiring connections. The protection standard shall be IP30 in accordance with IEC 144, DIN 40050. These should be generally mounted 1.5 m above the floor level. These should not be mounted near the heat sources such as windows, electrical appliances, etc. The final location shall be as per the consulting engineers' approval. The sensor shall be linear over 0 C to 50 C. 3. Shall operate on extra-low voltage and be suitable for mounting on British Standard conduit boxes. 4. The humidity sensor shall be in an independent housing or be combined with the room/duct type temperature sensor in the common housing. The sensor should be electronic type with capacitive sensing element. As a minimum it should have a range of 10 to 90% RH. Q. IMMERSION/TEMPERATURE DETECTOR AND DUCT MOUNTED
o o o
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY DETECTORS
o
1. The temperature sensor shall have sensitivities such that changes at the detector, for 0.3 C and 0.2 C respectively, from the stabilized conditions, are sufficient to start modulating the corrective element. 2. The humidity sensor shall be in an independent housing or be combined with the room/duct type temperature sensor in the common housing. The sensor should be electronic type with capacitive sensing element. As a minimum should have a range of 10 to 90% RH. 3. The temperature sensor shall be with silicon sensor having Positive Temperature Coefficient. The sensor shall be field wired using an unscreened cable to a base plate. The sensor housing shall plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed without disturbing the wiring connections. The protection standard shall be IP43 in accordance with IEC 144, DIN 40050. 4. The wiring terminals shall be plug-in type for easy installation and maintenance. The sensor shall be mounted in the duct based on the guidelines given by the specialist control supplier. The sensor shall be linear over 0 C to 50 C. R. PRESSURE DETECTORS (FOR LIQUIDS AND GASEOUS MEDIA) 1. Pressure detectors shall be suitable for the suitable for the medium and the working temperatures and pressures. The pressure detector shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of 2 times the working pressure. Connections shall be suitable for 1/2 to 1/8th in o.d. copper tube. 2. Ductwork versions shall be supplied with the air connections permitting their use as static or differential pressure detectors. 3. The setpoint shall fall within 40%-70% of the sensing range of the detector. The detector shall have sensitivity such that a change of 1.5% from the stabilized condition shall cause modulation of the corrective element. 4. The static pressure sensor shall be rated for IP65 and the differential pressure sensor shall be as a minimum IP54. The principle of operation should be based on a hall-effect transducer. The diaphragm should be copper benylium type. The sensor must be pressure compensated for a medium temperature of -10 to 80 C with ambient ranging between -25 to 60 C. S. AIR PRESSURE SENSOR The pressure sensor shall be differential type. The construction shall be spring loaded diaphragm type. The movement of the membrane in relation to the pressure should be converted by an inductive coupling, which would electromagnetically give an output suitable for the controller. The pressure sensor shall in housing having IP54 ratings in accordance with IEC529. Suitable mounting arrangement shall be available on the sensor. The sensor shall come complete with the PVC tubes, probes, etc. 1. Sensors shall be installed and wherever necessary for the proper functioning of BAS. Sensors shall comply with an agreed industry standards. Detail information shall be submitted at the time of tendering. 2. Unless otherwise specified, the Sub-contractor shall supply and install all sensors and transducers as according to the field point schedule. Interface relays shall also be provided. 3. Unless otherwise specified, provide a pair of voltage free contacts for each and every piece of the equipment requiring controlling/monitoring. 4. Sensors shall be of suitable sizes and application for installation at or nearby the equipment. 5. The sensors shall in general meet with the following minimum specification: a. Temperature Sensors Temperature sensors shall have linear current or voltage output over their entire
o o o o
range and shall be suitable for us on the type of duties expected. Sensors shall be factory calibrated and shall not require compensation for cable lengths etc. Sensors shall be recalibrated on site. Adjustment of zero point and span shall be done at the sensor. Room sensors shall have a plug in connection plate to permit removal of the sensor during decorations etc. Sensing range shall be 0...50 C. They shall match the appearance of the room type humidity sensors.
o
Duct sensors shall have an insertion element of between 150 to 900mm to suit duct width with temperature averaging along its full length. Sensors shall have a separate mounting flange with snap on connection to permit sensor removal. Sensing range shall be -30...+80 C. Immersion sensors shall be provided complete with immersion pocket. Insertion length shall be minimum 100mm. Sensing range shall be -30...+130 C. Stop cocks and quick release couplings shall be provided to facilitate maintenance.
o o
Location for all room sensors shall be agreed with the Supervision Consultant prior to installation of any concealed conduit. All sensors shall be covered with temporary covers before handover to the Employer. b. Humidity Sensors Humidity sensors shall employ a capacitance type element and shall provide a voltage output. Sensors shall require use of screened cable. Sensors shall have a minimum range of 30 to 90% R.H. Room sensors shall be of combined humidity/temperature sensor type and shall have a plug in connection plate to permit removal of the sensor during decorations etc. They shall match the appearance of the room temperature sensors. Duct sensors shall have an insertion length of 200mm and shall have a separate mounting flange with snap on connection to permit sensor removal. Location for all room sensors shall be agreed with the Supervision Consultant prior to installation of any concealed conduit. All sensors shall be covered with temporary covers before handover to the Employer. c. Pressure Sensors Air differential pressure sensors shall be fully solid state and shall utilize the hot wire technique to measure air velocity through a calibrated orifice. Sensors shall be able to operate on positive or negative pressures. The sensors shall have a separate duct mounting flange with snap on connection. Liquid pressure sensors shall be suitable for use on water, steam or refrigerant applications. Sensor shall furnish with a NPT ball valve as isolation for maintenance. They shall employ a bellow sensing element with at least 50% overpressure capability and shall provide a 4 - 20mA output. Liquid differential pressure sensors shall employ a dual chamber bellows sensing element with at least 50% overpressure capability and shall provide a 4 -20mA output. d. Water Flow Rate Sensors. Sensors shall be magnetic flow meter type and shall be suitable for operating at 0 - 50C and 150% of the system working pressure; 4-20mA output. Sensor for energy metering (BTU calculation) shall be electromagnetic flow meter, 4-20mA output. The energy calculator shall be able to display the mass and volume flow. In addition, the energy calculator shall be backup by battery of minimum 72 hrs operation; battery life shall not be less than 10 years.
Page 300 of 317
e. Carbon Monoxide Sensors The system shall be a complete package with integral sensor, monitor, alarm contacts. Device shall be housed in enclosure. All status indicators shall be mounted within enclosure. The units must meet OSHA and UL2075 rating standards. It must be capable of measuring other specific gas as mentioned below. Unit shall have adjustable setpoint and self-test diagnostics. Following are the technical specifications which the unit shall comply with: - Gas to be Detected: Carbon Monoxide (CO) - Power Requirements: 24 VDC or 24 VAC -Accuracy: 2.5% of reading-Signal Output: 4-20 mA, or 2-10 VDC Linear - Digital, RS-485 - Relay & Buzzer: Two, Single pole double throw(SPDT) -Form C, 1 amp dry contact - Factory Set Ranges: O2 0 to 25% v/v - Other measurable gas: NO2 - 0 to 6 ppm CO - 0 to 125 ppm NO - 0 to 100 ppm NH3 - 0 to 50 ppm - Remote Sensor: Electrochemical - Sensor Life: Minimum 2 to 3 year nominal service Transducers: One transducer shall be provided for each analogue sensor, and no two (2) analogue sensors shall share the same transducer. In general, transducers shall be provided and installed according to the schedule of analogue points. The transducer shall accept a signal from the necessary transformer (current voltage, etc.) and convert the signal (signals in the case of phase angle transducers) to a signal compatible with the FPU controller. The transducers shall be supplied to the relevant switchboard supplier for installation (current transformers voltage transformers will be supplied and installed by the switchboard manufacturer). Whenever the Sub-contractor intends to install a transducer elsewhere, other than in the field cabinet mentioned approval from the Supervision Consultant shall be obtained. Transducer outputs shall be industrial compatible, with the following ranges: - 0 - 20 mA - 4 - 20 mA - 0 -10 V - 1- 5 V Transducers shall be of the active type and shall have an accuracy of 2%. Ensure that all necessary provisions are made for the satisfactory performance of the transducers. The cost of these provisions shall be deemed to be included in the tender sum. T. ACTUATORS a. Shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. b. The Products shall be the same make as the BMS Make and not be out sourced from any other 3 Party Sub vendor. c. Shall have a sufficient torque to open and close valves and dampers against the
Page 301 of 317 MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 38. Section 15990 - Building Automation System (BAS)
rd
f.
maximum out of balance pressure across them. d. Control Damper Actuators Control Damper Actuators shall be of the type where the damper spindle passes through the actuator and is secured by a U clamp. Rotary type damper actuators shall be used on the project. The actuators shall not require any maintenance. The actuators shall have sufficient torque ratings to operate the dampers of various sizes. These should be available in spring return versions as specified elsewhere in the document. Limit switches, if required/specified shall be provided for. The actuators shall be suitable for On/Off and modulating operations. e. Actuator Additional features Actuator Additional features are required when detailed in the Motor Control Panel Equipment Schedules or the Performance Section of the Specification. Auxiliary Switches: For On/off applications, the actuators shall have changeover contacts suitable for 220 VAC. 2 amp rating. Auxiliary switch packs containing at least one, if specified two, electrically independent switches one for each end of the motor travel, adjustable for operation over at least half the motor travel. Feedback signal 0 to 10 V dc signal should be available from the modulating damper actuator for parallel operation or as feedback. Please refer the data point schedules / sequence of operation/ drawings to incorporate this feature wherever asked for. All valves actuators shall be synchronous, reversible type and of proper size to provide smooth modulating control under design temperatures and pressure conditions. All actuators shall be of corrosion-resistant construction and have close-off rating properly related to the maximum expected system differential pressure concerned. Actuators shall provide a linear (push-pull) thrust and shall not require maintenance or re-adjustment. Actuators shall incorporate electronics to positively position the output device in accordance with the control signal. The electronics shall incorporate an additional input for remote override or minimum positioning. Actuators shall provide a control output voltage for remote position indication or parallel operation of several actuators. Damper actuators shall be provided with all necessary mounting brackets, push rods etc. Valve actuators shall mount directly on the control valve without the need for separate linkages and the need for any adjustment of the actuator stroke. Actuators shall have a manual operation capability The motor actuator shall operate within the following limits:Temperature : 0 C to 52 C Humidity : 10 to 100% RH Voltage : 24V AC +10 to -15%, 50Hz U. CONTROL VALVES 1. General a. All control valves with Ky lesser than or equal to 4 shall have RG5 gunmetal / red bronze body. Actuators shall be PWM or 0-10v dc modulating motor type or 3 point reversible motor type. PWM actuators shall be used in conjunction with controllers having in-built PID algorithm. b. Control valves with Ky = 6.3 shall have RG5 gunmetal/red bronze body. Actuators shall be 3 point reversible motor type or 0-10V dc modulating motor type. Actuators shall have
Page 302 of 317
o o
c. d.
e.
f. g. h.
i.
manual override facility. Control valves with Ky > 6.3 shall have RG5 gunmetal/CI. Actuators shall be magnetic or 3 point reversible motor type or 0 10V dc modulating motor type. Actuators shall have manual override facility. Valves up to including 40mm shall be rated for 16 bar Nominal Pressure. Valves for 50mm and above shall be rated for nominal pressure of 10bar, provided the operating pressure of the system is not greater than 6bar. Valves above 100mm shall be rated for 16bar Nominal Pressure and actuators shall for these valves be magnetic / electro hydraulic / motoric working a 0-10v DC modulating signal actuators for valves 100mm dia. and above shall have spring return feature as well as manual override facility. All FCU valves shall have and all FAHU/AHU valves shall have range ability > 100 to ensure better operation at low load conditions. Thermal Actuators are not acceptable. The valve actuators shall fit on the valve body directly without the use of any linkages which create maintenance problems over a period. Control valves shall be suitable for a working pressure equal to or greater than twice the static pressure calculated due to the height of the building including basement levels. Control valves 50mm and below shall generally be threaded connection. Flanged connection may be used to suit the required pressure rating. Valves 65mm and above shall be flanged. Threaded valves shall be of gunmetal and flanged valves of cast iron. Threaded valves shall be provided with pipe coupling pieces. All valves whether two port or three port shall be closed when the spindle is in the up position. Two port valves shall have an equal percentage control characteristic. Three port valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic on the through port and a linear characteristic on the bypass port. Valves shall be sized to have a full flow pressure drop equal to or greater than the pressure drop through the water coil being controlled. The valves shall be sized to give an authority range of 0.4 to 0.7.
Two port valves shall have a close off capability equal to or greater than the maximum possible system differential pressure (as determined by the pump shut-off pressure and the height of the system). k. Three port valves shall have a close off capability equal to or greater than the combined full flow pressure drops of the coil plus the valve itself. l. Three port valves shall be piped for mixing service. m. Two port control valves for differential pressure bypass control applications shall be sized to handle at least the full flow one chiller at the desired pressure setting. The valve shall be capable of closing off against this pressure and of operating at this pressure for long periods without internal wear, or noise. n. The sub-contractor shall submit the sizing calculations for all control valves and actuators for endorsement by the Supervision Consultant prior to ordering. 2. Authority All 3 port modulating valves shall be selected to have an authority between 0.4 and 0.68. For systems using 2 port modulating valves, the MEP contractor shall furnish the controls supplier details such as, Pressure drop across the index circuit based on which the pump head was calculated, the pump head calculation, the design head of the pump ordered for the project, the available pressure on the system and the nodal pressures on each branch circuit of each AHU / FCU. Based on these data, the controls supplier shall submit the working principle for valve selection. 3. Butterfly valves Butterfly valves shall be manufactured by the Controls Manufacturer approved by the Consultant / Engineer.
j.
4. DDC Panels a. The out-station panel housing the DDC controllers shall be located inside the conditioned area. Proper care shall be taken to ensure that there is no induction problem between the control and power cables. These panels shall be IP54 and supplied by the specialist controls supplier. b. The DDC controllers located inside these out-station panels shall provide the required signals to the various equipment connected to these DDC controllers. The DDC controllers shall be capable of accepting digital input signals in the form of volt-free contacts from Motor control center. The MEP contractor shall co-ordinate this activity. c. All these outstations shall be connected with a communication bus cable and terminated to the BACS central station. It should be possible to connect the Portable hand held terminal to be connected to any of the DDC Controller and communicate with any other DDC controllers on the same bus. 5. Switches: a. The Sub-contractor shall supply and install switches, in accordance with the schedule of points. Switches shall normally single phase, double pole and carry 10A rated current at 250 VAC b. Terminal Strips: c. Terminal strips shall be provided and installed in standard field cabinets. d. The Sub-contractor shall supply and install voltage free contacts in the connected systems, according to the schedule of points. These voltage free contacts shall then be wired to the nearest terminal strip. All wires terminated shall be labeled by cylindrical rubber markers for identification. All cables shall be identified by a stamped aluminum tag attached by steel wire to the cable. e. In general, all sensors, switches and voltage free contacts shall be wired to the terminal strips. The terminal strips shall then be wired to the sub-station controllers via the field cabinets containing the transducers. f. The Supervision Consultant shall have the option of deleting any or all terminal strips, including the field cabinets containing the terminal strips. Under such circumstances, some or all of the sensors, switches and voltage free contacts shall be wired direct to the FPU controller via the field cabinets containing the transducers.
g. The terminal strips shall not share the same field cabinets as the transducers. h. All field cabinets containing the terminal strips shall be provided with suitable locks of common key. V. BAS SOFTWARE 1. General: a. System software shall be provided to support all command functions and application programs that are listed in the Sub-contractor's software library and shall minimum provide with the following: At least three (3) separate operating modes shall be available as follows: Direct Access Mode This mode allows the experienced operator to input the alphanumeric command string directly. This execution of the command is achieved with a minimum of keystrokes. Assisted Access Mode This mode provides self-teaching instructions to prompt the operator
Page 304 of 317
through each step showing his available options. At the end of the assisted mode input command, the system shall display the direct access mode command string. Edit Mode This mode allows on-line data base modifications and generation, and online definition of parameters to define interlocking programs. These operating modes shall be automatically displayed on the VDU for operator selection. There shall be a minimum of three security levels of operator access. Each operator's identifier can be up to twenty (20) characters, and associated with a password of a minimum of six characters. Access to any peripheral device shall be by a valid operator identifier and password entry on the keyboard touchpad. The system shall recognize this identifier and password attempt as a log-on procedure. The operator shall be able to log-off by entering a unique code on the keyboard touchpad. A hard copy of the time and date of each log-on/log-off operation of the operator shall be memorized and can be produced by the system alarm and logging device. -
All data base, functional, and control strategy additions/deletions/modifications must be done "On-line". System which requires off-line editing and compiling will not be acceptable under this specification. Each point in the system, whether hardware or software, must have the ability to be placed in either "Test" or in "Manual" so that operator can change the state or value and observe the action of the software using the new state or value. Removing the "Test" or "Manual" condition will cause the point to revert to normal condition at the next update. The Operator station must have a facility to list all points in the systems which are currently disabled by use of the "Test" or "Manual" function. A chronological record of all operator commands shall be automatically logged in, with the times of commands and the direct access mode command strings. Peripheral devices may be assigned as dedicated input/output units for control and monitoring of selected groups of sensors, switches and actuators. The operator shall be able to change such assignments of peripheral devices by online programming. 2. Application Software: a. Provide the relevant application programs from the software library, for satisfactory operation of the complete BAS. These programs shall have at least the following features: Date/Time Automatic updating of system time and date at regular intervals. Timing of power failures and system faults. Automatic time reference for numerous software features such as programmed commands, totalization, etc. Lock/Unlock Inhibition of nuisance alarms and Change Of States (COS) messages, by locking out any equipment undergoing maintenance. Prevention of critical points from responding to a lock/unlock command. Unlocking of points Item Log i. Provision of hard copy status reports on operator's requests. ii. Provision
Page 305 of 317 MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 38. Section 15990 - Building Automation System (BAS)
of status log request to output information about a single point, a group of points or all points. Acknowledge Automation silencing of alarm horns, after acknowledgement. Start/Stop Provision of operator's command to start/stop motors, pumps, lighting, etc. Automatic checking of proper systems' operation. Automatic output of advisories on response of field equipment to operator's start/stop commands. Automatic delayed starting of a equipment in sequence with other equipment to prevent power surges. Alarm And Off Normal Summaries Provision of operator's request for printout of a point or group of points in the alarm or off normal condition. Automatic assignment of output device, if output device is not specified in operator's alarm and off normal summaries request. Dedicated Keys As an aid to the operator, the system through its Person Machine Interface (PMI) shall provide dedicated function keys for common/repetitive operator functions. These functions shall be executed by the system through a single operator keystroke. Operator utilization of the dedicated function keys shall not inhibit any change-of-stage reporting or any other simultaneously functions that the operator may be performing. As a minimum, the system shall provide at least 12 dedicated function keys. Ignore/Execute Provision for system to automatically ignore any command not executed within a specified time, after such a command had been entered. Provision for operator to execute or stop execution of an input command, after it has been verified by the system. Command Advisories Automatic checking of command input for errors. Automatic display of advisory message, after detection of an error in the command input. Analog Provision to monitor analog points, and to enter or change limits and differentials on-line. Automatic output of alarm or off normal Change Of States (COS) message, after a high or low limit has been exceeded. Provision for operator to request a summary of high and low limits. Analog Totalization Provision of the analog sensors into the CPU for totalizing. Provision of simple keyboard command to produce a hard copy output of analog totals. Run Time Totalization Automatic recording of run time totals for binary status, field points. Provision to set run time limits on-line, and to output a message whenever the total run time for a point exceeds a limit. Provision of run time summary, to output a list of run time points, their associated totals and the corresponding limits.
Page 306 of 317
Data Base Generation Data base generation is to be done via an online fill-in-the-blank, mass template entry method. Systems that offer individual prompting of each parameter or require that the system is not functional with its field during the generation/ modification process are not acceptable. Binary Point Provision to examine the status of one or more assigned binary points. Automatic updating of status of binary points. Provision for operator to direct output to any printer or graphic display device. Trend Log Automatic listing of selected points and their associated condition or status, at specified trend intervals. Provision to select at least 15 points for trend log, and enter any trend interval from 1 to 60 minutes. Enough storage space in the data preprocessing microcomputer diskette shall be reserved for recording up to 750 readings for each point. Power Fail and subsequent Motor Restart The system shall provide a program to automatically restore a building to normal operating conditions, following a building power outage, and to enforce emergency operating conditions during a power outage. The system shall automatically restart loads to their correct operating condition sequentially to avoid surge if normal or emergency power is available. Programmed Start/Stop Automatic start/stop of field equipment on a pre-selected day and time. Provision of program summary to output a list of programmed points and all their associated commands. Provision of at least ten different programs per start/stop point, for multiple start/stop times on a single day and multiple start/stop times for different day of the week, and public holidays. Centralized Point Monitoring and Information Access The system shall store the current state and value of each software integrated point within central equipment memory and shall make this data available through various system reports. An operator shall be capable of attaining point status information by command or automatically, as preprogrammed, to a designated peripheral device. The accessible information shall be determined by the operator's authority level. Change-of-State Reporting The BAS shall detect and report any change from each points normal status. These changes shall include but not be limited to the following general categories: Exceeding or returning to defined limits. A contact status point changing from normal to trouble or abnormal/alarm; returning to normal. A point failing to respond to a commanded condition. Totalization limits exceeded. Any hardware failure/restoration. Hardware Status/Advisories The system shall provide a summary which contains the current status
Page 307 of 317
of hardware elements. The system shall continuously interrogate all hardware for failure and/or tampering and report to the operator, in English language, all changes in hardware status. Hardware status changes shall be in the form of advisories and shall include, at least, the following: o FPU sub-station controller is/or is not communicating/ operational. o Individual field point is/or is not communicating/ operational. Operator device is/or is not functional. o Communications channel is/or is not functional. o Power failure detected at (date) (time). Hardware status changes shall be in the form of advisories and shall include, at least, the following: Logs and summaries shall indicate on a per point basis the hardware communication status through the use of special characters or flags. These indicators shall be dynamically kept current with the advisories.
Test/Report Provision to define latchable alarm points on-line. Automatic memory storage of an alarm for a latchable alarm point, until the operator resets the alarm. Provision of operator's test/reset commands to check remote alarm functions of start/stop type points. Interlock Provision for on-line assignment of a group of pre-selected field point, to operate various devices. Provision for on-line assignment of slave field points whose conditions are checked or commanded, based on the status of master field points. Provision of complex sequences to initiate at the first alarm condition of a selected field point, but not be aborted until the last alarming point has returned to normal. Provision for on-line pre-planning of control sequences involving multiple field devices. Provision of operator's ability to override an interlock sequence, by pressing a function key. Automatic daily control of building systems, etc. Delayed Analog Reporting Provision of facilities to lock out high or low limit nuisance alarms when the analog readings are not yet stabilized. Provision for on-line programming of time delay from 0 to 25 minutes at increments of 1 second Input/output Provision for on-line assignment of a device's capabilities to another device. Provision for on-line hard copy device assignment. Provision for on-line default device assignment, for the back-up device to takeover the functions of an I/O device when it goes off-line. Provision for on-line operator's creation of new devices, so that additional peripheral devices can be assigned to the BAS. Alarms All building services alarms shall cause an alarm to sound in the Control Console in FCC room and a message identifying the type of alarm and location shall be printed on the VDU and printer inside Control Console in FCC room. 3. System Initialization
Page 308 of 317
The software supplied shall be a real time priority operation, multitasking, multi- user, capable of: a. Meeting all specification requirements. b. Be generated online. c. Be loaded into the network manager. d. Consist of the operating system. e. All specified programs. f. Have a complete data base to include all hardware address assignments, English language identifiers, operator station assignments, Change Of State (COS) response handling, point type assignments, event program interaction assignments and equation assignments for each point. g. Should AC line power be cycled, upon resumption, the network manager shall automatically restart and: h. Output a power failure message, indicating with the time and date of occurrence. i. Initialize processors and communications. j. Update all time programs. k. Compare all point conditions before and after the power failure and output only the changed conditions as a Change Of State (COS) message. 4. Voice Communication a. The system shall provide remote alarm notification and system control via Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) telephones. The system shall dial remote telephone voice operator-recorded descriptor and prompt for operator response via tone input. It shall be possible for remote operators to dial into the network to acknowledge alarms, review point status and issue commands. b. The operator programmable voice output shall be of high quality and includes accents, inflections and other characteristics of individual speech. c. The alarm-initiated dial out capability shall provide notification to selected remote locations. When an alarm occurs, the system shall enable for auto dial out. When answered, the system shall announce itself and wait for proper identifier response (operator password) via telephone key-pad. The message shall be repeated if an invalid password is entered. On the entry of proper password, the operator shall be informed of the number of alarms in the system and the actual alarm messages in first-in-first-out order. Pause shall be allowed after each alarm for operator's response via the telephone keypad. d. This voice communication capability of the system shall allow the following response from a remote operator: repeat alarm message acknowledge alarm proceed to next alarm review latest list of unacknowledged alarms review point status issue commands e. The software providing the voice communication capability of the system shall be interactive menu-driven and allows the local operator: define which points to allow dial in status requests/command define which points to initiate dial out action enter voice point descriptor and alarm action messages enter/modify phone numbers that software dials on selected alarm occurrence enter/modify operator passwords
5.
establish start/stop times for auto dial out mode enable/disable alarm dial out
Remote Monitoring a. The system should provide Web Access facilities & allows the simple distribution of building information to those who need it, and at the point where it is needed. Web access should not require any script components on the client side. All processes takes place at the web server. This means that clients standard web browser can work with web access without having to download any browser add-ons. Each time the user accesses the system on web, the corresponding user access rights should be automatically applied to the web pages that are displayed. b. The Web Access should provide the Graphics Based view of the plant including the database of alarms & system log. It should also provide the reports for the web clients. 6. Paging Communication For Alarms a. Various alarms should be routed to the following receiving devices according to the predefined priorities & criticalities: Mobile phones Pagers E-mail Fax b. All necessary software shall be included. 7. Reports & Maintenance Software a. The system shall be capable of automatically displaying or printing a user-defined message subsequent to the occurrence of selected events. Events shall not be limited to alarm occurrences. It shall be possible for the owner to construct independent messages for each DDC with as many as 60 characters. b. An operator shall be able to manually request reports from a keyboard. All reports shall have time and date and shall not be limited to any standard format. Data shall be gathered from the field LAN's automatically and archived on owner selected workstations. The system shall include a report writer function. c. Each DDC, acting in conjunction with the operator workstation graphic displays, shall support a maintenance management program on all specified points complete with the production of reports. This program as a minimum shall provide the following: Maintenance scheduling targets on specific equipment with auto-annunciation, autoscheduling and auto-shutdown; Discrete run-time monitoring on per point basis; Add-on Preventive Maintenance software application may be provided for Work Order Generation/Schedule and Runtime Related preventive maintenance, equipment Maintenance Records for repair and service histories, Maintenance Cost Management for Accounting Information. 8. Graphics a. As a minimum, the following graphic screens shall be provided: main screen plans and elevations lighting zone plan for every building air conditioning plan for each building flow diagram for chilled water system point history graph for all analog points real-time graph for all analog points water tanks to show the water levels and contents in litres booster pumps
sump pumps chilled water schematics layout ventilation schematic layout
b. Provide the following graphic screens also: fire/security zone plan for each building plumbing system diagram electrical system diagram c. The main screen shall contain the following elements: List of Buildings on which air conditioning control is provided Chilled water system icon Fire/security system icon Plumbing system icon Drainage system icon Electrical system icon Other mechanical ventilation system icon From the A/C floor plan, the operator shall be able to select any space temperature and modify the alarm limits and warning limits; select any space temperature and display a history of samples taken at 15 minutes intervals covering the previous 24 hours; select any space temperature and display a line graph showing the current temperature value. When an operator selects an air handling unit from the A/C floor plan, a dynamic flow diagram schematic for the air handling unit shall be displayed. The flow diagram shall display all monitored and controlled points associated with the air handling unit. From the flow diagram, the operator shall be able to select any analog input and modify the alarm limits and warning limits; select any analog input or output and display a history of samples taken at 15 minutes intervals covering the previous 24 hours. Similarly, the operator shall be able to select any analog input and display a line graph showing the current value. (The line graph shall display a new sample every 30 seconds); select and control any start/stop point; select the fan and display the run-time; select any binary input or output point and display a history of the last ten changes. f. Fire Protection Control: When the operator with the appropriate class of password selects the fire protection system icon, a graphic showing the building shall be presented. Floors with no alarms shall be black and floor with a fire alarm shall be red. From this graphic, the operator shall be able to select any floor and a graphic floor plan showing the location and status of all fire zones and devices shall be shown. From the floor plan graphic, the operator shall be able to select any fire zone and display a history of the last five alarms and resets. From the floor plan graphic, the operator shall be able to select any fire zone and display the status of each detector in the zone. From this display, an operator shall be able to adjust the threshold sensitivity of any smoke detector. g. Plumbing Control: When the operator selects the plumbing system icon, a plumbing system graphic shall be presented. From the plumbing system graphic, the operator shall be able to select any pump or tank sensor and display current operational status and a history of the last five alarms and resets.
h.
j.
Electrical Control: When the operator selects the electrical system icon, an electrical system graphic shall be shown. From the electrical system graphic, the operator shall be able to select any breaker or alarm and display a history of the last five alarms and resets; select a meter and see electrical consumption for the previous two days with samples take every one minute; select a meter and display a line graph showing the current value (The line graph shall display a new sample every 30 seconds). Graphic Package: Graphic package shall come complete with standard air conditioning and electrical symbols which shall be able to be imported into any graphic. The graphic package shall provide the ability to define lines, boxes, circles, outlines, eclipses, arcs, and freehand drawing. It shall also provide the ability to manipulate an area on the screen to transfer, copy, amend, and mirror images as well as provide the ability to define points on the graphic where real-time field data is displayed. Symbols shall change colour as follows: ON: Green OFF: White ALARM: Red WARNING: Magenta OFFLINE: Black REPORTS OR TRIGGERS LOCKED: Cyan
9. Demonstration and Training: a. After having carried out the testing and commissioning of the system, the Subcontractor shall demonstrate the system features, operation, etc to the Employers representatives and the Supervision Consultant. After satisfying the Supervision Consultant that the system is in proper operation, the Sub-contractor shall educate and train the Employers staff on the principles of the system, the operation procedures, maintenance methods, rectification of minor faults, etc. The Sub-contractor shall propose a training schedule for approval within 6 weeks after award of the Sub-contract. Basically the training shall be: Classroom 2 weeks (min) Operation 3 weeks (min) Maintenance 2 weeks (min) (including fault finding and rectification) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment, accessories, conduit and interconnecting wiring in a neat and protected manner by skilled and qualified work persons using the latest standard practices of the industry. B. Unless otherwise specified, meet manufacturers latest printed instructions for materials, planned maintenance and installation methods. C. Notify Supervision Consultant in writing of any conflict between these Specifications and manufacturers instructions. Within 2 weeks of submission of Tender, Sub-contract award may be determined by these deviations. No deviations will be considered after this time period. D. Coordinate with other Division 15 and 16 works and provide the necessary relays, auxiliary contacts and transformers required to interconnect equipment. Retain original equipment suppliers to provide contacts as required. E. All equipment installed shall be mechanically stable and fixed to wall or floor.
Page 312 of 317
F. Install equipment so as to allow for easy maintenance access and such that it does not interfere in any way with access to adjacent equipment and personnel traffic in the surrounding space. G. Install equipment in locations providing acceptable ambient conditions for its specified functioning, allowing for adequate ventilation and with no condensation traps. H. Meet Division 15 and 16 installation and materials requirements. I. J. Shield and ground communication trunk wiring at a single end. Do not splice cables.
K. Provide complete installation, testing, debugging and interfacing of specified software. 3.02IDENTIFICATION A. Provide all pieces of supplied equipment with a minimum 25 mm x 75 mm black and white lamacoid nameplate with, at minimum, 6 mm high bold lettering and affix to control device or on panel front. Identify in accordance with the shop drawing descriptions. Except where specifically noted otherwise, permanently attach using self tapping screws or bead chain. B. Within each field panel provide a complete listing of points connected, system schematic diagrams, calculated point codes and other information useful to assist an operator using a PT for diagnostic purposes. Fasten information to inside of front door using adhesive backed paper, or mount information in sealed plastic covers and secure to field cabinet. C. Identify all field wiring terminations with labels corresponding to Shop Drawing identifications. 3.03POWER A. Provide single phase, dedicated ground, and nominal power to the field panels from emergency panels in locations identified to Division 16. Provide suitably sized breaker compatible with existing power panels; provide wiring from breaker to all equipment unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Provide class 1 reinforced insulation II 24VAC transformers to EN 61558-1 where required. C. Under normal conditions, no single power supply shall be operated at more than 75% of its rated maximum continuous load. 3.04WIRING A. Provide all wiring required for Instrumentation; wiring shall be twist pair LSOH screen cable of minimum 1.5mm2 copper conductors. Install in G.I. conduit, and comply with Division 16 requirements and IEC 61000-5 (all parts) EMC Installation and Mitigation Guideline. B. Provide power wiring from nearest emergency powered panel to each field device as required. C. Provide necessary relays required to interconnect equipment. D. Install wiring parallel and perpendicular to building planes. 3.05TRAINING A. This specification for training the Employers personnel is supplementary to the training requirements stated elsewhere in the Specification. B. Provide practical training for the owners designated representatives. Direct training towards the requirements of the following user groups: 1. Supervisors: Control, Monitoring including Offsite Monitoring, Report Generation, Data Base Management 2. Operators: Control, Monitoring including Offsite Monitoring and Maintenance
Page 313 of 317
C. Provide training at the site at locations specified by the client. Allow for four separate groups of training sessions. These groups of sessions will be scheduled according to the project schedule and the groups may be held weeks or months apart. Allow 4 full 8 hour days of training for each group to cover the user categories above and allow for these days to be staggered to meet the owners schedule. Training sessions will be scheduled during normal working days and during normal working hours, excluding holidays. D. Training shall cover the complete operation of the BAS. Supervision training shall include for the software procedures to allow for the appropriate operators or supervisors to add, or modify points, programs, reports or graphics. E. Provide training specifically directed to controller programming with the Program Editor Module provided. F. Submit to the Supervision Consultant, check lists for each system or piece of equipment indicating that all components have been checked and are complete prior to instruction period. G. Provide all equipment and supplies, as required by the Sub-contractor in order to execute the training program. H. Submit a complete record of instructions given to the owners user groups. For each instruction period, supply the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. I. J. Date Duration Agenda: system or equipment involved Names of persons giving instructions Names of persons being instructed Other persons present
At least 4 complete sets of approved Draft Final Operation and Maintenance Manual Documentation shall be provided before training can begin. Verification of completed training shall be submitted to the Supervision Consultant prior to final release of holdback.
K. Selected clients representatives shall be sufficiently trained so as to be qualified to perform emergency maintenance during the warranty period, without affecting, in any way, the warranty coverage provided. At the end of such training, provide qualification certificate. 3.06WARRANTY AND WARRANTY SERVICE A. Warrant in writing, all provided equipment, accessories, installations, software and hardware against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of two year commencing from the date of issue of Completion Certificate. Include emergency 24 hour service. B. These warranties shall take precedence over any other warranties. C. Maintain the affected parts operational during repair of defective equipment covered by the warranty. D. All warranty repairs shall be carried out on site or a replacement component shall be issued to the facility at no charge. E. During the warranty, all components described above shall be routinely inspected and serviced by trained BAS technicians with written reports to the owner regarding condition, adjustments or changes made to any equipment following each inspection. Change consumable items such as printer ribbons as required at these inspections. F. Provide all service at no additional cost during the warranty period, with the specified exception of the supply of consumable items as defined above.
Page 314 of 317
G. Perform a final inspection in conjunction with the client and the Supervision Consultant, 60 days prior to the termination of the warranty period. Submit a full report, to the client at least 30 days prior to the termination of the warranty period. H. During the warranty period, replace or repair all supplied equipment, documentation and software, at no additional cost. All defective equipment and software shall be replaced or repaired as soon as is reasonably possible after it is considered to be defective. I. Maintain an inventory of sufficient normal replacement parts, components, materials, tools, equipment and testing devices such that repair or replacement can commence within 8 hours of notification of an inoperable condition. At the end of the warranty period, update software such that all software will be the most recent product.
J.
3.07SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Perform a complete demonstration of the BAS real time responsibilities of surveillance and command prior to online operation. Test to be carried out by manufacturers authorised testing Supervision Consultant. B. Advise the Supervision Consultant, in writing, at least 2 weeks in advance of readiness to perform tests. C. Note deficiencies and correct before starting and continuing tests. Perform calibration and operational checks prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing for all relevant system parts. D. Perform final acceptance testing at the following defined levels: 1. per point basis 2. per system basis 3. Software functions and packages basis 4. per building basis 5. Total BAS basis E. Make available on site for the duration of these tests, all installation, Supervision Consultation, software, system and personnel, required to enable test completion. F. Demonstrate the specified performance of the BAS software and hardware, at all levels from individual end devices through to total system operation and the proper operation/undertaking of all other items of work performed under this Sub-contract. G. Specifically orient acceptance test procedures to demonstrate the satisfactory operation of aspects of the operator interface terminals. H. Perform a complete and detailed calibration and operational check for each individual BAS point and control function contained within the supplied system. Check to ensure that all equipment, software, network elements, modules and circuits provided are functioning to meet the Specification and record on log sheets. I. Repeat acceptance testing until acceptable performance has been established.
3.08FACTORY TESTING A. Factory testing of hardware or software shall not replace, in whole or in part, site acceptance testing as detailed in this Section. B. Submit for Supervision Consultant review, proposed format of factory tests.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 15995 BTU METER GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.01
BTU meter shall be made up of a flow meter, two temperature sensors, energy calculator, and appropriate M-bus communication port with local read-out unit for the operator to observe the operating parameters. The energy meter shall be furnished with remote readout via meter bus communication for energy, flow, supply temperature and return temperature, for monitoring purpose by the BMS. BTU meters shall be wear-free Ultrasonic or electro magnetic type with high-measuring accuracy and long-term stability. Systems have to be approved by EN or OIML R75. BTU meters shall have two temperature sensors Pt500 according to Specification 751 (platinum) and with the homologation according to EN 1434. (Matched pairs to maximum 0,05K are prescribed), range 0150 C. One sensor mounted on the supply and the other on the return pipe. For compact BTU meters, one sensor could be installed in its hydraulic part. Meters shall be mounted directly on the flow pipe and should have the option to be mounted separately. In combination with a M-BUS remote reading system, the meters shall be operational with by a 3.6 V lithium battery for a minimum lifetime of 15 years. Working pressure shall be 25 bar, or as specified. Meter size shall be selected to meet the required flow rate. The flow meter shall meet the EN 1434 Standard class2. Minimum technical requirements: Accuracy Repeatability Supply effect variation Temperature EEPROM Memory LCD Display - 1.0% of calibrated span - 0.25% of calibrated span - 0.25% calibrated span for 10% power supply - 0.50% of calibrated span over rated range of 5 C to 50 C - 24 months storage at least - 7 character
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05 1.06
1.07
1.08
Display Features: Accumulated thermal energy: MWh, KWh, GJ, Gcal, MBtu Accumulated water flow: m Actual water flow : m/h Supply Temperature : C Return Temperature : C
1.09
The meter shall be interfaced with a remote reading device with LCD touch-screen and open protocol communication modem, Ethernet, RS-232, flash memory with software for monthly energy billing for apartments/shops. The system application software shall be Windows based. It shall allow data acquisition from M-bus / Modem / Radio / LON or hand-held terminal and provide data storage in the
Page 316 of 317
1.10
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 39. Section 15995 BTU Meter
database, which shall provide complete consumer register including all the utilities consumers. 1.11 It shall be possible to export data from the database in an optional format, adjusting data to any accounting, analytical and worksheet computer programme, as per customer needs. The interface of the software shall provide a menu that shows all relevant individual consumer data. It shall be possible to create consumer in advance or through auto-create function, the first time the meter delivers the data to the station. Customized software shall be provided that shall meet specific requirement for the project. The menu shall include search function that shall enable search among all meters data. Furthermore, it shall be possible for user to create extra field for information that suits individual stations need for details. Additionally, data logging facility shall be provided from within the software, with logging interval ranging from three minutes to one month. The meter manufacture shall provide a most recent test report of an independent organization, which shall acknowledge the performance in the following aspects: Durability and accuracy at real installation condition. BTU Meter shall have protection of IP 68.
1.12
1.13
1.14 1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
2.01
Each apartment to be provided with individual BTU Meter for chilled water metering purpose. Individual BTU Meters to be provided at the entry/inlet point of each apartment block. All retail units (community center) to be provided with independent BTU Meters for chilled water metering purpose.
2.02 2.03
END OF SECTION
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 39. Section 15995 BTU Meter
Page 317 of 317
APPENDIX A
Acceptable Manufacturers
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings Appendix A Acceptable Manufacturers
Page 1of 1
Section Mechanical
Product Chilled Water Strainers & Check Valves
Manufacturer / Brand Hattersley (UK) Spirax Sarco (UK) Crane (UK),Technoflow
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise
Mechanical
Chilled Water Die Electric Couplings for (Air Handling Units & Fan Coil Units)
Watts (Holland) Weico Colmac Hunter Taylor Weksler Wiess (Germany) Winters ( Canada)
Mechanical
Pressure & Temperature Gauges
Mechanical
Test Points
Binder Sisco (USA) Technoflow
Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise
Mechanical
Expansion Joints, Bellows & Guides
Flexonics (Canada) Isolated System (UK) Senior Flexonics (USA) Minken (UK) Mason (USA) Duradyne (USA) Technoflow
Mechanical
Drilled Fixings Inserts
Fischer (Germany) Hilti(USA) Rawlpug (UK)
Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise
Mechanical
Pipework Support Hangers
BSS Flamco Grinnell Mupro Erico (USA) PHD Diamond
Mechanical
Fire Barriers, Fire sealants and Smoke Stops
Duffalyte (UK) Firetherm Hilti (UK) Nullifire (UK) 3M (Germany)
Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise
Page 1 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Starters, Contactors & Motor Control Centers
Manufacturer / Brand ABB (Germany) Dorman Smith (UK) ETA (AEG, Germany) Merlin Gerin (France) Seimens (Germany)
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Europe, manufactured under Licence in Dubai, UAE.
Mechanical
Air Curtains
Envirotec (UK) Hitachi (Japan) National (Japan) Thermoscreens (UK) Shearflow (UK)
Europe, North America, Unless Stated otherwise
Mechanical
Variable Speed Drives
ABB Unless Stated otherwise Allen Bradley AC Tech Danfoss Seimens ITT Bill & Gosset
Europe, North America
Mechanical
Vibration Isolation Controls (Ductwork & Pipe works)
Kinetics (USA) Krantz (Germany) Isolated System (UK) Industrial Acoustics (UK) Mason (USA),Diamond
Mechanical
Sound Attenuators (Ductwork)
Sound Attenuators(UK) Industrial Acoustics Company (UK) Flakt Woods (UK) Zeneth Flow Tech Anvem Aldes
Europe, North America Manufactured under license in Dubai, UAE
Mechanical
Fiberglass Thermal Insulation (Pipe work)
AFICO Johns Manville Kimmco Knauf Owens Cornine
Page 2 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Closed Cell Rubber Insulation (Pipe work)
Manufacturer / Brand Aeroflex Rubaflex (Italy) Armafles Armstrong Supaflex Apcoflex
Acceptable Source of Manufacture
Mechanical
Insulation Finishes
Childers Insulation (USA) Fosters Idenden (UK).Zeneth
Mechanical
Insulation Adhesives and Sealants
Childers Insulation (USA) Flintkote Co. (Canada) H.B. Fuller (USA) Idenden (UK) Zenith
Mechanical
Aluminum Cladding (Pipe work) Hindalco (India)
Europe, North America, Unless Stated otherwise Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise
Mechanical
Fiberglass Thermal Insulation (Ductwork)
AFICO Johns Manville Kimmco Knauf (USA) Owens Corning
Mechanical
Closed Cell Rubber Insulation (Ductwork)
Aeroflex Rubaflex (Italy) Armafles Armstrong Supaflex Apcoflex
Mechanical
Acoustic Insulation (Ductwork)
AFICO Johns Manville Kimmco Knauf (USA)
Mechanical
Thermal Insulation (Condensate Drains)
Manson Armaflex Rubaflex Superion Apcoflex
Page 3 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Fire Protection Licensed Installers
Manufacturer / Brand Alkah Establishment Coorodex Juma Al Majid NAFFCO Unisafe
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Must be Dubai Civil Defense approved
Mechanical
Fire Protection Pipework (Galvanized and seamless)
BSS (UK) Grinnell (USA) Nippon (Japan) Tenaris (Italy) Sheild (UK)
Europe, North America, Unless Stated otherwise
Mechanical
Fire Hose Cabinets and related accessories
Angus Fire Armour (UK) DAFOOS NAFFCO Norsen (UK) Viking (UK)
Europe, North America and manufactured in Dubai, UAE under license
Mechanical
Fire Extinguishers
DAFOOS NAFFCO Norsen (UK) Angus Viking Firex
Mechanical
Breeching Intel Connection
Grinnell Reliable Viking (UK) Walker Fire (UK) Naffco Muller
Mechanical
Backflow Preventers
Claval (USA) Honeywell Braukman (USA) Spirax Sarco (UK) Wattls (Holland) Flocon Reliable Technoflow
Page 4 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Delayed Action Ball Float Valves
Manufacturer / Brand Action (UK) ITT Bell & Gossett (USA) Jerkin Bros (Canada) Keraflo (UK) Flocon Reliable Technoflow
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise
Mechanical Mechanical
Water Meters Fire Pumps
As Scheduled Aurora Pumps (USA) Patterson (USA) ITT-Bell & Gosset (USA) KSB (GERMANY) Reddy Buffaloes (USA) Armstrong (UK)
Note -To meet with Europe, North America Unless Stated otherwise
Mechanical
Sprinkler Heads
Grinnell (USA) Globe (USA) Reliable (USA) Viking (USA) Center
Mechanical
Spare Sprinkler Head Cabinets & Tools
Globe (USA) Grinnell (USA) Reliable (USA) Viking (USA)
Mechanical
Fire Hose reels and landing Valves
Angus Fire Armour (UK) DAFOOS NAFFCO Norsen Viking (UK)
Mechanical
Fire Suppression System (Clean Agent)
Kidde NAFFCo Cerberus Unisafe Zener
Page 5 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Fire Protection Valves and Accessories
Manufacturer / Brand Crane Grinnell Kennedy Victaulic (USA) Viking Center
Mechanical
Sumps and Manhole Covers/ Frames
Eccles (UK) Glynwed (UK) F,Jones (UK) RSI (India) Stanton & Stavely (UK)
Europe, India Unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Petrol / oil grease Interceptors
J.R.Smith (USA) Wade (UK/USA) Grease Guardian (Malta) ACo Passavant (Germany) Kessel (Germany)
Mechanical
PPR &PEX Pipework and Fittings (Domestic Water)
Aquatherm (Germany) Unipipe (Germany) George Fischer Uni Dalta (Itally) Borplas (Germany) Novatherin (Germany)
Mechanical
UPVC Pipes and Fittings (Drainage)
Durapipe (UK) Hepworth (UK) Marley (UK) Caradon Terrain (UK)
Mechanical
HDPE Pipes and Fittings (Where specified)
Geberit (Switzerland) Valsir (Italy) Wavin
Mechanical
Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings (Where specified)
Scolan (Germany) Valsir (ltaly) Wavin
Mechanical
Polybutylene Pipework and fiting
George Fischer (Switzerland) Mitsui (Japan)
Page 6 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Stormwater & Wasterwater Sumps Pumps
Manufacturer / Brand ABS (Ireland) Armstrong (UK) Grundfos (Denmark) Holden Brooke Pullen (UK) KSB (German)
Mechanical
Drainage Specialties
ACO (Germany) J.R.Smith (USA) Wade International (UK) Zurn (USA) Mifab (USA)
Mechanical
Plumbing Specialties
Amtrol (USA) Claval (USA) Delta (UK) Kitz (Japan) Nibco (USA)
Europe, North America Unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Water Hammer Arrestors
Sioux Chief (USA) Wade international (UK) Zurn (UK) Technoflow
Mechanical
Water Drinking Fountains (Back of House)
Elkay (USA) Filtrine (USA) Haws (USA) F.C.Frost (UK)
Mechanical
Domestic Water Heaters (LPG)
Aerco (USA) Andrews (UK) A.O.Smith (USA)
Mechanical
Chimney, Flues & Accessories
Midtherm Engineering (UK) Selkirk Metalbestos (UK)
Mechanical
Domestic Water Heaters (Electric)
Ariston (Italy) Rheem (USA) Bradford White (USA) Ruud(USA) A.O.Smith (USA)
Mechanical
Pantries Water Heaters (Electric)
Ariston (Italy) Bradford White (USA) A.O. Smith (USA)
Mechanical
GRP Sectional Tank
Brigston,Balmoral, Extraco
Page 7 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Water Softeners (Terminal Filters)
Manufacturer / Brand Berkfeld (Germany) Culligan (USA) Whirlpool (USA)
LPG Gas Distribution System Grooved End Pipe Joints/ Fittings
As Scheduled Aeroquip (USA) Grinnell (USA) National(USA) Victaulic (USA) Shield (UK)
Note - Must be Dubai Civil Europe, North America Unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
M.I. Pipe Joints / Fittings
Crane (UK) Grinnell (USA)
Europe, North America Unless stated otherwise Europe, North America Unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Plumbing Valves
Crane (UK) Hattersley (UK) Jenkins Bros (Canada) Pegler (UK) Danfoss (France) Technoflow Flowcon
Mechanical
Butterfly Valves
Dezurik (USA) Mueller (USA) Grinnell (USA) Keystone (USA) Kennedy (USA) Technoflow Flowcon
Mechanical
Chilled Water Circuit Balancing valves
Crane (UK) Tour & Anderson (Sweden) Hattersley (UK) Kitz (Japan) Nexus (USA) Techanoflow Flowcon Frese
Page 8 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Chilled Water Secondary and Tertiary Pumps
Manufacturer / Brand Grundfos (Denmark) Holden Brooke Pullen (UK) ITT- Bell & Gossett (USA) KSB (Germany) SPP (UK)
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Europe, North America Unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Chilled Water Pressurisation Units
Aqua -Tech (UK) Holden Brooke Pullen (UK) Holpak (UK) ITT Bell & Gossett (UK) Reflex (Germany TACO(USA) Grundfos (Denmark)
Mechanical
Domestic Water Pumps
Armstrong Pumps (UK) Grundfos (Denmark) ITT Bell & Gossett (USA) SPP - Sterling Fluid System (UK) Ebara (Japan)
Fuel Supply System for Standby HVAC Water Treatment
As Scheduled Baltimore (USA) Culligan (USA) Dearborn (UK) Houseman(UK) Waterbird(USA)
Must be Civil Defense Europe, North America Unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Plate Heat Exchangers (Domestic and Chilled Water)
Alfa Laval 9Sweden) API Heat Transfer (USA) Baltimore Air Coil (USA) Invensys APV (UK) ITT Bell & Gossett Sondex (Denmark)
Mechanical
Electric Duct Heaters
Heatex (UK) Indeeco(USA) Tutco (USA)
Mechanical
Flexible Hose Connection for Fan Coil Units
Megaflexon Technoflow
Page 9 of 14
Section Mechanical Water Cooled Chiller
Product
Manufacturer / Brand Carrier (USA) Hitachi (japan) Lennox(USA) Trane (USA) York(USA) LG(Korea) Mcquay(USA)
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Europe, North America Unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Fan Coil Units (Double skin type)
Carrier (USA) Euroclima (Italy) Trane (France) York (USA) Mcquay(USA) Sinko(japan) Enviro Tec(USA) Ferroli (Italy) Yamaha (Japan)
Mechanical
Fresh Air handling Units/Packaged Air Handlind Units (with Heat Wheel-)
York (USA) Trane (France) Mcquay(USA) Carrier (USA) Euroclima (Italy) Ferroli (Italy) Enviro Tec(USA) Yamaha (Japan)
Mechanical
Air Filters (Panel & Bag Type)
Camfil (USA) Farr (USA) Purafil (USA) American Air Filters (USA)
Europe, North America or manufactured under license in Dubai, UAE
Indoor Air Quality Units Package Air Conditioning Units
Cosa Tron (USA) Carrier (USA) Hitachi (Japan) Lennox ( USA) Trane (USA) Ferroli (Italy) Yamaha (Japan) Mcquay(USA) Europe, North America, Japan, Korea unless otherwise stated
Page 10 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product "Split Air Conditioning Units
Manufacturer / Brand Carrier (USA) LG (Korea) Trane (USA) Mcquay(USA) Sanyo(Japan) York (USA) Ferroli (Italy) Yamaha (Japan)
DX Pipework Precision/Close Control Air Conditioning
Mueller Canatal (Canada) Clivent / Clever (Italy) Denco (UK) Liebert (Ireland) Stutz (Germany)
North America unless Europe, North America unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Water Leak Detection Systems
Aqualeak (UK) Flowmetrix (USA) Liebert (Ireland)
Packaged Heat Recovery Equipment Axial and Propeller Fans
As Scheduled Flakt_Woods (UK) Greenheck (USA) Penn Ventilator (USA) Dynaire - (Italy) Wind (Italy) Europe, North America unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Bifurcated Fans and Smoke Exact Fans
Flakt Woods Greenheck (USA) Peen Ventilator (USA) Wind (Italy) Dynaire (Italy)
Europe, North America unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Centrifugal Fans
Flakt Woods Greenheck (USA) Peen Ventilator (USA) Dynaire (Italy)
Mechanical
In Line Centrifugal Fans
Flakt Woods Greenheck (USA) Peen Ventilator (USA) Dynaire (Italy)
Europe, North America, unless otherwise
Page 11 of 14
Section Mechanical Wall/ Ceilling Fans
Product
Manufacturer / Brand Vent - Axia (UK) xpelair (UK) Elicent (Italy) Dynaire (Italy)
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Europe, North America unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Carpark Jet Fans
Wolter (Germany) Novenco (Sweden) PSB (UK) HCPS (Holland) Systemair (Germany)
Europe unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Ductwork Joints
Doby Verrolec (USA) Ductmate (UK) Durodyne (USA)
Europe unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Ductwork Flexible Connections
Durodyne (USA) Hypalon (USA) Diamond Triple System (UK)
Europe, North America
Mechanical
Flexible Ductwork
ATCO (USA) Fleximaster (USA) Thermaflex (USA)
Mechanical
Fire Rated Duckwork
Durasteel Flamebar Dura System (USA)
Europe, North America or manufacture under lincense in USE Europe, North America unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Manual Balancing Dampers and Turning Vanes
Actionair (UK) Nailor (USA) Ruskin (USA) Kbe Trox (UK) Envem, ALdes
Mechanical
Fire Dampers, Fire & Smoke Dampers & Smoke Dampers
Actionair (UK) Nailor (USA) Ruskin (USA) Kbe Trox (UK) Envem, ALdes
Europe, North America, unless otherwise
Page 12 of 14
Section Mechanical
Product Chilled Water'Seamless' Pipework and Butt Welded\ Fittings
Manufacturer / Brand BBS (UK) Grinnell (USA) Nippon (Japan) Tenaris (Italy) Sumitomo Econesto
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Europe, North America, Japan unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Pre insulated Chilled Water 'Seamless Pipework
Logstor For Muller TCT Gulf cooltherm
Mechanical
Chilled Water Air Separators
Engineering Appliances (UK) Flamco (UK) ITT Bell & Gosselt (USA) Spirotherm (USA) Taco(USA)
Europe, North America, unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Sand Trap Louvers
Air Diffusion (UK) Titus (USA) Trox (UK) Waterloo (UK) Flowtech
Europe, North America or manufactured under licence in UAE
Mechanical
Kitchen Exhaust Ecology Units
Halton (Finland) Vent Master (UK) Green Heck (USA)
Europe, North America or manufactured under licence in UAE
Mechanical
Kitchen Exhaust Canopy UV-C Ozone
Halton (Finland) Vent Master (UK) Green Heck (USA)
Mechanical
Grilles Registers and Diffusers
Solid Air (Holland) Senior Coleman Titus (USA) Waterloo (UK),Anvem Flowtech, KBE Aides, NAilor, Gamco
Europe, North America unless stated otherwise or manufactured under licence in UAE
Jet Nozzle Diffusers BAS & Automatic Controls
Trox (UK) Acsys Honeywell Johnson Control System Seimens
Europe unless stated All locally based in UAE
Page 13 of 14
Section Mechanical Damper Actuators
Product
Manufacturer / Brand Belimo Honeywell Siemens
Acceptable Source of Manufacture Europe unless stated otherwise
Mechanical
Specialist Agencies for Noise & Vibration
Aerocoustic Engineering Gulf Accoustic Sound Research Laboratories
Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical
LPG - HDPE Pipes and Fittings LPG - Gas Tanks LPG-Piping Specially Fittings
George Fischer (Switzerland) Lapesa (Spain) Nippon Cop. (Japan) OPW Fueling Group (USA) US Steel Cop. (USA) Approved by Civil Defense
Mechanical
LPG - Gas Leak Detection (30 zone) with sms facility and with provision for easy swift to work on N/G or LPG
Prism (Canada) Matrix (UK) Crowson (UK) Mueller Brass (USA) Prism (Canada) Crane Enfilled (UK)
Mechanical
LPG Cooper Pipe
Mechanical
LPG -Submersible feed Pumps
Eastern Petrochem (UK) Nikkiso Co. Ltd (Japan) Nippon Gas (Japan)
Mechanical
LPG - Vaporizer
Kosam (Denmark)
Page 14 of 14
APPENDIX B
BAS Control Schematic
MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings Appendix B
INPUT OUTPUT
DIGITAL ANALOG DI AO DO DIGITAL
S.No. QTY
ANALOG - AI RTD 0-10V 4-20mA
EQUIPMENT & CONTROL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE & REMARKS Supplied By Remarks
1 X X X X X X X Volt Free Contact from DPS to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC 0-10 VDC to DDC By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By VSD Panel By BMS Supplier
DRAWING REF: CAR PARK SUPPLY FAN CONTROL SCHEMATICS
Details for Car Park Typical Car Park Extract Fan Fan Run Staus Fan H-O-A Switch Extract fan Fan Start / Stop Command 1 st speed enable/ disable 2 nd speed control command Fan Trip Alarm CO Level (No. of CO Sensors to be calculated based on area) X X X X X X X
2 Volt Free Contact from DPS to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC 0-10 VDC to DDC
DRAWING REF: By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier CAR PARK SUPPLY FAN CONTROL SCHEMATICS
Typical Car Park Supply Fan Fan Run Staus Fan H-O-A Switch Extract fan Fan Start / Stop Command 1 st speed enable/ disable 2 nd speed control command Fan Trip Alarm CO Level (No. of CO Sensors to be calculated based on area) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Differential Pressure Sensor FACP Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC From DDC to Panel Volt Free Contact to DDC Level Sensor By BMS Supplier By Fire Alarm Panel BY Pump Supplier By BMS Supplier BY Pump Supplier By BMS Supplier Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact from DPS to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact from DPS to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact from DPS to DDC
Typical Exhaust Fan Fan Auto Status Fan Start / Stop Command Fan Run Staus Fan Trip Alarm
By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier
DRAWING REF: EXHAUST FAN CONTROL SCHEMATICS
Typical Common Toilet Exhaust Fan (TEF) Fan Auto Status Fan Start / Stop Command Fan Run Staus Fan Trip Alarm
DRAWING REF: TEF CONTROL SCHEMATICS
Stair/Lift Pressurisation Fan Stair Pressurisation Fan Auto Status Stair Pressurisation Fan Start / Stop Command Stair Pressurisation Fan Run Status Motorised damper open closed staus Motorised damper open close command Differential Pressure Fire Alarm Signal from FACP
Irrigation Pump Pump On / Off Status Pump Start/Stop Trip alarm
DRAWING REF: IRRIGATION PUMP CONTROL SCHEMATICS. DRAWING REF: IRRIGATION WATER TANK CONTROL SCHEMATICS.
Irrigation Water Tank/Domestic water Tank Water Pressure Sensor
Note:
1.The above data points schedule shown are indicative, contractor shall propopse exact point schedule with any additional points required for the sucessful running of the system and get it approved by the Engineer before proceeding at site. 2.Total Data Points shall be calculated as per approved shop drawings with additional 30% spare points of each input and output type
INPUT OUTPUT
S.No. QTY
EQUIPMENT & CONTROL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE & REMARKS Supplied By Remarks DRAWING REF: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Temperature Sensor Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Transformer Supplier BY Transformer Supplier BY Transformer Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Pressure Sensor BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier BY Pump Supplier By BMS Supplier
Transfer Pumps Pump Auto Status Pump Run Status Pump Trip Status Water Pressure Sensor
TRANSFER PUMP CONTROL SCHEMATICS. DRAWING REF: TRANSFER PUMP CONTROL SCHEMATICS. DRAWING REF: CAR PARK EJECTOR PUMP CONTROL SCHEMATICS DRAWING REF: CAR PARK EJECTOR PUMP CONTROL SCHEMATICS DRAWING REF: FIRE PUMP & JACKY PUMP CONTROL SCHEMATICS.
Booster Pumps Pump Auto Status Pump Run Status Pump Trip Status
Carpark Ejector Pumps/Storm water sumo Pump On / Off Status Trip alarm
Carpark Ejector Pumps/Storm water sumo Pump On / Off Status Trip alarm
Fire Pumps & Jockey Pump Pump Run Status Trip alarm Pump Auto Status
Sump Pumps Pump Run Status Trip alarm Pump Auto Status
Transformer Incoming supply status Trip Alarm High Temperature Alarm
DRAWING REF: TRANSFORMER ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS.
Typical LV Panel( MDB) Incoming ACB Open/Close Status Incomer ACB Tripped Alarm Status Bus coupler Open/Close Status Bus coupler Trip Alarm Status ATS Status Each Outgoing Feeder Open/Close Status Each Outgoing Feeder Trip Status Room temperature Incomer Supply Voltage, Current, Frequency and Power Factor & Power Shall be integrated through Software as per specification X X X X X
DRAWING REF: ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS.
RMU Circuit Breaker ON/Off status Isolator On/OFF status Isolator tripped status Fult status Room temperature
Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Temperature Sensor
By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier
Note:
INPUT OUTPUT
S.No. QTY
EQUIPMENT & CONTROL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE & REMARKS Supplied By Remarks X X X X Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Temperature Sensor By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier DRAWING REF: GENERATOR
MV Switchgear 11KVA breaker On/Off Status 11KVA breaker Tripped Status Fult status Room temperature
3 X
Electrical Generator Outgoing ACB Open/Close Status Outgoing ACB Tripped Alarm Status Day Tank Diesel Low Level Alarm Common Fault Alarm Battery Healthy/ Fault Status Main Power Failiure Generator Run Status Room Temperature Incomer Supply Voltage, Current, Frequency and Power Factor & Power Shall be integrated through X X X X X X X Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Level Sensor Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Combine Sensor By Generator Supplier By Generator Supplier By BMS Supplier By Generator Supplier By Generator Supplier By Generator Supplier By Generator Supplier By BMS Supplier X X X X X X X X X X X Relay output to DB Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC From DDC to Panel Relay output to DB Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By DB Supplier
SMDB/FEEDER PILLAR Incoming Breaker Open/Close Status Incoming Power Failure Status
DRAWING REF: SMDB DRAWING REF: ESMDB DRAWING REF: DRAWING REF:
ESMDB Incoming Breaker Open/Close Status Incoming Power Failure Status
Common Area Final DB Each Lighting Contactor ON/OFF Command
Common Area EDB Each Lighting Contactor ON/OFF Command
By DB Supplier By Lift Control Panel By Lift Control Panel By Lift Control Panel By Lighting Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier DRAWING REF: LIFTS CONTROL SCHEMATICS.
Lifts and Escalators Lift Power supply Status Lift Cab Alarm Common Fault Alarm (Failiure)
Lighting Panel Auto Status Lighting On/Off Command Lighting On Status
Note:
INPUT OUTPUT
S.No. QTY
1 X X X X
X 0-10V Dcto DDC By BMS Supplier
Volt Free Contact to DDC Differential Pressure Switch Differential Pressure Switch 0-10V DC from DDC
By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier
DRAWING REF: TYPICAL AHU BMS CONTROL DIAGRAM WITH CONSTANT VOLUME
X X X X X X X X X FACP Volt Free Contact to DDC By Fire Alarm Panel
Typical Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Fresh Air Motorised Damper run status Pre Filter dirty Alarm Bag Filter dirty Alarm Chilled Water Valve Control Command Chilled Water Valve Feedback Supply Fan Auto Status Supply Fan Start / Stop Supply Fan Run Staus Supply Fan Trip alarm Supply Air Temperature Return Air Temperature Duct Pressure Sensor Air Flow status Fire Alarm Signal from FACP Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Air Flow Switch Volt Free Contact to DDC Duct Temperature Sensor Duct Temperature Sensor DP Sensor By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier
2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Differential Pressure Switch Differential Pressure Switch 0-10V DC from DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact from DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Duct Temperature Sensor Duct Temperature Sensor Volt Free Contact to DDC DP Sensor FACP Volt Free Contact to DDC
Fresh Air Handling Unit (FAHU) Pre Filter dirty Alarm Bag Filter Alarm Chilled Water Valve Control Command Supply Fan Auto Status Supply Fan Start / Stop Supply Fan Trip alarm Supply Air Temperature Outside Air Temperature Supply Fan H-O-A Switch Fan Status Fire Alarm Signal from FACP
By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By Fire Alarm Panel
DIAGRAM WITH CONSTANT VOLUME
Chilled Water Pumps CHW Common Supply Water temperature CHW Common Return Water temperature CHW System Differential Pressure CHW common supply water flow signal CHW Pump H-O-A switch auto Status CHW Pump Run Status CHW Pump Trip Alarm VSD Enable/ Disable VSD Speed Control Command VSD Speed feedback VSD Trip Alarm
Chilled water On/Off Modulating Valve control Comand Chilled water Modulating Valve On/Off feedback
Immersion Type Temperature Sensor Immersion Type Temperature Sensor 0-10 VDC to DDC 4 -20 mA to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC 0-10V DC from DDC 0-10V Dcto DDC Volt Free Contact to DDC 0-10V DC from DDC 0-10V DC from DDC 4 - 20 mA to DDC
Immersion Type Temperature Sensor
CHW common supply flow CHW leaving temperature KWHR Meter
By BMS Supplier TYPICAL PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS & CHW By BMS Supplier PUMPS CONTROL SCHEMATICS. By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By MCC Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By VSD Panel By VSD Panel By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier From KWHR via Software
Note:
INPUT OUTPUT
S.No. QTY
EQUIPMENT & CONTROL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION SIGNAL TYPE & REMARKS Supplied By Remarks X X X X X X X X X X X VFC from DDC 0 -10VDC to Control valve actuator Room Thermostat By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier Immersion Type Temperature Sensor 0-10V DC from DDC 0-10V Dcto DDC Immersion Type Temperature Sensor Immersion Type Temperature Sensor 0 - 10V DC from DDC 0-10V Dc to DDC 0-10V Dc to DDC By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier
Plate Heat Exchanger Side CHW Leaving Temperature Chilled water On/Off Valve Control Command Chilled water On/Off Valve Feedback CHW Common Supply Water temperature CHW Common Return Water temperature HEX Bypass Valve Control HEX Bypass Position Feedback CHW System Differential Pressure
Common Area CHW Fan coil unit Fan Start / Stop Command CHW Valve Modulating Control Command Room Temperature
DRAWING REF: TYPICAL FCU (COMMUNICATING TYPE) WITH ROOM THERMOSTAT CONTROL SCHEMATICS.
3 X X X X X X X X X X X VFC from DDC Room Thermostat Volt free contact to DDC 0 - 10 VDC to DDC 0 - 10 VDC to DDC VFC from DDC 0 -10VDC to Control valve actuator Room Thermostat Volt free contact to DDC Volt free contact to DDC VFC from DDC
By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By FCU Supplier By FCU Supplier By Panel Supplier By Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By Split A/C Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier
TYPICAL FCU (COMMUNICATING TYPE) WITH ROOM THERMOSTAT CONTROL SCHEMATICS.
GSM & LiFT Machine rooms - FCU with A/C Split Unit CHW FCU Fan Start / Stop Command CHW Valve Modulating Control Command Room Temperature Fan ON/OFF position Fan trip alarm Timer operation for FCU/Split Unit A/C Split Unit Compressor Start/ Stop Command Room Temperature Compressor Trip Alarm Air Flow meter Humidity Sensor
CONTROL SCHEMATICS.
X X X X X X
VFC from DDC 0 -10VDC to Control valve actuator Room Thermostat Volt free contact to DDC Volt free contact to DDC VFC from DDC
By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By BMS Supplier By FCU Supplier By FCU Supplier By Panel Supplier
TYPICAL FCU (COMMUNICATING TYPE) WITH ROOM THERMOSTAT CONTROL SCHEMATICS.
Telephone Rooms - CHW FCU with CCU With Split A/C Unit CHW FCU CHW FCU Fan Start / Stop Command CHW Valve Modulating Control Command Room Temperature Fan ON/OFF position Fan trip alarm Timer operation for FCU/Split Unit CCU A/C Split Unit Compressor Start/ Stop Command Room Temperature Compressor Trip Alarm Humidity Sensor X X X X
VFC from DDC Room Thermostat Volt free contact to DDC 0 - 10 VDC to DDC
By Panel Supplier By BMS Supplier By Split A/C Supplier By BMS Supplier
CONTROL SCHEMATICS.
Note:
INPUT OUTPUT
S.No. QTY
1 X Volt free Contact to DDC By Barrier Supplier
Barriers Fault Status
2 X X X
FM 200 FM 200 Prealarm FM 200 alarm FM 200 activated
3 X X X Volt free contact to DDC Volt free contact to DDC Volt free contact to DDC
Chilled Water Pressuirazaion Unit Pump Run Status Pump faul Panel Hralthy
4 X X X
Chemical treatment unit Pump Set Auto Status Pump on/Off Status Pump Trip alarm
5 X X X
Chilled Water Energy Meter Supply Chilled Water Temperature Return Chilled Water Temperature Supply Chilled water Flow
6 X Volt free contact to DDC
Emergency Lighting System Emergency light status
7 X X
Fire alarm System Fire alarm system status Fire alarm system Fault
Volt free contact to DDC Volt free contact to DDC
8 X X
Public address system system status System Fault
9 X X X
CCTV/ Access control Data exchange System status System Fault
10 X X
Central Battery system Common Fault alarm Power on / Off
11 X X X
Aircraft Warning lights Common Fault Alarm System Status Power On/ Off Note:
INPUT OUTPUT
S.No. QTY
1 X X Volt free Contact to DDC
Garbage Chute Fault status Power On/ Off Status
2 X X X
Capcitor Bank Power monitor Power factor monitor Fault status
Note:

MEchanical Spec 17-02-10

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

MEchanical Spec 17-02-10

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

ABU DHABI INTERNATIONAL SHOOTING CLUB

PLOT NO. C1 VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATION FOR MEP MECHANICAL SERVICES TO BUIDNINGS

February 17, 2010 Rev.1

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL SYSTEM

MEP - Specification Specification Mechanical

MEP - Specification Specification Mechanical

Table of Contents Page 2 of 2

Operation Number of stops and openings Travel HOISTWAY SIZE AVAILABLE

Car internal size Pit depth required

Machine room height Location of machine

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

Elevator car design Ceiling, lighting & ventilation

Car rear & side walls

Car front return panel and Transom panel Cabin flooring

Landing door panels

Type of hoistway doors

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

Machine room height Location of machine

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

Elevator car design Ceiling, lighting & ventilation

Landing door panels

Type of hoistway doors

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

Car operating panel

Comb plate, landing plate & manhole cover Operating panel

Outer sheathing Operational & safety features

Operation NUMBER OF STOPS AND OPENINGS

HOISTWAY SIZE AVAILABLE

Car internal size Pit depth required

Car rear & side walls

Car front return panel and Transom panel Cabin flooring

Landing door panels

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

Type of hoistway doors

Car operating panel

Operation NUMBER OF STOPS AND OPENINGS

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

HOISTWAY SIZE AVAILABLE

Car internal size Pit depth required

Machine room height Location of machine

Car rear & side walls

Car front return panel and Transom panel Cabin flooring

Landing door panels

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

Type of hoistway doors

Car operating panel

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

Counterweights Power supply Lighting supply

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

LIFT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

TRACTION LIFT REQUIREMENTS

2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4

Car Safety Gear Buffers Lift Machine Emergency Operation

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 2.6.8 2.6.9

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 1. Section 14200 Vertical Transportation

SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

MEP Mechanical Services to Buildings 2. Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions